all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 |
|
EX 5 series user manual | Users Manual | 32.00 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 |
|
Host Manual i | Users Manual | 1.51 MiB | May 07 2007 / July 09 2007 | |||
1 2 3 |
|
Host Manual r | Users Manual | 1.39 MiB | May 07 2007 / July 09 2007 | |||
1 2 3 |
|
Module Manual | Users Manual | 171.36 KiB | May 07 2007 / July 09 2007 | |||
1 2 3 |
|
R series user manual | Users Manual | 32.00 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 |
|
User Manual 1 | Users Manual | 2.05 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 |
|
User Manual 2 | Users Manual | 1.87 MiB | ||||
1 2 3 |
|
i series manual | Users Manual | 32.00 KiB | ||||
1 2 3 | Attestation Statements | |||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 | Parts List/Tune Up Info | May 07 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Parts List/Tune Up Info | May 07 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | May 07 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 | External Photos | May 07 2007 / July 09 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 | ID Label/Location Info | May 07 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 | External Photos | May 07 2007 / July 09 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Internal Photos | May 07 2007 / July 09 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | May 07 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | May 07 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | May 07 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Test Setup Photos | May 07 2007 / July 09 2007 | ||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 | Parts List/Tune Up Info | |||||||
1 2 3 | Parts List/Tune Up Info | |||||||
1 2 3 | Test Report | |||||||
1 2 3 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
1 2 3 | Test Setup Photos |
1 2 3 | Host Manual i | Users Manual | 1.51 MiB | May 07 2007 / July 09 2007 |
i-Series Digital Microwave Radios Installation and Management Guide Models included:
EX-2.4i EX-2.4i-16 EX-4.9i EX-5i EX-5i-16 Part Number: 50000001 Date: 2007-01-03 (draft) Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Legal Notice The information contained herein is the property of Exalt Communications, Inc. (Exalt) and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part of this document may be reproduced, in any form, except as authorized by contract or other written permission from the owner. Any brand names and product names included in this manual are trademarks, registered trademarks, or trade names of their respective holders. The contents of this document are current as of the date of publication. Exalt reserves the right to change the contents without prior notice. The publication of information in this document does not imply freedom from patent or other rights of Exalt or others. 2007 Exalt Communications Inc. All rights reserved. The Exalt logo is a trademark of Exalt Communications, Inc. Open-Source License Information In addition to proprietary software/firmware, which is the sole intellectual property of Exalt, the Exalt i-Series of Digital Microwave Radios make use of public (open-source) software/firmware within the terms of use of their respective shared license agreements. Exalt will supply copies of any of this code, within the terms of their individual licensing agreements, upon request. Open-Source Code License Agreement Linux Operating System GNU GPL Version 2 BusyBox CLI GNU GPL Version 2 GoAhead Web Server Copyright (c) 2003 GoAhead Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved. U-boot Boot Code GNU GPL Version 2 Website www.gnu.org www.gnu.org;
www.busybox.net www.goahead.com www.gnu.org www.sourceforge.net Net-SNMP
(see Copyright Notices on page 117) www.sourceforge.net 5000001 2007-06-25 1 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide About this Document This manual provides a complete description of the Exalt i-Series of Digital Microwave Radios and related software. This manual provides planners, engineers, installers, system administrators, and technicians general and specific information related to the planning, installation, operation, management, and maintenance of these devices. Revision History Date Products and Release code 2006-04-28 EX-2.4i initial release v1.0 2006-05-03 EX-2.4i maintenance release v1.0.1 2006-07-06 EX-5i initial release v1.0.0 2006-09-01 EX-2.4i release v1.1.0 (Mode2 feature release) EX-2.4i-16 and EX-5i-16 initial release v1.0.0 2006-09-27 EX-5i release 1.1.0 (SNMP feature release) 2006-10-27 EX-2.4i v1.2.0 (Sync and VLAN feature releases) EX-5i release v2.0.0 (Sync and VLAN feature releases) EX-2.4i and EX-5i-16 v1.1.1 (Sync feature release) 2007-01-03 EX-4.9i initial release 2007-04-15 Draft for WEEE, RoHS, DFS 2007-06-11 Draft for RLK, EU, Regulatory Compliance Appendix 2007-06-25 Update for DFS, removed Proxim antenna 5000001 2007-06-25 2 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide General Compliance and Safety The usage of radio transmission devices is subject to specific regulatory requirements governed by regional legislation. In most cases, the specific device must be authorized for use in a given country and must be installed and adjusted in accordance with specific radio-frequency settings and in a manner that has been authorized specific to the device itself in accordance with the specific location of the device. Some users may be completely or partially restricted from use of the device. Please consult local governmental agency/agencies for regulatory requirements before use, or contact Exalt or your Exalt authorized dealer for assistance. Do not modify this device in any way without the express written consent of Exalt. Modification voids the manufacturer warranty, and may also be illegal in accordance to government regulations. In addition, there are no user-serviceable parts or assemblies inside the product housing. There may also be voltages, signals, and mechanisms within the device that could be harmful to human safety. The mounting of this device and associated peripherals and connections (inclusive of antenna mast, antenna, cabling, egress, lightning protection devices, grounding, power, and so on) may be subject to regional requirements for health and human safety. A qualified professional installer and an electrician are highly recommended, and may be required by law. Exalt cannot warranty the device or be found liable for any unauthorized use or installation of the device. Safety Icons The following icons denote specific types of information. Note This symbol means take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to materials not contained in the manual. Caution This symbol means be careful. There is a risk of equipment damage, loss of data, or injury to persons. To reduce the risk, follow the instructions. This is a general warning, caution, or risk of danger. Warning This warning symbol means there is a risk of electric shock. This situation could cause bodily injury. To reduce the risk, before working on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents. 5000001 2007-06-25 3 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Safety Notices 1. Review this entire guide for important installation instructions BEFORE attempting to install this product. 2. This product is intended to be installed, used, and maintained by experienced telecommunications personnel only. 3. Employ a properly licensed or authorized electrician to install or evaluate/certify the installation of all power and grounding related to the use of this equipment and all connected devices. 4. The device(s) shall only be connected to AC or DC sources within the device specifications. Use a separate breaker circuit at the power source. 5. Lightning, surge protection devices, and earth grounding are required for most installations to ensure human safety. Consult a qualified electrician. 6. Servicing of this device should be performed by authorized personnel only. Do not disassemble this device. By opening or removing any covers you may expose yourself to hazardous energy parts. Incorrect reassembly of this product can cause a malfunction, and/or electrical shock, when the unit is subsequently used. 7. Do not connect or disconnect the power connection to the device when the power supply is plugged into an AC outlet. To connect, first connect the power connection to the device, and then apply power (or plug in) at the outlet. To disconnect, disengage power at the outlet or unplug, and then disconnect the direct connection to the device. 8. Do not insert any object of any shape or size inside this product at any time, whether powered or not. Objects may contact hazardous energy components that could result in a risk of fire or personal injury. 9. Liquids shall not come in contact with, or enter the inside of the device at any time. 10. Proper ventilation and/or airflow shall be provided surrounding the equipment. Do not block any intake or exhaust vents. Items shall not come in contact with heat-
sinking materials. Ensure that ambient operational and storage temperature specifications are maintained at all times. 11. Equipment is suitable for mounting on noncombustible surfaces only. 12. Do not move or alter the marking labels. 13. A CSU or similar isolating device is necessary between the equipment and the public telecommunications network. The equipment has not been evaluated for direct connection to the public telecommunications network. 5000001 2007-06-25 4 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Exalt Limited Hardware Warranty Exalt Communications, Inc. (Exalt) warrants solely to the original purchaser
(Purchaser) that the EX-2.4i, EX-2.4i-16, the EX-5i, EX-5i-16 or the EX-4.9i (the Product) will substantially conform in all material respects to the relevant Exalt published specifications that apply at the time of manufacture of such Product for two (2) years from the date of tender of Product by Exalt from FOB point designated by Exalt
(the Warranty Period). Proof-of-purchase in the form of an invoice, payment of invoice, or delivery waybill must be supplied, if requested by Exalt, in case of any dispute of warranty start date. Exalt shall within the Warranty Period, at its own option:
(A) use reasonable efforts to remedy any reproducible Product defect covered by this limited warranty within a reasonable period of time; (B) replace the defective Product with a functionally equivalent product (repair parts and products may be either reconditioned or new, but, if reconditioned, shall be of the same quality as new parts or products); or (C) if Exalt determines that it is unable to repair or replace such Product, Exalt will refund to Purchaser the amount actually paid by Purchaser for the applicable Product. All replaced parts become the property of Exalt. Exalt may, at its sole option, refuse to accept as defective Product that (i) is subject to the exclusions set forth below;
or (ii) cannot be demonstrated to be defective by Exalt and Purchaser is unable to provide adequate information describing how the Product failed. Such Product will, at Purchasers option and expense, either be: (a) returned to Purchaser in the state received, or (b) repaired and returned to Purchaser. Repaired or replaced Product will be warranted for the remainder of the original Warranty Period, but not less than ninety (90) days. Registration Purchaser is required to register its Product, within ninety (90) days of purchase, for full warranty support. Unregistered or late-registered Product will receive a Warranty Period of only one (1) year. Exclusions This limited warranty will not apply to: (A) any Product that: (i) has been modified or altered by any party other than Exalt; (ii) has been subject to accident, misuse, abnormal wear and tear, neglect, or mistreatment; (iii) has been damaged during installation of the Product; (iv) has been damaged by the equipment or system with which the Product is used; (v) has sustained damage to the Products interface or power connectors; (vi) are determined to be stolen; or (vii) has been damaged caused by fire, power changes, other hazards, or acts of God (including without limitation lightning); or (B) any software included in any such Product. The warranty applies only to Products that can be identified by the Exalt trademark, trade name, serial number or logo affixed to them. Exalt does not warrant any Product that is not manufactured by, for, or with permission from Exalt. The Products covered by this warranty are not consumer products and are not intended for personal, family, or household purposes. 5000001 2007-06-25 5 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide RMA Procedures A return material authorization (RMA) is required prior to returning Product to Exalt for warranty or out-of-warranty repair/evaluation. As such, Purchaser must use the following procedure:
1. Contact Exalt and request an RMA number. Please be prepared to provide the serial number of the Product, the date of purchase, and a description of the failure that is as complete as possible. 2. Pack the Product in its original container and packing or an equivalent. 3. Write the RMA number CLEARLY on the outside of the shipping box. 4. For services during the Warranty Period, cost of shipment to Exalts authorized service center, taxes, duty, tariffs, risk of loss and insurance charges to Exalt shall be borne by the Purchaser. Cost of return shipment and insurance charges shall be borne by Exalt and will be made by Exalts choice of carrier and method/schedule of shipment. Purchaser may expedite return shipments, upon request, at its own expense. PRODUCTS RETURNED WITHOUT A DULY ISSUED RMA NUMBER WILL BE RETURNED TO PURCHASER AT PURCHASERS EXPENSE. THIS EXPRESS WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, REGARDING THE PRODUCT, AND EXALT, ITS SUPPLIERS AND LICENSORS HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL SUCH IMPLIED AND EXPRESS WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY AND ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, INTERFERENCE WITH QUIET ENJOYMENT, NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY RIGHTS AND MERCHANTABILITY. FURTHER, EXALT DOES NOT WARRANT RESULTS OF USE OR THAT PURCHASERS USE OF THE PRODUCT WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE. NO WARRANTIES ARE MADE BY EXALTS SUPPLIERS OR LICENSORS. EXCEPT FOR THE EXPRESS WARRANTY STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCT IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITH ALL FAULTS. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND EFFORT IS WITH PURCHASER. REGARDLESS OF WHETHER ANY REMEDY SET FORTH HEREIN FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OR OTHERWISE, AND EXCEPT FOR BODILY INJURY, IN NO EVENT WILL EXALT, ITS SUPPLIERS OR LICENSORS BE LIABLE TO PURCHASER OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY UNDER ANY TORT, CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHER LEGAL OR EQUITABLE THEORY FOR ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST OR CORRUPTED DATA, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS, OR OTHER SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT, EVEN IF EXALT HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH LOSS OR DAMAGES AND WHETHER OR NOT SUCH LOSS OR DAMAGES ARE FORESEEABLE. 5000001 2007-06-25 6 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide IN NO EVENT SHALL EXALTS AND ITS SUPPLIERS AGGREGATE LIABILITY EXCEED AN AMOUNT EQUAL TO THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT PAID BY PURCHASER THAT IS THE SUBJECT OF A CLAIM. ANY CLAIM ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THIS AGREEMENT MUST BE BROUGHT WITHIN ONE (1) YEAR AFTER THE OCCURRENCE OF THE EVENT GIVING RISE TO SUCH CLAIM. IN ADDITION, EXALT DISCLAIMS ALL LIABILITY OF ANY KIND OF EXALTS SUPPLIERS. 5000001 2007-06-25 7 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Table of Contents Legal Notice........................................................................................................................ 1 Open-Source License Information...................................................................................... 1 About this Document .......................................................................................................... 2 Revision History ............................................................................................................. 2 General Compliance and Safety.......................................................................................... 3 Safety Icons..................................................................................................................... 3 Safety Notices ..................................................................................................................... 4 Exalt Limited Hardware Warranty...................................................................................... 5 Registration..................................................................................................................... 5 Exclusions....................................................................................................................... 5 RMA Procedures............................................................................................................. 6 Introduction....................................................................................................................... 15 Related Documentation and Software .......................................................................... 15 The Exalt i-Series of Digital Microwave Radios.......................................................... 15 Basic Features ............................................................................................................... 18 Pre-installation Tasks........................................................................................................ 21 Link Engineering and Site Planning ............................................................................. 21 Familiarization with i-Series Radios............................................................................. 22 Shipping Box Contents ............................................................................................. 23 Back-to-Back Bench Test and Configuration............................................................... 24 RF Output Power Setting.............................................................................................. 25 Time Division Duplex (TDD) Factors.......................................................................... 25 Link Orientation and Synchronization.......................................................................... 26 Radio A/B Configuration.......................................................................................... 27 Radio Synchronization.................................................................................................. 28 Synchronization Modes ............................................................................................ 29 Internal Synchronization........................................................................................... 29 External Synchronization.......................................................................................... 31 Offset Timing............................................................................................................ 31 When Sync is Lost .................................................................................................... 32 5000001 2007-06-25 8 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide LEDs ......................................................................................................................... 32 System Installation and Initiation Process ........................................................................ 33 Record Keeping ............................................................................................................ 34 Installation......................................................................................................................... 35 Mechanical Configuration and Mounting..................................................................... 35 Rack Mounting.......................................................................................................... 35 Table or Rack Shelf Mounting the System............................................................... 37 Radio Ports and Indicators............................................................................................ 37 Connector Overview ................................................................................................. 37 LED Indicators.......................................................................................................... 39 RMT (Remote) Button.............................................................................................. 41 Power ............................................................................................................................ 41 Terminating the RF Connector ................................................................................. 41 AC Power.................................................................................................................. 42 DC Power.................................................................................................................. 43 Reset to Critical Factory Settings ............................................................................. 44 Antenna/Transmission System...................................................................................... 45 Initial Antenna Mounting.......................................................................................... 45 Transmission Line from Antenna to Egress.............................................................. 46 RF Lightning Arrestor............................................................................................... 48 Transmission Line from Egress to Radio.................................................................. 49 Antenna Alignment....................................................................................................... 50 Configuration and Management ....................................................................................... 52 Command Line Interface (CLI) .................................................................................... 52 Connect to the Radio with a Serial Connection........................................................ 52 Connect to the Radio through a Telnet Connection.................................................. 52 CLI Screens and Menus................................................................................................ 53 Exalt Graphical User Interface (GUI)........................................................................... 54 Preparing to Connect................................................................................................. 54 Make Connections .................................................................................................... 55 Log In........................................................................................................................ 55 Login Privileges........................................................................................................ 56 5000001 2007-06-25 9 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Quick-Start.................................................................................................................... 57 Navigating the GUI....................................................................................................... 58 Summary Status Section ........................................................................................... 59 Navigation Panel....................................................................................................... 60 Radio Information Page ................................................................................................ 61 Administration Settings Page........................................................................................ 62 System Configuration Page........................................................................................... 64 Ethernet Interface Configuration Page.......................................................................... 68 T1/E1 Configuration Pages........................................................................................... 69 T1 Interface Configuration Page............................................................................... 69 E1 Interface Configuration Page............................................................................... 70 T1/E1 Loopback........................................................................................................ 71 File Transfer Page......................................................................................................... 73 File Activation Page...................................................................................................... 76 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Configuration.................................. 77 Alarms Page.................................................................................................................. 78 Performance Page ......................................................................................................... 80 Event Log Page............................................................................................................. 83 Diagnostic Charts Page................................................................................................. 85 Spectrum Analyzer Page............................................................................................... 87 Reboot Page .................................................................................................................. 88 Manual Page.................................................................................................................. 89 Troubleshooting ................................................................................................................ 90 General Practices .......................................................................................................... 90 Typical Indications of Issues ........................................................................................ 91 Improper RF Cable Termination................................................................................... 92 Multipath Propagation .................................................................................................. 93 RF Interference ............................................................................................................. 93 Path Obstruction............................................................................................................ 94 Misaligned Antenna...................................................................................................... 94 Faulty Antenna.............................................................................................................. 94 Improper Grounding ..................................................................................................... 95 5000001 2007-06-25 10 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Insufficient Link Margin............................................................................................... 95 Moisture in the Transmission System........................................................................... 95 Specifications.................................................................................................................... 96 Physical Specifications ................................................................................................. 96 Common System Specifications ................................................................................... 96 EX-2.4i System Specifications ..................................................................................... 97 EX-4.9i System Specifications ..................................................................................... 98 EX-5i System Specifications, 5.3 GHz Band ............................................................... 99 EX-5i System Specifications, 5.4 GHz Band ............................................................. 100 EX-5i System Specifications, 5.8 GHz Band ............................................................. 101 Interfaces..................................................................................................................... 102 Back-to-back Bench Testing........................................................................................... 104 Basic Test.................................................................................................................... 104 Specification Performance Verification...................................................................... 105 DC Coupler for Antenna Alignment............................................................................... 107 Required Items............................................................................................................ 107 Interconnections.......................................................................................................... 107 Interface Connections ..................................................................................................... 109 T1/E1 Connections...................................................................................................... 109 Ethernet Connections.................................................................................................. 110 Sync Connections........................................................................................................ 111 Alarm Connector......................................................................................................... 112 Console Connector...................................................................................................... 113 DC Power Connector .................................................................................................. 113 DIP Switch Settings (-16 Models Only) ......................................................................... 114 Copyright Notices ........................................................................................................... 117 Net-SNMP................................................................................................................... 117 General Regulatory Notices............................................................................................ 123 Dynamic Frequency Selection .................................................................................... 123 Antennas ..................................................................................................................... 123 Region 1 Specifics .......................................................................................................... 127 4.9 GHz Model................................................................................................................ 127 5000001 2007-06-25 11 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Federal Communications Commission (FCC), United States .................................... 127 United States Compliance............................................................................................... 128 Industry Canada (IC), Canada..................................................................................... 129 Antennas Supported in Canada............................................................................... 129 Canada Compliance ........................................................................................................ 129 EX-2.4i EIRP for the USA and Canada.......................................................................... 131 EX-4.9i EIRP for the USA and Canada.......................................................................... 131 EX-5i EIRP for the US and Canada................................................................................ 132 5250-5350 MHz Band................................................................................................. 132 5470-5725 MHz Band................................................................................................. 132 5725-5850 MHz Band................................................................................................. 133 Region 2 Specifics .......................................................................................................... 134 Europe/ITU (ETSI and CE Mark)............................................................................... 134 Declaration of Conformity to the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC............................ 135 EU WEEE ....................................................................................................................... 135 EU RoHS ........................................................................................................................ 136 Europe Compliance......................................................................................................... 136 EX-2.4i EIRP by Country............................................................................................... 138 EX-5i EIRP by Country.................................................................................................. 140 52505350 MHz band................................................................................................. 140 54705725 MHz band................................................................................................. 140 5725-5850 MHz band ................................................................................................. 141 Index ............................................................................................................................... 143 List of Figures EX-2.4i Digital Microwave Radio................................................................ 16 Figure 1 Indoor mount interconnection....................................................................... 18 Figure 2 Enclosure mount interconnection ................................................................. 19 Figure 3 Basic radio interconnectivity using internal synchronization....................... 29 Figure 4 Collocated radios, one in AUTO SYNC mode to provide redundancy........ 30 Figure 5 Figure 6 Multiple-link site configuration, using AUTO SYNC for redundancy ........ 30 5000001 2007-06-25 12 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Figure 7 GPS as primary sync source using AUTO SYNC........................................ 31 Synchronized GPS sources using AUTO SYNC.......................................... 31 Figure 8 Figure 9 Radio installation tasks ................................................................................. 33 Figure 10 Front flush mount configuration ................................................................... 35 Figure 11 Front projection mount configuration........................................................... 36 Figure 12 Rear-mount locations.................................................................................... 36 Figure 13 Front panel (EX-2.4i, EX-4.9i or EX-5i)...................................................... 37 Figure 14 Front panel (EX-2.4i-16 or EX-5i-16).......................................................... 37 Figure 15 Primary front panel connectors (standard models) ....................................... 38 Figure 16 DC connector ................................................................................................ 44 Figure 17 CLI main menu ............................................................................................. 53 Figure 18 Initiating the browser connection.................................................................. 55 Figure 19 Browser Login screen ................................................................................... 56 Figure 20 Radio Information page ................................................................................ 57 Figure 21 Exalt GUI window description ..................................................................... 59 Figure 22 Minimized browser windows for summary status of multiple radios........... 59 Figure 23 Radio Information page ................................................................................ 61 Figure 24 Administration Settings Page........................................................................ 62 Figure 25 System Configuration Page........................................................................... 64 Figure 26 Ethernet Interface Configuration Page.......................................................... 68 Figure 27 T1 Interface Configuration page (standard models) ..................................... 70 Figure 28 E1 Interface Configuration page (standard models) ..................................... 71 Figure 29 External (remote) loopback........................................................................... 72 Figure 30 External (local) loopback.............................................................................. 72 Figure 31 Internal loopback .......................................................................................... 72 Figure 32 File Transfer Page......................................................................................... 73 Figure 33 File Transfer pagedownload file link........................................................ 74 Figure 34 File Activation page...................................................................................... 76 Figure 35 Alarms page (standard models) .................................................................... 78 Figure 36 Performance page.......................................................................................... 80 Figure 37 Event Log page ............................................................................................. 83 Figure 38 Diagnostic Charts page ................................................................................. 86 5000001 2007-06-25 13 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Figure 39 Reboot page .................................................................................................. 88 Figure 40 Manual page.................................................................................................. 89 Figure 41 Basic back-to-back bench test configuration .............................................. 105 Figure 42 DC coupler interconnection ........................................................................ 108 Figure 43 T1/E1 connectors ........................................................................................ 109 Figure 44 Ethernet connectors (MAIN and AUX)...................................................... 110 Figure 45 Sync In connector ....................................................................................... 111 Figure 46 Sync Out connector..................................................................................... 111 Figure 47 Alarm Connector......................................................................................... 112 Figure 48 Console Connector...................................................................................... 113 Figure 49 DC Power connector................................................................................... 113 Figure 50 DIP Switch Orientation............................................................................... 114 List of Tables Factory Default Settings ............................................................................... 27 Table 1 Connectors .................................................................................................... 38 Table 2 LED indicators.............................................................................................. 39 Table 3 Recommended transmission line .................................................................. 46 Table 4 Default Login Information............................................................................ 56 Table 5 DIP Switch Functions ................................................................................. 114 Table 6 Standard Factory Defaults (-16 Models)..................................................... 115 Table 7 Common DIP Switch Applications............................................................. 115 Table 8 Product Approvals ...................................................................................... 122 Table 9 EX-2.4i supported antennas........................................................................ 124 Table 10 Table 11 EX-5i supported antennas........................................................................... 125 Table 12 Region 2 Country Specific Power Levels for EX-2.4i Series..................... 139 Table 13 Region 2 Country Specific Power Levels for EX-5i Series........................ 142 5000001 2007-06-25 14 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Introduction Exalt Communications, Inc. thanks you for your purchase. Our goal is to build the highest quality, highest reliability digital microwave radio products. This commitment to quality and reliability extends to our employees and partners alike. We appreciate any comments on how we can improve our products, as well as your sales and Customer Care experience. Customer Care Hotline (USA):
(408) 871-9890 Toll-Free Customer Care Hotline (USA):
(877) EXALT-01 (392-5801) Direct-Dial Telephone (USA):
(408) 871-1804 Website:
www.exaltcom.com Sales e-mail:
sales@exaltcom.com Customer Care e-mail:
support@exaltcom.com Mailing Address:
Exalt Communications, Inc. 580 Division St. Campbell, CA 95008 USA Related Documentation and Software This manual makes reference to other documentation and software files that may be necessary. Any document or software mentioned in this manual can be found at:
http://www.exaltcom.com/support/downloads.htm The Quick Start Guide provides any necessary username and password information to gain access to these documents. The Exalt i-Series of Digital Microwave Radios The Exalt i-Series of Digital Microwave Radios are the most advanced carrier-class point-to-point terrestrial radio communications devices operating in the 2400 to 2483.5 MHz, 4940 to 4990MHz and 5250 to 5850MHz frequency bands, respectively. Figure 1 shows the EX-2.4i Digital Microwave Radio. 5000001 2007-06-25 15 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Figure 1 EX-2.4i Digital Microwave Radio The i-Series radios connect voice and/or digital data from one location to another, obviating the need for copper or fiber connectivity, or enhancing existing connectivity by providing a redundancy solution, a primary solution, and/or additional capacity. The following models of radios are covered in this manual:
EX-2.4i, 10/100 Ethernet + 4xT1/E1
Configured for 100Mbps (32MHz/Mode2) EX-2.4i-16, 10/100 Ethernet + 16xT1/E1
Configured for 4xT1/E1, 100Mbps (32MHz/Mode2)
With license-key upgrade for 8xT1/E1, 100Mbps (32MHz/Mode2)
With license-key upgrade for 12xT1/E1, 100Mbps (32MHz/Mode2)
With license-key upgrade for 16xT1/E1, 200Mbps (64MHz/Mode2) EX-4.9i, 10/100 Ethernet + 4xT1/E1
Configured for 2xT1/E1, 27Mbps (10MHz/Mode2, 20MHz/Mode1)
With license-key upgrade for 4xT1/E1, 55Mbps (20MHz/Mode2) EX-5i, 10/100 Ethernet + 4xT1/E1
Configured for 100Mbps (32MHz/Mode2)
With license-key upgrade for 200Mbps capacity (64MHz/Mode2) EX-5i-16, 10/100 Ethernet + 16xT1/E1
Configured for 4xT1/E1, 100Mbps (32MHz/Mode2)
With license-key upgrade for 8xT1/E1, 100Mbps (32MHz/Mode2)
With license-key upgrade for 12xT1/E1, 100Mbps (32MHz/Mode2)
With license-key upgrade for 16xT1/E1, 200Mbps (64MHz/Mode2) Note: Not all software features mentioned in this document are enabled on all radios with the current firmware releases. Please note the revision history in the front section of the manual and check the Exalt website download section to verify the most recent firmware release available for your product. 5000001 2007-06-25 16 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Note: This manual uses terminology to distinguish the characteristics of specific radio models. The term standard refers to the EX-2.4i, EX-4.9i and EX-5i models. The term -16 refers to the EX-2.4i-16 and EX-5i-16 models. When no specific mention is made or the term i-Series is used, this refers to all models. Generally, the i-Series models require a clear line-of-sight and proper path clearance to achieve a high-performance, reliable connection. Perform professional path engineering and site planning BEFORE installing this equipment. The primary focus of this document is the installation and maintenance of the digital microwave radio, and assumes that path engineering and site planning has already been performed. Please refer to the Exalt document, Guidance for Engineering and Site Planning of Terrestrial Wireless Links, for detailed information on these activities. The EX-2.4i models utilize radio frequencies in the range of 2400 to 2483.5MHz. The EX-5i models utilize radio frequencies in the range of 5250 to 5850 MHz. In most countries these frequency bands are considered as license-exempt or unlicensed. This means that virtually any user may use these frequencies freely, without paying for access, or any type of pre-notification, post-notification or registration. As a result of this designation, users may also move or change these systems at any time, with significant flexibility to the location, orientation and configuration of the system. However, due also to this designation, there may be uncontrolled interference from other similar devices that occupy this spectrum. In these cases, it is up to engineering and maintenance personnel to design the system with existing and future interference sources in mind, recognizing that there is a chance that the interference conditions could be very dynamic, and outages may occur on the system as a result, and that, in some very rare cases, the system may cause interference into another system and may be required to be disengaged or modified/re-
oriented to eliminate the interference. If the spectrum in your country is designated as license-exempt or similar, this does not infer that the installer may configure the system in any manner at any location. In most cases, there are regulations, or device-based conditions that limit the use of the device, such as maximum gain antenna, antenna types and maximum output power, as well as, in some cases, application limits, limited geography of use, and other unique regulations. The link design engineer and/or professional installer must determine these limitations and engineer/install the system within the confines of all local regulations. Also, it is required to examine any regulations that may apply to peripheral equipment, installation and cabling of the system that may be regulated for human safety, electrical code, air-traffic control, and other safety-related categories. In certain countries, the spectrum for this product is NOT considered to be license-
exempt. In these cases, there may be additional regulatory requirements concerning the location, frequency, power, orientation, configuration, and other aspects of the system, including, in some cases, a need for link registration, coordination, and fees that may apply to the system usage. Please consult your local regulatory organization(s) to determine usage requirements. 5000001 2007-06-25 17 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide The EX-4.9i utilizes frequencies in the 4940-4990MHz range, and is typically a licensed band reserved for use by Public Safety agencies and applications. This band is not generally available outside of North America. In almost all cases, either for license-exempt or other designation, the product itself must be authorized for use in your country. Either Exalt or Exalts agent must have applied for certification or authorization to allow the sale and deployment of the system within the country. It is also possible that only certain versions or configurations of the device are allowed within a particular country. Please contact Exalt or your authorized Exalt representative for information pertaining to your country. Note: It is the professional installers responsibility to ensure that the radio system is implemented in a legal fashion. Exalt is not liable for any unsafe or illegal installations. Basic Features The i-Series Digital Microwave Radios are single integrated units intended for all-indoor or enclosure-based mounting. The associated antenna is typically mounted on a tower or rooftop mast structure with RF cabling running from the antenna location, with an egress through the structure or enclosure, with proper lightning suppression and grounding, to the RF connector of the radio. In turn, the communications interfaces and power connections are directly applied to the radio, or in some cases, also with an egress through the structure or radio enclosure with proper lightning or surge-suppression devices and associated grounding. ANTENNA PRIMARY TRANSMISSION LINE RF LIGHTNING ARRESTOR (GROUNDED) SECONDARY TRANSMISSION LINE STRUCTURE PENETRATION RADIO POWER/DATA/INTERFACES Figure 2 Indoor mount interconnection 5000001 2007-06-25 18 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide RF LIGHTNING ARRESTOR
(GROUNDED) ANTENNA RADIO CABINET GROUNDED POWER/DATA/INTERFACES LIGHTNING ARRESTOR(S) POWER/DATA/INTERFACES POWER/DATA/INTERFACES STRUCTURE PENETRATION Figure 3 Enclosure mount interconnection For highest performance and reliability, it is advised to minimize the length of RF cable and associated transmission system losses between the antenna and the radios antenna port. All models provide connections for a combination of the following data communication interfaces:
10/100BaseT Ethernet Up to 16xT1/E1 interfaces for synchronous voice traffic (number of TDM interfaces is determined by specific model and license-key configuration) The i-Series radios feature a wide-mouth direct DC connection (24V or 48V), and are also provided with an external AC adapter. All models provide the following primary features and benefits:
Low-latency optimization and control for voice and data connections Very high throughput and flexible interface configurations with voice+data combinations Encryption for extreme wireless security Easy-to-use management and configuration Flexible utilized channel bandwidth selection for interference avoidance and frequency coordination Flexible center frequency tuning for interference avoidance and frequency coordination Flexible capacity to meet current connection requirements and future growth needs Carrier-class reliability and performance 19 5000001 2007-06-25 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Intuitive graphical user interface for fast and easy configuration and management Advanced diagnostics monitoring and analysis tools for fast and easy troubleshooting 5000001 2007-06-25 20 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Pre-installation Tasks This section describes the steps necessary to prepare a site for the installation of the Exalt Digital Microwave Radio. Link Engineering and Site Planning Design all terrestrial wireless links prior to purchase and installation. Generally, professional wireless engineering personnel are engaged to determine the viability and requirements for a well-engineered link to meet the users needs for performance and reliability. The reader is referred to the Exalt document, Guidance for Engineering and Site Planning of Terrestrial Wireless Links and the ExaltCalc path calculator. This document and calculator aid in the pre-planning and engineering required to determine following attributes:
Antenna type/gain at each end of the link Antenna mounting height/location for proper path clearance Antenna polarization orientation RF cabling type, length, connectors, route, and mounting Antenna system grounding Lightning arrestor type(s), location(s), and grounding Radio mounting location and mechanisms Radio grounding Radio transmitter output power setting Anticipated received signal level (RSL) at each end Anticipated fade margin and availability performance at each end Radio settings for TDD frame length and occupied bandwidth Anticipated throughput performance (TDM circuit support and Ethernet) Anticipated system latency With respect to radio path and site planning, these radios are generally identical to any other microwave terrestrial wireless systems. Engineering of these systems requires specific knowledge about the radios, including:
RF specifications (transmitter output power, receiver threshold, occupied channel bandwidth, and carrier-to-interference tolerance) Regulatory limitations on transmitter output power setting and antenna type/gain Noise/interference profile for the intended location 5000001 2007-06-25 21 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Impact on throughput and latency relative to link distance, occupied bandwidth, and TDD frame size setting, and the planned implementation of these parameters Familiarization with i-Series Radios The i-Series radios utilize time division duplex (TDD) radio transmission. This means that the transmitted signal in both directions uses the same center frequency and transmits in one direction for a period of time, and then in the opposite direction for another period of time. This total period of time is referred to as the frame length or TDD frame length, and is further discussed in Time Division Duplex (TDD) Factors on page 25. The two radio terminals are identical hardware, except for the TDD setting in software. When the radios are in their default state, both radios are configured as Radio B. One end of the link must be configured as Radio A before the two ends of the radio system can communicate. It can be considered that Radio A is the primary radio in the link. Radio A provides the master clock and control to Radio B. For most applications, it is not important how the radio link is oriented, only that one end is configured for Radio A and the other for Radio B. For some applications (such as, multi-radio hub sites or repeaters), the orientation of the radio systems may be more critical. See Link Orientation and Synchronization on page 26 for details. There are three ways to configure the radios for Radio A/B determination:
1. Use the Exalt browser-based graphical user interface (GUI) preferred. 2. Use the temporary hardware configuration key, in case of emergency (all models except for -16 models). 3. Use the front panel DIP switch, in case of emergency (-16 models only). Exalt recommends using the Exalt GUI for radio configuration. This interface requires a computer with an Ethernet port and web browser software, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or above. See Configuration and Management on page 52 for details on how to connect to and use the browser-based GUI interface. Standard models: The temporary hardware configuration key can be used when no computer is available to complete Radio A/Radio B configuration and there is a need for immediate bench testing or initial link installation and/or antenna alignment. See Radio A/B Configuration on page 27 for details on the temporary hardware configuration key.
-16 models: The front panel DIP switch provides a fast temporary means for Radio A/Radio B configuration. See DIP Switch Settings (-16 Models Only) on page 114 for details. 5000001 2007-06-25 22 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Shipping Box Contents Unless purchased as a spare terminal, the radios are shipped as a complete hop (that is, a radio link pair consisting of two terminals). An outer box has labeling that indicates the contents of the box, with the part number and serial number details for both radio terminals. Inside the outer box are two identical boxes, each of these boxes is also marked with the part number and serial number of the individual terminal contained inside the box. The terminal box contains the following items:
Radio terminal (configured as Radio B) AC adapter Accessory kit
Rack mount flanges
Flange mounting hardware (4 x M4 screws; 4 x M4 wave washers)
DC power connector (1)
Temporary hardware configuration key (1 x 9-pin connector, labeled A)
Grounding hardware (1 x M5 screw; 1 x M5 wave washer; 2 x M5 flat washers)
Radio A temporary hardware configuration key (for standard models only) Registration card Quick-start guide Inspect the outer packaging and the contents of the boxes upon receipt. If you suspect any shipping damage or issues with the contents, contact Exalt Customer Care. Note: Register your system as soon as possible. A 2-year Warranty period applies to products registered within 90 days of purchase. The Warranty period is reduced to 1-year for unregistered products and products registered after the first 90 days. 5000001 2007-06-25 23 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Back-to-Back Bench Test and Configuration Every Exalt digital microwave radio goes through extensive quality testing and performance evaluation over the full operating temperature range prior to shipment. However, before installation, it is strongly advised to perform several tests and tasks that are much more difficult to perform once the radio link endpoints are distant from one another. A back-to-back bench test and pre-configuration will provide confidence that the radio link is operational and properly configured prior to installation, so that if troubleshooting is necessary, the radio hardware and configuration settings are eliminated from the troubleshooting process. Verify the following in the back-to-back testing:
Confirm that the radio system is generally operational
Radios power-up with planned power and wiring solutions
RF link connects in both directions
Traffic passes across the link Configure connected equipment and cabling
Test Ethernet (CAT5) cabling, and/or T1/E1 cabling, any auxiliary connector cabling and configure all interfaces
Configure IP settings for configuration and management
Configure passwords and security modes
Become familiar with the configuration and management interfaces through the Exalt GUI interface Configure radio parameters
Set transmitter output power to engineered or allowed level (see RF Output Power Setting on page 25)
Set operating center frequency
Set link distance, occupied channel bandwidth, and frame length Make detailed radio performance measurements
Measure transmitter output power
Measure receiver threshold performance
Confirm unfaded error-free performance Some of these tasks may not be possible or practical within a bench test environment due to the nature of the remote connectivity of peripheral equipment. However, it is good practice to perform as much as possible in this environment to minimize field/installation time and troubleshooting efforts. 5000001 2007-06-25 24 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Detailed performance measurements are usually not required for pre-installation, but can be easily performed at this stage and may be helpful for later troubleshooting efforts or for internal records. During troubleshooting, there may often be a point at which a back-
to-back bench test should be performed to verify many or all of the above items, and in the case of a suspected faulty device, to help confirm the fault and determine which end of the system is at fault and in need of repair or replacement. Note: See Back-to-back Bench Testing on page 104 for detailed instructions. RF Output Power Setting The maximum RF output power is bounded by one of the following criteria:
Maximum RF output power setting capability of the radio device Maximum RF output power allowed/authorized by the local government regulations and for this specific device Maximum effective isotropic radiated power (EIRP) of the transmission system allowed/authorized by the local government regulations and for this specific device Desired RSL to not exceed the maximum RSL allowed by the device Desired RSL to minimize/eliminate interference into neighboring systems Note: In many cases the radio must be pre-configured for legal maximum output power before connecting to the antenna and transmission system. Instructions for adjusting the output power can also be found in System Configuration Page on page 64. The following information on how to set the proper power for each country is based on the pertains to specific regulatory requirements based on up-to-date information for countries where these radios are authorized is in Appendix A. A list of recommended antennas is listed in Antenna/Transmission System on page 45. Time Division Duplex (TDD) Factors The i-Series radios are very dynamic, allowing the installer to optimize and control the performance of the radio system for the intended application. The following parameters must be carefully determined during the link engineering phase:
Link distance Bandwidth TDD frame size Mode (modulation) The setting of the above parameters determines the following performance factors:
5000001 2007-06-25 25 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Number of supported T1/E1 channels Ethernet throughput System latency (delay) Use the ExaltCalc calculator to determine optimum settings for the above parameters to meet the needs of your application. The following generalizations can be made with regards to these factors:
The shorter the TDD frame size, the lower the latency The shorter the link distance, the lower the latency, the higher the throughput The longer the TDD frame size, the higher the throughput The higher the bandwidth, the higher the capacity The higher the mode, the higher the capacity Note: Disable all T1/E1 ports if there are no T1/E1 interfaces connected. This shifts all available throughput to the Ethernet interface. Note: If a selected combination of the Link Distance, Frame Size, Bandwidth, and Mode parameters cannot support all the desired T1 or E1 ports, the ports that cannot be supported are automatically disabled. Priority is placed on the T1/E1 port number. That is, the first port to be disabled, if necessary, is the highest port number, such as Port 4 for the standard models, and Port 16 for -16 models (assuming that all 16 TDM interfaces are licensed for use). See T1/E1 Configuration Pages on page 69 for more information. Link Orientation and Synchronization Link orientation refers to the Radio A and Radio B placement in your network. Link synchronization refers to using external or internal timing to coordinate multiple links. For every link, one end of the radio link must be configured as Radio A, while the other end is configured as Radio B. In single-link systems, it does not matter which end of the system is mounted at which end of the link, and there is typically no requirement for any link synchronization. Link orientation and synchronization are more important for networks with site(s) where there is more than one link of the same type or for sites using the same type of radio that are very close to each another at one or both ends. It can be advantageous to utilize link synchronization for collocated links. The radios allow the use of an optional GPS synchronization kit or internal synchronization. This synchronization controls the transmitter and receiver frame timing so that collocated radios are transmitting at the same time and receiving at the same time. This can substantially reduce the opportunity for self-interference. Without synchronization, 5000001 2007-06-25 26 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide collocated radios may be transmitting and receiving at the same time, incurring near-end interference. Note: It is not always necessary to synchronize collocated radios. If antennas are substantially separated or blocked from one another and/or frequency separation tuning is used, the opportunity for near-end interference can be eliminated. Note: Internal and/or GPS sync features are not released for all models as of printing. Contact your Exalt Communications representative for details. Radio A/B Configuration Use the Exalt GUI to configure the radio terminals for Radio A and Radio B orientation. Since many other parameters also need to be set, and the Exalt GUI is needed for these configurations, this is the best way to completely configure the radio terminals. Radios arrive from manufacture in default configuration, orientated as Radio B and configured as shown in Table 1. Table 1 Factory Default Settings Parameter Frequency Transmit Power Bandwidth Mode Link Distance TDD Frame Size Link Security Key Administration Password User Password IP Address IP Mask IP Gateway Ethernet Interfaces AUX port NMS Access T1/E1 Settings (-16 models) T1/E1 Settings (std. models) 5000001 2007-06-25 EX-2.4i 2441
+7 dBm 8MHz EX-5i 5788
+4dBm 8MHz EX-4.9i 4965 MHz
+4dBm 10MHz Mode 1
<10 miles 2ms 000000000000 password password 10.0.0.1 255.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Enabled, 100/Full In-Band All Enabled, T1, B8ZS, AIS Disabled 27 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Standard models: If radio configuration is unknown, and you do not have access to a computer and must install the radios immediately, the temporary hardware configuration key can help to establish a link or perform back-to-back bench testing, by helping to configure one of the radio terminals to Radio A. Note: In many cases, the system design will not be identical to the factory default configuration, and in some cases, these differences prohibit the installation of the radio. If at all possible, obtain a computer and configure the radio terminals using the browser-based GUI. See Exalt Graphical User Interface (GUI) on page 54 for details. Temporary Hardware Configuration Key (Standard Models Only) Use the following steps to enable the temporary hardware configuration key:
1. Remove power from the radio. 2. Remove anything connected to the ALARMS port. 3. Connect the key (found in the accessory kit) to the ALARMS port. 4. Hold down RMT button while applying power. The LEDs toggle through the boot cycle. Continue to hold the RMT button until the LEDs stabilize (approximately 45 seconds). IP address = 10.0.0.1 IP mask = 255.0.0.0 IP gateway = 0.0.0.0 5. Release the RMT button. The following configurations are reset on the radio:
Administration password = password User password = password Endpoint Identifier = Radio A DIP Switch Configuration (-16 Models Only) The -16 models have a DIP switch to allow temporary configuration for Radio A and Radio B. See DIP Switch Settings (-16 Models Only) on page 114 for information on DIP switch functions. Radio Synchronization The radio synchronization feature improves the performance of Exalt radios operating in the same frequency band and that are collocated (such as in repeater and hub configurations). Radio synchronization ties radio systems together to operate off of a 5000001 2007-06-25 28 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide common clock system, ensuring that all radios simultaneously transmit and receive, and thus eliminating near-field interference issues and related radio system coupling. Note: The synchronization function is not currently available on all Exalt radio models. A firmware upgrade may be required for models without sync if sync is desired. Contact your Exalt representative for details. Synchronization Modes Synchronization can be accomplished using either an internal or external source. In either case, one radio in the network must be defined as the primary sync source (A) radio. A Global Positioning System (GPS) kit from Exalt is required to implement external source synchronization. GPS synchronization is not available on all radio models. Contact your Exalt representative for details. Synchronization implementation only requires one synchronization source for any interconnected network. The system also implements a redundancy configuration to maintain a majority of the synchronization functions in case of primary radio failure. For internal synchronization, the primary radio is designated SYNC SOURCE. This radio provides the master timing for all interconnected radios. SYNC SOURCE radios and collocated radios must be configured as Radio A. Collocated radios must be in SYNC RECIPIENT mode; they receive sync signaling from the SYNC SOURCE, either directly or daisy-chained with other collocated radios. Alternatively, the radio(s) can be placed in AUTO SYNC mode. AUTO SYNC synchronizes the radios to any source provided on the SYNC IN port. However, if an appropriate synchronization signal is unavailable, the radio becomes the SYNC SOURCE for all connected radios. Internal Synchronization Figure 4 illustrates the basic interconnectivity of a radio system using internal FAR-END RADIO
(B) SYNC SOURCE C N Y S
(A) T U O SYNC RECIPIENT
(A) I N S Y N C FAR-END RADIO
(B) synchronization. In this scenario, there are two radios collocated at one site. Figure 4 Basic radio interconnectivity using internal synchronization In Figure 5, there are three collocated radios. In this configuration it may be desirable to make one radio a secondary sync source using AUTO SYNC. This provides 5000001 2007-06-25 29 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide redundancy if the primary sync source radio (A) loses power or experiences any other failure. FAR-END RADIO
(B) SYNC SOURCE
(A) C N Y S T U O AUTO SYNC
(A) I N S Y N C O U T S Y N C I N S Y N C SYNC RECIPIENT
(A) FAR-END RADIO
(B) FAR-END RADIO
(B) Figure 5 Collocated radios, one in AUTO SYNC mode to provide redundancy The synchronization function can be carried across links to additional collocation sites. For example, Figure 6 illustrates a multi-link backbone with two hub sites. FAR-END RADIO
(B) SYNC SOURCE
(A) C N Y S T U O I N S Y N C AUTO SYNC
(A) FAR-END RADIO
(B) C N Y S T U O I N S Y N C AUTO SYNC
(A) FAR-END RADIO
(B) Figure 6 Multiple-link site configuration, using AUTO SYNC for redundancy Note: The configuration shown in Figure 6 is not supported in all models at the time of this writing. Consult your Exalt representative for details. Virtually any combination of hubs and repeater sites, star configurations, and/or backbones can be implemented with synchronization using these configurations. It is typically necessary or ideal in each configuration to match the following parameters on every radio in the network:
Link Distance Match to the longest distance link in the network. Frame Length Match to the lowest frame length to optimize total system latency
(for example, for TDM networks) or match to a highest frame length to optimize user throughput. Choose an intermediate value to compromise between latency and throughput. Mode It is desirable, but not always necessary, to match the mode for all collocated links. 5000001 2007-06-25 30 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Bandwidth It is desirable, but not always necessary, to match the bandwidth for all collocated links. For complex networks, an Exalt engineer should review multi-link networks before deployment as several factors can optimize the network for desired performance. External Synchronization Use an external GPS source as an alternative to the internal synchronization source for system synchronization. This is ideal for links that are nearby each other, but are not directly collocated at the same site. Figure 7 illustrates using a GPS source for the primary synchronization at a typical site with collated radios. GPS ANTENNA FAR-END RADIO
(B) AUTO SYNC
(A) C N Y S N I C N Y S T U O I N S Y N C SYNC RECIPIENT
(A) FAR-END RADIO
(B) Figure 7 GPS as primary sync source using AUTO SYNC Figure 8 illustrates two separate radio locations benefiting from synchronized GPS sources. GPS ANTENNA GPS ANTENNA C N Y S N I FAR-END RADIO
(B) AUTO SYNC
(A) FAR-END RADIO
(B) AUTO SYNC
(A) C N Y S N I Figure 8 Synchronized GPS sources using AUTO SYNC Offset Timing Manual control of offset timing is also allowed. This provides a means to delay the synchronization signal using a user-defined offset. This is helpful when Exalt radios are near other devices operating in the same frequency band that also use a timing source, 5000001 2007-06-25 31 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide such as GPS. The timing source to the Exalt radios can be adjusted to match the other radio system timing source mechanism. Offset timing can also optimize timing intervals for repeaters and backbones. As the distance of each link results in a unique factor for speed-of-light transmission of the radio signal, a subsequent radio can be delayed in timing so that the overall synchronization of radios is precisely maintained. Offset timing can be adjusted in 1-ms intervals, from zero to the radios frame length setting. For example, if using a 2-ms frame length, the offset timing can be set from zero up to 1999 ms. Note: Offset timing is not supported in all models at the time of this writing. Consult your Exalt representative for details. When Sync is Lost If the primary sync source (for example, the sync source radio or GPS source) signal is lost due to equipment failure, a disconnected sync cable, or other conditions, the first radio in the daisy-chain configuration set to AUTO SYNC resumes the sync function for the remaining connected radios. If a radio is configured as SYNC RECIPIENT, transmission ceases if the sync signal does not appear at the SYNC IN connector. A radio running in AUTO SYNC (without the sync source) is said to be flywheeling. That is, the clock is free-running off internal clocking and is no longer synchronized to any source. If the original sync source is restored to the flywheeling radio configuration, the flywheeling radio attempts to synchronize to this signal without causing transmission interruption. All interconnected radios receiving sync from the flywheeling radio also continue to operate without interruption. When the flywheeling radio runs independently for long periods of time, the synchronization signal can be too far outside of the capture range of the synchronization loop, and portions of transmission frames can be lost during the re-synchronization process. This condition is temporary and all interconnected radios re-synchronize to the sync source, as necessary. For GPS synchronization, the wiring inside the Exalt radio carries the GPS signal to the next radio cabled in the system, even when power is removed from the SYNC SOURCE radio or during radio failures. This provides redundancy for catastrophic failure of the SYNC SOURCE and maintains GPS synchronization. If the GPS source is lost (for example, due to failure of the GPS unit, a disconnected cable, or satellite blockage), the AUTO SYNC radio resumes synchronization duties for all collocated radios. LEDs There are two LEDs on both the SYNC OUT and SYNC IN ports. Table 3 on page 39 describes the two SYNC IN and two SYNC OUT LEDs. 5000001 2007-06-25 32 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide System Installation and Initiation Process The tasks required for radio installation and initiation are outlined in the following figure. Transmission System Tasks Radio Preparation Tasks Path & Site Analysis Link Design Build Antenna Structures &
Egress Read This Manual Completely Pre-configure Radios Perform Back-to-Back Test Mount Antennas &
Transmission Line Install & Test Network &
Power Wiring Both Transmission System & Radio Preparation Tasks Must Be Complete Mount Radios Connect Transmission Line Connect Power Align Antennas to Planned RSL Verify LEDs for Good Link Test Network Connectivity Connect &
Test Primary Services Test Network Management System 33 Figure 9 Radio installation tasks 5000001 2007-06-25 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Record Keeping After installation, record the following items for ongoing maintenance and future troubleshooting. Keep a record for each end of the radio link and store a copy of these records at the radio location, at the opposite end radio location, and a central record storage location. GPS coordinates for antenna locations at each site Antenna heights above ground level (AGL), as mounted Antenna model numbers, serial numbers, and specifications Antenna polarization as mounted Length/type of primary transmission lines at each site Model number and serial number of RF lightning arrestors Length/type of secondary transmission line(s) Transmitter output power setting as installed at each site RSL as measured after antenna alignment at each site Designed RSL per original design at each site RSL reading with far-end power off (from each end) Spectrum analyzer plot with far end off at each site Voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR)/return loss at radios antenna connector at each site Radios network management IP address at each site Radios network management gateway address at each site Radios operating frequency, bandwidth setting, and mode of operation Optionally purchased extended warranty and/or emergency service contract details In addition, certain information may be desired for central record-keeping only:
Security codes and login passwords (kept in a secure place) Photographs of complete installation End-user sign-off/acceptance documentation (if any) Photo of rear panel label (part number, serial number, MAC address information) Site access information phone numbers, access codes, directions 5000001 2007-06-25 34 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Installation This section presents all tasks required to install the Exalt Digital Microwave Radio. Mechanical Configuration and Mounting The i-Series radios are one-piece radio designs intended for deployment in a telecom equipment rack indoors or in an appropriate environmental enclosure. The device must be deployed within an ambient temperature range as specified, and properly ventilated with no obstructions to the air intake and exhaust. The standard models occupy 1 rack unit
(1RU = 1.75/4.5cm ) height in a typical telecom rack. The -16 models occupy 1.5 RU
(2.625/6.7cm). In most cases, additional racked equipment can be placed directly above and/or below the device with no empty spaces in the rack. However, depending on power consumption and ventilation for adjoining devices, they may pass heat to the device, not allowing the radio to cool properly and increasing the risk of malfunction. Heat dissipation from the radio may also affect adjoining devices. Provide air space above and below the device, where possible. If not possible, a thermal analysis may be required by a professional engineer to determine the impact of thermal transfer between all adjoining units. Provide proper clearance for all cables and connectors attached to the device. Notably, the RF cable connector may require significant clearance for the bend radius of the coaxial cable assembly. Use a properly specified 90 RF connector to minimize clearance requirements, which may be necessary in enclosure implementations. All RF connectors, cables, and adapters must be rated for operation within the radios frequency range
(24002483.5 MHz for EX-2.4i; 4940-4990 MHz for EX-4.9i; 52505850 MHz for EX-
5i). RF connector losses must be accounted for within the link engineering design and output power settings. Rack Mounting Rack mounting hardware for a standard 19" (48cm) rack is included in the accessory kit. Attach the rack mounting brackets to the sides of the unit with the provided screws. The radio can be mounted in one of four configurations:
Front flush mount (front panel even with the rack mounting surface) Figure 10 Front flush mount configuration 5000001 2007-06-25 35 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Front projection mount (front panel extended forward from the rack mounting surface) Figure 11 Front projection mount configuration Rear flush mount (rear panel even with the rack mounting surface) Rear projection mount (rear panel extended forward from the rack mounting surface) USE THESE BRACKET-MOUNTING HOLES FOR REAR-FLUSH OR REAR-PROJECTION MOUNTING Figure 12 Rear-mount locations The rack mounting brackets accommodate identical mounting configurations as shown in the previous figures, and can be mounted three different ways with respect to the vertical orientation in the rack:
1. Projecting down, using one full rack space and half of the space below, and leaving a half-space gap below. 2. Projecting up, using one full rack space and half of the space above, and leaving a half-space gap above. 3. Centered within two spaces, with rack space gap above and below. Two radios mounted in the same rack can be mounted in adjoining spaces, utilizing a total of three rack spaces. Note: Screws for attaching the radio to the telecom rack are not provided; use the appropriate screw type that matches the equipment rack. 5000001 2007-06-25 36 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Table or Rack Shelf Mounting the System Affix rubber feet or adhesive-backed non-slip pads (not included) near the corners of the unit along the bottom panel when mounting on a table or a rack shelf. These pads help keep the radio stable on a wooden or metal surface. Caution: In many areas, it is necessary to strap the equipment to a table or rack shelf if mounting in this manner. In case of earthquake or other shock or vibration, or an accidental pull of a cable, the unit should be secured from falling. It may also be necessary to secure the AC adapter, if it is used. Radio Ports and Indicators This section provides a brief overview of the connectors, controls, and indicators on the device. Details about each item are in other sections of this document. The EX-2.4i front panel is shown in Figure 13. The EX-4.9i and EX-5i front panels are identical, except for the model number shown in the upper-right corner. Figure 13 Front panel (EX-2.4i, EX-4.9i or EX-5i) The EX-2.4i-16 front panel is shown in Figure 14. The EX-5i-16 front panel is identical, except for the model number shown in the upper-right corner. Figure 14 Front panel (EX-2.4i-16 or EX-5i-16) Connector Overview The primary user interfaces are shown in Figure 15. Table provides details of the front panel connectors of all radios. Detailed pin structures for each connector are in Interface Connections on page 109. 5000001 2007-06-25 37 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Figure 15 Primary front panel connectors (standard models) Table 2 Connectors Label Antenna T1/E1
(14 or 116) ETHERNET
(MAIN/AUX) SYNC
(IN/OUT) Type N RJ-48C RJ-45 RJ-45 CONSOLE 9-pin sub-D ALARMS 9-pin sub-D GND (Ground) Bantam RSL Bantam Gender Function F F F F F F F F Transmission line connection to GPS antenna. Primary ports for User T1 or E1 circuits to traverse link. Primary ports for user Ethernet and/or management data
(10BaseT or 100BaseT) to traverse link. Internal or external radio synchronizing source (for example, GPS) input and output. Management port (serial) for PC/PDA for Command Line Interface (CLI) communications. External alarm inputs and outputs. Common (return) volt meter test point for measuring RSL. Voltmeter test point for measuring received signal level. 4060VDC 6-pin modular M DC power input from DC source or AC adapter.
(Ground) Threaded (M5) receptacle F Chassis ground connection (M5 x 0.8 threads). 5000001 2007-06-25 38 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide LED Indicators Table 3 provides details of the LED indicators on all models. Table 3 LED indicators Location/Label Type Function LINK 3-color LED STATUS 3-color LED RADIO A 3-color LED Indicates RF link status:
Green Solid = Error-free connection (BER<10e-6) Yellow Solid = Errored connection (10e-3>BER >10e-6) Red Solid = No link (BER>10e-3) Red Flash= No remote information available (when RMT is pressed and held) Off = Improperly powered or fatal system failure Indicates system status:
Green Solid = No alarm conditions (normal operation) Yellow Solid = Alarm conditions, not traffic effecting Yellow Slow Flash = In loopback (from this end) Yellow Fast Flash = In loopback (at this end) Red Solid = Alarm conditions; traffic effecting Red Flash = No remote information available (when RMT is pressed and held) Off = Improperly powered or fatal system failure Indicates radio orientation:
Green Solid = Radio is configured as Radio A, based on software setting Green Flash = Radio is configured as Radio A, based on temporary hardware configuration key Off = Radio is configured as Radio B ETHERNET MAIN/AUX Left Corner ETHERNET MAIN/AUX Right Corner 5000001 2007-06-25 Green LED Green LED Solid/Flashing = Data present Off = No data present Solid = Negotiated @ 100Mbps Flash = Negotiated @ 10Mbps Off = No connection negotiated 39 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Location/Label T1/E1 Left Corner T1/E1 Right Corner RMT
(LED inside button) SYNC IN Left Corner SYNC IN Right Corner SYNC OUT Left Corner SYNC OUT Right Corner Type Green LED Green LED Amber LED Green LED Green LED Green LED Green LED
(Unmarked LED on rear panel) 2-color LED Function Solid = Connection present (clocking confirmed) Fast Flash = Connection present; coding/clock problem Slow Flash = Connection present, but unexpected Off = No connection/clock Solid = In a loopback state Fast Flash = Automatic indication signal (AIS) is active Off = No loopback; no AIS activity Off = Remote end LINK and STATUS LEDs are both green Solid = No remote end status available Flash = Alarm conditions at the remote end (LINK and/or STATUS LEDs are non-green) Solid on = GPS is normal (no alarms) Flash = GPS is in alarm Off = No GPS source detected Solid on = Sync locked, no alarms Flash = Sync signal detected, but not locked Off = No input sync signals detected Solid on = Radio configured as SYNC SOURCE Flash = Radio configured as AUTO SYNC Off = Radio configured as SYNC RECIPIENT or sync is disabled Solid on = SYNC SOURCE is external (GPS 1 pps) Off = SYNC SOURCE is internal Indicates overall status (from the rear panel):
Green = LINK and STATUS LEDs are both green Red Flash = LINK and/or STATUS are in a yellow state; no red states exist Red Solid = LINK and/or STATUS are in a red state Off = Improperly powered or fatal system failure 5000001 2007-06-25 40 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide RMT (Remote) Button The RMT button is the only external control on the radios. This button allows easy and quick evaluation of the status of the remote-end radio. Press and hold the button and, while held, all local-end status LEDs (LINK, STATUS, Radio A) represent the status of the LEDs on the remote-end radio. In addition, the RSL voltage represents the remote-
end voltage. When the RMT LED is amber flashes, this is an alert that the remote end has an alarm condition. Press the RMT button to determine the alarm conditions. When the RMT button is pressed and held and local LEDs flash, this indicates that no remote-end information is available. This indicates that the remote radio is either not powered, is booting, or is not linked in the direction towards the local radio, or the local radio is receiving excessive errors in this direction. It could also indicate a serious failure of either radio. Local-end LEDs (when this button is not pressed) in combination with remote-end information (from a technician located at the far end, and/or when the button is pressed) can substantially aid in rapid troubleshooting analysis. Power The radio requires a DC power source within specifications. The DC can be provided from a DC battery source, central lab/rack supply, or from the supplied AC adapter. Note: Read this section completely before applying power. Terminating the RF Connector Before applying power, the devices RF connector must be properly terminated into a 50-
Ohm load. If this is not performed, the radio may be damaged by simply applying power. Also, there are human safety factors to consider regarding potentially harmful RF radiation. There are a few simple means to accommodate proper termination:
Connect a 50-Ohm coaxial termination device to the RF port of the radio. The termination must be rated to 1W (or more). Example(s) include:
Broadwave Technologies P/N 552-200-002, or similar Connect the complete transmission system. That is, the RF cabling including the antenna. The cabled antenna provides a proper termination for the RF output. 5000001 2007-06-25 41 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Connect a fixed (or a series of fixed) 50-Ohm attenuator(s) to the RF connector, either directly or at the end of an RF transmission line. The attenuator must be at least 30dB as specified at the operating frequency (~2400 MHz for the EX-2.4i; ~4950 MHz for the EX-4.9i, ~5700 MHz for the EX-5i), and rated for a minimum of 1W input power. Examples include:
Broadwave Technologies P/N 352-103-xxx
Bird 2-A-MFN-xx
JFW Industries 50FP-xxx-H6-N AC Power The AC adapter easily connects to the device. The AC rating of the adapter accepts most standard voltages and frequencies worldwide. Refer to the input voltage requirements stated on the label affixed to the adapter to ensure that the adapter can be used with the AC mains supply. The AC plug outlet provided with the adapter may need to be replaced to match the country configuration. The adapter cable uses a standard connector for this cable for use of a pre-wired cable appropriate to the outlet configuration. If the appropriate cable is not available, the existing AC plug end can be severed and a replacement plug affixed. Consult a qualified electrician for this activity. Do not plug the adapter into the mains power. First, verify that the RF connector is properly terminated (see Power on page 41), and then plug in the radio-side connector from the AC adapter to the radio. If the AC mains can be turned off using a switch, disable the power, plug the AC side of the adapter into the AC mains socket, and then enable power to the circuit. If the AC mains cannot be turned off, plug in to the AC main socket to apply power. Verify that the radio is active by observing LED activity. All LEDs on the radio flash at initial power cycle. It is strongly encouraged that the AC mains supply be fused or on a separate breaker to ensure against over-voltage and/or over-current situations and to provide some form of protection to the radio electronics and other devices connected to the same supply. In addition, if the AC power is subject to significant spikes or variation, power conditioning is a worthwhile investment, as the quality of mains power may have a direct impact on the device operation, performance and/or reliability. An Uninterruptible Power Source
(UPS) or other form of battery-backed system protects against brown-out and black-out conditions, and condition the power presented to the adapter. Evaluate the opportunity for lightning or other similar surges to be present on the powering system, including the ability for surges to couple to the power wiring system. If an evaluation indicates that there is a potential likelihood for these conditions to occur, additional surge protection is recommended for the input power wiring, especially to protect the radio electronics between the adapter and the radios DC input connector. The above statement is similarly true for every wired connection to the device. While the configuration for surge suppression or line conditioning is of a different type for each 5000001 2007-06-25 42 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide kind of signal interface, the opportunity for damage to the device, loss of communications and property is significant. In some cases, there can also be a risk to human life by not protecting against lightning entering a building through wiring or improper grounding. If you do not have experience in this type of installation practice, consult a qualified electrician and/or telecoms professional during the installation and wiring of the equipment. DC Power The device accepts DC power within the voltage specifications. The DC voltage input accepts either 20-60VDC. Ensure that the power source is specified for the proper amount of current delivery capacity. The DC power may be connected as a positive or negative voltage supply, and be referenced to ground or floating (differential voltage). There are different system grounding considerations depending on the nature of the DC supply grounding, and consult a qualified electrician or telecoms professional on the proper wiring and grounding process. To connect a DC source, with the power disabled on the DC supply, connect proper gauge wiring to the DC supply. For most (short) power cable runs, 18AWG or 24AWG wire can be typically used. Strip the ends just long enough for enclosure to the DC radio connector (approximately 0.25 inches/6mm). If using stranded wire, the stripped ends inserted into the DC terminal connector must be solder-tipped. If using solid wire, a solder tip is not necessary. Ensure that the power wiring is long enough to neatly traverse, when properly dressed, between the source supply and the radio mounting location. If DC wires are to be exposed to outdoor environments, use wire in the proper weatherproof wiring jacket. For longer runs of DC wiring, use a higher gauge wire and/or higher current source supply to overcome the additional resistance of the DC wiring. However, the DC connector for the radio may not be able to accept a high diameter wire, transition to thinner gauge near the end of the wiring run or use the maximum diameter wire for the entire wiring run, as long as it meets the powering requirements considering total resistance of the wiring and the power source current load capacity. Insert the wiring ends into the DC mating connector (supplied) and tighten the terminal screws to secure the wire into the connector. Do not connect the mating connector to the radio system and disable the power system. Pay close attention to the polarization of the DC signals coming from the DC supply and the ground conductor (if any), and ensure that they are connected to the proper pins of the DC mating connector. The connector mate on the radio is clearly marked on the front panel for proper polarization and for ground connection. Wire across the plus (+) and minus (-) terminals from the DC supply. In addition, place a separate jumper between the proper terminal and the ground terminal to reference one side of the power supply line to the radio chassis ground. In some cases, the DC system may need to be floating and this ground jumper is not necessary; however, many configurations require one side to be grounded for proper electrical safety. 5000001 2007-06-25 43 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Warning: Consult a qualified electrician if uncertain about how to properly ground the system and connect power. Figure 16 DC connector Once the wires are connected to the mating connector, do not connect to the radio. First test the DC connection to the connector from the DC supply. Engage power on the DC supply, and use a volt meter to verify proper voltage level and polarity. Verify that the RF connector is properly terminated, as described in Terminating the RF Connector on page 41. Disengage power once again on the DC source, and connect the mating connector to the radio device. Engage power on the DC source. Verify radio is active by observing LED activity. All LEDs flash during the initial power cycle to verify that they are operational. Secure the DC connector using the integral captive screws at each end. This prevents accidental disconnection. See Power on page 41 regarding fusing, breakers, lightning protection, surge protection and power conditioning. Follow these recommendations for a DC supply. Reset to Critical Factory Settings If necessary, the radio terminal may be reset to critical factory settings. This may be necessary if the IP address and/or passwords for the system are not known. All other configurations are left at their current settings. If a complete default factory configuration is desired, load the Default Configuration File into the system, as described in System Configuration Page on page 64. The following parameters are configured after a reset to critical factory settings:
Administration password = password User password = password Endpoint Identifier = Radio B (unless temporary hardware configuration key is IP Address = 10.0.0.1 IP Mask = 255.0.0.0 IP Gateway = 0.0.0.0 installed on a standard model, or the DIP switch is used on a -16 model) To perform a reset to critical factory settings:
1. Remove power. 2. Remove connections to the ALARMS port. 5000001 2007-06-25 44 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide 3. Hold the RMT button on the front panel while applying power. Continue to hold the RMT button through the entire boot cycle (approximately 45 seconds). The front-panel LEDs toggle during the boot cycle. 4. Release the RMT button when LED behavior stabilizes. Antenna/Transmission System This section provides general guidance to the mounting and connecting of the RF transmission system, consisting of the antenna, RF cabling, and RF lightning arrestors. Consult the manufacturers instructions for proper mounting, grounding, and wiring of these devices, and for definitive direction. These manufacturers instructions supersede any information in this section. The antennas permitted for are identified in Tables 10 and 11. Initial Antenna Mounting The antenna must be an exact model recommended by the path and site planning engineer(s). Mount the antenna at the proper height, mast/mounting location and polarization orientation as determined by the path and site planning engineer(s). The model type, location, and orientation of the antenna is critical with respect to achieving proper path clearance, as well as to mitigate external or self-interference from nearby or collocated systems operating in or near the same frequency band. Warning: Mount the antenna in a restricted area and in a manner preventing long-term human exposure to the transmitted RF energy. To comply with FCC and Industry Canada regulations, the minimum safe distance from the antenna for continuous human exposure for the EX-2.4i models is 10 feet (3m), 39 inches (1m) for the EX-4.9i, and 10.5 feet
(3.2m) for the EX-5i models. The antenna structure must be secure and safe with respect to the mounting of the antenna, transmission system weight, and the combined weight of any personnel that may climb or attach to the structure. The combined weight of items and forces on the structure must be carefully considered in the design and construction of the structure. This must include the weight bearing on the structure in the highest wind conditions possible in the region, and with respect to all objects affixed to the structure. If additional objects are affixed to the structure in the future, it may be important to evaluate both the mechanical impact of these planned additions (with respect to wind and weight loading), as well as the potential impact to RF interference and frequency coordination (if additional radio equipment is anticipated). This is especially important if future equipment is likely to operate within the same frequency band. Once the antenna is mounted, cabled, and aligned, your goal is to never require modification. This prior planning is important in the path and site planning stages and in construction of the antenna structure. 5000001 2007-06-25 45 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Follow the antenna manufacturers instructions for mechanical mounting of the antenna. Ensure that there is enough room around the antenna for alignment activities (moving the antenna in vertical and horizontal arcs), and for the RF transmission line to connect to the antenna connector unobstructed and within the specified bend radius requirements of the transmission line. At this point, the antenna mounts should be fully secure to the structure, the feed of the antenna securely mounted to the antenna (if the feed is a separate assembly), and the azimuth and elevation adjustments not completely tightened in preparation of the antenna alignment activity. It is a good practice to connect the transmission line to the antenna connector as early in the process as possible, to reduce the opportunity for debris or moisture to enter either the antenna connector or the transmission line connector. Use a connector cover or other temporary measures to ensure that the connector is kept clear. Take extra care if the antenna is installed during inclement weather to ensure that no moisture gets inside the antenna connector at any time. Now the antenna can be aimed in the general direction required for the link. Use a compass, a reference bearing, binoculars or any other similar device to point the antenna in the direction (generally) of the far end radio, and then slightly tighten the azimuth and elevation adjustments so that the antenna maintains its general position and is safe to be left without additional securing. Refer to the Exalt white paper, Antenna Alignment, for more information on antenna alignment techniques. Transmission Line from Antenna to Egress Most installations use coaxial transmission line for the connection between the antenna and the radio device. Coaxial transmission line can either have a solid or braided shield. Solid-shield cables are more resistant to external signal coupling and interference, but are generally stiffer than braided cables. Consult the path or site engineer(s) to ensure that the proper materials are chosen for the installation and that all factors were considered. Refer to the Exalt white paper, Transmission Line for Exalt Indoor Radio Systems. Generally, the larger the diameter of the transmission line, the lower the loss. So for longer runs of transmission line, larger diameter cables are highly advised. However, at every frequency, there is a maximum diameter cable that supports the operating frequency. Verify the specifications. This should is determined in the path and site planning process. In some cases, the choice of transmission line is not coaxial cable, but is instead air-
dielectric waveguide. This is an expensive solution and is generally not necessary, but may be required for very long transmission line runs, and/or very long link distances, and/or for systems requiring extremely high reliability. Table 4 lists representative samples of transmission line types recommended for the Exalt Digital Microwave Radio. Table 4 Recommended transmission line Manufacturer Type Description Loss at 2.4GHz Loss at 4.9GHz Loss at 5.3GHz Loss at 5.8GHz Andrew LDF4-50 1/2-inch solid shield 3.3dB/100ft. 5.6dB/100ft. 5.7dB/100ft. 6.0dB/100ft. 5000001 2007-06-25 46 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Manufacturer Type Description Loss at 2.4GHz Loss at 4.9GHz Loss at 5.3GHz Loss at 5.8GHz LDF4.5-50 LMR-600 LMR-900 LCF12-50J LCF12-58J 2.5dB/100ft. 4.3dB/100ft. 2.9dB/100ft. 3.5dB/100ft. 2.8dB/100ft. 4.7dB/100ft. 7.3dB/100ft. 4.9dB/100ft. 5.9dB/100ft. 4.8dB/100ft. 4.3dB/100ft. 6.8dB/100ft. 4.5dB/100ft. 5.5dB/100ft. 4.4dB/100ft. 4.4dB/100ft. 6.9dB/100ft. 4.6dB/100ft. 5.6dB/100ft. 4.5dB/100ft. 5/8-inch solid shield 1/2-inch braided shield 5/8-inch braided shield 1/2-inch solid shield 5/8-inch solid shield Andrew Times Times RFS RFS There are several other brands and models of transmission line that are perfectly acceptable. However, for extremely long transmission lines and/or extremely long radio paths, it may be necessary to use waveguide transmission line instead of coaxial transmission line. In these cases, waveguide type EW20 is recommended for EX-2.4i models (0.45dB/100ft. loss at 2.4GHz), and type EW52 for the EX-4.9i and EX-5i models (1.2dB/100ft. loss at 5.8GHz, 1.35dB/100ft. loss at 5.3GHz). It is critical that the transmission line and antenna be capable of supporting the same type of connector, or easily adapted. It can be important to minimize the number of connectors and adapters, and it is ideal that they match directly without adaptation. In most cases, transmission line allows for N-type male connectors and antennas have N-type female connectors. For waveguide, the waveguide flange can typically accommodate a direct adapter to an N connector, or alternatively, the antenna can be purchased with a direct waveguide connection. But often a flexible coaxial jumper is required to connect between the waveguide and antenna, as waveguide is generally inflexible and can be mechanically challenging to align to the exact antenna connector location. If possible, connect the primary transmission line directly to the antenna. It is desired to have the fewest possible pieces of transmission line in the system, to minimize losses and points of failure from connectors. The antenna can typically accommodate a direct connection if planned in advance. Use a 90adapter for the connection to the antenna, if necessary, but confirm that all connectors and transmission lines are properly specified for the operating frequency with minimum loss, proper impedance (50 Ohm) and proper VSWR characteristics. Transmission line connector termination is a critical element of the installation. Many factory built RF transmission lines do not provide the proper characteristics for proper transmission, despite their published specifications, often due to the fully or semi-
automated process of factory termination, which may not have considered the frequency of your system. When buying pre-terminated transmission line, it is strongly advised to obtain the documentation of test measurements on the connected transmission line showing that the loss characteristics and VSWR are within the specified limits specifically at your operating frequency. In addition to factory-built transmission line, self-terminated transmission line can suffer the same issues. Caution: Always follow the manufacturers termination process EXACTLY, and only use the manufacturers authorized tools and connectors for a given transmission line type. 5000001 2007-06-25 47 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide The manufacturers of transmission line typically offer instruction and certification for transmission line termination, and may also provide videos illustrating the process. There is no amount of extra care, education, precision, and effort that can be overstated for this process. Once the transmission line is connected to the antenna, traverse the exact route provided by the site planner. There is often a need for a small excess of transmission line near the antenna to accommodate both the need for extra slack as the antenna is loosened and moved for the alignment process, and to accommodate a drip loop for the transmission line and the initial transmission line securing hardware and grounding near the antenna. In addition, the transmission line is typically very stiff, and can provide undue pulling force on the antenna connector. Take care to align the cable with the connector so that it does not provide any torque or strain on the connector. Consult your transmission line manufacturer for the proper transportation, hoisting, securing, and grounding process. Always be very mindful of the entire length of transmission line to ensure that the transmission line is never twisted, kinked, or over-
bent beyond the specified bend radius. Once a transmission line is over-bent or kinked, it will likely never recover its specified characteristics, even after straightening, and will often be completely unusable. The opposite end of this primary transmission line typically terminates at the building or enclosure egress point. This is where to locate the RF lightning arrestor. Ensure that a proper termination to the connector-type of the lightning arrestor is made at this location. A drip loop may be required and proper securing hardware and grounding must be accommodated. As soon as practical, weatherproof the connected ends of the transmission line to the antenna and lightning arrestor. This process should be delayed as long as possible to ensure that all systems are working properly before applying the weatherproofing. Once weatherproofing is applied, it may have to be removed for testing or installation modification. With this in mind, if the installation is occurring during inclement weather, take extra care at all times to ensure that no moisture enters any connector at any time. If moisture is suspected to have compromised the antenna or transmission line, it may render those devices useless without any means for remedy except for full replacement. Indoor Mounting On rare occasions the antenna can be mounted indoors behind a window. In these cases, there would not be a need for drip loops or an RF lightning arrestor. Use a very short transmission line connected directly between the antenna and the radio mounted nearby. The weatherproofing process can also be omitted. RF Lightning Arrestor RF lightning arrestors provide a direct path to ground for lightning strikes that may couple to or directly hit the outdoor transmission system or antenna structure. The RF lightning arrestor prevents any associated voltage and current from entering the building or enclosure, where it might harm the radio equipment, other equipment, or humans. 5000001 2007-06-25 48 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide The following lightning arrestors are examples of proper devices for Exalt Digital Microwave Radios:
Polyphaser AL-LSXM Andrew BB-BNFNFE-26 Mount and ground the RF lightning arrestor in accordance to the manufacturers recommendations. Place it as close as possible to the egress point where the next piece of transmission line enters the building or enclosure. Minimize the distance to the egress to lessen the opportunity for lightning to couple to or strike the unprotected section of transmission line (if any). Where possible, use a bulkhead connector to eliminate any opportunity of this risk. Keep cable lengths behind the arrestor and into the egress substantially short (less than 3'/1m) as a safe practice. Consult a qualified electrician or installer in all cases of grounding and lightning arrestor implementation. Transmission Line from Egress to Radio A single transmission line section from the egress to the radio RF connection is always desired. Minimize the number of connectors and adapters. For indoor runs, a cable ladder or tray may be needed to properly secure the cable. In some cases, a short flexible jumper allows ease of connection to the radios RF connector. A properly specified 90 connector can often eliminate this need. An installation with space around the radio to accommodate a gentle bend radius of the transmission line is also good for a direct connection. In all cases, ensure that the transmission line is not a pulling force of the RF connector on the radio. Transmission lines can be very stiff and can damage the connector if not dressed properly. Also, follow the transmission line manufacturers instructions for the proper use of cable securing devices. 5000001 2007-06-25 49 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Antenna Alignment Antennas must be installed at both ends of the planned link to commence precision alignment. Refer to the Exalt white paper, Antenna Alignment. Antennas are typically aligned using the radio hardware for precise alignment. However, there are many very useful tools available to aid in this process, inclusive of devices specifically designed for the purpose of aligning antennas. Some examples are:
XL Microwave Path Align-R Teletronics 17-402 Use of these devices may be extremely advantageous as compared to using the radio, because they employ many unique facilities to aid in this process. Using these tools also makes it possible to align the antennas before the radio equipment is delivered. However, many installers successfully use the radios as the means for antenna alignment. There are two primary facilities when using the radio to align the antenna:
RSL voltage test point using a volt meter (recommended) The RSL test point DC voltage is inversely proportional and numerically calibrated to the received signal level. The voltage rises as the antennas are less in alignment, and falls as antennas are more in alignment. The voltage measurement corresponds to the received signal level in measurements of dBm (a negative number for RSL measurements). For example, an RSL of -60dBm yields an RSL voltage measurement of 0.60VDC; an RSL of -45dBm measures 0.45VDC. ExaltGUI RSL reading indicates the current RSL in dBm. Alignment of the antennas using the RSL test point can be accomplished in the following ways:
Radio near or at antenna location
Temporarily connect the radio to the antenna using a short piece of transmission line, so that the radio is very close to the antenna location Run wires, as necessary, from the RSL test point to the volt meter so that the antenna installer can directly view the volt meter Note: Using this method, the final RSL voltage readings during alignment may be different (better) than the planned RSL, due to the short RF transmission line. Use the path calculation tool to determine the RSL that should result in this temporary configuration to ensure proper ideal alignment. Run separate wires from radio mounted location to antenna location
Temporarily connect a set of wires from the RSL test point to the antenna location, to allow the radio installer to use a local volt meter 5000001 2007-06-25 50 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Note: Due to the resistance of the cable, the RSL readings might be impacted. Use the thickest wiring possible. Test the impact of the voltage reading due to the wiring by comparing a direct measurement at the RSL test point as opposed to the end of the wiring. RF/DC coupler Install a temporary DC coupling device at the radio antenna port and at the antenna connector. Connect the RSL test point to the radio antenna port coupler, and the volt meter to the antenna connector coupler. See DC Coupler for Antenna Alignment on page 107 for more information Verbal relay/walkie-talkie/mobile radio/cell phone
A person located at the radio front panel can use a short-range communication device or verbal relay to communicate to the antenna installer and read off RSL voltage measurements Only use the browser-based GUI for antenna alignment if there is no other means available. If this method is required, refer to Exalt Graphical User Interface (GUI) on page 54. The RSL reading can be read on a PC or any handheld computing device that supports an HTML browser and Ethernet connectivity. Note: There is a slight delay in RSL readings in the GUI as the RSL levels change. In this case, fine alignment can be done in small adjustments allowing a small gap of time so that the impact of the adjustment on the GUI display catches up to real time. 5000001 2007-06-25 51 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Configuration and Management This section describes the command line interface (CLI) and Exalt graphical user interface (GUI). Command Line Interface (CLI) Bits per second:
Data bits:
Parity:
Stop bits:
Flow Control:
Exalt Digital Microwave Radios provide a CLI to set key parameters on the system. Use the Console port for serial devices, or use the Ethernet MAIN or AUX ports for a Telnet session over a network connection. Connect to the Radio with a Serial Connection For serial interface to the CONSOLE port, on your PC, PDA, dumb terminal, or any other device with a serial interface and text input capabilities, use Hyperterminal or a similar application with the following settings:
Use a standard straight-through serial cable to connect between most computer serial ports and the Console port on the radio. A null modem cable is not properly wired for this interface. See Interface Connections on page 109 for wiring details. After establishing the serial connection, press ENTER to display the login prompt. Connect to the Radio through a Telnet Connection Use the following steps for a Telnet connection to the radio through the ETHERNET AUX port using Windows:
1. Open a command prompt, or MS-DOS prompt shell (Start>Run>cmd). 2. Type C:\>Telnet <IP Address> at the command line of the command prompt 9600 8 None 1 None window. The default IP address is 10.0.0.1 Note: You can reset the default address to a different address through serial CLI using the Console port, or back to the default address by radio reset. Note: Your computer must be on the same IP subnet as the radio to use the Telnet function. 5000001 2007-06-25 52 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide CLI Screens and Menus Use CLI or Telnet when prompted, and enter the administration level login and password. The default administration login is admin and password is password (or admin for early firmware releases). It is recommended that the default administration password be reset by performing a radio reset (see Reset to Critical Factory Settings on page 44). The serial port CLI and Telnet CLI are identical. Figure 17 shows the three menu choices available after log in. Figure 17 CLI main menu Select 1 or 2 to display the Configuration or Status menus, respectively. Select 3 to exit the CLI/Telnet session. The following selections can be made on all screens:
0 = back to previous screen 9 = help Ctrl+\ (control and backslash keys) = exit session The following depicts the complete CLI tree structure:
1. Radio information 2. Configuration a. Current IP settings b. Current system configuration c. Set IP address and mask (admin only) d. Set IP default gateway (admin only) e. Administration (admin only) System time and date System reboot Password File transfer File activation 5000001 2007-06-25 53 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide 3. Status
Alarm summary
Radio alarm
Radio status
Radio performance
Radio performance reset (admin only) 4. Exit Exalt Graphical User Interface (GUI) The Exalt GUI is the primary user interface for configuring and troubleshooting the radio and radio system. A computer or hand-held device with a conventional HTML browser and Ethernet port is required. Microsoft Internet Explorer is the preferred browser. Netscape, Mozilla, and Firefox are also supported. Preparing to Connect If the radios are new, both radios are preconfigured as Radio B, and have the same IP address. The initial priority is to configure one radio to Radio A and assign different IP addresses, unique to each radio. There are two ways to change the IP address:
1. Use the CLI interface through the console port (serial), as described in Command Line Interface (CLI) on page 52 2. Connect to the GUI using the default IP address (10.0.0.1), and change the IP address through the GUI interface. Note: If the radios current IP address is unknown, use the CLI interface through the console port to retrieve it and/or change it. Or perform a complete radio reset as described in Reset to Critical Factory Settings on page 44. Note: To connect to the radios Ethernet port and use the GUI interface, the accessing computer must match the radios IP address subnet. It is therefore necessary to either change the radios IP address through the CLI to match the subnet of the computer, or change the computers IP address to match the subnet of the radio (such as, a computer IP address of 10.0.0.10 if trying to connect to a radio set to the factory default IP address of 10.0.0.1). There are three ways to configure a radio as Radio A:
1. Use the temporary hardware configuration key, as discussed in Temporary Hardware Configuration Key (Standard Models Only) on page 28. 5000001 2007-06-25 54 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide 2. Use the front panel DIP switch, as discussed in DIP Switch Configuration (-16 Models Only) on page 28. 3. Connect to the GUI and change the configuration, as discussed in this section
(preferred). Make Connections It is recommended that one radio at a time be configured, on a bench, before taking the radios to the field for installation:
Terminate the RF connector with a 50-Ohm termination or a fixed attenuator of at least 20dB (see Terminating the RF Connector on page 41). Apply power to the radio (see Power on page 41). Note: Do not connect the radios in a back-to-back configuration. If the radios are set to their factory default settings, both radios are configured as Radio B and cannot communicate. Both radios also have the same IP address, which causes IP address conflicts. Use the CONSOLE port and CLI interface to configure the IP address to match the accessing computer or connect to the ETHERNET AUX port to the computers Ethernet port. Note: The IP address subnet of the accessing computer must match the radios IP address subnet to connect using Ethernet (see Preparing to Connect). Either change the computers IP address to match the radio, or use the CLI to change radios IP address to match the computer. Once connected to the radio using Ethernet, log in to the Exalt GUI. Log In Use the following steps to log in to the Exalt GUI. 1. Open a browser window. Microsoft Internet Explorer is the recommended browser. Netscape, Mozilla, and Firefox are also supported. If there are issues with your browser, please report it to Exalt Customer Care. You may be required to use a different browser to immediately overcome issues. 2. Type the IP address of the radio in the address bar. Figure 18 Initiating the browser connection 5000001 2007-06-25 55 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide The following window displays after pressing the Enter key or clicking the Go button in the browser window. Figure 19 Browser Login screen Login Privileges There are two levels of login privileges:
Administrator (admin) assigned complete permissions to view, edit, and configure User (user) assigned limited, view-only permissions with no edit or configuration rights The default login names and passwords are as follows:
Table 5 Default Login Information Privilege level User name Default password Administrator User admin user password password Administrator login credentials are required for configuration purposes. Type the user name and passwords for Administrator level and click OK. The following screen displays. 5000001 2007-06-25 56 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Radio Information page Figure 20 Quick-Start To establish a link on the bench, apply the following basic configurations to the radio terminal. Use the steps in the Quick Start Guide included with the radio. A summary of the items that need to be configured are:
Radio IP address for each end.
Each end must have a different IP address and cannot match the accessing computers IP address or any address assigned if radios are part of a larger network.
It may be required to change the IP address of the accessing computer after changing the IP address of the radio so that the IP subnet matches.
The radio IP address is listed on the Administration Settings page. 5000001 2007-06-25 57 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Set one radio as Radio A.
The radio selected as Radio A must be configured.
Radio A/B selection is the Endpoint Identifier parameter on the System Configuration page.
Even though both radios are set as Radio B by default, confirm this configuration on the radio intended to be Radio B. If all other parameters are still configured at their factory default settings, the radios can now be connected back-to-back to verify that the link is communicating and perform any other desired tests. See Back-to-back Bench Testing on page 104 for test information. Navigating the describes each page of the GUI. Most configuration parameter settings are intuitive. The following link parameters must match at both ends for the link to communicate:
Link Security Key (Administration Settings page) Bandwidth (System Configuration page) RF Frequency (System Configuration page) Link Distance (System Configuration page) TDD Frame Size (System Configuration page) Note: Changing any of these parameters causes a temporary loss of link. The GUI displays a warning and provides an opportunity to cancel changes. Navigating the GUI The GUI provides the primary interface for all configuration and management. There are three sections of the main GUI window, as shown in Figure 21:
Summary status information section (upper-left corner) Navigation panel Main window 5000001 2007-06-25 58 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Summary Status Navigation Panel Main Window Figure 21 Exalt GUI window description Summary Status Section This section of the Exalt GUI provides a review of the system status. Figure 22 Minimized browser windows for summary status of multiple radios In the screens in Figure 22, the top bar illustrates the alarm condition of the link. The background color of this bar is equivalent to the color of the LINK LED on the radio front panel(s) (see Table 3 on page 39). The information inside the bar is equivalent to the entry of the Link Name, as set by the administrator in the Administration Settings page (see Administration Settings Page on page 62). The background color of the left box illustrates the summary of alarm conditions of the local radio (the radio that matches the IP address). The color follows the same convention as the rear panel SUMMARY LED. The information inside the bar illustrates the IP address and the endpoint identifier (Radio A or Radio B). The background color of the right box illustrates the summary alarm conditions of the remote radio (the radio linked to the local radio). 5000001 2007-06-25 59 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Note: The local radio might be the near-end or the far-end radio, depending on the management interface connection. The terms local and remote refer to the orientation of the radio terminals relative to the IP address you are managing. When making certain changes to a near-end radio without first making changes to the far-end radio, the link may become disconnected unless configuration changes are reverted to their original settings. When making changes that have the opportunity to disrupt the link, always change the far-end radio first, and then the near-end radio to match. The Summary Status Section allows the Exalt GUI to be a rudimentary management system. Minimize the browser window to display just the top bar or the top bar and radio information, and open several browsers on the desktop. When a window status changes to yellow or red, you can quickly maximize that window to determine the issues. Navigation Panel In the navigation panel, pages with sub-pages have a plus (+) to the left of the page link. Click the plus sign or page name title to view sub-page titles. The pages can be collapsed to hide the sub-pages when a minus () sign appears to the left of the page link. Management pages are indicated with an X to the left of the page name. Click the X or page name to display the page within the main window. 5000001 2007-06-25 60 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Radio Information Page This page provides general information about the local radio terminal. This information is helpful for troubleshooting and for record keeping. Figure 23 Radio Information page 5000001 2007-06-25 61 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Administration Settings Page This page allows contains general parameters for the radio system. The Current Value column lists entries actual settings. Desired changes are entered in the New Value column. After all desired changes are entered, click the Update button to accept and enable changes. Figure 24 Administration Settings Page Most entries on this page are self-explanatory. The following lists unique or important parameters. Fill in the date and time fields as soon as practical. Events are captured with time/date stamps, which is valuable information for troubleshooting. Set the Link Security Key to something other than the factory default setting (12 characters, all zeros) at each end. The link security key must match at both sides of the link. If the security key remains at the factory setting, the radio link is open to 5000001 2007-06-25 62 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide sabotage by a party with the same radio model. Each link should have a unique security key. If using the same security key for every link in the network, the radio could link to any other radio with the same security key. This is problematic in multi-
radio networks.
Note that the security key must be exactly 12 characters. Any printable ASCII character can be used. The link security key is case sensitive. Note: Changing the link security key interrupts transmission until the opposite end is changed to match. Always change the far-end radio first, and then change the near-end radio. Reset the admin and user passwords. These passwords should not match. If the admin password remains at the factory default setting, it provides an opportunity for random reassignment by a network-connected user.
The new password must be entered twice: once in the main window and again in the confirmation window. If the passwords do not match and the UPDATE button is clicked, the password is not changed and remains set to the previous password. The License Key is set to all zeros. Enter the license key provided by Exalt to access extended features or diagnostic capabilities. Click Update to accept the changes and enable the new features. License keys are issued by radio serial number, so ensure that the license key used was issued for this particular radio. 5000001 2007-06-25 63 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide System Configuration Page This page contains several critical system parameters. Figure 25 System Configuration Page Most entries on this page are self-explanatory. The following lists unique or important parameters:
Set the Radio Transmit Power parameter to the designed level. The professional installer sets this value or dictates the value of this setting to the system administrator following the system design and local regulations. In many cases, this value must be set to a proper value to comply with legal restrictions. Improper values can result in liability to the user and/or installer. Note: Changing Radio Transmit Power may temporarily interrupt traffic. Small changes in output power do not normally interrupt traffic, but larger changes may. 5000001 2007-06-25 64 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide
Do not adjust the Radio Transmit Power parameter to a value higher than is legally allowed.
Do not adjust the Radio Transmit Power parameter lower than the link budget and fade margin can afford. The link may be lost and unrecoverable through GUI control. If the link is lost due to reduction of Radio Transmit Power, travel to the radio location(s) may be required to reset the value. Set the Bandwidth parameter to the designed level. The value of this is determined in the design/engineering stage. The Bandwidth parameter must also match at both ends of the link. In conjunction with the Mode parameter, the Bandwidth parameter directly relates to the capacity, latency, and the number of TDM circuits supported. The transmitter and receiver bandwidth are modified using this parameter, making it critical that it be set with respect to the local RF noise and interference profile, and/or in relation to any multi-link network design. Note: Changing Bandwidth will temporarily interrupt traffic. The Bandwidth parameter must match at each end. Adjust the far-end radio first, and then the near-end radio. Changing Bandwidth changes the radios threshold. A narrower bandwidth has better threshold performance and improved interference immunity, therefore if changing to a wider bandwidth, there is an opportunity that the link may be lost and unrecoverable through GUI control. Check the available fade margin and interference profile to determine if the impact to threshold and increased bandwidth is acceptable to maintain the link and the desired performance. If the link is lost due to increasing the Bandwidth parameter, travel to the radio location(s) may be required to reset the value. Set the Mode parameter to the designed selection. The value of this setting is determined in the design/engineering stage. The Mode parameter must match at both ends of the link. In conjunction with the Bandwidth parameter, the Mode parameter setting directly relates to the capacity of the system, as well as critical RF parameters, including receiver threshold, carrier-to-interference ratio, and in some cases, maximum radio transmit power. 5000001 2007-06-25 65 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Note: Changing Mode will temporarily interrupt traffic. The Mode setting must match at each end. Adjust the far-end radio first, and then the near-end radio. Changing Mode changes the radios threshold, carrier-to-interference ratio, and also may have impact on the Radio Transmit Power. A lower mode has better threshold performance and carrier-to-interference ratio, and in some cases, higher output power, therefore if changing to a higher mode (for example, from Mode 1 to Mode 2), there is an opportunity that the link may be lost and unrecoverable through GUI control. Check the available fade margin and interference profile, and determine if the impact to RF performance is sufficient to maintain the link and desired performance. If the link is lost due to increasing the Mode parameter, travel to the radio location(s) may be required to reset the value. Set the RF Frequency parameter to the designed point. The value of this setting is determined in the design/engineering stage. RF Frequency must match at both ends of the link. It may be critical to set RF Frequency with respect to the local RF noise and interference profiles, and/or in relation to any multi-link network design. The frequency selection section includes the ability to select from either the complete list of frequencies (All) that can be tuned for the selected band and bandwidth, or a pre-selected list of non-overlapping center frequencies (Preferred) that Exalt determined provides the most flexible collocation opportunities for large networks of Exalt radios For the EX-5i families, the frequency selection section includes a band selection button that must be enabled for the frequency band of operation for which the link was engineered. In some cases, some bands may not be selectable due to regulatory constraints. Note: Changing RF Frequency will temporarily interrupt traffic. The RF Frequency parameter setting must match at each end. Adjust the far-end radio first, and then the near-end radio. If the RF Frequency parameter is changed to a frequency with interference, the link may be lost and unrecoverable through GUI control. If the link is lost due to changing the RF Frequency parameter, travel to the radio location(s) may be required to reset the value. Set the Endpoint Identifier so that one end of the link is set to Radio A and the opposite end set to Radio B. In single-link networks, it is unimportant which end is designated A or B. In multi-link networks, however, it may be important to orient the links so that at any collocation site (where there are multiple radios of the same type at the same site), all radios are set to the same Endpoint Identifier (A or B). See Link Orientation and Synchronization on page 26. Note: Changing Endpoint Identifier parameter requires a reboot of the radio to take effect. The reboot temporarily interrupts traffic. 5000001 2007-06-25 66 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Set the Link Distance parameter to the range that is equal to or greater than the actual link distance. The value of this setting is determined in the design/engineering stage. Note: Changing Link Distance parameter will temporarily interrupt traffic. The Link Distance setting must match at each end and must not be less than the actual link distance. Adjust the far-end radio first, and then the near-end radio. If the Link Distance parameter is changed to a setting less than the actual distance, the link may be lost and unrecoverable through GUI control. If the link is lost due to this situation, travel to the radio location(s) may be required to reset the value. If the Link Distance parameter setting is set to a distance unnecessarily higher than the actual link distance, the radio may have substantially reduced performance with respect to throughput and latency. Set the TDD Frame Size parameter to the designed level. The value of this setting is determined in the design/engineering stage. The TDD Frame Size parameter must match at both ends of the link. The TDD Frame Size parameter setting directly relates to the capacity, latency, and number of TDM circuits that can be supported over the given link distance. In multi-link networks, especially where there are collocated links, it is also important to set all radios to the same TDD Frame Size setting to avoid self-interference. Note that the GPS or internal synch function may be necessary for these networks. See Time Division Duplex (TDD) Factors, Link Orientation and Synchronization, and Radio Synchronization for more information. Note: Changing the TDD Frame Size parameter will temporarily interrupt traffic. TDD Frame Size parameters must match at each end. Adjust the far-end radio first, and then the near-end radio. If the TDD Frame Size parameter is set to a value that cannot be supported for the link distance, the link may be lost and unrecoverable through GUI control. If the link is lost due to this situation, travel to the radio location(s) may be required to reset the value. The External Alarm Inputs parameter can be ignored unless connecting external alarm sources to the radio for monitoring the status of these external alarms through the radio management system (see Interface Connections on page 109). 5000001 2007-06-25 67 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Ethernet Interface Configuration Page This page allows the administrator to set the muting, alarm, and duplex settings of both the ETHERNET MAIN and AUX connections. It also allows determination of the management information for in-band (carried over the air and available from both the MAIN and AUX connectors on either end of the link) or out-of-band (not carried over the air and only available from the local AUX connector). Figure 26 Ethernet Interface Configuration Page Muting the MAIN connection is desirable when connected equipment senses Ethernet signaling and makes decisions (such, as spanning tree protocol enable) based on the presence or lack of presence of the Ethernet signal. If the MAIN connection has muting enabled, the port mutes when the link is not active. It may be desirable to disable the alarming of the AUX connector if it is not used. Set the Ethernet interfaces on the radio and connected equipment to 100/full-duplex for best performance. If the Ethernet ports are set to auto-negotiation, poor throughput performance may be a result, as well as intermittent disconnections of the Ethernet connection. 5000001 2007-06-25 68 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide T1/E1 Configuration Pages These pages allow the administrator to selectively enable or disable the T1 or E1 circuits, one at a time. For enabled T1/E1 circuits, additional configuration, including loopback functions, are available. Disable the unused T1 or E1 so that the alarms are turned off and more throughput is allocated to the Ethernet interface. Every enabled T1 or E1 input, even if there is no T1 or E1 signal present, reduces the aggregate throughput of the Ethernet interface by roughly 3Mbps (for T1) or 4Mbps (for E1). This page toggles between T1 and E1, as required, by clicking the Set to T1 or Set to E1 button. A warning displays that a reboot is necessary, and the radio reboots if the administrator continues. This will interrupt traffic. It may be necessary to re-login to the radio after the reboot completes. T1/E1 mode self-coordinates across the link if the link is active. This means that it only needs to be set while connected at one end. In addition, enabling and disabling T1/E1 circuits also self-coordinates across the link if the link is active. If a link is not active and T1/E1 enabling is a mismatch when a link is first created, the Radio A configuration for T1/E1 enabling supersedes the settings on the Radio B configuration, and changes the settings on Radio B. Note: Certain combinations of the TDD Frame Size, Link Distance, Mode, and Bandwidth parameter settings limit the number of T1/E1 circuits that can be carried by the radio. In these cases, certain fields on the T1/E1 Interface Configuration pages are not available, starting with the highest port number. For example, for a 4x T1/E1 radio version, if only three (3) circuits can be carried, port 4 is not available for configuration and is disabled. If only two circuits can be carried, both ports 3 and 4 are not available. Increasing the TDD frame size and Mode parameters, and/or increasing the Bandwidth parameter results in an increase in the supported number of T1/E1 circuits. For -16models, the highest number channels that are configurable (based on the currently installed license key) are disabled if they cannot be supported with the current settings. T1 Interface Configuration Page This page allows the administrator to enable/disable each individual T1 channel, set the Line Build Out (LBO), Line Code (either AMI or B8ZS), and AIS enabling/disabling for each input. If enabled, the radio places an AIS code on the output of the associated interface if and when the link fails or when there is no T1 signal available from the far end to provide the user at the local end. Loopback controls are also provided (see T1/E1 Loopback on page 71). 5000001 2007-06-25 69 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Figure 27 T1 Interface Configuration page (standard models) E1 Interface Configuration Page This page allows the administrator to enable/disable each individual E1 channel. The AIS can also be enabled and disabled for each input. If enabled, the radio places an AIS code on the output of the associated interface if and when the link fails or when there is no E1 signal available from the far end to provide the user at the local end. Loopback controls are also provided (see T1/E1 Loopback on page 71). 5000001 2007-06-25 70 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Figure 28 E1 Interface Configuration page (standard models) T1/E1 Loopback Loopback is provided for any enabled T1 or E1 port. As shown in Figure 29 and Figure 30, the choices are:
No Loopback (default) External (local) External (remote) Internal Note: Only one Internal loopback can be enabled at any time. All loopback configurations control the loop at the Line Interface integrated circuit, which is the device wired directly to the front panel ports. External loopback modes are used in conjunction with an external test source. The designation of local or remote refers to where the loopback is occurring relative to the location where the loopback is implemented. That is, on the radio being accessed, if External (remote) is selected, this loops the signal back at the remote radio interface back towards the local radio. Likewise, if External (local) is selected, the signal loops back at the local interface towards the remote radio (Figure 29 and Figure 30). 5000001 2007-06-25 71 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide LOCAL REMOTE IN OUT Figure 29 External (remote) loopback LOCAL REMOTE IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT Figure 30 External (local) loopback When a local T1/E1 port is configured for External (remote) loopback, it is the same as configuring the remote radio for External (local) loopback. Internal loopback uses an internal test source, and sends the test source signal across the link, looped at the remote radios interface, returned to the local radio, and looped at the local radios interface back to the source. The inputs at both ends are looped back at the line level. Figure 31 illustrates the internal loopback function. LOCAL REMOTE IN OUT IN OUT Figure 31 Internal loopback 5000001 2007-06-25 72 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide File Transfer Page This page allows the administrator to upload and download files to and from the radio. Two types of files can be uploaded: configuration and radio firmware. When uploading Configuration Files, current configuration parameters are immediately overwritten, and the unit automatically reboots. When uploading radio firmware files, the file is placed into reserve memory space. After the new radio firmware file uploads, use the File Activation page to enable the files (see File Activation Page on page 76). Up to three types of files can be downloaded: configuration, radio firmware, and MIB. The MIB file refers to the Management Information Base related to the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) function, and is only available on models which support SNMP. See Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) on page 77 for more information. Note: Check the File Activation page before uploading radio firmware files. New file uploads overwrite the secondary file location. If important files reside in the primary or secondary file location, download them before uploading the new files. Only the active radio firmware file can be downloaded. Therefore, to download the reserve file, it must first be activated (using the Swap button). See File Activation Page on page 76. Figure 32 File Transfer Page 5000001 2007-06-25 73 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Use the following steps to download a file 1. Select the type of file to download (configuration or radio firmware) 2. Click the DOWNLOAD button and wait for the radio to prepare the file for download. For the MIB file download, a second page/link appears (Figure 33). 3. Right-click the link on the page to download the file to a desired location. Figure 33 File Transfer pagedownload file link File download and upload is useful when configuring several radios with similar settings. A copy of the configuration file can also help restore radio settings. In addition, a copy of the Exalt default configuration file is helpful to restore the radio to factory settings. Note: Do not change the name of any downloaded file. The configuration file must be named config.nv. To keep track of multiple configuration files, use a folder naming system or temporarily rename the file, however, it must be named config.nv it can be uploaded to a radio. Never change radio firmware file names under any circumstances. If copying the same configuration file into multiple radios, take as some parameters will match and that may be undesirable. However, it may be easier to change just a subset of parameters rather than every parameter. 5000001 2007-06-25 74 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide The following parameters can cause problems or confusion if they match at each of a link:
Radio Name Endpoint Identifier IP Address IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway The following parameters can match at both ends of the link:
Link Name Link Security Key (although each link should be different) Admin and User passwords Bandwidth RF Frequency Link Distance TDD Frame Size T1/E1 configurations Ethernet configurations 5000001 2007-06-25 75 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide File Activation Page Use this page to move stored or uploaded files for use on the radio. The page indicates which file is currently in use, and which file is available for use. Click the Swap button to place the file in the Alternative File column into the active state and move the file in the Current File column to the Alternative File column. Figure 34 File Activation page Note: In all cases, the radio reboots after a new file is selected using the Swap function. This places the radio out of service for a short period. 5000001 2007-06-25 76 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Configuration Use SNMP to manage networked devices and execute the following functions:
GET: Obtain information from the device, such as a configuration setting or parameter. SET: Change a configuration setting on the device. TRAP: The device proactively informs the management station of a change of state, usually used for critical alarms or warnings. Note: Currently the SNMP implementation does not support TRAP functions. For critical alarms, use the GET command for specific alarm conditions. One feature of the SNMP implementation is that system configuration changes do not take effect using the SET command. Instead, groups of configuration settings can be preconfigured for global change, and a single Save (Commit) command implements all changes. When some parameters are changed, a link may drop and/or management control lost. MIB files allow many parameters to be set at once, allowing only a temporarily dropped link or management control issue. The opposite end radio can be quickly reconfigured, with little downtime for the link and management control. The save (Commit) command is similar to the Update button. Dropped links or management control issues do not occur with every parameter change. Many configuration changes do not impact traffic or management access. Exalt radios utilize SNMPv3, a high security version of SNMP, to ensure secure access to and storing of management data. The SNMPv3 security string matches the admin and user passwords. Passwords must be eight characters or longer. Note: Currently not all EX-series radios implement SNMP. Check the software release notes to verify that the function is available. Generally, the radio supports SNMP when MIB files are listed on the File Activation Page. The SNMP MIBs are organized similar to the GUI. Become familiar with the GUI before using the SNMP function. 5000001 2007-06-25 77 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Alarms Page This page provides an easy-to-read summary of the alarm status of both local and remote radios. The colors on this page reflect the color of the alarms displayed on the radio front panel. However, additional detail displays on this page to aid in quick assessment of issues and status. Figure 35 Alarms page (standard models) See Table 3 for more information on the front panel LEDs. This page displays additional information about the alarm status. The Internal Fan alarm monitors all three internal fans. The radio only requires that one fan be operational for full-specification performance. The additional fans are provided for redundancy and to increase overall reliability. If one or two fan alarms are yellow or red, it is prudent to plan to install a spare radio at the earliest opportunity and return the radio for repair (RMA authorization required). If all three fans are in alarm, the radio must be taken out of service immediately, as damage may occur to the internal electronics, especially in hotter environments or where thermal exchange from neighboring equipment exists. 5000001 2007-06-25 78 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide The Temperature alarm monitors the internal temperature of the unit based on specific points inside the radio chassis. It is normal for the internal temperature to be above the ambient temperature, so the temperature reading may be higher than the highest specified ambient temperature. When the internal electronics reach a point that is higher than the normal temperature rise at the highest ambient temperature, the temperature alarm turns yellow. Power down the radio as soon as possible, and investigate the cause of the temperature rise before the radio is put back into service. In almost all cases, a temperature alarm is due to an external cause, unless the fans in the unit are also in alarm, in which case, the fans are the likely cause. 5000001 2007-06-25 79 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Performance Page This page provides statistical information about the performance of the system in relation to the integrity of the user data and the RF link. Figure 36 Performance page The Current BER field indicates the current bit error rate of the link. If the link is operating perfectly, this should indicate zero. Generally, the link should remain at a BER less than 1x10-6 (1 bit out of every million bits errored). This is the threshold performance specification and the standard to which the link was engineered. However, radio links can and are affected by weather, interference, and other external sources and will occasionally have a higher error rate. A link remains operational unless the BER exceeds 1x10-3 (1 bit out of every hundred bits errored). Consult the link design engineer for an understanding of the predicted error rate of the radio link as it has been designed. Many applications are unaffected by bit errors, but TDM circuits (for example, T1 or E1) are more sensitive. Also, if the link operator is providing a service guarantee, this value may need to be monitored or examined in cases of service issues. The behavior of BER in relation to other alarms or measurements and external events can be very helpful in troubleshooting activities. 5000001 2007-06-25 80 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Current RSL is the measurement of the received signal level at the radio antenna port. This is the measured level of the RF signal coming from the opposite end of the radio link. The link was engineered to a specific RSL by the link design engineer, and this RSL should be obtained during installation and remain relatively stable during the operation of the link. RSL can and will vary as a result of weather changes and other external sources, such as path obstructions. Once again, this variation was part of the original design to achieve a certain level of performance over time. Bit errors occur when the RSL falls to a level within roughly 3dB of the threshold specification. When the RSL falls below the threshold specification, the link disconnects and will not reconnect until the RSL is above the threshold specification. The behavior of RSL in relation to other alarms or measurements and external events can be very helpful in troubleshooting activities. Errored Seconds (ES) indicates the total number of seconds that occurred where there was at least one bit error since the last time that the radio statistics counter was reset. Generally, ES are not a significant concern, so long as they are not continuous or above the anticipated performance based on the original link engineering goals. If ES are continuous or at a high rate, this is normally an indication of poor link performance due to poor RSL or interference, or severe impact by weather or other environmental factors. However, similar to the performance factors previously listed, ES can and will occur in any radio link. Once again, consult the link engineer to determine the original design goals, and compare actual performance to these expectations to determine if any improvements are necessary or if other problems may be causing excessive ES. Note: Unavailable Seconds do not register as ES. In other words, the ES counter counts all seconds that are errored NOT INCLUDING the seconds that were classified as unavailable. The total number of seconds with errors or outages is the sum of ES and Unavailable Seconds. Unavailable Seconds (also called UAS) are similar to ES, but this counter keeps track of every second where the bit error rate equals or exceeds 1x10-3, as well as any seconds where there is a complete loss of radio communication, over the period since the last counter reset. If Unavailable Seconds are continuous or at a high rate, this is normally an indication of poor link performance due to poor RSL or interference, or severe impact by weather or other environmental factors. However, similar to the performance factors listed above, Unavailable Seconds can and do occur in any radio link. Consult the link engineer to determine the original design goals, and compare actual performance to these expectations to determine if any improvements are necessary or if other problems may be causing excessive Unavailable Seconds. Minimum RSL indicates the worst (lowest) received signal level that occurred since the last counter reset. It is helpful to know if the RSL dropped significantly from the normal level, or has reached a level near or below threshold. Minimum RSL Timestamp indicates the date and time when the Minimum RSL occurred. This is helpful for general troubleshooting, and especially comparing to items in the event log or diagnostic charts from the same time period. 5000001 2007-06-25 81 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Maximum RSL indicates the best (highest) RSL that occurred since the last counter reset. This indicates the best performance of the radio link, which is normally equal to the installed value, and is usually the designed value. Time Since Reset indicates the amount of time passed since the last counter reset. This helps to quantify the seriousness of other statistics, such as ES and Unavailable Seconds, if there have been high numbers of ES and/or Unavailable Seconds over a relatively short period of time. Each end of the link statistics on this page can be independently reset using the Reset Statistics button for the local or remote radio. It is good practice to reset the statistics at the time that the link is commissioned (after all antenna alignment is complete and stable RSL at designed levels is achieved, and no more system reboots are anticipated). Make a habit of viewing this page regularly, make records of the performance, and reset the statistics so that the counters can more precisely pinpoint issues. Note: Resetting statistics from one end also resets the statistics for the same radio at the opposite end. That is, if the Local statistics are reset, logging into the remote end shows the Remote statistics on that end
(which is the local radio in the first condition) as being reset at the same time. 5000001 2007-06-25 82 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Event Log Page Use this page to review a list of the events logged by the radio. The following items are listed in the event log:
Alarms Alarms clearing (Normal) Radio Reboots Figure 37 Event Log page 5000001 2007-06-25 83 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Every event is tagged with the time that the event occurred, and a severity and type. The event log also allows filtering to limit the view of the log to the lowest level of desired information. For example, a filter level of Minor displays Minor, Major, and Critical severity events. The log contains the last 200 events. Events are deleted on a FIFO basis, erasing the oldest entries to make room for the newest entries. The event log can be cleared and be downloaded from the radio (some models may require a software upgrade to enable this feature). A screen capture of the browser window can serve as a useful record. 5000001 2007-06-25 84 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Diagnostic Charts Page Use this page as an aid in troubleshooting. This page illustrates the historical (and current) performance for three parameters: RSL, Radio Temperature, and BER. The horizontal scale illustrates 120 points of time measurement and is synchronized on all three graphs. The scale displays in minutes, hours, or days from the last two hours
(120 minutes), five days (120 hours), or four months (120 days). All information is stored, so all of these periods are available for short- and long-term performance analysis. The right side of a graph represents the most recent measurement, and data marches from the right-to-left at every interval. The vertical scale of each chart independently scales to show the maximum resolution based on the maximum variation of the data over the selected time measurement. 5000001 2007-06-25 85 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Figure 38 Diagnostic Charts page Use the cursor to point to any spot on any of the three charts, and all three charts illustrate the measurements taken for that time interval in the upper-left corner of each chart. The time interval is indicated by T=(value). This is followed by the value of the measurement, listing the highest value, lowest value and average value measured over that time interval. For example, in Figure 38 the displayed time interval is hours, and the cursor is held at the T=13 mark on the horizontal axis. The measurements shown indicate performance from 13 hours ago. The high/low/average values shown on each chart are measurements made across that specific one-hour interval. 5000001 2007-06-25 86 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Changes in RSL often have an impact on BER, and this can be confirmed by looking for synchronized events. When BER events occur without corresponding changes in RSL, this normally indicates interference, atmospheric changes, transmission system issues
(such as problems with cables, connectors or antennas), or possibly radio hardware problems. It is also useful to help determine if changes in radio temperature are occurring, and if they are having any impact on RSL or BER. If the radio is mounted in an environmentally controlled location, this has less relevance. However, temperature monitoring can be helpful to ensure that the radio is operating within specifications. Spectrum Analyzer Page This page is not currently available. A built-in spectrum analyzer will be available in future releases, and documented. 5000001 2007-06-25 87 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Reboot Page Use this page to reboot the radio. The function may never be required, but can be used in emergencies. All configurations that require a reboot automatically reboot on administrator confirmation. Figure 39 Reboot page 5000001 2007-06-25 88 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Manual Page The manual (this document or the version that matches the installed firmware) is available within the GUI. Adobe Acrobat Reader 5.5 or higher is required (go to www.adobe.com to download Acrobat Reader). Click the Manual link and the manual displays within the browser window. Once the manual displays, click the save button on the PDF toolbar to download the manual locally. Figure 40 Manual page 5000001 2007-06-25 89 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Troubleshooting This section provides information regarding troubleshooting of common issues and alarms on these radios. Exalt Digital Microwave Radio systems are designed by Exalts expert engineers with extensive experience through multiple generations of microwave radio design. These new-generation systems contain extensive diagnostic tools, alarm indications, and troubleshooting aids. And, as compared to other systems in their class, are easier to install, maintain, and troubleshoot. The GUI provides information to aid in troubleshooting (see Diagnostic Charts Page on page 85). Contact Exalt Customer Care for further assistance with issues with your Exalt radio and with suggestions on how the radio and documentation can be improved. General Practices Troubleshooting a microwave radio link can be a complex task. Approach troubleshooting as a process of elimination, and first determine which portions of the system are operating properly. In a vast majority of cases, failures or poor performance of microwave links is attributed to something other than the microwave radio hardware. In this respect, the back-to-back bench test (see Back-to-back Bench Testing on page 104) is very important to determine if radio hardware is operating properly and eliminate many variables in the troubleshooting process. If a back-to-back bench test fails, then the radio hardware is either broken or the radios are improperly configured. Upgrade the radio to the most current release of firmware, and/or reset the radio to its critical factory settings, following the quick start guide instructions and those in Configuration and Management, helps to confirm if configuration issues cause failure. The most common issues with microwave radio links are:
An improperly terminated RF cable Multipath propagation RF interference Path obstruction Misaligned antenna Faulty antenna Moisture in the transmission system (antenna feed and/or RF cable) Improper grounding Insufficient link margin in the design/implementation 5000001 2007-06-25 90 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide If the radio link has been operating without issues and is exhibiting new poor performance behavior or becomes completely inoperative, the troubleshooting process should pay close attention to any conditions that may have changed between the time when the system was working without issue and the time when the issues started. Also, it can be helpful to compare some performance parameters of the system before and after the presence of issues. Often the source of the issues can be determined by thoughtful consideration of changes, such as:
Changes in weather, including high winds Changes made to the radio equipment, transmission system, or connected equipment New radio systems or electronic equipment the nearby radio or transmission system New construction nearby either end of the link, or along the path Tree growth, flooded fields, or changes in rivers/lakes along the path Verify that configurations are set as follows:
RF matches at each end of the link Bandwidth matches at each end of the link Link distance matches at each end of the link TDD Frame Length matches at each end of the link Endpoint Identifier is different at each end of the link (one end Radio A, one end Radio B) Ethernet interfaces are enabled, as desired AUX Ethernet is set for in-band or out-of-band NMS, as desired T1/E1 enabling matches at each end of the link Link security key matches at each end of the link Also, use the ExaltCalc tool in the design phase to determine the optimum setting for the Bandwidth and TDD Frame Length parameters for the given link distance, and provides guidance to the expected RF link performance, as well as throughput, latency, and number of supported T1/E1 circuits. Typical Indications of Issues In many cases, microwave radio users do not notice changes or degradation to the radio system until the radio system fails completely or becomes highly errored or significantly intermittent. However, regular management of the radio system can help indicate changes in performance that have not yet impacted user performance, but may impact performance at a later date if left unchecked or unaddressed. The administrator can use this as an opportunity to be proactive and monitor the radio link performance regularly, watching for unexplained or unexpected changes in performance and trends in performance changes. 5000001 2007-06-25 91 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Most importantly, monitoring radio system RSL over time indicates the performance of the radio system. Address any long-term drop in RSL and erratic or unsteady RSL. Some RSL changes are expected and weather patterns and the related multipath can cause dramatic RSL changes resulting in system outage. However, that outage should not occur at a significantly greater rate than the designed long-term performance. Consult the path design engineer for more information about link reliability expectations and anticipated RSL deviation. In addition, regular inspection of the transmission system (RF cables and antennas) and paying close attention to changes along the path, such as construction or tree height, or new microwave radio installations nearby, can be extremely helpful and proactive. When link performance is very poor, alarms on the radio front panel and within the radios management system indicates particular failures. Consult this manual for more information on the specific alarms and diagnostics, or contact Exalt Customer Care for assistance. Exalt Customer Care is primarily motivated to determine if the radio hardware is faulty and require return for repair, and to help execute an effective and efficient repair and return process for radio terminals believed to be faulty. However, Exalt Customer Care provides advice regarding the total radio system and RF path engineering and environment, and advises on troubleshooting. End users should first contact the installer and/or designer of the system. In many cases, an in-depth understanding of RF design is required, and on-site analysis and special test equipment, may be necessary. Compared to phone support from Exalt Customer Care, troubleshooting is much more expeditious if the professional installer and/or link designer examines the system and reviews the management information in the GUI. In turn, if the professional installer and/or link designer contacts Exalt Customer Care, the process to rectify the system is much more expedient due to the in-depth knowledge related to the implementation and the RF environment. Improper RF Cable Termination Improper RF cable termination is a very common problem. In many cases, this is a problem that occurs during installation and is not a problem that suddenly appears. However, if cables are moved or flexed, especially near the termination points, and radio errors, changes in RSL, or other performance issues occur, this is a certain sign of this issue. Another relatively easy method to test for this condition is to decrease the output power of the radio system (at each end, one end at a time). A poor RF cable termination may be reflecting too much RF energy back into the radio system, and reducing output power reduces the reflected energy at a faster rate than the transmitted energy towards the far end. Be careful not to reduce the output power to the point where the radios threshold is reached. Typically, a reduction of just 3 to 6dB is enough to determine if this is the issue. If the reduction of output power clears the error condition, this is the likely cause. 5000001 2007-06-25 92 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Use a reflectometer or meter that can read VSWR at the operating frequency to identify poor terminations as well as poor antenna feeds. Note: The Praxsym VSWR meter is an excellent tool for this purpose Multipath Propagation Multipath propagation is a term that encompasses changes to the RF path, such as reflections and/or refraction, causing partial or complete destruction of the radio signal, and thus excessive bit errors and/or system outages. Rapid changes in temperature, inversion layers, humidity, air pressure, water evaporation, as well as standing water or moisture on objects along the path are all examples of changes that can cause multipath propagation. New building construction near either end of the path or along the path can cause new reflection characteristics. If your system has been operating without issue and is suddenly experiencing issues that are symptomatic of a certain time of day or related to change in climatic events or some of the external factors listed above, this is likely the cause. Consult a professional RF path engineer in these cases. Often, minor repositioning of the antennas at either or both ends can reduce or eliminate these problems. RF Interference RF interference is usually indicative of another radio system nearby either end of your radio system or aimed towards one or both ends of your radio system usually at or near the same frequency and usually a signal level similar to the level of the signal of your radio system. Other forms of RF interference also exist, such as electronic equipment placed close to the radio chassis or transmitters that couple onto the cabling or grounding system of the radio. Microwave ovens and wireless communication devices used near the equipment or cabling are examples of electronic equipment interference. Note: The EX-2.4i and EX-5i operate in license-exempt bands. Microwave ovens, wireless Internet devices and cordless phone technology may also use this frequency band. It may be necessary to separate the radio chassis, cabling system and antenna from these devices. RF interference, like most other causes of problems, is indicated by significant bit errors and/or system outages. One means to determine presence of interference is the use of a spectrum analyzer that covers the same range as the radio system. A professional RF engineer can use a spectrum analyzer to locate sources of interference, measure these sources, and determine potential remedies to take to operate in the presence of interference. If a spectrum analyzer is not available, the radios RSL port can help determine RSL levels of interfering signals. By turning the far-end radio off, the residual RSL measured 5000001 2007-06-25 93 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide by the radio indicates the level of interference seen by the radio. It is possible that interference levels below that which can be measured still have an impact on the radio system especially if the radio system has low fade margin or is using a high order modulation. The EX-2.4i and EX-5i families provide considerable flexibility to tune to different frequencies across the bands within which they operate. This is the easiest method to use to try to avoid existing interference. In addition, the occupied bandwidth of the radio can be reduced. This, along with re-tuning, can be very effective, however throughput is reduced. Repositioning the antenna and/or changing polarization, or upgrading the antenna to a higher gain, and/or using a high-performance antenna, are all secondary means that can be used. It may be necessary to perform combinations of both radio changes (retuning, occupied bandwidth reduction) and antenna system changes (position, polarization, upgrade). The EX-4.9i radio operates under licensed regulations. If interference is suspected, the local frequency coordination organization, or other users of the spectrum should be consulted before re-tuning the radio to a different frequency channel. Path Obstruction A path obstruction is defined as an object, such as a building or tree, impeding the proper path of the radio system. If the system design was proper at the time of installation and issues arise at a later date, an updated path profile and survey may be necessary to identify changes in path clearance. Misaligned Antenna At the time of initial installation, it is critical that the antennas at each end are properly aligned and that the designed RSL is achieved. However, antennas may become misaligned due to high winds, changes in the guy-wiring systems keeping the antenna mast stable, or loosening of the antenna mounting hardware. A reduction in the RSL of the link is symptomatic of this condition, but this condition is not the only condition that results in a reduction of RSL. However, if conditions occur where the antenna alignment may be suspected, the mechanics must be inspected and the antennas realigned. Faulty Antenna A faulty antenna is rare, but is still a possibility. In some cases, the mechanics of the antenna feed can get moisture inside, or a bad or weak connection in the pin and connector structure of the antenna may occur. A VSWR measurement of the antenna connection can be made to verify this condition. 5000001 2007-06-25 94 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Improper Grounding In addition to being a potential human safety issue, improper system grounding is a somewhat common condition that can cause continuous bit errors or bit errors when metal objects come in contact with the radio, transmission system, or racking system. If touching the radio causes errors, grounding is the cause. It can be difficult to identify grounding problems, but a professional electrician can normally inspect a system and identify if there are deficiencies in the grounding system. Insufficient Link Margin Ideally, the link was designed with enough link margin (fade margin) to allow for multipath propagation and atmospheric fading and still remain reliable. In some cases, link margin is compromised by economic factors, such as using low-cost RF cabling or lower-cost antennas that have less gain or deficient performance compared to higher cost transmission system components. In some cases, there may be antenna size restrictions that forced the design to not have the desired amount of link margin. If the link was designed with poor link margin, there are likely many cases of bit errors and outages. The antenna system and transmission line can be upgraded to help reduce this. If the link design was installed with sufficient margin, but RSL is reduced, the remaining link margin may no longer be enough to maintain a reliable link. The causes of RSL reduction were previously described, but are usually due to new path obstruction(s) or antenna misalignment due to wind or mechanical factors. The antenna height or location can be changed to overcome new obstructions. Realignment of the antenna, and/or improvement to mechanical structures can help overcome antenna misalignment. Moisture in the Transmission System If the connectors on cables and antennas and egress junctions are not properly weatherproofed, moisture can get into the transmission system and cause significant error conditions and erratic performance. In many cases, the transmission system must be replaced. A VSWR meter is one means to identify such issues. Physical inspection can be helpful, and if changes to the weatherproofing occur (such as cracks), the weatherproofing must be replaced before it leaks. 5000001 2007-06-25 95 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Specifications This section presents specifications for the i-Series of Digital Microwave Radios. Physical Specifications Physical Configuration Dimensions (HxWxD), (std models) Dimensions (HxWxD), (-16 models) Weight (std models) Weight (-16 models) Operating Temperature Altitude Humidity Safety EMC Single-piece Indoor Unit (IDU) 1RU: 1.75" x 17" x 14"/ 4.5 x 43.2 x 35.6 cm 1.5RU: 2.63" x 17" x 14"/ 6.7 x 43.2 x 35.6 cm 11.3 lbs/5.1 kg 12 lbs/5.5kg
-13 +149F /-25 to +65C 15,000'/4.6 km 95% non-condensing EN 60950-1, IEC 60950-1 EN 301 489-17 (EX-5i and EX-2.4i series), FCC Part 15, IC Part 15 Common System Specifications Tuning Resolution Power Control Resolution Selectable Modulation Modes Selectable Frame Lengths (ms) 1MHz (5MHz for EX-4.9i) 0.5dB Mode 1 (QPSK); Mode 2 (16QAM) 0.5, 1, 2, 2.5, 4, 5 Maximum Aggregate User Capacity Error Floor Frequency Stability Link Security Mbps Mode 1 Mode 2 8 / 10 MHz 16 / 20 MHz*
64MHz*
13 27 110 27 54 216 10-12
+7 ppm 96-bit Security Code 5000001 2007-06-25 96 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide
*Not all Bandwidth and Mode combinations are available on all radio models, and some may require specific software license keys, which may be purchased from an authorized Exalt representative. EX-2.4i System Specifications Frequency Band Tunable Range Output Power (at full power) Output Power (at minimum power) +7dBm Selectable Channel Bandwidths 2400 to 2483.5MHz 2406 to 2468MHz
+27dBm (0.5W), Mode 1
+24dBm (0.25W), Mode 2 8MHz, 16MHz, 32MHz, 64MHz*
Receiver Threshold (BER=10-6) Maximum RSL Non-overlapping channels Regulatory Compliance FCC ID IC ID dBm 8MHz 16MHz 32MHz 64MHz*
Mode 1 Mode 2
-88
-85
-82
-79
-80
-77
-74
-71 Mode 1: -25dBm error-free; 0dBm no damage 8MHz: 8; 16MHz: 4; 32MHz: 2; 64*: 1 FCC 15.247; IC RSS-210, EN 300 328 TTM-102P40I 6254A-102P40I dBm 8MHz Mode 1 Mode 2 9M9W7D 10M2W7D Emission Designator(s)
* For the EX-2.4i, a firmware option is required to enable 64MHz BW. For the EX-2.4i-
16, 64MHz BW is enabled when the 16xT1/E1 license key is enabled. 60M7W7D 61M3W7D 19M0W7D 36M0W7D 17M3W7D 34M7W7D 64MHz*
16MHz 32MHz 5000001 2007-06-25 97 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide EX-4.9i System Specifications Frequency Band Tunable Range Output Power (at full power, Mode 1) Output Power (at minimum power) Selectable Channel Bandwidths 4940 to 4990 MHz 4945 to 4985 MHz
+24dBm (20MHz BW)
+22dBm (10MHz BW)
+4dBm 10MHz, 20MHz Receiver Threshold (BER=10-6) Maximum RSL damage Non-overlapping channels Regulatory Compliance FCC ID IC ID dBm 10MHz 20MHz Mode 1 Mode 2
-86
-83
-78
-75*
Mode 1: -25dBm error-free; 0dBm no 10MHz: 5; 20MHz: 2 FCC Part 90; IC RSS-111 TTM-104P90I 6254A-104P90I 10MHz Emission Designator(s)
*For the EX-4.9i, firmware options are required to enable Mode 2/20MHz BW. 10M9W7D 21M8W7D 20MHz 5000001 2007-06-25 98 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide EX-5i System Specifications, 5.3 GHz Band Frequency Band Tunable Range Output Power (at full power) Output Power (at minimum power) -7dBm Selectable Channel Bandwidths 5250 to 5350 MHz 5260 to 5332 MHz
+13dBm (0.02W) 8MHz, 16MHz, 32MHz, 64MHz*
Receiver Threshold (BER=10-6) Maximum RSL Non-overlapping channels Regulatory Compliance Contains FCC ID IC ID dBm 8MHz 16MHz 32MHz 64MHz*
Mode 1 Mode 2
-86
-83
-80
-77
-78
-75
-72
-69 Mode 1: -25dBm error-free; 0dBm no damage 8MHz: 10; 16MHz: 5; 32MHz: 2; 64MHz*: 1 FCC 15.407; IC RSS-210; EN 301 893 TTM-105P25M 6254A-105P25I 8MHz 16MHz 8M7W7D Emission Designator(s)
*For the EX-5i, a firmware option is required to enable 64MHz BW. For the EX-5i-16, 64MHz BW is enabled when the 16xT1/E1 license key is enabled. 67M9W7D 17M2W7D 34M5W7D 64MHz*
32MHz 5000001 2007-06-25 99 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide EX-5i System Specifications, 5.4 GHz Band Frequency Band Tunable Range Output Power (at full power) Output Power (at minimum power) -7dBm Selectable Channel Bandwidths 5470 to 5725 MHz 5488 to 5715 MHz
+13dBm (0.02W) 8MHz, 16MHz, 32MHz*, 64MHz*
Receiver Threshold (BER=10-6) Maximum RSL Non-overlapping channels Regulatory Compliance Contains FCC ID IC ID dBm Mode 1 Mode 2 8MHz 16MHz 32MHz 64MHz*
-86
-83
-80
-77
-78
-75
-72
-69 Mode 1: -25dBm error-free; 0dBm no damage 8MHz: 29; 16MHz: 14; 32MHz: 7; 64MHz*: 3 FCC 15.407; IC RSS-210; EN 301 893 TTM-105P25M 6254A-105P25I 8MHz Emission Designator(s)
* For the EX-5i, a firmware option is required to enable 64MHz BW. For the EX-5i-16, 64MHz BW is enabled when the 16xT1/E1 license key is enabled. 67M9W7D 17M2W7D 34M5W7D 8M7W7D 64MHz*
16MHz 32MHz 5000001 2007-06-25 100 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide EX-5i System Specifications, 5.8 GHz Band Frequency Band Tunable Range Output Power (at full power) Output Power (at minimum power) +4dBm Selectable Channel Bandwidths 5725 to 5850 MHz 5731 to 5844 MHz
+24dBm (0.25W), Mode 1
+21dBm (0.13W), Mode 2 8MHz, 16MHz, 32MHz*, 64MHz*
Receiver Threshold (BER=10-6) Maximum RSL Non-overlapping channels Regulatory Compliance Contains FCC ID IC ID
(dBm) 8MHz 16MHz 32MHz 64MHz*
Mode 1 Mode 2
-86
-83
-80
-77
-78
-75
-72
-69 Mode 1: -25dBm error-free; 0dBm no damage 8MHz: 15; 16MHz: 7; 32MHz: 3; 64MHz*: 1 FCC 15.247; IC RSS-210; EN 302 502 TTM-105P25M 6254A-105P25I 8MHz 9M1W7D Emission Designator(s)
* For the EX-5i, a firmware option is required to enable 64MHz BW. For the EX-5i-16, 64MHz BW is enabled when the 16xT1/E1 license key is enabled. 61M6W7D 16M5W7D 31M8W7D 64MHz*
16MHz 32MHz 5000001 2007-06-25 101 Interfaces RF Connector Impedance T1/E1 (x4 or x16) Connector T1 Impedance T1 Line Codes T1 LBO Settings (in ft.) T1 Clocking Speed T1 Compliance E1 Impedance E1 Line Codes E1 Clocking Speed E1 Compliance Ethernet (x2) Connectors Interface Speed Duplex Compliance Console (Serial) Connector Interface Speed Compliance Alarm Connector Inputs Outputs Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide N-type female 50 Ohms RJ-45 (RJ48C), female 100 Ohms, balanced AMI, B8ZS, selectable 0-133, 133-266, 266-399, 399-533, 533-655 1.544 Mbps ANSI T1.102-1987; ITU-T; G.823; GR-49T-CORE 120 Ohms, balanced HDB3 2.048 Mbps CEPT-1; G.703; ITU-T-G703 RJ-45, female, auto-MDIX 10 or 100 Mbps Half, full, auto, selectable 802.3 9-pin sub-D, female 9600 bps EIA-574 DTE (RS-232) 9-pin sub-D, female
(2) TTL/Closure
(2) Relay (Form C) 5000001 2007-06-25 102 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Sync (In and Out) Connector Signal Power Connector Input Voltage (standard models) Consumption (standard models) Input Voltage (-16 models) Consumption (-16 models) RJ45, female 1 pps (GPS) 6-pin barrier strip 2060VDC
<38.5W (0.8A @ 48V; 1.6A @ 24V) 2060VDC
< 45W (0.9A @ 48V; 1.8A @ 24V) 5000001 2007-06-25 103 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Back-to-back Bench Testing Use back-to-back bench testing to test the radio before installation, pre-configure the radio and connected equipment before installation, or in the troubleshooting process to identify if the radio hardware is the source of a system issue. It is a critical process, and often required or highly desirable for any installation or troubleshooting exercise. This section describes how to properly configure the radio hardware and accessories for a proper back-to-back bench test. For radio testing, there are two types of back-to-back configurations:
1. Basic test (test general operation) 2. Specification performance verification Basic Test The basic test is a simple test of radio functionality. It verifies that the radios are properly configured to communicate to one another, and verifies general radio performance as operational. For the basic test, the following items are needed:
Radio pair Powering source RF interconnect cable(s) (any length short is best) Fixed or variable attenuation, between 60 and 90dB (note: attenuation for basic test does not to be calibrated or precise) Computer/terminal with either serial or Ethernet port (helpful, but not necessary)
If no computer is available, use the temporary hardware configuration key or DIP switch, depending on radio model (see Radio A/B Configuration on page 27) Connect the items as follows:
1. Connect attenuation and (known-good) RF cable(s) between radio pair, shown in Figure 41. 2. Configure one radio as Radio A; the other as Radio B 3. Power on radio pair 5000001 2007-06-25 104 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide RF PORTS RADIO B ATTENUATION
(60-90DB) RADIO A CONSOLE PORT SERIAL PORT POWER
(CONNECT LAST) POWER
(CONNECT LAST) COMPUTER Figure 41 Basic back-to-back bench test configuration After connecting and powering on, observe the front panel LEDs to verify that the LINK and STATUS LEDs are green. If so, the radios are communicating and all radio-related alarm conditions are normal. It can be beneficial to have a computer to verify configuration in case of red LEDs or to pre-configure the radio as desired for operation. Follow the instructions in Configuration and Management. Specification Performance Verification The specification performance verification is a more detailed test that allows you to verify that the radios output power and threshold specifications are being met. This is typically a test that would only be performed in a troubleshooting scenario, but can be performed before installation to provide a detailed record or ensure radio performance before installation. This test is identical to the basic test, but in place of the fixed attenuation, it requires the use of calibrated variable attenuation, or a set of calibrated fixed attenuators, or a combination of both, adding to a total attenuation value of 120dB, as measured at the operating frequency of the radio. In addition, a volt meter or computer is also required. Connect the system as shown in Figure 41, using the combination of fixed and variable attenuation between the radios RF ports. Connect the volt meter to either radios RSL test point and associated reference ground connection. In this test, it is desirable to use pre-tested RF cables, known to be good, and the insertion loss is known at the operating frequency. If the cables are short (6'/2m or less), you can estimate the loss, including connectors, to be less than 1dB each. The estimate of cable loss is critical to the overall confidence of the measurements made in this test. There are two critical specifications that can be tested in this configuration:
1. RF output power 2. Radio receiver threshold To measure transmitter output power, simply insert any value of attenuation between the radios between 60 and 90dB. Ensure that both RF output power settings are at maximum. 5000001 2007-06-25 105 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Use the volt meter to measure RSL in both directions. The RSL measured value should match the appropriate value according to the inserted attenuation, such as:
RSL = RF Output Power cabling losses total attenuation Verify output power by adjusting output power using the Exalt GUI (in administration mode) and evaluate the corresponding change to the RSL measurement. For threshold testing, the key is to insert a measured amount of loss that is close to, but not exceeding the radios specified system gain. System gain is the difference between RF output power and receiver threshold. At your selected modulation and bandwidth settings, determine the specified threshold performance, and choose a value of attenuation (including cable losses) that adds to roughly 5 to 15dB less than the system gain. For example, for the EX-2.4i, if the threshold for your measurement is -85dBm, the output power is +27dBm, so the system gain is 112dB. Choose a value of total attenuation in the range of roughly 100105dB. Once this attenuation is inserted, verify RSL readings as in the first step, and then, using the GUI, reduce radio output power in 1dB steps until the receiving radio (the one whose output power not being adjusted) Link LED turns from green to yellow. This indicates that threshold has been reached. At this point, verify the equation for system gain using the new output power level setting and verify that the threshold performance is meeting or exceeding the published specification. Note: Due to the variation of measurements and accuracies involved in this test, you may read a measurement that is 1dB to as much as 2dB off of the expected value. It should be of no concern unless the value is more than 3dB worse than expected. Once threshold is verified in this direction, repeat the process in the opposite direction by adjusting RF output power of the radio at the opposite end. Return the first radio to its original power setting before adjusting the second radio. Perform threshold measurement tests for all combinations of bandwidth and mode
(modulation) being usedespecially when troubleshooting. It should not be necessary to vary center frequency, as this does not have any appreciable impact on system gain performance, however, try any setting combination to gain confidence in the radio performance parameters. 5000001 2007-06-25 106 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide DC Coupler for Antenna Alignment One challenge associated with an all-indoor radio construction is the alignment of the antennas. It can sometimes be challenging to place the radio near the antenna alignment personnel, and can also be challenging to run a separate set of wires for the voltmeter to be in view of the alignment personnel. If any of the conventional methods mentioned in the manual are difficult to achieve, one of the simplest methods to use is to employ the use of a DC coupling system as a temporary test configuration exclusively for the purpose of aligning the antennas. This type of system simply couples the DC voltage associated with RSL measurement at the radio location, over the RF transmission line, up to the antenna port. Warning: Remove all DC-blocked lightning arrestors in the transmission system prior to applying the DC coupler system. Failure to do so can result in electric shock and/or damage to the lightning arrestors and/or other equipment. Required Items The following items are needed for the DC coupling system, per radio end (double the quantities of these items for a complete link for simultaneous use at both ends):
2ea DC couplers: mini-circuits ZNBT-60-1W 1ea BNC male-male extension cable: Pomona 2249 1ea BNC female-to-mini Bantam (stackable Pin-tip plugs): Pomona 3221 1ea BNC female-to-banana male: Pomona 5268*
1ea digital volt meter
*This type of plug is typical for most professional hand-held digital volt meters (DVMs). However, verify that your DVM can accept this type of Bantam connector. If not, a different part number or adapter may be required to connect to the DVM. Interconnections Connect the items as shown in Figure 42. For the coupler installation, ensure that the DC side of the coupler is facing away from the radio and away from the antenna towards the RF transmission line system. Using the BNC adapters and cables, attach the radio end DC coupler to the RSL port on the radio, and the antenna end DC coupler to the DVM that the antenna alignment personnel will use. The DC voltage from the RSL port is now coupled to the transmission line system between the radio and the antenna, and is available at the antenna location. This allows the antenna alignment personnel to view the DVM output directly while adjusting the antenna. 5000001 2007-06-25 107 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide COUPLER
(DC SIDE TOWARD RADIO) ANTENNA PRIMARY TRANSMISSION LINE DVM JUMPER CABLE OR ADAPTER (IN PLACE OF LIGHTNING ARRESTOR) STRUCTURE PENETRATION SECONDARY TRANSMISSION LINE COUPLER
(DC SIDE TOWARD ANTENNA) RADIO TO RSL PORT POWER/DATA/INTERFACES Figure 42 DC coupler interconnection Note: After completing antenna alignment, remove the DC couplers and associated wiring at both radio and antenna ends. 5000001 2007-06-25 108 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Interface Connections This section provides the pin number assignment and wiring information for the connectors on the i-Series radios. All connectors are shown as viewed from the radio front panel. T1/E1 Connections There are two orientations of T1/E1 connections. Depending on model, some channels have the securing tab towards the top of the connector, and others have the securing tab towards the bottom of the connector. Figure 43 illustrates the pin orientation and functionality of these connectors. 1 Figure 43 8 8 1 T1/E1 connectors Pin Function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Tip Out (from radio) Ring Out (from radio) Ground Tip In (to radio) Ring In (to radio) Ground Unused Unused 5000001 2007-06-25 109 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Ethernet Connections There are two orientations of Ethernet connections. AUX has the securing tab towards the top of the connector while MAIN has the securing tab towards the bottom of the connector. Figure 44 illustrates the pin orientation and functionality of these connectors. 1 Figure 44 Pin Function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Paired with Pin 2 Paired with Pin 1 Paired with Pin 6 Unused Unused Paired with Pin 3 Unused Unused 8 8 1 Ethernet connectors (MAIN and AUX) The Ethernet connections implement Auto-MDIX, and therefore either straight or crossover Ethernet cables can be used, independent of the wiring of the connected device. Depending on the settings of in-band or out-of-band NMS, both the MAIN and AUX ports can access the far-end radio (if in-band) or not (out-of-band). In the case of out-of-
band setting, only the AUX port can access the GUI, while only the MAIN port carries Ethernet traffic across the link. 5000001 2007-06-25 110 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Sync Connections There are two sync connectors: Sync In and Sync Out. The Sync In connector is normally connected to a (custom) GPS antenna system, or to the Sync Out connector of a collocated radio. Figure 45 Figure 46 1 8 Pin Function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+5V Power Out (to GPS antenna) Ground Tx Data (to GPS antenna) Enable (to GPS antenna) Rx Data (from GPS antenna) 1 pps Timing Signal (from GPS antenna) Unused Unused Sync In connector 8 1 Sync Out connector Pin Function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
+5V Power In (from connected radio) Ground Tx Data (to connected radio) Unused Rx Data (from connected radio) 1 pps Timing Signal (to connected radio) Unused Unused For internal sync, pins 2 and 6 are the only required connections. Connect these pins using a straight cable. A straight cable can be used for all pin connections. For GPS connections, the interconnection cable between radios must cross over pins 3 and 5, with all other pins wired straight through. All configurations do not require connections on pins 4, 7, and 8. 5000001 2007-06-25 111 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Alarm Connector The Alarm connector provides two alarm outputs that can be connected to external alarm collection equipment. The connector also allows connection of up to two external alarm sources, where the radio will report the status of these connections through the radio network management. Output alarm connections are Form C style connections, performing alarm logic based on either Normally Opened (NO) or Normally Closed (NC) connections compared to a Common (C) pin. Input alarm connections can be TTL logic or NO/NC style relay closures. Figure 47 5 4 3 2 1 9 8 7 6 Alarm Connector Pin Function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Alarm Output 1 - NO Alarm Output 1 - NC Ground (for Alarm Inputs) Alarm Output 2 NO Alarm Output 2 NC Alarm Output 1 Common Alarm Input 1 Alarm Input 2 Alarm Output 2 Common Alarm Output 1 is in alarm any time that there is a traffic-impacting alarm condition
(Major). Alarm Output 2 is in alarm any time that there is an alarm that is not traffic-
impacting (Minor). The administrator can set the polarity of the alarm inputs. 5000001 2007-06-25 112 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Console Connector The Console connector provides a serial interface for the Command Line Interface (CLI) functions. Typically, a straight-through serial cable is used between a computers serial port and the Console connector. 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Figure 48 Console Connector DC Power Connector Pin Function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Unused Tx (from radio) Rx (into radio) Unused Ground Unused Unused Unused Unused The voltage input of the DC connector is 20VDC - 60 VDC. Figure 49 5000001 2007-06-25 1 2 3 4 5 6 DC Power connector Pin Function 1 2 3 4 5 6 Power Return (-) Ground Power (+) Power (+) Ground Power Return (-) 113 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide DIP Switch Settings (-16 Models Only) The -16 models incorporate a front panel DIP switch. Use the DIP switch for emergency configuration or restoration for installations where there is no computer available for complete radio configuration. Only use the DIP switch for temporary purposes, for the purpose of a bench test or antenna alignment. Use the Exalt GUI for complete system configuration, as required before final system deployment. The DIP switch is only read when the critical factory reset procedure is implemented (see Radio A/B Configuration on page 27 and Reset to Critical Factory Settings on page 44). That is, when the RMT button is pressed and held during power up, and held through the boot cycle (approximately 45 seconds, until LED behavior stabilizes). If changes are made while the radio is already powered or when power is not applied, the changes are not executed until a reset is executed. Figure 50 depicts DIP switch positions 1 through 8, left to right, when facing the front panel. Also, the switch is considered in the One position when it is toggled upward, and in the Zero position when it is toggled downward (default). 1 (UP) 0 (DOWN) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Figure 50 DIP Switch Orientation Table 6 describes the function of each switch when placed in either position. Table 6 DIP Switch Functions Switch 0 (DOWN) 1 (UP) Position 1 Ignore all DIP switch positions If RMT button is held during boot cycle (reset to critical factory defaults procedure), reset to factory defaults, except IP address and password information, and make changes as described in this table. Position 2 Radio B Radio A Position 3*
TDM circuits = T1 TDM circuits = E1 Position 4 Standard factory defaults Standard factory defaults, except <50miles link distance and full transmit power. Positions 58 Unused Unused 5000001 2007-06-25 114 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Table 7 provides the standard factory defaults for the -16 models. Table 7 Standard Factory Defaults (-16 Models) Parameter Frequency Transmit Power Link Distance Bandwidth Mode TDD Frame Size EX-2.4i-16 EX-5i-16 2441 MHz 5788 MHz
+7 dBm
+4dBm
<10 miles 8 MHz Mode 1 2ms Ethernet Interfaces Enabled, 100/Full AUX port NMS Access In-Band T1/E1 Settings All Enabled, T1, B8ZS, AIS There are several scenarios for using the DIP switches. Table 8 describes common configurations and related applications. Table 8 Common DIP Switch Applications Application Switch Positions Comments Reset all critical factory defaults 0xxxxxxx Reset complete factory defaults except for IP information and passwords 1x00xxxx Configure the radio as Radio A while resetting. 11xxxxxx If the IP address and/or passwords are forgotten or lost, use this setting and execute the critical reset procedure (RMT button held through boot cycle). If the IP address and/or passwords are already reset or are known but the configuration of the radio parameters is unknown, use this setting to restore all parameters to factory defaults. Execute the critical reset procedure with these settings. If trying to establish a link, configure one radio as Radio A, the other as Radio B using position 2. Choose the desired reset function using position 4. Reset one radio as Radio A with position 2 up, so that a link can be established. 5000001 2007-06-25 115 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Change TDM interfaces to E1 1x1xxxxx Configure for ideal antenna alignment configuration 1xx1xxxx Choose the desired reset function using position 4. Reset both radios with position 3 up to configure E1 at each end. One radio must be Radio B, and the other Radio A (using position 2). Reset the radio with position 4 up to configure for the best setting to optimize antenna alignment. One radio must be configured as Radio A, the other as Radio B (using position 2). 5000001 2007-06-25 116 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Copyright Notices This section present copyright notices for third-party software licensed to Exalt Communications, Inc. Net-SNMP The following copyright notice applies to the open-source licensing agreement for Net-SNMP. Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000 Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California All Rights Reserved Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU and The Regents of the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written permission. CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE. 5000001 2007-06-25 117 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Network Associates Technology, Inc. Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Cambridge Broadband, Ltd. Portions of this code are copyright (c) 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED 5000001 2007-06-25 118 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Sun Microsystems, Inc. Copyright 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, California 95054, U.S.A. All rights reserved. Use is subject to license terms below. This distribution may include materials developed by third parties. Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. 5000001 2007-06-25 119 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Sparta, Inc. Copyright (c) 2003-2005, Sparta, Inc All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Sparta, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Cisco, Inc. Copyright (c) 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Cisco, Inc, Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications, nor the names of their contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. 5000001 2007-06-25 120 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co. Copyright (c) Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG, 2003 oss@fabasoft.com Author: Bernhard Penz Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* The name of Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG or any of its subsidiaries, brand or product names may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. 5000001 2007-06-25 121 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Appendix A - Regulatory Compliance As of this printing, Exalt Communications, Inc. has approvals for the products that are covered by this manual as indicated in Table 11. If your application or country is not listed, please check with your Sales Representative for the current status. Table 9 Product Approvals EX-2.4i series EX-4.9i series EX-5i series, 5.3 GHz
Country Austria Belgium Canada Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Ghana Great Britain Hungary Iceland Ireland Italy Liechtenstein Lithuania Luxembourg Malta Mexico Netherlands Norway Poland Portugal 5000001 2007-06-25
122 EX-5i series, 5.4 GHz
EX-5i series, 5.8 GHz
Romania Slovak Republic
Slovenia
United States Switzerland Sweden Turkey Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide
General Regulatory Notices Dynamic Frequency Selection Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) may be required by regional legislation in some frequency bands in order to avoid causing interference to radar systems. Prior to the start of any transmission, the device equipped with DFS monitors the spectrum and is not permitted to transmit on a part of the spectrum that is already in use for radar transmissions for a period of 30 minutes. During operation of the device, the spectrum is continually monitored by the DFS to detect if radar begins transmission on a frequency that is being used by the device to transmit on. If the DFS software detects radar, the device must move off channel within a specified time period so that the device transmission does not interfere with the radar transmission. The device equipped with DFS is required to stay off that part of the spectrum for a minimum of 30 minutes, after which time the device may then check the spectrum for radar transmissions and begin transmitting if no radar is detected. Antennas The following Tables list antennas recommended for use with the i-Series radios. The EX-4.9i may use any antenna. In some countries, antennas exceeding a certain level of gain may be unlawful. Refer to RF Output Power Setting in this Appendix for details on regulatory limits. 5000001 2007-06-25 123 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Table 10 EX-2.4i supported antennas Manufacturer Model #
Description Mid-band Gain
(dBi) 3dB (Azimuth/Elevation) Beamwidth
(degrees) Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel RadioWaves RadioWaves RadioWaves RadioWaves RadioWaves RadioWaves RadioWaves RadioWaves RFS RFS RFS RFS RFS RFS 5000001 2007-06-25 19T-2440-1 21T-2441-1 18T-2400-1 26T-2400-1 P2F-23 P4F-23 KP3F-23 KP4F-23 KPR3F-23 KPR4F-23 QD-2402 DFPS.5-23 DFPS1-23 P-24A36 P-24A48 SSP2-23 SSP4-23 SSP6-23 HSSP2-23 HSSP4-23 HSSP6-23 SP1-2.4 SP2-2.4 SP3-2.4 SP4-2.4 SP6-2.4 G3-2.4 G4-2.4 G6-2.4 MGAR2-
MGAR3-
MGAR4-
SPF2-23 SPF3-23 SPF4-23 16-inch Solid Parabolic Dish 24-inch Solid Parabolic Dish Semi-parabolic Grid Semi-parabolic Grid 2-foot Solid Parabolic Dish 4-foot Solid Parabolic Dish 3-foot Grid Parabolic Dish 4-foot Grid Parabolic Dish 2-foot Grid Parabolic Dish 4-foot Grid Parabolic Dish 11-inch Panel 6-inch Panel 1-foot Panel 3-foot Grid Parabolic Dish 4-foot Grid Parabolic Dish 2-foot Solid Parabolic Dish 4-foot Solid Parabolic Dish 6-foot Solid Parabolic Dish 2-foot Solid HP Parabolic 4-foot Solid HP Parabolic 6-foot Solid HP Parabolic 1-foot Solid Parabolic Dish 2-foot Solid Parabolic Dish 3-foot Solid Parabolic Dish 4-foot Solid Parabolic Dish 6-foot Solid Parabolic Dish 3-foot Grid Parabolic Dish 4-foot Grid Parabolic Dish 6-foot Grid Parabolic Dish 2-foot Grid Parabolic Dish 3-foot Grid Parabolic Dish 4-foot Grid Parabolic Dish 2-foot Solid Parabolic Dish 3-foot Solid Parabolic Dish 4-foot Solid Parabolic Dish 19 21 17 23 21.6 27.3 25.1 27.5 23.6 27.3 16 10.3 16.5 25.7 27.7 20.7 26.7 30.3 20.5 26.3 30.0 14 21.3 24.3 27.2 30.3 24.5 27 30.3 20.8 24.2 27.2 20.5 24.2 27.1 124 16/17 10/11 14/13 7.5/10 12/13.3 6.9 8.1 6.9 7.9/8.7 6.2/6.7 27 35/53 36 8.4 6.5 14.5 7.2 4.8 14.5 7.2 4.8 28 14 9.5 7.3 4.8 9.2 7.1 4.6 13.7 8.6 7 13.8 9.2 6.9 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Table 11 lists antennas supported by the EX-5i family of Digital Microwave Radios. Table 11 EX-5i supported antennas Manufacturer Model #
Description Mid-band Gain dBi P2F-52-N P3F-52-N P4F-52-NXA P6F-52-NXA HP2F-52-NPA HP3F-52-NPA HP4F-52-NPA HP6F-52-NPA FPA5250D06-N FPA5250D12-N DFPS.5-52 DFPD1-52 DFPD2-52 QF2-52-N QF2.5-52-N QF4-52-N QF6-52N HQF2-52-N HQF4-52-N HQF6-52-N MT-485001 MT-485002 MT-486004 MT-486001 FP.5-5-18 FP1-5-24 FP2-5-28 SP1-5.2 SP2-5.2 HP2-5.2 SP3-5.2 SP4-5.2 SP6-5.2 SPF2-52A SPF3-52A SPF4-52A SPF6-52A SDF4-52A 2-foot Dish 3-foot Dish 4-foot Dish 6-foot Dish 2-foot HP Dish 3-foot HP Dish 4-foot HP Dish 6-foot HP Dish 6-inch Panel 1-foot Panel 6-inch Panel 1-foot Panel 2-foot Panel 2-foot Dish 2.5-foot Dish 4-foot Dish 6-foot Dish 2-foot HP Dish 4-foot HP Dish 6-foot HP Dish 7.5-inch Panel 1-foot Panel 18-inch Panel 2-foot Panel 6-inch Panel 1-foot Panel 2-foot Panel 1-foot Dish 2-foot Dish 2-foot HP Dish 3-foot Dish 4-foot Dish 6-foot Dish 2-foot Dish 3-foot Dish 4-foot Dish 6-foot Dish 4-foot HP Dish Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel MTI MTI MTI MTI Radio Waves Radio Waves Radio Waves Radio Waves Radio Waves Radio Waves Radio Waves Radio Waves Radio Waves RFS RFS RFS RFS RFS 5000001 2007-06-25
(mid-band) 29.4 33.4 34.9 37.6 29.0 33.0 34.5 37.2 18.0 23.6 18.0 23.5 28.0 28.5 31.2 34.8 37.8 28.2 34.4 37.4 19.0 23.0 26.0 28.0 18.0 23.8 28.0 22.5 29.0 28.6 32.0 34.8 37.9 27.9 31.4 33.9 37.4 33.9 125 3dB (Azimuth/Elevation) Beamwidth
(degrees) 5.4 3.8 3.0 1.8 5.4 3.8 3.0 1.8 19.3 9.6 19.0 9.4 4.6 5.6 4.4 2.7 1.9 5.7 2.8 1.9 18.0 9.0 6.0 4.5 20.0 10.0 4.5 11.1 6.1 6.1 4.0 3.0 2.0 6.2 4.2 3.1 2.1 3.1 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Manufacturer Model #
Description Mid-band Gain dBi RFS RFS RFS RFS SDF6-52A MA0528-19AN MA0528-23AN MA0528-28AN 6-foot HP Dish 7.5-inch Panel 1-foot Panel 2-foot Panel
(mid-band) 37.4 19.0 23.0 28.0 3dB (Azimuth/Elevation) Beamwidth
(degrees) 2.1 18.0 9.0 4.5 5000001 2007-06-25 126 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Region 1 Specifics Region 1 is designated for USA and Canada installations. Note: The professional installer is responsible to ensure that RF output power is properly adjusted to not exceed the regulatory limit. 4.9 GHz Model The EX-4.9i is a licensed-band product operating within Part 90 of the FCC regulations and RSS-111 of Industry Canada. This band is specifically reserved for Public Safety applications and related agencies. Transmitter power reduction may be required, depending on transmission system gains and losses, in accordance with instructions found in RF Output Power Setting on page 25. The transmitter power of the device must be reduced by 1 dB for every 1 dB that the antenna gain exceeds 26 dBi (inclusive of transmission system losses). In this section this Appendix you will find information about the Regulatory Compliance Regulations in your particular country. Federal Communications Commission (FCC), United States The device is allowed to be used provided it does not cause interference to other devices. It is not guaranteed to provide protection against interference from other electronic and radio devices. The system has been tested and found to comply with the limits of a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Shielded cables and I/O cords must be used for this equipment to comply with the relevant FCC regulations. 5000001 2007-06-25 127 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Changes or modifications not expressly approved in writing by Exalt may void the users authority to operate this equipment. This device must be professionally installed. To comply with regulations, the output power of this device may need to be adjusted in accordance to the associated transmission system. See RF Output Power Setting on page 25 in this Appendix for details. The antenna associated with EX-2.4i family shall be mounted in a location that is at least 10 feet away from humans that may be subject to long-term or continuous exposure. The antenna associated with the EX-5i family shall be mounted in a location that is at least 10/3m away from humans that may be subject to long-term or continuous exposure. Important: Where required by regional regulations, DFS is enabled by the system keys and cannot be disabled. United States Compliance The EX-2.4i and EX-5i product families operate under FCC Rule Parts 15.247 and/or 15.407 as a license-exempt device. The EX-4.9i products operate under FCC Rule Part 90 as a licensed device. All of these devices must be professionally installed. They may only be used as a point-to-point transmission device for fixed or temporary-fixed (non-mobile) installations. The devices are subject to the following restrictions:
Do not use external amplifiers to boost the power or overcome transmission system losses, unless the specific amplifier/cable/antenna combination has expressly been authorized by the FCC. The output power must never exceed +30 dBm. Cross-border transmissions are expressly prohibited, except with written permission from both the FCC and the governing body of the neighboring country (Cofetel for Mexico; Industry Canada for Canada). Use only parabolic dish antennas or directional flat-panel antennas. No other types of antennas (omni-directional, yagi, and so on) are authorized. Parabolic dishes of either grid or solid type are allowed. Maximum mid-band gain of each type of antenna certified is:
EX-2.4i models:
Parabolic dish: 30.3 dBi (6'/1.8m diameter) Directional flat panel: 20.5 dBi (~2'/61cm square)
EX-4.9i models:
Parabolic dish: 26dBi (larger gains are allowed, with Tx power reduction) Directional flat panel: 26 dBi (larger gains are allowed, with Tx power reduction)
EX-5i models:
Parabolic dish: 37.9 dBi (6'/1.8m diameter) 5000001 2007-06-25 128 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Directional flat panel: 28 dBi (~2'/61cm square) Industry Canada (IC), Canada This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
3. 4. this device may not cause interference, and this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Antennas Supported in Canada The EX-2.4i is designed to operate with the antennas listed in Table 10, which have a maximum gain of 30.3 dBi. Antennas not included in the list or having a gain greater than 30.3dBi are prohibited for use with this device. The required antenna impedance is 50 Ohms. The antenna associated with the EX-2.4i family shall be mounted in a location that is at least 10 feet away from humans that may be subject to long-term or continuous exposure. See Table 6 for Antenna Details. The EX-5i family has been designed to operate with the antennas listed in Table 11 which have a maximum gain of 37.9 dBi. Antennas not included in the list or having a gain greater than 37.9 dBi are prohibited for use with this device. The required antenna impedance is 50 Ohms. The antenna associated with the EX-5i family shall be mounted in a location that is at least 10/3m away from humans that may be subject to long-term or continuous exposure. Important: Where required by regional regulations, DFS is enabled by the system keys and cannot be disabled. Canada Compliance The EX-2.4i and EX-5i models operate under RSS-210 of Industry Canada regulations. The EX-4.9i model operates under RSS-111 of Industry Canada regulations. Operation is subject to the following conditions, unless express permission is granted by Industry Canada to operate in a different manner:
External amplifiers cannot be used to boost the power or to overcome transmission system losses, unless the specific amplifier/cable/antenna combination is expressly authorized by Industry Canada. Cross-border transmissions are expressly prohibited, except with written permission from both Industry Canada and the governing body of the neighboring country (FCC for USA) Only parabolic dish antennas or directional flat-panel antennas may be used. No other types of antennas (omni-directional, yagi, and so on) are authorized. Parabolic dishes of either grid or solid type are allowed. Maximum gain of each type of antenna allowed is:
5000001 2007-06-25 129 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide
EX-2.4i models:
Parabolic dish: 30.3 dBi (6'/1.8m diameter) Directional flat panel: 20.5 dBi (~2'/61cm square)
EX-4.9i models:
Parabolic dish: 26 dBi (larger gains are allowed with Tx power reduction) Directional flat panel: 26 dBi (larger gains are allowed with Tx power reduction)
EX-5i models:
Parabolic dish: 37.9 dBi (6'/1.8m diameter) Directional flat panel: 28 dBi (~2'/61cm square) A complete list of allowed antennas can be found in United States Compliance The EX-2.4i and EX-5i product families operate under FCC Rule Parts 15.247 and/or 15.407 as a license-exempt device. The EX-4.9i products operate under FCC Rule Part 90 as a licensed device. All of these devices must be professionally installed. They may only be used as a point-to-point transmission device for fixed or temporary-fixed (non-mobile) installations. The devices are subject to the following restrictions:
Do not use external amplifiers to boost the power or overcome transmission system losses, unless the specific amplifier/cable/antenna combination has expressly been authorized by the FCC. The output power must never exceed +30 dBm. Cross-border transmissions are expressly prohibited, except with written permission from both the FCC and the governing body of the neighboring country (Cofetel for Mexico; Industry Canada for Canada). Use only parabolic dish antennas or directional flat-panel antennas. No other types of antennas (omni-directional, yagi, and so on) are authorized. Parabolic dishes of either grid or solid type are allowed. Maximum mid-band gain of each type of antenna certified is:
EX-2.4i models:
Parabolic dish: 30.3 dBi (6'/1.8m diameter) Directional flat panel: 20.5 dBi (~2'/61cm square)
EX-4.9i models:
Parabolic dish: 26dBi (larger gains are allowed, with Tx power reduction) Directional flat panel: 26 dBi (larger gains are allowed, with Tx power reduction)
EX-5i models:
Parabolic dish: 37.9 dBi (6'/1.8m diameter) Directional flat panel: 28 dBi (~2'/61cm square) 5000001 2007-06-25 130 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Industry Canada (IC), Canada on page 128. EX-2.4i EIRP for the USA and Canada For the EX-2.4i models, the maximum EIRP allowed is +52.2 dBm. The maximum conducted power of the radio is +27 dBm for Mode 1 and +24 dBm for Mode 2. The following formula is used to determine the output power:
P = CP [(G-6)/3] + L where:
P
= Maximum transmitter output Power of radio, in dBm CP dBm G L
= Maximum Conducted Power of transmitter power of radio, in
= Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 2400 to 2483.5 MHz
= Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, and lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 2400 and 2483.5 MHz EX-4.9i EIRP for the USA and Canada For the EX-4.9i model within the 49404990 MHz band, the maximum EIRP allowed is
+50 dBm. The maximum conducted power of the radio is +24 dBm for Mode 1 and +21 dBm for Mode 2. The following formula is used to determine the output power:
P = CP G + L where:
P
= Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm
= Maximum Conducted Power of transmitter output power of CP radio, in dBm G L
= Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 4940 to 4990 MHz
= Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 4940 and 4990 MHz 5000001 2007-06-25 131 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide EX-5i EIRP for the US and Canada 5250-5350 MHz Band For the EX-5i models within the 52505350 MHz band, the maximum transmit power is 30 dBm. The maximum output of the radio is +13 dBm. P = CP G + L where:
P
= Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm
= Maximum Conducted Power of transmitter output power of CP radio, in dBm G L
= Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 5250 to 5350 MHz
= Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 5250 and 5350 MHz 5470-5725 MHz Band For the EX-5i models within the 5470-5725 MHz band, the maximum EIRP allowed is 30 dBm. The maximum output power of the radio is +13 dBm. P = CP G + L where:
P
= Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm
= Maximum Conducted Power of transmitter output power of CP radio, in dBm G L
= Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 5470 to 5725 MHz
= Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 5470 and 5725 MHz 5000001 2007-06-25 132 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide 5725-5850 MHz Band For the EX-5i models within the 57255850 MHz band, the maximum EIRP allowed is 61.9 dBm. The maximum output power of the radio is +24 dBm in Mode 1 and +21 dBm in Mode 2. P = CP G + L where:
P
= Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm
= Maximum Conducted Power of transmitter output power of CP radio, in dBm G L
= Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 5725 to 5850 MHz
= Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 5725 and 5850 MHz 5000001 2007-06-25 133 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Region 2 Specifics The countries that are covered by this region are: Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Great Britain, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Netherlands, Switzerland, and Turkey. Note: The professional installer is responsible to ensure that RF output power is properly adjusted to not exceed the regulatory limit. Europe/ITU (ETSI and CE Mark) The EX-2.4i family complies with ETS 300 328 for license-exempt use for most countries recognizing ETSI or ITU band assignments. This band is not yet harmonized for all countries recognizing ETSI or ITU band assignments. There is a +20dBm EIRP limit applied to this band. Transmitter power must be adjusted accordingly with respect to the RF cabling losses and antenna gains associated with each terminal. The EX-5i family complies with ETS 301 893 for the 5.3 and 5.47 GHz bands for license-exempt use for most countries recognizing ETSI or ITU band assignments. This band is not yet harmonized for all countries recognizing ETSI or ITU band assignments These bands require Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) and Transmitter Power Control
(TPC) for radar-detection and avoidance. There is a +30dBm EIRP limit applied to this band. Transmitter power must be adjusted accordingly with respect to the RF cabling losses and antenna gains associated with each terminal. The EX-5i family complies with ETS 302 502 for the 5.8 GHz band. This band is not yet harmonized for all countries recognizing ETSI or ITU band assignments. Consult the individual country regulations or your Exalt Communications representative for details. This band requires DFS and TPC for radar-detection and avoidance. There is a +33dBm EIRP limit for use of the 10MHz BW setting (called 8MHz on GUI), and a +36dBm EIRP limit for use of the 20MHz BW setting (called 16MHz on GUI). All models comply with the requirements for CE Mark (EN 60950-1 and IEC 60950-1) and EMC (EN 301 489-17). No substitutions shall be made, and all wiring and grounding instructions contained in this manual must be followed to ensure safety in accordance to the standards. 5000001 2007-06-25 134 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Declaration of Conformity to the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC English:
This equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Deutsch:
Dansk:
Espaol:
Franais:
Dieses Gert entspricht den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den weiteren entsprecheneden Vorgaben der Richtlinie 1999/5/EU. Dette udstyr er i overensstemmelse med de vsentlige krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i Directiv 1999/5/EF. Este equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales asi como con otras disposiciones de la Directive 1999/5/EC. 1999/5/E. Cet appareil est conforme aux exigencies essentialles et aux autres dispositions pertinantes de la Directive 1999/5/EC. slenska:
essi bnaur samrmist lgbonum krfum og rum kvum tilskipunar 1999/5/ESB. Italiano:
Questo apparato conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed agli altri principi sanciti dalla Direttiva 1999/5/EC. Nederlands: Deze apparatuur voldoet aan de belangrijkste eisen en andere voorzieningen van richtlijn 1999/5/EC. Norsk:
Dette utstyret er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i EU-
directiv 1999/5/EC. Portugus:
Este equipamento satisfaz os requisitos essenciais e outras provises da Directiva 1999/5/EC. Suomalainen: Tm laite tytt direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleelliset vaatimukset ja on siin asetettujen muidenkin ehtojen mukainen. Svenska:
Denna utrustning r i verensstmmelse med de vsentliga kraven och andra relevanta bestmmelser i Direktiv 1999/5/EC. For 2.4 GHz radios, the following standards were applied:
Radio: EN 300 328-1, EN 300 328-2 EMC: EN 301 489-1, EN 301 489-17 Safety: EN 60950, IEC 60950, IEC 60950-1 For 5 GHz radios, the following standards were applied:
Radio: EN 301 893, EN 302 502 EMC: EN 301 489-1, EN 301 489-17 Safety: EN 60950-1, IEC 60950-1 The following CE mark is affixed to the product:
EU WEEE Exalt is committed to meeting the requirements of the European Unions Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive. The Directives require producers of electrical and electronic equipment to finance the take-back for re-use or recycling of their products placed on the EU market after 13 August 2005. Exalt products that are within the scope of the Directives are labeled with a crossed-out
"wheelie-bin" symbol as required by the Directives. This indicates that the product was placed on the market after 13 August 2005 and that end-users should segregate the product from other wastes at end-of-life. 5000001 2007-06-25 135 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide The WEEE Directives are being implemented in each of the 28 EU and European Economic Area (EAA) countries through national legislation. This has resulted in considerable variation in the detailed requirements across the EU, many of which require presence in the EU. As a result, Exalts WEEE compliance approach is to require the distributors and/or resellers in the EU to comply with each countrys national legislation by registration of the distributor or reseller as the producer and for the reseller/distributor to carry out and fulfill the legislative requirements of each national compliance scheme. Below is the crossed out wheelie bin symbol as required by the WEEE Directive. EU RoHS RoHS is the acronym used to refer to the European Union (EU) Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. Hazardous materials are those chemicals and substances that are legislatively, market, or customer banned or restricted for use in products and/or manufacturing. There are six (6) RoHS substances: lead (Pb), cadmium (Cd), mercury
(Hg), hexavalent chromium (Cr+6), polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) and polybrominated diphenylethers (PBDE). Other countries may be introducing legislation that results in similar restrictions of hazardous substances. Many Exalt products will continue to use lead-based solder under the exemption allowed for network infrastructure equipment. Small amounts of lead, cadmium, mercury, hexavalent chromium, PBB, and PBDE can also be found in a few electrical and electrical components. Europe Compliance The EX-2.4i family operates under EN 300 328 rules as a license-exempt device. The EX-4.9i devices are currently not permitted in any EU member or affiliate countries. The EX-5i family operates under EN 301 893 and EN 302 502 rules as a license-exempt device. All of these permitted devices must be professionally installed. They may only be used as a point-to-point transmission device for fixed or temporary-fixed (non-mobile) installations. The devices are subject to the following restrictions:
Do not use external amplifiers to boost the power or overcome transmission system losses, unless the specific amplifier/cable/antenna combination has expressly been authorized by the specific country regulations. The output power must never exceed that specified in the Tables 1 and 2. 5000001 2007-06-25 136 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Use only parabolic dish antennas or directional flat-panel antennas. No other types of antennas (omni-directional, yagi, and so on) are authorized. Parabolic dishes of either grid or solid type are allowed. Maximum mid-band gain of each type of antenna certified is:
EX-2.4i models:
Parabolic dish: 30.3 dBi (6'/1.8m diameter) Directional flat panel: 20.5 dBi (~2'/61cm square)
EX-5i models:
Parabolic dish: 37.9 dBi (6'/1.8m diameter) Directional flat panel: 28 dBi (~2'/61cm square) 5000001 2007-06-25 137 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide EX-2.4i EIRP by Country For the EX-2.4i models within the 2400-2483.5 MHz band, the maximum EIRP allowed is 20 dBm and the countries are summarized in Table 12. The maximum output power of the radio is +13 dBm. P = CP G + L where:
P
= Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm
= Maximum Conducted Power of transmitter output power of CP radio, in dBm G L
= Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 2400-2483.5 MHz
= Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 2400 and 2483.5 MHz 5000001 2007-06-25 138 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Table 12 Region 2 Country Specific Power Levels for EX-
2.4i Series Country Maximum EIRP Output Power 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm Austria Belgium Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Great Britain Hungary Iceland Ireland Italy Liechtenstein Lithuania Malta Netherlands Norway Poland Portugal Romania Slovak Republic Slovenia Sweden Switzerland Turkey 5000001 2007-06-25 139 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide EX-5i EIRP by Country Table 13 summarizes the maximum power by band and country for Exalts EX-5i series products. 52505350 MHz band For the EX-5i models within the 52505350 MHz band, the maximum transmit power is 23 dBm. The maximum output of the radio is +13 dBm. P = CP G + L where:
P
= Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm
= Maximum Conducted Power of transmitter output power of CP radio, in dBm
= Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 5250 to 5350 MHz
= Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 5250 and 5350 MHz G L 54705725 MHz band For the EX-5i models within the 5470-5725 MHz band, the maximum EIRP allowed is 30 dBm. The maximum output power of the radio is +13 dBm. P = CP G + L where:
P
= Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm
= Maximum Conducted Power of transmitter output power of CP radio, in dBm G L
= Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 5470 to 5725 MHz
= Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all 5000001 2007-06-25 140 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 5470 and 5725 MHz 5725-5850 MHz band For the EX-5i models, within the 5725-5850 MHz band, the maximum transmit power with respect to specific country EIRP regulations is determined based on the channel bandwidth. The EIRP power limit is 33 dBm for 10 MHz channels and 36 dBm for 20 MHz channels. The Exalt EX-5i series maximum transmitter conducted power is +24 dBm. Use the following equation to determine the EIRP:
P = CP G + L where:
P
= Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm
= Maximum Conducted Power of transmitter output power of CP radio, in dBm G
= Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 5725-5850 MHz
= Total transmission system losses of all elements between the L radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 5725 and 5850 MHz 5000001 2007-06-25 141 Table 13 Country Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Region 2 Country Specific Power Levels for EX-5i Series Maximum EIRP Output Power, 5.3 GHz band Maximum EIRP Output Power, 5.4 GHz band Maximum EIRP Output Power, 5.8 GHz band
(BW dependent) see note 1 5 dBm 5 dBm 33/36 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm Austria Belgium Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Great Britain Hungary Iceland Ireland Italy Liechtenstein Lithuania Luxembourg Netherlands Norway Poland Portugal Romania Slovak Republic Slovenia Sweden Switzerland Turkey Note 1: If the output power is designated as 33/36 dBm, the EIRP is limited to 33 dBm for 10 MHz bandwidth transmissions and 36 dBm for 20 MHz bandwidth transmissions. 5000001 2007-06-25 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 5 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 5 dBm 33/36 dBm 5 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 5 dBm 33/36 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 142 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Index A AC adapter, 41, 42 accessory kit contents, 23 Administration Settings page, 62 administrator privileges, 56 AIS enabling/disabling, 69 alarm conditions, 59 Alarm connector, 112 alarms, 68, 78, 83, 102 clearing, 83 Internal Fan, 78 Temperature, 79 Alarms page, 78 AMI, 69 antennas alignment, 50, 94 EX-2.4i Canada, 129 US, 124 EX-5i Canada, 129 US, 125 mounting, 18, 45 indoor, 48 mounting height, 21 polarization orientation, 21 site preparation considerations, 21 system grounding, 21 transmission line, 46 troubleshooting, 94 AUTO SYNC mode, 29 B B8ZS, 69 back-to-back bench test, 24, 104 back-to-back bench test configuration, 105 bandwidth, 19, 21 Bandwidth parameter, 65, 75 battery source, 41 BER, 85 browsers, 54 C cables Ethernet (CAT5), 24 RF, 19, 21 T1/E1, 24 troubleshooting improper RF cable termination, 92 carrier-to-interference tolerance, 21 center frequency, 24 center frequency tuning, 19 channel bandwidth, 19 CLI, 52 5000001 2007-06-25 143 main menu, 53 menu options, 53 clock, 32 configuration file, 73 connectors 40-60VDC, 38 Alarm, 112 alarms, 38 antenna, 38 console, 38 CONSOLE, 52, 113 DC, 44 DC Power, 113 Ethernet, 38, 110 ETHERNET MAIN/AUX, 68 front panel, 37 Ground (GND), 38 out-of-band, 68 RSL, 38 Sync, 38 Sync (In/Out), 111 T1/E1, 38, 109 Console connector, 113 console interface, 102 CONSOLE port, 55 contact information, 15 Current BER field, 80 Current RSL field, 81 D data communication interface, 19 date and time, 62 DC connector, 44 DC coupler, 51, 107 DC Power connector, 113 DC power source, 41 Diagnostic Charts page, 85 dimensions, 96 DIP switch, 28 DIP switch (-16 models only), 22, 55, 114 documentation, related, 15 duplex 100/full-duplex, 68 duplex settings, 68 E E1 channels, 70 E1 Interface Configuration page, 70 effective isotropic radiated power (EIRP), 25 encryption, 19 Endpoint Identifier, 58, 66, 75 Errored Seconds (ES) field, 81 Ethernet, 21 ETHERNET AUX port, 55 Ethernet configuration parameters, 75 Ethernet connectors, 110 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Ethernet interface, 102 throughput settings, 69 Ethernet Interface Configuration page, 68 ETHERNET MAIN/AUX LED, 39 Event Log page, 83 ExaltCalc tool, 26, 91 External Alarm Inputs parameter, 67 external GPS source, 31 external loopback modes, 71 F factory default settings, 44, 74 fade margin, 21, 95 features, 16, 19 File Activation page, 73, 76 File Transfer page, 73 file transfers, 73 files activating stored, 76 default configuration file, 74 frame length. See TDD frame frequency center, 22 G gateway (default), 75 Global Positioning System (GPS) kit, 29 GPS sync features, 27 grounding, 95 GUI Administration Settings page, 62 Alarms page, 78 browsers supported, 54 description, 54 Diagnostic Charts page, 85 E1 Interface Configuration page, 70 Ethernet Interface Configuration page, 68 Event Log page, 83 File Activation page, 73, 76 File Transfer page, 73 IP address (default), 54 log in, 55 login privileges, 56 navigation panel, 58, 60 Performance page, 80 Radio A configuration, 54 Radio Information page, 61 Reboot page, 88 Spectrum Analyzer page, 87 summary status information, 59 System Configuration page, 64 T1 Interface Configuration page, 69 T1/E1 Configuration page, 69 H hop, 23 hub, 30 5000001 2007-06-25 144 I interfaces alarm, 102 Ethernet, 102 power, 103 RF, 102 serial console, 102 Sync (In/Out), 103 T1/E1, 102 interference, 81 interference profile, 21 Internal Fan alarm, 78 IP address, 75 IP address conflicts, 55 IP address subnet, 55 IP settings, 24 IP subnet, 52 IP subnet mask, 75 L latency optimization, 19 LED indicators ETHERNET MAIN/AUX, 39 LINK, 39 RADIO A, 39 RMT, 40 STATUS, 39 SYNC IN, 40 SYNC OUT, 40 system status (rear panel), 40 T1/E1, 40 License Key, 63 lightning arrestor, 21 lightning arrestors, 48 Line Build Out (LBO), 69 Line Code, 69 link, 21 orientation, 26 RF link testing, 24 synchronization, 26 Link Distance parameter, 67, 75 LINK LED, 39, 59 link margin, 95 Link Name parameter, 75 link parameters, 58 Link Security Key, 62 Link Security Key parameter, 75 login names, 56 login privileges, 56 loopback, 69, 70, 71 external (local), 71 external (remote), 71 internal, 71 M master timing, 29 Maximum RSL field, 82 MIB files, 73 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide Minimum RSL field, 81 Minimum RSL Timestamp field, 81 Mode parameter, 65 modes AUTO SYNC, 29 multi-link backbone, 30 multi-link network, 31 multipath, 92 multipath propagation, 93 muting, 68 N noise profile, 21 O offset timing, 31 P passwords, 24, 56, 75 path obstruction, 94 performance degradation, 91 Performance page, 80 ports SYNC IN, 32 SYNC OUT, 32 power AC adapter, 42 DC specifications, 43 DC wiring, 43 system LEDs and, 42 power interface, 103 R rack mounting hardware, 35 temperature considerations, 35 radio default settings, 27 grounding, 21, 95 initiation tasks, 33 installation tasks, 33 maximum transmit power setting, 65 mounting, 21, 35 parameters, 24 rebooting, 83, 88 transmitter output power, 21 Radio A, 27 Radio A configuration, 22 RADIO A LED, 39 radio configuration, 22 radio features, 19 radio firmware files, 73 radio frequency EX-2.4i, 17 EX-5i, 17 Radio Information page, 61 5000001 2007-06-25 145 radio mount enclosure, 18 connections, 19 indoor, 18 connections, 18 Radio Name parameter, 75 Radio Transmit Power parameter, 64 Reboot page, 88 received signal level (RSL). See RSL receiver threshold, 21 receiver threshold performance, 24 record keeping, 34 regulatory requirements, 25 EX-2.4i FCC EIRP, 131, 138 EX-4.9i FCC EIRP, 131 EX-5i FCC EIRP, 133 USA, 128, 130 regulatory rquirements Canada, 129 repeater, 30 RF cable length, 19 RF connector, 49 RF connector termination, 41 RF Frequency parameter, 66, 75 RF interface, 102 RF interference, 93 RF lightning arrestor, 48 RF output power, 25 RMT button, 41 RMT LED, 40 RSL, 25 current RSL readings, 81 diagnostics, 85 Maximum RSL field, 82 Minimum RSL Timestamp field, 81 monitor for performance, 92 RSL voltage, 50 S security mode, 24 serial connection settings, 52 serial console interface, 102 Set to E1 button, 69 Set to T1 button, 69 shipping box contents, 23 site preparation, 21 SNMP, 77 spanning tree protocol, 68 specifications, 96 Spectrum Analyzer page, 87 STATUS LED, 39 Swap button, 73, 76 Sync (In/Out) connectors, 111 Sync (In/Out) interface, 103 SYNC IN LED, 40 SYNC OUT LED, 40 SYNC RECIPIENT radio, 29 SYNC SOURCE radios, 29 synchronization, 28 internal, 29 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide temperature, 85, 96 Temperature alarm, 79 temporary hardware configuration key, 22, 28, 54 testing, 104 back-to-back bench, 24 threshold, 106 threshold measurement, 106 threshold measurement tests, 106 threshold testing, 106 time division duplex (TDD). See TDD frame Time Since Reset, 82 timing lost signal, 32 master timing, 29 offset timing, 31 using an external GPS source, 31 transmission line coaxial, 46 egress, 49 transmitter output power, 24 transmitter output power, 21 troubleshooting, 85, 90 U Unavailable Seconds (UAS), 81 unfaded error-free performance, 24 Update button, 62 user privileges, 56 V voltage test, 50 VSWR, 93 System Configuration page, 64 system latency, 21 system parameters default settings, 44 system performance, 80 system reboot, 83 system settings Current BER field, 80, 81 Errored Seconds (ES) field, 81 grounding, 95 Maximum RSL, 82 Minimum RSL field, 81 Time Since Reset field, 82 Unavailable Seconds field, 81 system specifications, 96 system synchronization, 31 T T1 Interface Configuration page, 69 T1/E1 circuits, 69 T1/E1 Configuration page, 69 T1/E1 configuration parameters, 75 T1/E1 connections, 109 T1/E1 connectors, 109 T1/E1 interfaces, 102 T1/E1 LED, 40 T1/E1 loopback, 71 TDD factors, 25 TDD frame length, 21, 22 TDD frame size, 22 TDD Frame Size parameter, 67, 75 TDM circuit, 21 TDM circuits, 65 TDM interfaces, 26 Telnet connection, 52 5000001 2007-06-25 146 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt i-Series Installation and Management Guide 2007 Exalt Communications Inc. 580 Division St. Campbell, CA 95008 USA) 5000001 2007-05-31
1 2 3 | Host Manual r | Users Manual | 1.39 MiB | May 07 2007 / July 09 2007 |
r-Series Digital Microwave Radios Installation and Management Manual Includes Models:
EX-4.9r, EX-4.9r-c, EX-4.9r-x, EX-4.9r-xc EX-5r, EX-5r-c, EX-5r-x, EX-5r-xc Part Number: 50000007 Date: 2007-06-28 Exalt Communications Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Legal Notice The information contained herein is the property of Exalt Communications, Inc. (Exalt) and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part of this document may be reproduced, in any form, except as authorized by contract or other written permission from the owner. Any brand names and product names included in this manual are trademarks, registered trademarks, or trade names of their respective holders. The contents of this document are current as of the date of publication. Exalt reserves the right to change the contents without prior notice. The publication of information in this document does not imply freedom from patent or other rights of Exalt or others. 2007 Exalt Communications Inc. All rights reserved. The Exalt logo is a trademark of Exalt Communications, Inc. Open-Source License Information In addition to proprietary software/firmware, which is the sole intellectual property of Exalt, the EX-5r Digital Microwave Radios make use of public (open-source) software/firmware within the terms of use of their respective shared license agreements. Exalt will supply copies of any of this code, within the terms of their individual licensing agreements, upon request. Open-Source Code License Agreement Linux Operating System GNU GPL Version 2 BusyBox CLI GNU GPL Version 2 GoAhead Web Server Copyright (c) 2003 GoAhead Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved. U-boot Boot Code GNU GPL Version 2 Website www.gnu.org www.gnu.org;
www.busybox.net www.goahead.com www.gnu.org www.sourceforge.net Net-SNMP
(see Copyright Notices on page 84) www.sourceforge.net 5000007 (ETS) 2007-05-31 (draft) ii Exalt Communications Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual About this Document This manual provides a complete description of the EX-5r family of Digital Microwave Radios and related software. This manual provides planners, engineers, installers, system administrators, and technicians general and specific information related to the planning, installation, operation, management, and maintenance of these devices. Revision History Date 2006-09-18 2006-12-20 2007-02-12 2007-04-15 2007-06-11 2007-06-25 Detail EX-5r release 1.0.0 Draft for ETSI/CE Draft for 4.9r series Draft for WEEE, RoHS, DFS Draft for RLK, EU, Regulatory Compliance Appendix Update for DFS, removed Proxim antenna 5000007 (ETS) 2007-05-31 (draft) iii Exalt Communications Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual General Compliance and Safety The usage of radio transmission devices is subject to specific regulatory requirements governed by regional legislation. In most cases, the specific device must be authorized for use in a given country and must be installed and adjusted in accordance with specific radio-frequency settings and in a manner that has been authorized specific to the device itself in accordance with the specific location of the device. Some users may be completely or partially restricted from use of the device. Please consult local governmental agency/agencies for regulatory requirements before use, or contact Exalt or your Exalt authorized dealer for assistance. Do not modify this device in any way without the express written consent of Exalt. Modification voids the manufacturer warranty, and may also be illegal in accordance to government regulations. In addition, there are no user-serviceable parts or assemblies inside the product housing. There may also be voltages, signals, and mechanisms within the device that could be harmful to human safety. The mounting of this device and associated peripherals and connections (inclusive of antenna mast, antenna, cabling, egress, lightning protection devices, grounding, power, and so on) may be subject to regional requirements for health and human safety. A qualified professional installer and an electrician are highly recommended, and may be required by law. Exalt cannot warranty the device or be found liable for any unauthorized use or installation of the device. Safety Icons The following icons denote specific types of information. Note This symbol means take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to materials not contained in the manual. Caution This symbol means be careful. There is a risk of equipment damage or loss of data. To reduce the risk, follow the instructions. This is a general warning, caution, or risk of danger. Warning This warning symbol means there is a risk of electric shock. This situation could cause bodily injury. To reduce the risk, before working on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents. 5000007 (ETS) 2007-05-31 (draft) iv Exalt Communications Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Safety Notices 1. Review this entire guide for important installation instructions BEFORE attempting to install this product. 2. This product is intended to be installed, used, and maintained by experienced telecommunications personnel only. 3. Employ a properly licensed or authorized electrician to install or evaluate/certify the installation of all power and grounding related to the use of this equipment and all connected devices. 4. The device(s) shall only be connected to AC or DC sources within the device specifications. Use a separate breaker circuit at the power source. 5. Lightning, surge protection devices, and earth grounding are required for most installations to ensure human safety. Consult a qualified electrician. 6. Servicing of this device should be performed by authorized personnel only. Do not disassemble this device. By opening or removing any covers you may expose yourself to hazardous energy parts. Incorrect reassembly of this product can cause a malfunction, and/or electrical shock, when the unit is subsequently used. 7. Do not connect or disconnect the power connection to the device when the power supply is plugged into an AC outlet. To connect, first connect the power connection to the device, and then apply power (or plug in) at the outlet. To disconnect, disengage power at the outlet or unplug, and then disconnect the direct connection to the device. 8. Do not insert any object of any shape or size inside this product at any time, whether powered or not. Objects may contact hazardous energy components that could result in a risk of fire or personal injury. 9. Liquids shall not come in contact with, or enter the inside of the device at any time. 10. Proper ventilation and/or airflow shall be provided surrounding the equipment. Do not block any intake or exhaust vents. Items shall not come in contact with heat-sinking materials. Ensure that ambient operational and storage temperature specifications are maintained at all times. 11. Equipment is suitable for mounting on noncombustible surfaces only. 12. Do not move or alter the marking labels. 13. A CSU or similar isolating device is necessary between the equipment and the public telecommunications network. The equipment has not been evaluated for direct connection to the public telecommunications network. 5000007 (ETS) 2007-05-31 (draft) v Exalt Communications Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Exalt Limited Hardware Warranty Exalt Communications, Inc. (Exalt) warrants solely to the original purchaser (Purchaser) that the EX-5r series or the EX-4.9r Series (the Product) will substantially conform in all material respects to the relevant Exalt published specifications that apply at the time of manufacture of such Product for two (2) years from the date of tender of Product by Exalt from FOB point designated by Exalt (the Warranty Period). Proof-of-purchase in the form of an invoice, payment of invoice, or delivery waybill must be supplied, if requested by Exalt, in case of any dispute of warranty start date. Exalt shall within the Warranty Period, at its own option: (A) use reasonable efforts to remedy any reproducible Product defect covered by this limited warranty within a reasonable period of time; (B) replace the defective Product with a functionally equivalent product (repair parts and products may be either reconditioned or new, but, if reconditioned, shall be of the same quality as new parts or products); or (C) if Exalt determines that it is unable to repair or replace such Product, Exalt will refund to Purchaser the amount actually paid by Purchaser for the applicable Product. All replaced parts become the property of Exalt. Exalt may, at its sole option, refuse to accept as defective Product that (i) is subject to the exclusions set forth below; or (ii) cannot be demonstrated to be defective by Exalt and Purchaser is unable to provide adequate information describing how the Product failed. Such Product will, at Purchasers option and expense, either be: (a) returned to Purchaser in the state received, or (b) repaired and returned to Purchaser. Repaired or replaced Product will be warranted for the remainder of the original Warranty Period, but not less than ninety (90) days. Registration Purchaser is required to register its Product, within ninety (90) days of purchase, for full warranty support. Unregistered or late-registered Product will receive a Warranty Period of only one (1) year. Exclusions This limited warranty will not apply to: (A) any Product that: (i) has been modified or altered by any party other than Exalt; (ii) has been subject to accident, misuse, abnormal wear and tear, neglect, or mistreatment; (iii) has been damaged during installation of the Product; (iv) has been damaged by the equipment or system with which the Product is used; (v) has sustained damage to the Products interface or power connectors; (vi) are determined to be stolen; or (vii) has been damaged caused by fire, power changes, other hazards, or acts of God (including without limitation lightning); or (B) any software included in any such Product. The warranty applies only to Products that can be identified by the Exalt trademark, trade name, serial number or logo affixed to them. Exalt does not warrant any Product that is not manufactured by, for, or with permission from Exalt. The Products covered by this warranty are not consumer products and are not intended for personal, family, or household purposes. 5000007 (ETS) 2007-05-31 (draft) vi Exalt Communications Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual RMA Procedures A return material authorization (RMA) is required prior to returning Product to Exalt for warranty or out-of-warranty repair/evaluation. As such, Purchaser must use the following procedure:
1. Contact Exalt (see Introduction on page 1 for current contact data) and request an RMA number. Please be prepared to provide the serial number of the Product, the date of purchase, and a description of the failure that is as complete as possible. 2. Pack the Product in its original container and packing or an equivalent. 3. Write the RMA number CLEARLY on the outside of the shipping box. 4. For services during the Warranty Period, cost of shipment to Exalts authorized service center, taxes, duty, tariffs, risk of loss and insurance charges to Exalt shall be borne by the Purchaser. Cost of return shipment and insurance charges shall be borne by Exalt and will be made by Exalts choice of carrier and method/schedule of shipment. Purchaser may expedite return shipments, upon request, at its own expense. PRODUCTS RETURNED WITHOUT A DULY ISSUED RMA NUMBER WILL BE RETURNED TO PURCHASER AT PURCHASERS EXPENSE. THIS EXPRESS WARRANTY IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESSED, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, REGARDING THE PRODUCT, AND EXALT, ITS SUPPLIERS AND LICENSORS HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ALL SUCH IMPLIED AND EXPRESS WARRANTIES, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY AND ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, INTERFERENCE WITH QUIET ENJOYMENT, NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY RIGHTS AND MERCHANTABILITY. FURTHER, EXALT DOES NOT WARRANT RESULTS OF USE OR THAT PURCHASERS USE OF THE PRODUCT WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE. NO WARRANTIES ARE MADE BY EXALTS SUPPLIERS OR LICENSORS. EXCEPT FOR THE EXPRESS WARRANTY STATED HEREIN, THE PRODUCT IS PROVIDED AS IS AND WITH ALL FAULTS. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND EFFORT IS WITH PURCHASER. REGARDLESS OF WHETHER ANY REMEDY SET FORTH HEREIN FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OR OTHERWISE, AND EXCEPT FOR BODILY INJURY, IN NO EVENT WILL EXALT, ITS SUPPLIERS OR LICENSORS BE LIABLE TO PURCHASER OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY UNDER ANY TORT, CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHER LEGAL OR EQUITABLE THEORY FOR ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST OR CORRUPTED DATA, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS, OR OTHER SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT, EVEN IF EXALT HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH LOSS OR DAMAGES AND WHETHER OR NOT SUCH LOSS OR DAMAGES ARE FORESEEABLE. 5000007 (ETS) 2007-05-31 (draft) vii Exalt Communications Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual IN NO EVENT SHALL EXALTS AND ITS SUPPLIERS AGGREGATE LIABILITY EXCEED AN AMOUNT EQUAL TO THE PURCHASE PRICE OF THE PRODUCT PAID BY PURCHASER THAT IS THE SUBJECT OF A CLAIM. ANY CLAIM ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THIS AGREEMENT MUST BE BROUGHT WITHIN ONE (1) YEAR AFTER THE OCCURRENCE OF THE EVENT GIVING RISE TO SUCH CLAIM. IN ADDITION, EXALT DISCLAIMS ALL LIABILITY OF ANY KIND OF EXALTS SUPPLIERS. 5000007 (ETS) 2007-05-31 (draft) viii Exalt Communications Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Table of Contents Legal Notice.................................................................................................................................... ii Open-Source License Information.................................................................................................. ii About this Document .....................................................................................................................iii Revision History ........................................................................................................................iii General Compliance and Safety..................................................................................................... iv Safety Icons................................................................................................................................ iv Safety Notices ................................................................................................................................. v Exalt Limited Hardware Warranty................................................................................................. vi Registration................................................................................................................................ vi Exclusions.................................................................................................................................. vi RMA Procedures....................................................................................................................... vii List of Figures.............................................................................................................................. xiv List of Tables ................................................................................................................................ xv Introduction..................................................................................................................................... 1 Related Documentation and Software ........................................................................................ 1 The Exalt r-Series Digital Microwave Radios............................................................................ 1 Basic Features ............................................................................................................................. 3 Pre-installation Tasks...................................................................................................................... 6 Link Engineering and Site Planning ........................................................................................... 6 Familiarization with the r-Series................................................................................................. 7 Shipping Box Contents ........................................................................................................... 7 Back-to-Back Bench Test and Configuration............................................................................. 8 RF Output Power Setting............................................................................................................ 9 Time Division Duplex (TDD) Factors...................................................................................... 10 Link Orientation and Synchronization...................................................................................... 11 Radio A/B Configuration...................................................................................................... 11 System Installation and Initiation Process .................................................................................... 14 Record Keeping ........................................................................................................................ 16 Installation..................................................................................................................................... 17 Mechanical Configuration and Mounting................................................................................. 17 5000007 (ETS) 2007-05-31 (draft) ix Exalt Communications Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Mounting the System ............................................................................................................ 17 Radio Ports and Indicators........................................................................................................ 19 Connector Overview ............................................................................................................. 19 LED Indicators...................................................................................................................... 20 RESET Button ...................................................................................................................... 21 Power ........................................................................................................................................ 21 Terminating the RF Connectors r-(x)c Series models only)................................................. 22 AC Power.............................................................................................................................. 22 Power Injector....................................................................................................................... 23 Reset to Critical Factory Settings ......................................................................................... 24 Antenna/Transmission System.................................................................................................. 24 Initial Antenna Mounting r-(x)c Series models only)........................................................... 24 Transmission Line from Antenna to Radio r-(x)c Series models only ................................. 25 RF Lightning Arrestor........................................................................................................... 27 Antenna Alignment................................................................................................................... 28 Configuration and Management ................................................................................................... 30 Telnet into the Command Line Interface (CLI)........................................................................ 30 Connect to the Radio in a Telnet Session ............................................................................. 30 Telnet ........................................................................................................................................ 30 Exalt Graphical User Interface (GUI)....................................................................................... 31 Preparing to Connect............................................................................................................. 31 Make Connections ................................................................................................................ 32 Log In.................................................................................................................................... 32 Login Privileges.................................................................................................................... 33 Quick-Start................................................................................................................................ 34 Navigating the GUI................................................................................................................... 35 Summary Status Section ....................................................................................................... 35 Navigation Panel................................................................................................................... 36 Radio Information Page ............................................................................................................ 37 Administration Settings Page.................................................................................................... 38 System Configuration Page....................................................................................................... 40 Ethernet Interface Configuration Page...................................................................................... 44 5000007 (ETS) 2007-05-31 (draft) x Exalt Communications Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual T1/E1 Configuration Pages....................................................................................................... 45 T1 Interface Configuration Page........................................................................................... 46 E1 Interface Configuration Page........................................................................................... 47 T1/E1 Loopback.................................................................................................................... 47 File Transfer Page..................................................................................................................... 49 File Activation Page.................................................................................................................. 52 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Configuration.............................................. 53 Alarms Page.............................................................................................................................. 54 Performance Page ..................................................................................................................... 56 Event Log Page......................................................................................................................... 59 Diagnostic Charts Page............................................................................................................. 60 Spectrum Analyzer Page........................................................................................................... 61 Reboot Page .............................................................................................................................. 62 Manual Page.............................................................................................................................. 63 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................ 64 General Practices ...................................................................................................................... 64 Typical Indications of Issues .................................................................................................... 65 Improper RF Cable Termination............................................................................................... 66 Multipath Propagation .............................................................................................................. 67 RF Interference ......................................................................................................................... 67 Path Obstruction........................................................................................................................ 68 Misaligned Antenna.................................................................................................................. 68 Faulty Antenna.......................................................................................................................... 68 Improper Grounding ................................................................................................................. 68 Insufficient Link Margin........................................................................................................... 69 Moisture in the Transmission System....................................................................................... 69 Specifications................................................................................................................................ 70 Physical Specifications ............................................................................................................. 70 Common System Specifications ............................................................................................... 70 EX-4.9r System Specifications ................................................................................................. 71 System Specifications, 5.3GHz Band ....................................................................................... 72 System Specifications, 5.4GHz Band ....................................................................................... 73 5000007 (ETS) 2007-05-31 (draft) xi Exalt Communications Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual System Specifications, 5.8GHz Band ....................................................................................... 74 Interfaces................................................................................................................................... 75 Back-to-back Bench Testing......................................................................................................... 77 Basic Test.................................................................................................................................. 77 Connections EX-5r-c only .................................................................................................... 77 EX-5r Basic Test Configuration ........................................................................................... 78 Verify Connection................................................................................................................. 78 Specification Performance VerificationEX-5r-(x)c only...................................................... 78 Interface Connections ................................................................................................................... 81 T1/E1 Connections.................................................................................................................... 81 RSL & GPS Sync Connector .................................................................................................... 82 Power/Ethernet Connector........................................................................................................ 82 Copyright Notices ......................................................................................................................... 84 Net-SNMP................................................................................................................................. 84 General Regulatory Notices.......................................................................................................... 90 Dynamic Frequency Selection .................................................................................................. 90 Antennas ................................................................................................................................... 90 Region 1 Specifics ........................................................................................................................ 93 4.9 GHz Model.............................................................................................................................. 93 Federal Communications Commission (FCC), United States .................................................. 93 United States Compliance............................................................................................................. 94 Industry Canada (IC), Canada................................................................................................... 94 Antennas Supported in Canada............................................................................................. 95 Canada Compliance ...................................................................................................................... 95 EX-4.9r EIRP for the USA and Canada........................................................................................ 96 EX-5r EIRP for the US and Canada ............................................................................................. 97 5250-5350 MHz Band............................................................................................................... 97 5470-5725 MHz Band............................................................................................................... 97 5725-5850 MHz Band............................................................................................................... 98 Region 2 Specifics ........................................................................................................................ 99 Europe/ITU (ETSI and CE Mark)............................................................................................. 99 Declaration of Conformity to the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC........................................ 100 5000007 (ETS) 2007-05-31 (draft) xii Exalt Communications Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual EU WEEE ................................................................................................................................... 100 EU RoHS .................................................................................................................................... 101 Europe Compliance..................................................................................................................... 101 EX-5r EIRP by Country.............................................................................................................. 103 EX-5r EIRP by Country.............................................................................................................. 103 52505350 MHz band............................................................................................................. 103 54705725 MHz band............................................................................................................. 103 5725-5850 MHz band ............................................................................................................. 104 Index ........................................................................................................................................... 106 5000007 (ETS) 2007-05-31 (draft) xiii Exalt Communications Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual List of Figures Figure 1 Exalt EX-5r (integrated antenna model)..................................................................... 2 Figure 2 Mounting and cablingintegrated antenna model..................................................... 4 Cabling and mountingexternal antenna model ....................................................... 4 Figure 3 Figure 4 Radio installation tasks ............................................................................................. 15 Pole-mount example ................................................................................................. 17 Figure 5 EX-5r pole and wall mount (with azimuth and elevation adjustment) ..................... 18 Figure 6 Figure 7 r-c Series pole/wall mount ........................................................................................ 18 EX-5r connectors ...................................................................................................... 19 Figure 8 Figure 9 Power injector connectors......................................................................................... 23 Figure 10 CLI main menu ......................................................................................................... 30 Figure 11 Initiating the browser connection.............................................................................. 33 Figure 12 Browser Login screen ............................................................................................... 33 Figure 13 Radio Information page ............................................................................................ 34 Figure 14 Exalt GUI window description ................................................................................. 35 Figure 15 Summary status information..................................................................................... 36 Figure 16 Radio Information page ............................................................................................ 37 Figure 17 Administration Settings page.................................................................................... 38 Figure 18 System Configuration page....................................................................................... 40 Figure 19 Ethernet Interface Configuration page...................................................................... 44 Figure 20 T1 Interface Configuration page............................................................................... 46 Figure 21 E1 Interface Configuration page............................................................................... 47 Figure 22 External (remote) loopback....................................................................................... 48 Figure 23 External (local) loopback.......................................................................................... 48 Figure 24 Internal loopback ...................................................................................................... 48 Figure 25 File Transfer page ..................................................................................................... 49 Figure 26 File Transfer pagedownload file link.................................................................... 50 Figure 27 File Activation page.................................................................................................. 52 Figure 28 Alarms page .............................................................................................................. 54 Figure 29 Performance page...................................................................................................... 56 Figure 30 Event Log page ......................................................................................................... 59 Figure 31 Diagnostic Charts page ............................................................................................. 60 5000007 (ETS) 2007-05-31 (draft) xiv Exalt Communications Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Figure 32 Reboot page .............................................................................................................. 62 Figure 33 Manual page.............................................................................................................. 63 Figure 34 Basic back-to-back bench test configuration ............................................................ 78 Figure 35 Ex-5r connector orientation ...................................................................................... 81 Figure 36 T1/E1 connectors ...................................................................................................... 81 Figure 37 RSL & GPS connector.............................................................................................. 82 Figure 38 Power/Ethernet connector......................................................................................... 83 List of Tables Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Table 4 Table 5 Table 6 Connectors ................................................................................................................ 19 LED indicators.......................................................................................................... 20 Recommended transmission line .............................................................................. 25 Default login information ......................................................................................... 33 Alarm status indicators ............................................................................................. 54 Product Approvals .................................................................................................... 89 5000007 (ETS) 2007-05-31 (draft) xv Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Introduction Exalt Communications, Inc. thanks you for your purchase. Our goal is to build the highest quality, highest reliability digital microwave radio products. This commitment to quality and reliability extends to our employees and partners alike. We appreciate any comments on how we can improve our products, as well as your sales and Customer Care experience. Customer Care Hotline (USA):
(408) 871-9890 Toll-Free Customer Care Hotline (USA):
(877) EXALT-01 (392-5801) Direct-Dial Telephone (USA):
(408) 871-1804 Website:
www.exaltcom.com Sales e-mail:
sales@exaltcom.com Customer Care e-mail:
support@exaltcom.com Mailing Address:
Exalt Communications, Inc. 580 Division St. Campbell, CA 95008 USA Related Documentation and Software This manual makes reference to other documentation and software files that may be necessary. Any document or software mentioned in this manual can be found at:
http://www.exaltcom.com/support/downloads.htm The Exalt r-Series Digital Microwave Radios The Exalt r-series of Digital Microwave Radios is the most advanced carrier-class point-to-point terrestrial radio communications devices operating in the 4940 to 4990 MHz and 5250 to 5850 MHz frequency bands. The EX-5r comes in the following configurations:
r-Series has integrated software selectable polarization antenna r-c Series has external antenna connectors, which allows connection of either one single- or dual-polarized antenna (with software selectable polarization) r-x Series is a dual-radio with integrated dual-polarized antenna r-xc Series is a dual-radio with external antenna connectors designed for use with a dual-
polarized antenna, or two separate single-polarization antennas mounted for dual-
polarization. The r-Series connects voice and/or digital data from one location to another, obviating the need for copper or fiber connectivity, or enhancing existing connectivity by providing a redundancy solution, a primary solution, and/or additional capacity. Figure 1 shows the Exalt r-series Digital Microwave radio. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 1 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Exalt EX-5r (integrated antenna model) Figure 1 Generally, the r-Series requires a clear line-of-sight and proper path clearance to achieve a high-
performance, reliable connection. Perform professional path engineering and site planning before installing this equipment. The primary focus of this document is the installation and maintenance of the digital microwave radio, and assumes that path engineering and site planning has already been performed. Please refer to the Exalt document, Guidance for Engineering and Site Planning of Terrestrial Wireless Links, for detailed information on these activities. The EX-5r utilizes radio frequencies in the range of 5250 to 5850 MHz. In most countries these frequency bands are considered as license-exempt or unlicensed. This means that virtually any user may use these frequencies freely, without paying for access, or any type of pre-
notification, post-notification or registration. As a result of this designation, users may also move or change these systems at any time, with significant flexibility to the location, orientation and configuration of the system. However, due also to this designation, there may be uncontrolled interference from other similar devices that occupy this spectrum. In these cases, it is up to engineering and maintenance personnel to design the system with existing and future interference sources in mind, recognizing that there is a chance that the interference conditions could be very dynamic, and outages may occur on the system as a result, and that, in some very rare cases, the system may cause interference into another system and may be required to be disengaged or modified/re-oriented to eliminate the interference. If the spectrum in your country is designated as license-exempt or similar, this does not infer that the installer may configure the system in any manner at any location. In most cases, there are regulations, or device-based conditions that limit the use of the device, such as maximum gain antenna, antenna types and maximum output power, as well as, in some cases, application limits, limited geography of use, and other unique regulations. The link design engineer and/or professional installer must determine these limitations and engineer/install the system within the confines of all local regulations. Also, it is required to examine any regulations that may apply to peripheral equipment, installation and cabling of the system that may be regulated for human safety, electrical code, air-traffic control, and other safety-related categories. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 2 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual In certain countries, the spectrum for this product is NOT considered to be license-exempt. In these cases, there may be additional regulatory requirements concerning the location, frequency, power, orientation, configuration, and other aspects of the system, including, in some cases, a need for link registration, coordination, and fees that may apply to the system usage. Please consult your local regulatory organization(s) to determine usage requirements. The EX-4.9r utilizes frequencies in the 4940-4990MHz range, and is typically a licensed band reserved for use by Public Safety agencies and applications. This band is not generally available outside of North America. In almost all cases, either for license-exempt or other designation, the product itself must be authorized for use in your country. Either Exalt or Exalts agent must have applied for certification or authorization to allow the sale and deployment of the system within the country. It is also possible that only certain versions or configurations of the device are allowed within a particular country. Please contact Exalt or your authorized Exalt representative for information pertaining to your country. Note: It is the (professional) installers responsibility to ensure that the radio system is implemented in a legal fashion. Exalt is not liable for any unsafe or illegal installations. Basic Features The r-Series Digital Microwave Radio is intended for all-outdoor mounting. It is accompanied with an indoor-mounted power injector. In some cases, the EX-5r may also be mounted indoors or in an enclosure. Depending on the configuration purchased, the associated antenna is either integrated as part of the unit or connected separately. For the integrated antenna model, the entire unit is typically mounted on a tower or rooftop mast structure, with Ethernet/Power and other optional interface cables running from the unit location, through a structure penetration, and to the power injector and connected communications equipment. For the external antenna model, the unit is typically mounted very close to the external antenna to minimize RF cabling and associated losses. Alternatively, the unit may be mounted at an easily-accessible location with longer RF cabling to the antenna. Proper lightning or surge suppression devices and associated grounding are required for all connections. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 3 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Optional GPS Antenna Power/Ethernet Optional T1/E1 Lightning Arrestors (grounded) 1-4xT1/E1 Power/Ethernet Lightning Arrestor (grounded) Power/Ethernet Structure Penetration Power Injector Ethernet DC Power AC Adapter Figure 2 Mounting and cablingintegrated antenna model Optional GPS Antenna External Antenna
(Single or Cross-Polarized) Optional T1/E1 Lightning Arrestors (grounded) Power/Ethernet Lightning Arrestor (grounded) Structure Penetration Power/Ethernet 1-4xT1/E1 Power/Ethernet Power Injector Ethernet DC Power AC Adapter Cabling and mountingexternal antenna model Figure 3 For highest performance and reliability, it is advised to minimize the length of RF cable and associated transmission system losses between the antenna and the radios antenna port. The r-Series provides connections for a combination of the following data communication interfaces:
10/100BaseT Ethernet 4xT1/E1 interfaces for synchronous voice traffic The EX-5r is powered by a combined Power/Ethernet cable, and associated power injector. The power injector provides 48VDC to the unit. The EX-5r provides the following primary features and benefits:
5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 4 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Low-latency optimization and control for voice and data connections Very high throughput and flexible interface configurations with voice+data combinations Encryption for extreme wireless security Easy-to-use management and configuration Flexible utilized channel bandwidth selection for interference avoidance and frequency coordination Flexible center frequency tuning for interference avoidance and frequency coordination Flexible capacity to meet current connection requirements and future growth needs Carrier-class reliability and performance Advanced diagnostics monitoring and analysis tools for fast and easy troubleshooting Intuitive graphical user interface for fast and easy configuration and management 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 5 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Pre-installation Tasks This section describes the steps necessary to prepare a site for the installation of the Exalt Digital Microwave Radio. Link Engineering and Site Planning Design all terrestrial wireless links prior to purchase and installation. Generally, professional wireless engineering personnel are engaged to determine the viability and requirements for a well-engineered link to meet the users needs for performance and reliability. The reader is referred to the Exalt document, Guidance for Engineering and Site Planning of Terrestrial Wireless Links and the ExaltCalc path calculator. This document and calculator aid in the pre-planning and engineering required to determine following attributes:
Antenna type/gain at each end of the link Antenna mounting height/location for proper path clearance Antenna polarization orientation RF cabling type, length, connectors, route, and mounting Antenna system grounding Lightning arrestor type(s), location(s), and grounding Radio mounting location and mechanisms Radio grounding Radio transmitter output power setting Anticipated received signal level (RSL) at each end Anticipated fade margin and availability performance at each end Radio settings for TDD frame length and occupied bandwidth Anticipated throughput performance (TDM circuit support and Ethernet) Anticipated system latency With respect to radio path and site planning, these radios are generally identical to other microwave terrestrial wireless systems. Engineering of these systems requires specific knowledge about the radios, including:
RF specifications (transmitter output power, receiver threshold, occupied channel bandwidth, and carrier-to-interference tolerance) Regulatory limitations on transmitter output power setting and antenna type/gain Noise/interference profile for the intended location 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 6 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Impact on throughput and latency relative to link distance, occupied bandwidth, and TDD frame size setting, and the planned implementation of these parameters Familiarization with the r-Series The r-Series utilizes time division duplex (TDD) radio transmission. This means that the transmitted signal in both directions uses the same center frequency and transmits in one direction for a period of time, and then in the opposite direction for another period of time. This total period of time is referred to as the frame length or TDD frame length, and is further discussed in Time Division Duplex (TDD) Factors on page 25. The two radio terminals are identical hardware, except for the TDD setting in software. When the radios are in their default state, both radios are configured as Radio B. One end of the link must be configured as Radio A before the two ends of the radio system can communicate. It can be considered that Radio A is the primary radio in the link. Radio A provides the master clock and control to Radio B. For most applications, it is not important how the radio link is oriented, only that one end is configured for Radio A and the other for Radio B. For some applications (such as, multi-radio hub sites or repeaters), the orientation of the radio systems may be more critical. See Link Orientation and Synchronization on page 11 for details. There are two ways to configure the radios for Radio A/B determination:
1. Use the Exalt browser-based graphical user interface (GUI) preferred. 2. Connect to the radio using Telnet. Exalt recommends using the Exalt GUI for radio configuration. This interface requires a computer with an Ethernet port and web browser software, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or above. See Configuration and Management on page 30 for details on how to connect to and use the browser-based GUI interface. Shipping Box Contents Unless purchased as a spare terminal, the radios are shipped as a complete hop (that is, a radio link pair consisting of two terminals). An outer box has labeling that indicates the contents of the box, with the part number and serial number details for both radio terminals. Inside the outer box are two identical boxes, each of these boxes is also marked with the part number and serial number of the individual terminal contained inside the box. The terminal box contains the following items:
Radio terminal (configured as Radio B) AC adapter Power injector Mounting kit (for pole or wall mounting) Accessory kit
Grounding screw/washers 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 7 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual
Connector covers with safety ring (for covering and securing unused connectors)
Weather-sealing tape (required for RF connectors on the EX-5r-c)
RF connector cover (for the EX-5r-c, covering the unused RF connector, where applicable)
RSL adapter cable Registration card Quick-start guide 3-foot PoE cable (with safety ring) Inspect the outer packaging and the contents of the boxes upon receipt. If you suspect any shipping damage or issues with the contents, contact Exalt Customer Care. Note: Register your system as soon as possible. A 2-year Warranty period applies to products registered within 90 days of purchase. The Warranty period is reduced to 1-year for unregistered products and products registered after the first 90 days. The radio terminal boxes contain a single pre-terminated PoE cable intended for bench testing and to make the short connection between the radio and the PoE lightning arrestor near the radio. If running a longer cable from the radio to the PoE lightning protector (such as at the egress point), use pre-terminated cables
(sold separately). Pre-terminated cables are available in different lengths to meet a variety of applications, and can also be used for the T1/E1 connections. Back-to-Back Bench Test and Configuration Every Exalt digital microwave radio goes through extensive quality testing and performance evaluation over the full operating temperature range prior to shipment. However, before installation, it is strongly advised to perform several tests and tasks that are much more difficult to perform once the radio link endpoints are distant from one another. A back-to-back bench test and pre-configuration will provide confidence that the radio link is operational and properly configured prior to installation, so that if troubleshooting is necessary, the radio hardware and configuration settings are eliminated from the troubleshooting process. Verify the following in the back-to-back testing:
Confirm that the radio system is generally operational
Radios power-up with planned power and wiring solutions
RF link connects in both directions
Traffic passes across the link Configure connected equipment and cabling 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 8 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual
Test Ethernet (CAT5) cabling, and/or T1/E1 cabling, any auxiliary connector cabling and configure all interfaces
Configure IP settings for configuration and management
Configure passwords and security modes
Become familiar with the configuration and management interfaces through the Exalt GUI interface
Configure radio parameters
Set transmitter output power to engineered or allowed level (see RF Output Power Setting)
Set operating center frequency
Set link distance, occupied channel bandwidth, and frame length Make detailed radio performance measurements
Measure transmitter output power
Measure receiver threshold performance
Confirm unfaded error-free performance Some of these tasks may not be possible or practical within a bench test environment due to the nature of the remote connectivity of peripheral equipment. However, it is good practice to perform as much as possible in this environment to minimize field/installation time and troubleshooting efforts. Detailed performance measurements are usually not required for pre-installation, but can be easily performed at this stage and may be helpful for later troubleshooting efforts or for internal records. During troubleshooting, there may often be a point at which a back-to-back bench test should be performed to verify many or all of the above items, and in the case of a suspected faulty device, to help confirm the fault and determine which end of the system is at fault and in need of repair or replacement. Note: See Back-to-back Bench Testing on page 77 for detailed instructions. RF Output Power Setting The maximum RF output power is bounded by one of the following criteria:
Maximum RF output power setting capability of the radio device Maximum RF output power allowed/authorized by the local government regulations and for this specific device Maximum effective isotropic radiated power (EIRP) of the transmission system allowed/authorized by the local government regulations and for this specific device Desired RSL to not exceed the maximum RSL allowed by the device 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 9 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Desired RSL to minimize/eliminate interference into neighboring systems Note: In many cases the radio must be pre-configured for legal maximum output power before connecting to the antenna and transmission system. Instructions for adjusting the output power can also be found in System Configuration Page on page 40. The information on how to set the proper power for each country is based on the specific regulatory requirements based on up-to-date information for countries where these radios are authorized is in Appendix A. A list of recommended antennas is in Antenna/Transmission System on page 24. Time Division Duplex (TDD) Factors The r-Series radios are very dynamic, allowing the installer to optimize and control the performance of the radio system for the intended application. The following parameters must be carefully determined during the link engineering phase:
Link distance Bandwidth TDD frame size Mode (modulation) The setting of the above parameters determines the following performance factors:
Number of supported T1/E1 channels Ethernet throughput System latency (delay) Use the ExaltCalc calculator to determine optimum settings for the above parameters to meet the needs of your application. The following generalizations can be made with regards to these factors:
The shorter the TDD frame size, the lower the latency The shorter the link distance, the lower the latency, the higher the throughput The longer the TDD frame size, the higher the throughput The higher the bandwidth, the higher the capacity The higher the mode, the higher the capacity Note: Disable all T1/E1 ports if there are no T1/E1 interfaces connected. This shifts all available throughput to the Ethernet interface. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 10 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual If a selected combination of the Link Distance, Frame Size, Bandwidth, and Mode parameters cannot support all four T1 or E1 ports, the ports that cannot be supported are automatically disabled. Priority is placed on the T1/E1 port number. That is, the first port to be disabled, if necessary, is the highest port number, such as Port 4. Link Orientation and Synchronization Link orientation refers to the Radio A and Radio B placement in your network. Link synchronization refers to using external or internal timing to coordinate multiple links. For every link, one end of the radio link must be configured as Radio A, while the other end is configured as Radio B. In single-link systems, it does not matter which end of the system is mounted at which end of the link, and there is typically no requirement for any link synchronization. Link orientation and synchronization are more important for networks with site(s) where there is more than one link of the same type or for sites using the same type of radio that are very close to each another at one or both ends. Configure collocated radio terminals for the same link orientation. That is, configure all radios at the same location as Radio A or Radio B. In addition, it can be advantageous to utilize link synchronization for collocated links. The radios allow the use of an optional GPS synchronization kit. This synchronization controls the transmitter and receiver frame timing so that collocated radios are transmitting at the same time and receiving at the same time. This can substantially reduce the opportunity for self-
interference. Without synchronization, collocated radios may be transmitting and receiving at the same time, incurring near-end interference. Note: It is not always necessary to synchronize collocated radios. If antennas are substantially separated or blocked from one another and/or frequency separation tuning is used, the opportunity for near-end interference can be eliminated. Note: When synchronization is required or desired, one GPS kit is required for each EX-5r link in the connected or collocated network. Radio A/B Configuration Use the Exalt GUI to configure the radio terminals for Radio A and Radio B orientation. Since many other parameters also need to be set, and the Exalt GUI is needed for these configurations, this is the best way to completely configure the radio terminals. Radios arrive from manufacture in default configuration, orientated as Radio B and configured as shown in Table 1. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 11 Table 1 Factory default settings Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Parameter Frequency Transmit Power Link Distance Bandwidth Mode TDD Frame Size Link Security Key Administration Password User Password IP Address IP Mask IP Gateway Ethernet Interface T1/E1 Enabling EX-4.9r Series 4965 MHz
+4dBm EX-5r Series 5788 MHz
+4dBm
<10 miles 8 MHz Mode 1 2ms 000000000000 password password 10.0.0.1 255.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Alarm Enabled, 100/Full All Disabled Note: In many cases, the system design will not be identical to the factory default configuration, and in some cases, these differences prohibit the installation of the radio. If at all possible, obtain a computer and configure the radio terminals using the browser-based GUI. See Exalt Graphical User Interface (GUI) on page 31 for details. Radio Reset Use the reset function if the IP address and/or passwords are lost. Use the following steps to perform a critical parameter reset:
1. Remove power from the radio by disconnecting the AC adapter from the power injector. 2. Hold down RESET button on the power injector while applying power. Hold the RESET button down through the entire power cycle and monitor the DATA+POWER left LED on the power injector. Release the RESET button only after the LED is in the steady state (45 to 60 seconds). 3. Release the RESET button. The following configurations are reset on the radio:
Administration password = password IP address = 10.0.0.1 IP mask = 255.0.0.0 IP gateway = 0.0.0.0 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 12 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual User password = password Endpoint Identifier = Radio B 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 13 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual System Installation and Initiation Process The tasks required for radio installation and initiation are outlined in the following figure. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 14 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Transmission System Tasks Radio Preparation Tasks Path & Site Analysis Link Design Build Antenna Structures &
Egress Read This Manual Completely Pre-configure Radios Perform Back-to-Back Test Mount Antennas &
Transmission Line Install & Test Network &
Power Wiring Both Transmission System & Radio Preparation Tasks Must Be Complete Mount Radios Connect Transmission Line Connect Power Align Antennas to Planned RSL Verify LEDs for Good Link Test Network Connectivity Connect &
Test Primary Services Test Network Management System 15 Figure 4 Radio installation tasks 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Record Keeping After installation, record the following items for ongoing maintenance and future troubleshooting. Keep a record for each end of the radio link and store a copy of these records at the radio location, at the opposite end radio location, and a central record storage location. GPS coordinates for antenna locations at each site Antenna heights above ground level (AGL), as mounted Antenna model numbers, serial numbers, and specifications Antenna polarization as mounted Length/type of primary transmission lines at each site (r-c Series only) Model number and serial number of RF lightning arrestors (r-c Series only) Transmitter output power setting as installed at each site RSL as measured after antenna alignment at each site Designed RSL per original design at each site RSL reading with far-end power off (from each end) Spectrum analyzer plot with far end off at each site
(r-c Series only) Voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR)/return loss at the antenna connector(s) at each site Model number and serial number of PoE and/or T1/E1 lightning arrestor(s) used Length(s) of PoE and/or T1/E1 cables from radio, through lightning arrestor(s) to termination points Radios network management IP address at each site Radios network management gateway address at each site Radios operating frequency, bandwidth setting, and mode of operation Optionally purchased extended warranty and/or emergency service contract details In addition, certain information may be desired for central record-keeping only:
Security codes and login passwords (kept in a secure place) Photographs of complete installation End-user sign-off/acceptance documentation (if any) Photo of product identification label (part number, serial number, MAC address information) Site access information phone numbers, access codes, directions 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 16 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Installation This section presents all tasks required to install the Exalt Digital Microwave Radio. Mechanical Configuration and Mounting The Exalt r-Series are environmentally sealed units intended for deployment outdoors. The device must be deployed within an ambient temperature range as specified, and with non-
restrictive airflow around the chassis. The r-c and r-xc Series can also be mounted in an enclosure or indoors. The same airflow and temperature conditions apply. All r-Series models can be mounted behind a window if window losses are considered in the link budget calculation. Note: The power injector and power supply must be placed indoors or in an enclosure. Provide proper clearance for all cables and connectors attached to the device. Note that for the r-
(x)c Series, the RF cable connector may require significant clearance for the bend radius of the coaxial cable assembly. All RF connectors, cables, and adapters must be rated for operation within the radios frequency range. RF connector losses must be accounted for within the link engineering design and output power settings. Note: There are two RF connectors on the r-(x)c Series, which facilitate connection to a cross-polarized antenna for polarization diversity. Seal the secondary connector when using a single-polarized antenna. Use the N-type cover cap and weather-seal tape included in the accessory kit to weatherproof this connector. Mounting the System Use the mounting system supplied with each terminal for wall or pole mounting (Figure 5). The pole mounting kit can accommodate a pole 25"/5-13cm in diameter. Install the mounting system first, and then affix the radio to the mount. The radio can also be affixed to the mount, and the entire assembly (including radio) mounted. Figure 5 Pole-mount example 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 17 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Figure 6 illustrates the r-Series pole/wall mount assembly, showing the azimuth and elevation adjustment points. AZIMUTH ADJUSTMENT THREAD BAND CLAMPS THROUGH SLOTS FOR POLE-MOUNTING ELEVATION ADJUSTMENT USE REAR BRACKET HOLES FOR WALL-
MOUNTING Figure 6 Figure 7 illustrates the r-c Series pole/wall mount assembly. EX-5r pole and wall mount (with azimuth and elevation adjustment) THREAD BAND CLAMPS THROUGH SLOTS FOR POLE-MOUNTING USE REAR BRACKET HOLES FOR WALL-
MOUNTING r-c Series pole/wall mount Figure 7 For the integrated antenna model, it is critical to mount the entire device at the predetermined location for proper path clearance to the link end. Ensure that there is adequate space around the mounting system and the radio to allow for antenna alignment for both azimuth and elevation adjustments. Note: Mount the r-c Series as close as possible to the antenna to minimize the length and associated losses of RF cabling. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 18 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Radio Ports and Indicators This section provides a brief overview of the connectors, controls, and indicators on the device. Details about each item are in other sections of this document. Figure 8 shows the connectors on the r-Series. T1/E1 2&4 T1/E1 1&3 GPS/RSL POWER/ETHERNET EX-5r connectors Figure 8 Connector Overview The primary user interfaces are shown in Figure 8. Table 1 provides details of the connectors. Detailed pin structures for each connector are in Interface Connections on page 81. Table 1 Connectors Connector Description GPS/RSL
(1) Connection to (optional) external GPS antenna for network synchronization.
(2) Antenna alignment RSL voltage (during installation) T1/E1 2&4 Ports for up to two user T1 or E1 circuits to traverse link, port numbers 2 and 4 T1/E1 1&3 Ports for up to two user T1 or E1 circuits to traverse link, port numbers 1 and 3 Power/Ethernet Connected cables traverse to the power injector (Data+Power side), and provide the following functions:
Primary ports for user Ethernet data (10BaseT or 100BaseT) to traverse link DC power from power injector
(Ground) Threaded (M5) receptacle Note: Use a connector cover on all unused connectors for weatherproofing. The connector covers are included in the accessory kit. Use a safety ring on each connector to secure the connector covers. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 19 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual LED Indicators Table 2 provides details of the LED indicators on the r-Series radios. Note that there are two LEDs, labeled top and bottom, associated with each connector. See Alarms Page on page 54 for information on how the Exalt GUI displays LED status. Table 2 LED indicators Location Type Function T1/E1 2&4 Top T1/E1 2&4 Bottom T1/E1 1&3 Top T1/E1 1&3 Bottom GPS/RSL Top GPS/RSL Bottom Power/Ethernet Top Power/Ethernet Bottom Power Injector DATA+POWER Left Green LED Solid when T1 clocking is present for input #2. Green LED Solid when T1 clocking is present for input #4. Green LED Solid when T1 clocking is present for input #1. Green LED Solid when T1 clocking is present for input #3. Green LED
(Future implementation) Green LED
(Future implementation) Green LED Solid when proper power is applied. Green LED
(Future implementation) Green LED Solid when no alarm conditions are present. Flashing when in alarm condition. While RESET button is pressed:
Solid when in major alarm condition (traffic affecting). Flashing when in minor alarm condition (not traffic affecting). Off when no alarm conditions are present. DATA+POWER Right Green LED Solid when proper power is applied. During boot up, the DATA+POWER left LED on the power injector is solid green for approximately 30 seconds, and then turns off briefly. The antenna alignment buzzer then activates for approximately two seconds, and then the LED flashes once. After boot up 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 20 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual completes, the LED is solid when no alarm conditions are present, and flashes continuously if alarms conditions are detected. The LED remains in this state until another boot up or until alarm conditions change. RESET Button There is only one external control on the r-Series system, a button labeled RESET which is located on the Power Injector. This button performs two functions: critical system parameter reset and summary alarm information. Use the reset function if the IP address and/or passwords are lost. Use the following steps to perform a critical parameter reset:
1. Remove power from the radio by disconnecting the AC adapter from the power injector. 2. Hold down RESET button on the power injector while applying power. Hold the RESET button down through the whole power cycle and monitor the DATA+POWER left LED on the power injector. Release the RESET button only after the LED is in the steady state (45 to 60 seconds). IP address = 10.0.0.1 IP mask = 255.0.0.0 IP gateway = 0.0.0.0 3. Release the RESET button. The following configurations are reset on the radio:
Administration password = password User password = password Endpoint Identifier = Radio B A flashing left DATA+POWER LED on the power injector indicates that alarm conditions exist on the radio. To access summary alarm information during normal operation, press and hold the RESET button. The following is status for the left the DATA+POWER LED while holding the RESET:
Solid on is a link alarm (link is down or errored) Flashing indicates a minor alarm (does not affect traffic) Power The radio requires a DC power source within specifications. DC can be provided from a DC battery source, central lab/rack supply, or from the supplied AC adapter. Note: Read this section completely before applying power. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 21 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Terminating the RF Connectors r-(x)c Series models only) Before applying power, the RF connectors must be properly terminated into a 50-Ohm load. If this is not performed, the radio may be damaged by simply applying power. Also, there are human safety factors to consider regarding potentially harmful RF radiation. The following lists a few simple ways to achieve proper termination:
Connect a 50-Ohm coaxial termination device to the RF port of the radio. The termination must be rated to 1W (or more). Example(s) include:
Broadwave Technologies P/N 552-200-002, or similar Connect the complete transmission system. That is, the RF cabling including the antenna. The cabled antenna provides a proper termination for the RF output. Connect a fixed (or a series of fixed) 50-Ohm attenuator(s) to the RF connector, either directly or at the end of an RF transmission line. The attenuator must be at least 30dB as specified at the operating frequency and rated for a minimum of 1W input power. Examples include:
Broadwave Technologies P/N 352-103-xxx
Bird 2-A-MFN-xx
JFW Industries 50FP-xxx-H6-N Cover any unused connector with the connector cap and apply the weather-seal tape. Both cap and tape are included in the accessory kit. AC Power The AC adapter easily connects to the power injector. Refer to the input voltage requirements stated on the label affixed to the adapter to ensure that the adapter can be used with the AC mains supply. The AC plug outlet provided with the adapter may need to be replaced to match the country configuration. The adapter cable uses a standard connector for this cable for use of a pre-wired cable appropriate to the outlet configuration. If the appropriate cable is not available, the existing AC plug end can be severed and a replacement plug affixed. Consult a qualified electrician for this activity. Do not plug the adapter into the mains power. First, verify that the RF connector is properly terminated (see Power on page 21), and then plug in the radio-side connector from the AC adapter to the radio. If the AC mains can be turned off using a switch, disable the power, plug the AC side of the adapter into the AC mains socket, and then enable power to the circuit. If the AC mains cannot be turned off, plug in to the AC main socket to apply power. Verify that the radio is active by observing LED activity on the injector and radio. All LEDs on the radio flash at initial power cycle. Exalt strongly recommends that the AC mains supply be fused or on a separate breaker to ensure against over-voltage and/or over-current situations and to provide some form of protection to the radio electronics and other devices connected to the same supply. In addition, if the AC power is 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 22 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual subject to significant spikes or variation, power conditioning is a worthwhile investment, as the quality of mains power may have a direct impact on the device operation, performance and/or reliability. An Uninterruptible Power Source (UPS) or other form of battery-backed system protects against brown-out and black-out conditions, and condition the power presented to the adapter. Evaluate the opportunity for lightning or other similar surges to be present on the powering system, including the ability for surges to couple to the power wiring system. If an evaluation indicates that there is a potential likelihood for these conditions to occur, additional surge protection is recommended for the input power wiring, especially to protect the radio electronics between the adapter and the radios DC input connector. The above statement is similarly true for every wired connection to the device. While the configuration for surge suppression or line conditioning is of a different type for each kind of signal interface, the opportunity for damage to the device, loss of communications and property is significant. In some cases, there can also be a risk to human life by not protecting against lightning entering a building through wiring or improper grounding. If you do not have experience in this type of installation practice, consult a qualified electrician and/or telecoms professional during the installation and wiring of the equipment. Power Injector The r-Series uses a power injector to send DC power to the radio over the CAT5 cable, and including the Ethernet connections. Figure 9 shows the power injector connectors that connect the AC adapter (included with the system) and the radio. Power injector connectors Figure 9 Connect the network Ethernet connection to the DATA connection of the power injector. Connect the cable for the radio to the DATA+POWER connection of the power injector. Ground the power injector using the grounding receptacle. The injector can also be mounted to a wall using the bottom panel brackets. For proper safety, the ground source should be the same as that used for AC power ground into the included AC adapter. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 23 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Reset to Critical Factory Settings If necessary, the radio terminal may be reset to critical factory settings. This may be necessary if the IP address and/or passwords for the system are not known. All other configurations are left at their current settings. If a complete default factory configuration is desired, load the Default Configuration File into the system, as described in System Configuration Page on page 40. The following parameters are configured after a reset to critical factory settings:
Administration password = password User password = password See Radio Reset on page 12 for instructions on performing a reset to critical factory settings. Antenna/Transmission System IP Address = 10.0.0.1 IP Mask = 255.0.0.0 IP Gateway = 0.0.0.0 This section provides general guidance to the mounting and connecting of the RF transmission system, consisting of the antenna, RF cabling, and RF lightning arrestors. Consult the manufacturers instructions for proper mounting, grounding, and wiring of these devices, and for definitive direction. These manufacturers instructions supersede any information in this section. The antennas permitted are identified in Table 10. Initial Antenna Mounting r-(x)c Series models only) The antenna must be an exact model recommended by the path and site planning engineer(s). Mount the antenna at the proper height, mast/mounting location and polarization orientation as determined by the path and site planning engineer(s). The model type, location, and orientation of the antenna is critical with respect to achieving proper path clearance, as well as to mitigate external or self-interference from nearby or collocated systems operating in or near the same frequency band. Warning: Mount the antenna in a restricted area and in a manner preventing long-term human exposure to the transmitted RF energy. To comply with FCC and Industry Canada regulations, the minimum safe distance from the antenna for continuous human exposure is 10'/3m. The antenna structure must be secure and safe with respect to the mounting of the antenna, transmission system weight, radio housing, and the combined weight of any personnel that may climb or attach to the structure. The combined weight of items and forces on the structure must be carefully considered in the design and construction of the structure. This must include the weight bearing on the structure in the highest wind conditions possible in the region, and with respect to all objects affixed to the structure. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 24 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual If additional objects are affixed to the structure in the future, it may be important to evaluate both the mechanical impact of these planned additions (with respect to wind and weight loading), as well as the potential impact to RF interference and frequency coordination (if additional radio equipment is anticipated). This is especially important if future equipment is likely to operate within the same frequency band. Once the antenna is mounted, cabled, and aligned, your goal is to never require modification. This prior planning is important in the path and site planning stages and in construction of the antenna structure. Follow the antenna manufacturers instructions for mechanical mounting of the antenna. Ensure that there is enough room around the antenna for alignment activities (moving the antenna in vertical and horizontal arcs), and for the RF transmission line to connect to the antenna connector unobstructed and within the specified bend radius requirements of the transmission line. At this point, the antenna mounts should be fully secure to the structure, the feed of the antenna securely mounted to the antenna (if the feed is a separate assembly), and the azimuth and elevation adjustments not completely tightened in preparation of the antenna alignment activity. It is a good practice to connect the transmission line to the antenna connector as early in the process as possible, to reduce the opportunity for debris or moisture to enter either the antenna connector or the transmission line connector. Use a connector cover or other temporary measures to ensure that the connector is kept clear. Take extra care if the antenna is installed during inclement weather to ensure that no moisture gets inside the antenna connector at any time. Now the antenna can be aimed in the general direction required for the link. Use a compass, a reference bearing, binoculars or any other similar device to point the antenna in the direction
(generally) of the far end radio, and then slightly tighten the azimuth and elevation adjustments so that the antenna maintains its general position and is safe to be left without additional securing. Refer to the Exalt white paper, Antenna Alignment, for more information on antenna alignment techniques. Transmission Line from Antenna to Radio r-(x)c Series models only Most installations use a very short length of coaxial transmission line for the connection between the antenna and the radio device. Coaxial transmission line can either have a solid or braided shield. Solid-shield cables are more resistant to external signal coupling and interference, but are generally stiffer than braided cables. Consult the path or site engineer(s) to ensure that the proper materials are chosen for the installation and that all factors were considered. Generally, the larger the diameter of the transmission line, the lower the loss. So for longer runs of transmission line, larger diameter cables are highly advised. However, at every frequency, there is a maximum diameter cable that supports the operating frequency. Verify the specifications. This should is determined in the path and site planning process. Table 3 lists representative samples of transmission line types recommended for the Exalt Digital Microwave Radio. Table 3 Recommended transmission line Manufacturer Type Description Loss at 4.9GHz Loss at 5.3GHz Loss at 5.8GHz 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 25 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Manufacturer Type Description Loss at 4.9GHz LDF4-50 1/2-inch solid shield 5.6dB/100ft. Loss at 5.3GHz 5.7dB/100'
Loss at 5.8GHz 6.0dB/100'
Andrew Andrew Times Times RFS RFS LDF4.5-50 5/8-inch solid shield 4.3dB/100ft. 4.4dB/100'
4.7dB/100'
LMR-600 1/2-inch braided shield 6.8dB/100ft. 6.9dB/100'
7.3dB/100'
LMR-900 5/8-inch braided shield 4.5dB/100ft. 4.6dB/100'
4.9dB/100'
LCF12-50J 1/2-inch solid shield 5.5dB/100ft. 5.6dB/100'
5.9dB/100'
LCF12-58J 5/8-inch solid shield 4.4dB/100ft. 4.5dB/100'
4.8dB/100'
It is critical that the transmission line and antenna be capable of supporting the same type of connector, or easily adapted. It can be important to minimize the number of connectors and adapters, and it is ideal that they match directly without adaptation. In most cases, transmission line allows for N-type male connectors and antennas have N-type female connectors. If possible, connect the primary transmission line directly to the antenna. It is desired to have the fewest possible pieces of transmission line in the system, to minimize losses and points of failure from connectors. The antenna can typically accommodate a direct connection if planned in advance. Use a 90 adapter for the connection to the antenna, if necessary, but confirm that all connectors and transmission lines are properly specified for the operating frequency with minimum loss, proper impedance (50 Ohm) and proper VSWR characteristics. Transmission line connector termination is a critical element of the installation. Many factory built RF transmission lines do not provide the proper characteristics for proper transmission, despite their published specifications, often due to the fully or semi-automated process of factory termination, which may not have considered the frequency of your system. When buying pre-
terminated transmission line, it is strongly advised to obtain the documentation of test measurements on the connected transmission line showing that the loss characteristics and VSWR are within the specified limits specifically at your operating frequency. In addition to factory-built transmission line, self-terminated transmission line can suffer the same issues. Caution: Always follow the manufacturers termination process EXACTLY, and only use the manufacturers authorized tools and connectors for a given transmission line type. The manufacturers of transmission line typically offer instruction and certification for transmission line termination, and may also provide videos illustrating the process. There is no amount of extra care, education, precision, and effort that can be overstated for this process. There is often a need for a small excess of transmission line near the antenna to accommodate both the need for extra slack as the antenna is loosened and moved for the alignment process, and to accommodate a drip loop for the transmission line and the initial transmission line securing hardware and grounding near the antenna. In addition, the transmission line is typically very stiff, and can provide undue pulling force on the antenna or radio connector. Take care to align the cable with the connector so that it does not provide any torque or strain on the connector. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 26 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Consult your transmission line manufacturer for the proper transportation, hoisting, securing, and grounding process. Always be very mindful of the entire length of transmission line to ensure that the transmission line is never twisted, kinked, or over-bent beyond the specified bend radius. Once a transmission line is over-bent or kinked, it will likely never recover its specified characteristics, even after straightening, and will often be completely unusable. The opposite end of this primary transmission line typically terminates at the radio connector. If using a long transmission line (in excess of 3'/1m), an RF lightning arrestor is recommended to protect the radio equipment. As soon as practical, weatherproof the connected ends of the transmission line to the antenna and lightning arrestor and radio. This process should be delayed as long as possible to ensure that all systems are working properly before applying the weatherproofing. Once weatherproofing is applied, it may have to be removed for testing or installation modification. With this in mind, if the installation is occurring during inclement weather, take extra care at all times to ensure that no moisture enters any connector at any time. If moisture is suspected to have compromised the antenna or transmission line, it may render those devices useless without any means for remedy except for full replacement. Cap and weatherproof the second antenna connector on the radio if using a single-polarity antenna. Indoor Mounting On rare occasions the antenna can be mounted indoors behind a window. In these cases, there would not be a need for drip loops or an RF lightning arrestor. Use a very short transmission line connected directly between the antenna and the radio mounted nearby. The weatherproofing process can also be omitted. RF Lightning Arrestor RF lightning arrestors provide a direct path to ground for lightning strikes that may couple to or directly hit the outdoor transmission system or antenna structure. The RF lightning arrestor prevents any associated voltage and current from entering the radio equipment, other equipment, or humans. The following lightning arrestors are examples of proper devices for Exalt Digital Microwave Radios:
Polyphaser AL-LSXM Andrew BB-BNFNFE-26 Mount and ground the RF lightning arrestor in accordance to the manufacturers recommendations. Place it as close as possible to the radio equipment. Minimize the distance to the radio to lessen the opportunity for lightning to couple to or strike the unprotected section of transmission line (if any). Consult a qualified electrician or installer in all cases of grounding and lightning arrestor implementation. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 27 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Antenna Alignment Antennas must be installed at both ends of the planned link to commence precision alignment. Refer to the Exalt white paper, Antenna Alignment. The r-Series has an integrated antenna. Antennas are typically aligned using the radio hardware for precise alignment. However, there are many very useful tools available to aid in this process, inclusive of devices specifically designed for the purpose of aligning antennas. Some examples are:
XL Microwave Path Align-R Teletronics 17-402 Use of these devices may be extremely advantageous as compared to using the radio, because they employ many unique facilities to aid in this process. Using these tools also makes it possible to align the antennas before the radio equipment is delivered. However, many installers successfully use the radios as the means for antenna alignment. The following are the primary facilities when using the radio to align the antenna:
RSL voltage connection using a volt meter (recommended) Insert the included adapter into the GPS connector on the radio housing and the opposite end connected to a volt meter. The RSL test point DC voltage is inversely proportional and numerically calibrated to the received signal level. The voltage rises as the antennas are less in alignment, and falls as antennas are more in alignment. The voltage measurement corresponds to the received signal level in measurements of dBm (a negative number for RSL measurements). For example, an RSL of -60dBm yields an RSL voltage measurement of 0.60VDC; an RSL of -45dBm measures 0.45VDC. Audio alignment buzzer Enable the audio alignment buzzer through the Exalt GUI. When enabled, the radio enclosure emits a sound. The pitch rises when higher (better) levels of RSL are achieved. Align the antennas until the highest pitch is accomplished. The tone is continuous when the two ends of the radio system are in communication. Otherwise, the buzzer beeps. Exalt GUI RSL reading indicates the current RSL in dBm. Note: There is a slight delay in RSL readings in the GUI as the RSL levels change. In this case, fine alignment can be done in small adjustments allowing a small gap of time so that the impact of the adjustment on the GUI display catches up to real time. Note: Only use the browser-based GUI for antenna alignment if there are no other means available. If this method is required, refer to Exalt Graphical User Interface (GUI) on page 31. The RSL reading can be read on a PC or any 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 28 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual handheld computing device that supports an HTML browser and Ethernet connectivity. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 29 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Configuration and Management This section describes the command line interface (CLI) and Exalt graphical user interface
(GUI). Telnet into the Command Line Interface (CLI) Use a Telnet connection to access the CLI in the Exalt Digital Microwave Radios. Use the CLI to set key parameters on the system. Connect to the Radio in a Telnet Session Make the Telnet connection to the radio through the Ethernet port. Use Windows and perform the following steps:
1. Open a command prompt or MS-DOS prompt (Start>Run). 2. Type C:\>Telnet <IP Address> at the command line:
The default IP address is 10.0.0.1 Note: The accessing computer must be on the same IP subnet as the radio. Telnet Use Telnet when prompted to enter the administration level login and password. The default administration login is admin and password is password. It is recommended that the default administration password be reset by performing a radio reset (see Reset to Critical Factory Settings on page 24). Figure 10 shows the three menu choices available after log in. CLI main menu Figure 10 Select 1 or 2 to display the Configuration or Status menus, respectively. Select 3 to exit the session. The following selections can be made on all screens:
0 = back to previous screen 9 = help 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 30 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Ctrl+\ (control and backslash keys) = exit session The following depicts the complete tree structure:
1. Radio information 2. Configuration a. Current IP settings b. Current system configuration c. Set IP address and mask (admin only) d. Set IP default gateway (admin only) e. Administration (admin only) System time and date System reboot Password File transfer File activation 3. Status
Alarm summary
Radio alarm
Radio status
Radio performance
Radio performance reset (admin only) 4. Exit Exalt Graphical User Interface (GUI) The Exalt GUI is the primary user interface for configuring and troubleshooting the radio and radio system. A computer or hand-held device with a conventional HTML browser and Ethernet port is required. Microsoft Internet Explorer is the preferred browser. Netscape, Mozilla, and Firefox are also supported. Preparing to Connect If the radios are new, both radios are preconfigured as Radio B, and have the same IP address. The initial priority is to configure one radio to Radio A and assign different IP addresses, unique to each radio. There are two ways to change the IP address:
1. Reset the radio to the critical default factory settings (see Radio Reset on page 12) 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 31 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual 2. Connect to the GUI using the default IP address (10.0.0.1), and change the IP address through the GUI interface. Note: To connect to the radios Ethernet port and use the GUI interface, the accessing computer must match the radios IP address subnet. It is therefore necessary to either change the radios IP address through the CLI to match the subnet of the computer, or change the computers IP address to match the subnet of the radio (such as, a computer IP address of 10.0.0.10 if trying to connect to a radio set to the factory default IP address of 10.0.0.1). To configure a radio as Radio A, connect to the GUI and change the configuration, as discussed in this section. Make Connections It is recommended that one radio at a time be configured, on a bench, before taking the radios to the field for installation:
(EX-5r-(x)c only) Terminate the RF connector with a 50-Ohm termination or a fixed attenuator of at least 20dB (see Terminating the RF Connector on page 22). Apply power to the radio (see Power on page 21). Note: Do not connect the radios in a back-to-back configuration. If the radios are set to their factory default settings, both radios are configured as Radio B and cannot communicate. Both radios also have the same IP address, which causes IP address conflicts. Note: The IP address subnet of the accessing computer must match the radios IP address subnet to connect using Ethernet (see Preparing to Connect). Once connected to the radio using Ethernet, log in to the Exalt GUI. Log In Use the following steps to log in to the Exalt GUI. 1. Open a browser window. Microsoft Internet Explorer is the recommended browser. Netscape, Mozilla, and Firefox are also supported. If there are issues with your browser, please report it to Exalt Customer Care. You may be required to use a different browser to immediately overcome issues. 2. Type the IP address of the radio in the address bar. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 32 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Figure 11 Initiating the browser connection The following window displays after pressing the Enter key or clicking the Go button in the browser window. Browser Login screen Figure 12 Login Privileges There are two levels of login privileges:
Administrator (admin) assigned complete permissions to view, edit, and configure User (user) assigned limited, view-only permissions with no edit or configuration rights The default login names and passwords are as follows:
Table 4 Default login information Privilege level User name Default password Administrator User admin user password password Administrator login credentials are required for configuration purposes. Type the user name and passwords for Administrator level and click OK. The following screen displays. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 33 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Radio Information page Figure 13 Quick-Start To establish a link on the bench, apply the following basic configurations to the radio terminal. Use the steps in the Quick Start Guide included with the radio. A summary of the items that need to be configured are:
Radio IP address for each end.
Each end must have a different IP address and cannot match the accessing computers IP address or any address assigned if radios are part of a larger network.
It may be required to change the IP address of the accessing computer after changing the IP address of the radio so that the IP subnet matches.
The radio IP address is listed on the Administration Settings page. Set one radio as Radio A.
The radio selected as Radio A must be configured.
Radio A/B selection is the Endpoint Identifier parameter on the System Configuration page.
Even though both radios are set as Radio B by default, confirm this configuration on the radio intended to be Radio B. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 34 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual If all other parameters are still configured at their factory default settings, the radios can now be connected back-to-back to verify that the link is communicating and perform any other desired tests. See Back-to-back Bench Testing on page 77 for test information. Navigating the GUI describes each page of the GUI. Most configuration parameter settings are intuitive. The following link parameters must match at both ends for the link to communicate:
Link Security Key (Administration Settings page) Bandwidth (System Configuration page) RF Frequency (System Configuration page) Link Distance (System Configuration page) TDD Frame Size (System Configuration page) Note: Changing any of these parameters causes a temporary loss of link. The GUI displays a warning and provides an opportunity to cancel changes. Navigating the GUI The GUI provides the primary interface for all configuration and management. There are three sections of the main GUI window:
Summary status information section (upper-left corner) Navigation panel Main window SUMMARY STATUS NAVIGATION PANEL MAIN WINDOW Exalt GUI window description Figure 14 Summary Status Section This section of the Exalt GUI provides a review of the system status. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 35 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual In the screens in Figure 15, the top bar illustrates the alarm condition of the link. The information inside the bar is equivalent to the entry of the Link Name set by the administrator in the Administration Settings page (see Administration Settings Page on page 38). The color of the panel indicates alarm status:
Green indicates the system is communicating and all functions are normal Yellow indicates a minor non-traffic affecting alarm condition Red indicates a major traffic affecting alarm condition The left panel summarizes the alarm conditions of the local radio (the radio that matches the IP address). The information displayed is the IP address and the endpoint identifier (Radio A or Radio B). The right panel summarizes the alarm conditions of the remote radio (the radio linked to the local radio). Note: The local radio might be the near-end or the far-end radio, depending on the management interface connection. The terms local and remote refer to the orientation of the radio terminals relative to the IP address you are managing. When making certain changes to a near-end radio without first making changes to the far-end radio, the link may become disconnected unless configuration changes are reverted to their original settings. When making changes that may disrupt the link, always change the far-end radio first, and then the near-end radio to match. The Summary Status Section allows the Exalt GUI to be a rudimentary management system. Minimize the browser window to display just the top bar or the top bar and radio information, and open several browsers on the desktop. When a window status changes to yellow or red, you can quickly maximize that window to determine the issues. Summary status information Figure 15 Navigation Panel In the navigation panel, pages with sub-pages have a plus (+) to the left of the page link. Click the plus sign or page name title to view sub-page titles. The pages can be collapsed to hide the sub-pages when a minus () sign appears to the left of the page link. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 36 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Management pages are indicated with an X to the left of the page name. Click the X or page name to display the page within the main window. Radio Information Page This page provides general information about the local radio terminal. This information is helpful for troubleshooting and for record keeping. Figure 16 Radio Information page 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 37 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Administration Settings Page This page allows contains general parameters for the radio system. The Current Value column lists entries actual settings. Desired changes are entered in the New Value column. After all desired changes are entered, click the Update button to accept and enable changes. Administration Settings page Figure 17 Most entries on this page are self-explanatory. The following lists unique or important parameters. Fill in the date and time fields as soon as practical. Events are captured with time/date stamps, which is valuable information for troubleshooting. Set the Link Security Key to something other than the factory default setting (12 characters, all zeros) at each end. The link security key must match at both sides of the link. If the 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 38 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual security key remains at the factory setting, the radio link is open to sabotage by a party with the same radio model. Each link should have a unique security key. If using the same security key for every link in the network, the radio could link to any other radio with the same security key. This is problematic in multi-radio networks.
Note that the security key must be exactly 12 characters. Any printable ASCII character can be used. The link security key is case sensitive. Note: Changing the link security key interrupts transmission until the opposite end is changed to match. Always change the far-end radio first, and then change the near-end radio. Reset the admin and user passwords. These passwords should not match. If the admin password remains at the factory default setting, it provides an opportunity for random reassignment by a network-connected user.
The new password must be entered twice: once in the main window and again in the confirmation window. If the passwords do not match and the Update button clicked, the password is not changed and remains set to the previous password. The License Key is set to all zeros. Enter the license key provided by Exalt to access extended features or diagnostic capabilities. Click Update to accept the changes and enable the new features. License keys are issued by radio serial number, so ensure that the license key used was issued for this particular radio. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 39 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual System Configuration Page This page contains several critical system parameters. System Configuration page Figure 18 Most entries on this page are self-explanatory. The following lists unique or important parameters. Set the Radio Transmit Power (dBm) parameter to the designed level. The professional installer sets this value or dictates the value of this setting to the system administrator following the system design and local regulations. In many cases, this value must be set to a proper value to comply with legal restrictions. Improper values can result in liability to the user and/or installer. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 40 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Note: Changing Radio Transmit Power may temporarily interrupt traffic. Small changes in output power do not normally interrupt traffic, but larger changes may.
Do not adjust the Radio Transmit Power parameter to a value higher than is legally allowed.
Do not adjust the Radio Transmit Power parameter lower than the link budget and fade margin can afford. The link may be lost and unrecoverable through GUI control. If the link is lost due to reduction of Radio Transmit Power, travel to the radio location(s) may be required to reset the value. Set the Bandwidth (MHz) parameter to the designed level. The value of this is determined in the design/engineering stage. The Bandwidth parameter must also match at both ends of the link. In conjunction with the Mode parameter, the Bandwidth parameter directly relates to the capacity, latency, and the number of TDM circuits supported. The transmitter and receiver bandwidth are modified using this parameter, making it critical that it be set with respect to the local RF noise and interference profile, and/or in relation to any multi-link network design. Note: Changing Bandwidth will temporarily interrupt traffic. The Bandwidth parameter must match at each end. Adjust the far-end radio first, and then the near-end radio. Changing Bandwidth changes the radios threshold. A narrower bandwidth has better threshold performance and improved interference immunity, therefore if changing to a wider bandwidth, there is an opportunity that the link may be lost and unrecoverable through GUI control. Check the available fade margin and interference profile to determine if the impact to threshold and increased bandwidth is acceptable to maintain the link and the desired performance. If the link is lost due to increasing the Bandwidth parameter, travel to the radio location(s) may be required to reset the value. Set the Mode parameter to the designed selection. The value of this setting is determined in the design/engineering stage. The Mode parameter must match at both ends of the link. In conjunction with the Bandwidth parameter, the Mode parameter setting directly relates to the capacity of the system, as well as critical RF parameters, including receiver threshold, carrier-to-interference ratio, and in some cases, maximum radio transmit power. Note: Changing Mode will temporarily interrupt traffic. The Mode setting must match at each end. Adjust the far-end radio first, and then the near-end radio. Changing Mode changes the radios threshold, carrier-to-interference ratio, and also may have impact on the Radio Transmit Power. A lower mode has better threshold performance and carrier-to-interference ratio, and in some cases, higher output power, therefore if changing to a higher mode (for example, from Mode 1 to Mode 2), there is an opportunity that the link may be lost and unrecoverable through GUI control. Check the available fade margin and interference profile, 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 41 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual and determine if the impact to RF performance is sufficient to maintain the link and desired performance. If the link is lost due to increasing the Mode parameter, travel to the radio location(s) may be required to reset the value. Set the RF Frequency (GHz) parameter to the designed point. The value of this setting is determined in the design/engineering stage. RF Frequency must match at both ends of the link. It may be critical to set RF Frequency with respect to the local RF noise and interference profiles, and/or in relation to any multi-link network design. The frequency selection section includes the ability to select from either the complete list of frequencies (All) that can be tuned for the selected band and bandwidth, or a pre-selected list of non-overlapping center frequencies (Preferred) that Exalt determined provides the most flexible collocation opportunities for large networks of Exalt radios The frequency selection section includes a band selection button that must be enabled for the frequency band of operation for which the link was engineered. In some cases, some bands may not be selectable due to regulatory constraints. Note: Changing RF Frequency will temporarily interrupt traffic. The RF Frequency parameter setting must match at each end. Adjust the far-end radio first, and then the near-end radio. If the RF Frequency parameter is changed to a frequency with interference, the link may be lost and unrecoverable through GUI control. If the link is lost due to changing the RF Frequency parameter, travel to the radio location(s) may be required to reset the value. Set the Endpoint Identifier so that one end of the link is set to Radio A and the opposite end set to Radio B. In single-link networks, it is unimportant which end is designated A or B. In multi-link networks, however, it may be important to orient the links so that at any collocation site (where there are multiple radios of the same type at the same site), all radios are set to the same Endpoint Identifier (A or B). See Link Orientation and Synchronization on page 11. Note: Changing Endpoint Identifier parameter requires a reboot of the radio to take effect. The reboot temporarily interrupts traffic. Set the Link Distance (miles) parameter to the range that is equal to or greater than the actual link distance. The value of this setting is determined in the design/engineering stage. Note: Changing Link Distance parameter will temporarily interrupt traffic. The Link Distance setting must match at each end and must not be less than the actual link distance. Adjust the far-end radio first, and then the near-end radio. If the Link Distance parameter is changed to a setting less than the actual distance, the link may be lost and unrecoverable through GUI control. If the link is lost due to this situation, travel to the radio location(s) may be required to reset the value. If the Link Distance parameter setting is set to a distance unnecessarily higher than the actual link distance, the radio may have substantially reduced performance with respect to throughput and latency. 42 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Set the TDD Frame Size (ms) parameter to the designed level. The value of this setting is determined in the design/engineering stage. The TDD Frame Size parameter must match at both ends of the link. The TDD Frame Size parameter setting directly relates to the capacity, latency, and number of TDM circuits that can be supported over the given link distance. In multi-link networks, especially where there are collocated links, it is also important to set all radios to the same TDD Frame Size setting to avoid self-interference. Future enhancement:
The GPS or internal sync function may be necessary for these networks. See Time Division Duplex (TDD) Factors and Link Orientation and Synchronization for more information. Note: Changing the TDD Frame Size parameter will temporarily interrupt traffic. TDD Frame Size parameters must match at each end. Adjust the far-end radio first, and then the near-end radio. If the TDD Frame Size parameter is set to a value that cannot be supported for the link distance, the link may be lost and unrecoverable through GUI control. If the link is lost due to this situation, travel to the radio location(s) may be required to reset the value. Antenna Port parameter
r-c Series only: The antenna port selection allows selection of either the A or B connector on the front face of the radio housing. Only set this parameter if using a dual-polarized antenna or two separate antennas.
r-Series only: The antenna port selection toggles between the vertically and horizontally polarized integrated antennas. Ensure that both link ends match polarization. Note: Changing antenna port will temporarily interrupt traffic. The polarization of the antennas at each end must match at each end adjust the far-
end radio first, then the near-end radio. Buzzer Timeout (minutes) parameter creates an audio signal for antenna alignment. Turn on the buzzer continuously during antenna alignment or preset a period of time that the buzzer will sound. If the buzzer stops before alignment activities are complete, change the selection and press the Update button or select the ON option until alignment activities are complete. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 43 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Ethernet Interface Configuration Page This page allows the administrator to set the alarm, and duplex settings of the Ethernet connection. Ethernet Interface Configuration page Figure 19 To ignore Ethernet alarms, disable the alarming of the MAIN connector. Set the Ethernet interfaces on the radio and connected equipment to 100/full-duplex for best performance. If the Ethernet ports are set to auto-negotiation, poor throughput performance may be a result, as well as intermittent disconnections of the Ethernet connection. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 44 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual T1/E1 Configuration Pages These pages allow the administrator to selectively enable or disable the T1 or E1 circuits, one at a time. For enabled T1/E1 circuits, additional configuration, including loopback functions, are available. Disable the unused T1 or E1 so that the alarms are turned off and more throughput is allocated to the Ethernet interface. Every enabled T1 or E1 input, even if there is no T1 or E1 signal present, reduces the aggregate throughput of the Ethernet interface by roughly 3Mbps (for T1) or 4Mbps (for E1). This page toggles between T1 and E1, as required, by clicking the Set to T1 or Set to E1 button. A warning displays that a reboot is necessary, and the radio reboots if the administrator continues. This will interrupt traffic. It may be necessary to re-login to the radio after the reboot completes. T1/E1 mode self-coordinates across the link if the link is active. This means that it only needs to be set while connected at one end. In addition, enabling and disabling T1/E1 circuits also self-coordinates across the link if the link is active. If a link is not active and T1/E1 enabling is a mismatch when a link is first created, the Radio A configuration for T1/E1 enabling supersedes the settings on the Radio B configuration, and changes the settings on Radio B. Note: Certain combinations of the TDD Frame Size, Link Distance, Mode, and Bandwidth parameter settings limit the number of T1/E1 circuits that can be carried by the radio. In these cases, certain fields on the T1/E1 Interface Configuration pages are not available, starting with the highest port number. For example, for a 4x T1/E1 radio version, if only three (3) circuits can be carried, port 4 is not available for configuration and is disabled. If only two circuits can be carried, both ports 3 and 4 are not available. Increasing the TDD frame size and Mode parameters, and/or increasing the Bandwidth parameter results in an increase in the supported number of T1/E1 circuits. For -16models, the highest number channels that are configurable (based on the currently installed license key) are disabled if they cannot be supported with the current settings. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 45 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual T1 Interface Configuration Page This page allows the administrator to enable/disable each individual T1 channel, set the Line Build Out (LBO), Line Code (either AMI or B8ZS), and AIS enabling/disabling for each input. If enabled, the radio places an AIS code on the output of the associated interface if and when the link fails or when there is no T1 signal available from the far end to provide the user at the local end. Loopback controls are also provided (see T1/E1 Loopback on page 47). Figure 20 T1 Interface Configuration page 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 46 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual E1 Interface Configuration Page This page allows the administrator to enable/disable each individual E1 channel. The AIS can also be enabled and disabled for each input. If enabled, the radio places an AIS code on the output of the associated interface if and when the link fails or when there is no E1 signal available from the far end to provide the user at the local end. Loopback controls are also provided (see T1/E1 Loopback). E1 Interface Configuration page Figure 21 T1/E1 Loopback Loopback is provided for any enabled T1 or E1 port. As shown in Figure 22 and Figure 23, the choices are:
No Loopback (default) External (local) External (remote) Internal Note: Only one Internal loopback can be enabled at any time. All loopback configurations control the loop at the Line Interface integrated circuit, which is the device wired directly to the front panel ports. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 47 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual External loopback modes are used in conjunction with an external test source. The designation of local or remote refers to where the loopback is occurring relative to the location where the loopback is implemented. That is, on the radio being accessed, if External (remote) is selected, this loops the signal back at the remote radio interface back towards the local radio. Likewise, if External (local) is selected, the signal loops back at the local interface towards the remote radio
(Figure 22 and Figure 23). LOCAL REMOTE IN OUT Figure 22 External (remote) loopback LOCAL REMOTE IN OUT IN OUT IN OUT External (local) loopback Figure 23 When a local T1/E1 port is configured for External (remote) loopback, it is the same as configuring the remote radio for External (local) loopback. Internal loopback uses an internal test source, and sends the test source signal across the link, looped at the remote radios interface, returned to the local radio, and looped at the local radios interface back to the source. The inputs at both ends are looped back at the line level. Figure 24 illustrates the internal loopback function. LOCAL REMOTE IN OUT IN OUT Figure 24 Internal loopback 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 48 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual File Transfer Page This page allows the administrator to upload and download files to and from the radio. Two types of files can be uploaded: configuration and radio firmware. When uploading Configuration Files, current configuration parameters are immediately overwritten, and the unit automatically reboots. When uploading radio firmware files, the file is placed into reserve memory space. After the new radio firmware file uploads, use the File Activation page to enable the files (see File Activation Page on page 52). Up to three types of files can be downloaded: configuration, radio firmware, and MIB. The MIB file refers to the Management Information Base related to the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) function, and is only available on models which support SNMP. See Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) on page 53 for more information. Note: Check the File Activation page before uploading radio firmware files. New file uploads overwrite the secondary file location. If important files reside in the primary or secondary file location, download them before uploading the new files. Only the active radio firmware file can be downloaded. Therefore, to download the reserve file, it must first be activated (using the Swap button). See File Activation Page on page 52. Figure 25 File Transfer page 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 49 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Use the following steps to download a file. 1. Select the type of file to download (configuration or radio firmware). 2. Click the Download button and wait for the radio to prepare the file for download. For the MIB file download, a second page/link appears (Figure 26). 3. Left-click the link on the page to download the file to a desired location. File Transfer pagedownload file link Figure 26 File download and upload is useful when configuring several radios with similar settings. A copy of the configuration file can also help restore radio settings. In addition, a copy of the Exalt default configuration file is helpful to restore the radio to factory settings. Note: Do not change the name of any download file. The configuration file must be named config.nv. To keep track of multiple configuration files, use a folder naming system or temporarily rename the file, however, it must be named config.nv before it can be uploaded to a radio. Never change radio firmware file names under any circumstances. If copying the same configuration file into multiple radios, take as some parameters will match and that may be undesirable. However, it may be easier to change just a subset of parameters rather than every parameter. The following parameters can cause problems or confusion if they match at each of a link:
Radio Name 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 50 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Endpoint Identifier IP Address IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway The following parameters can match at both ends of the link:
Link Name Link Security Key (although each link should be different) Admin and User passwords Bandwidth RF Frequency Link Distance TDD Frame Size T1/E1 configurations Ethernet configurations 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 51 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual File Activation Page Use this page to move stored or uploaded files for use on the radio. The page indicates which file is currently in use, and which file is available for use. Click the Swap button to place the file in the Alternative File column into the active state and move the file in the Current File column to the Alternative File column. Figure 27 File Activation page Note: In all cases, the radio reboots after a new file is selected using the Swap function. This places the radio out of service for a short time. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 52 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Configuration Use SNMP to manage networked devices and execute the following functions:
GET: Obtain information from the device, such as a configuration setting or parameter. SET: Change a configuration setting on the device. TRAP: The device proactively informs the management station of a change of state, usually used for critical alarms or warnings. Note: Currently the SNMP implementation does not support TRAP functions. For critical alarms, use the GET command for specific alarm conditions. One feature of the SNMP implementation is that system configuration changes do not take effect using the SET command. Instead, groups of configuration settings can be preconfigured for global change, and a single Save (Commit) command implements all changes. When some parameters are changed, a link may drop and/or management control lost. MIB files allow many parameters to be set at once, allowing only a temporarily dropped link or management control issue. The opposite end radio can be quickly reconfigured, with little downtime for the link and management control. The save (Commit) command is similar to the Update button. Dropped links or management control issues do not occur with every parameter change. Many configuration changes do not impact traffic or management access. EX-series radios utilize SNMPv3, a high security version of SNMP, to ensure secure access to and storing of management data. The SNMPv3 security string matches the admin and user passwords. Passwords must be eight characters or longer. Note: Currently not all EX-series radios implement SNMP. Check the software release notes to verify that the function is available. Generally, the radio supports SNMP when MIB files are listed on the File Activation Page. The SNMP MIBs are organized similar to the GUI. Become familiar with the GUI before using the SNMP function. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 53 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Alarms Page This page provides an easy-to-read summary of the alarm status of both local and remote radios. The colors on this page reflect the color of the alarms displayed on the radio front panel. However, additional detail displays on this page to aid in quick assessment of issues and status. Alarms page Figure 28 Table 5 lists alarm status conditions that appear on this page. Table 5 Alarm status indicators Label Link Status Indicates RF link status:
Green Solid = Error-free connection (BER<10e-6) Yellow Solid = Errored connection (10e-3>BER >10e-6) Red Solid = No link (BER>10e-3) Ethernet Main Green Solid = Data present Off = No data present 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 54 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Label Status T1/E1 Input Green = Enabled and connection present (clocking confirmed) Red = Enabled and no connection present Grey = Disabled or unavailable due to configuration Temperature Green Solid = Normal temperature range Yellow Solid = Exceeding normal temperature range The Temperature alarm monitors the internal temperature of the unit based on specific points inside the radio chassis. It is normal for the internal temperature to be above the ambient temperature, so the temperature reading may be higher than the highest specified ambient temperature. When the internal electronics reach a point that is higher than the normal temperature rise at the highest ambient temperature, the temperature alarm turns yellow. Power down the radio as soon as possible, and investigate the cause of the temperature rise before the radio is put back into service. In almost all cases, a temperature alarm is due to an external cause. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 55 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Performance Page This page provides statistical information about the performance of the system in relation to the integrity of the user data and the RF link. Figure 29 The Current BER field indicates the current bit error rate of the link. If the link is operating Performance page perfectly, this should indicate zero. Generally, the link should remain at a BER less than 1x10-6 (1 bit out of every million bits errored). This is the threshold performance specification and the standard to which the link was engineered. However, radio links can and are affected by weather, interference, and other external sources and will occasionally have a higher error rate. A link remains operational unless the BER exceeds 1x10-3 (1 bit out of every hundred bits errored). Consult the link design engineer for an understanding of the predicted error rate of the radio link as it has been designed. Many applications are unaffected by bit errors, but TDM circuits (for example, T1 or E1) are more sensitive. Also, if the link operator is providing a service guarantee, this value may need to be monitored or examined in cases of service issues. The behavior of BER in relation to other alarms or measurements and external events can be very helpful in troubleshooting activities. Current RSL is the measurement of the received signal level at the radio antenna port. This is the measured level of the RF signal coming from the opposite end of the radio link. The link was engineered to a specific RSL by the link design engineer, and this RSL should be obtained during installation and remain relatively stable during the operation of the link. RSL 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 56 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual can and will vary as a result of weather changes and other external sources, such as path obstructions. Once again, this variation was part of the original design to achieve a certain level of performance over time. Bit errors occur when the RSL falls to a level within roughly 3dB of the threshold specification. When the RSL falls below the threshold specification, the link disconnects and will not reconnect until the RSL is above the threshold specification. The behavior of RSL in relation to other alarms or measurements and external events can be very helpful in troubleshooting activities. Errored Seconds (ES) indicates the total number of seconds that occurred where there was at least one bit error since the last time that the radio statistics counter was reset. Generally, ES are not a significant concern, so long as they are not continuous or above the anticipated performance based on the original link engineering goals. If ES are continuous or at a high rate, this is normally an indication of poor link performance due to poor RSL or interference, or severe impact by weather or other environmental factors. However, similar to the performance factors previously listed, ES can and will occur in any radio link. Once again, consult the link engineer to determine the original design goals, and compare actual performance to these expectations to determine if any improvements are necessary or if other problems may be causing excessive ES. Note: Unavailable Seconds do not register as ES. In other words, the ES counter counts all seconds that are errored NOT INCLUDING the seconds that were classified as unavailable. The total number of seconds with errors or outages is the sum of ES and Unavailable Seconds. Unavailable Seconds (also called UAS) are similar to ES, but this counter keeps track of every second where the bit error rate equals or exceeds 1x10-3, as well as any seconds where there is a complete loss of radio communication, over the period since the last counter reset. If Unavailable Seconds are continuous or at a high rate, this is normally an indication of poor link performance due to poor RSL or interference, or severe impact by weather or other environmental factors. However, similar to the performance factors listed above, Unavailable Seconds can and do occur in any radio link. Consult the link engineer to determine the original design goals, and compare actual performance to these expectations to determine if any improvements are necessary or if other problems may be causing excessive Unavailable Seconds. Minimum RSL indicates the worst (lowest) received signal level that occurred since the last counter reset. It is helpful to know if the RSL dropped significantly from the normal level, or has reached a level near or below threshold. Minimum RSL Timestamp indicates the date and time when the Minimum RSL occurred. This is helpful for general troubleshooting, and especially comparing to items in the event log or diagnostic charts from the same time period. Maximum RSL indicates the best (highest) RSL that occurred since the last counter reset. This indicates the best performance of the radio link, which is normally equal to the installed value, and is usually the designed value. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 57 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Time Since Reset indicates the amount of time passed since the last counter reset. This helps to quantify the seriousness of other statistics, such as ES and Unavailable Seconds, if there have been high numbers of ES and/or Unavailable Seconds over a relatively short period of time. Each end of the link statistics on this page can be independently reset using the Reset Statistics button for the local or remote radio. It is good practice to reset the statistics at the time that the link is commissioned (after all antenna alignment is complete and stable RSL at designed levels is achieved, and no more system reboots are anticipated). Make a habit of viewing this page regularly, make records of the performance, and reset the statistics so that the counters can more precisely pinpoint issues. Note: Resetting statistics from one end also resets the statistics for the same radio at the opposite end. That is, if the Local statistics are reset, logging into the remote end shows the Remote statistics on that end (which is the local radio in the first condition) as being reset at the same time. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 58 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Event Log Page Use this page to review a list of the events logged by the radio. The following items are listed in the event log:
Alarms Alarms clearing (Normal) Radio Reboots Every event is tagged with the time that the event occurred, and a severity and type. The event log also allows filtering to limit the view of the log to the lowest level of desired information. For example, a filter level of Minor displays Minor, Major, and Critical severity events. The log contains the last 200 events. Events are deleted on a FIFO basis, erasing the oldest entries to make room for the newest entries. The event log can be cleared and be downloaded from the radio (some models may require a software upgrade to enable this feature). A screen capture of the browser window can serve as a useful record. Figure 30 Event Log page 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 59 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Diagnostic Charts Page Use this page as an aid in troubleshooting. This page illustrates the historical (and current) performance for three parameters: RSL, Radio Temperature, and BER. The horizontal scale illustrates 120 points of time measurement and is synchronized on all three graphs. The scale displays in minutes, hours, or days from the last two hours (120 minutes), five days (120 hours), or four months (120 days). All information is stored, so all of these periods are available for short- and long-term performance analysis. The right side of a graph represents the most recent measurement, and data marches from the right-to-left at every interval. The vertical scale of each chart independently scales to show the maximum resolution based on the maximum variation of the data over the selected time measurement. Diagnostic Charts page Figure 31 Use the cursor to point to any spot on any of the three charts, and all three charts illustrate the measurements taken for that time interval in the upper-left corner of each chart. The time interval 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 60 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual is indicated by T=(value). This is followed by the value of the measurement, listing the highest value, lowest value and average value measured over that time interval. For example, in Figure 31 the displayed time interval is minutes, and the cursor is held at the T=17 mark on the horizontal axis. The measurements shown indicate performance from 17 minutes ago. The high/low/average values shown on each chart are measurements made across that specific one-hour interval. Changes in RSL often have an impact on BER, and this can be confirmed by looking for synchronized events. When BER events occur without corresponding changes in RSL, this normally indicates interference, atmospheric changes, transmission system issues (such as problems with cables, connectors or antennas), or possibly radio hardware problems. It is also useful to help determine if changes in radio temperature are occurring, and if they are having any impact on RSL or BER. If the radio is mounted in an environmentally controlled location, this has less relevance. However, temperature monitoring can be helpful to ensure that the radio is operating within specifications. Spectrum Analyzer Page This page is not currently available. A built-in spectrum analyzer will be available in future releases, and documented. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 61 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Reboot Page Use this page to reboot the radio. The function may never be required, but can be used in emergencies. All configurations that require a reboot automatically reboot on administrator confirmation. Figure 32 Reboot page 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 62 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Manual Page The manual (this document or the version that matches the installed firmware) is available within the GUI. Adobe Acrobat Reader 5.5 or higher is required (go to www.adobe.com to download Acrobat Reader). Click the Manual link and the manual displays within the browser window. Once the manual displays, click the save button on the PDF toolbar to download the manual locally. Figure 33 Manual page 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 63 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Troubleshooting This section provides information regarding troubleshooting of common issues and alarms on these radios. Exalt Digital Microwave Radio systems are designed by Exalts expert engineers with extensive experience through multiple generations of microwave radio design. These new-
generation systems contain extensive diagnostic tools, alarm indications, and troubleshooting aids. And, as compared to other systems in their class, are easier to install, maintain, and troubleshoot. The GUI provides information to aid in troubleshooting (see Diagnostic Charts Page on page 60). Contact Exalt Customer Care for further assistance with issues with your Exalt radio and with suggestions on how the radio and documentation can be improved. General Practices Troubleshooting a microwave radio link can be a complex task. Approach troubleshooting as a process of elimination, and first determine which portions of the system are operating properly. In a vast majority of cases, failures or poor performance of microwave links is attributed to something other than the microwave radio hardware. In this respect, the back-to-back bench test
(see Back-to-back Bench Testing on page 77) is very important to determine if radio hardware is operating properly and eliminate many variables in the troubleshooting process. If a back-to-back bench test fails, then the radio hardware is either broken or the radios are improperly configured. Upgrade the radio to the most current release of firmware, and/or reset the radio to its critical factory settings, following the quick start guide instructions and those in Configuration and Management, helps to confirm if configuration issues cause failure. The most common issues with microwave radio links are:
An improperly terminated RF cable Multipath propagation RF interference Path obstruction Misaligned antenna Faulty antenna Moisture in the transmission system (antenna feed and/or RF cable) If the radio link has been operating without issues and is exhibiting new poor performance behavior or becomes completely inoperative, the troubleshooting process should pay close attention to any conditions that may have changed between the time when the system was working without issue and the time when the issues started. Improper grounding Insufficient link margin in the design/implementation 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 64 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Also, it can be helpful to compare some performance parameters of the system before and after the presence of issues. Often the source of the issues can be determined by thoughtful consideration of changes, such as:
Changes in weather, including high winds Changes made to the radio equipment, transmission system, or connected equipment New radio systems or electronic equipment the nearby radio or transmission system New construction nearby either end of the link, or along the path Tree growth, flooded fields, or changes in rivers/lakes along the path Verify that configurations are set as follows:
RF matches at each end of the link Bandwidth matches at each end of the link Link distance matches at each end of the link TDD Frame Length matches at each end of the link Endpoint Identifier is different at each end of the link (one end Radio A, one end Radio B) Ethernet interfaces are enabled, as desired AUX Ethernet is set for in-band or out-of-band NMS, as desired T1/E1 enabling matches at each end of the link Link security key matches at each end of the link Also, use the ExaltCalc tool in the design phase to determine the optimum setting for the Bandwidth and TDD Frame Length parameters for the given link distance, and provides guidance to the expected RF link performance, as well as throughput, latency, and number of supported T1/E1 circuits. Typical Indications of Issues In many cases, microwave radio users do not notice changes or degradation to the radio system until the radio system fails completely or becomes highly errored or significantly intermittent. However, regular management of the radio system can help indicate changes in performance that have not yet impacted user performance, but may impact performance at a later date if left unchecked or unaddressed. The administrator can use this as an opportunity to be proactive and monitor the radio link performance regularly, watching for unexplained or unexpected changes in performance and trends in performance changes. Most importantly, monitoring radio system RSL over time indicates the performance of the radio system. Address any long-term drop in RSL and erratic or unsteady RSL. Some RSL changes are expected and weather patterns and the related multipath can cause dramatic RSL changes resulting in system outage. However, that outage should not occur at a significantly greater rate 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 65 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual than the designed long-term performance. Consult the path design engineer for more information about link reliability expectations and anticipated RSL deviation. In addition, regular inspection of the transmission system (RF cables and antennas) and paying close attention to changes along the path, such as construction or tree height, or new microwave radio installations nearby, can be extremely helpful and proactive. When link performance is very poor, alarms on the radio front panel and within the radios management system indicates particular failures. Consult this manual for more information on the specific alarms and diagnostics, or contact Exalt Customer Care for assistance. Exalt Customer Care is primarily motivated to determine if the radio hardware is faulty and require return for repair, and to help execute an effective and efficient repair and return process for radio terminals believed to be faulty. However, Exalt Customer Care provides advice regarding the total radio system and RF path engineering and environment, and advises on troubleshooting. End users should first contact the installer and/or designer of the system. In many cases, an in-
depth understanding of RF design is required, and on-site analysis and special test equipment, may be necessary. Compared to phone support from Exalt Customer Care, troubleshooting is much more expeditious if the professional installer and/or link designer examines the system and reviews the management information in the GUI. In turn, if the professional installer and/or link designer contacts Exalt Customer Care, the process to rectify the system is much more expedient due to the in-depth knowledge related to the implementation and the RF environment. Improper RF Cable Termination Improper RF cable termination is a very common problem. In many cases, this is a problem that occurs during installation and is not a problem that suddenly appears. However, if cables are moved or flexed, especially near the termination points, and radio errors, changes in RSL, or other performance issues occur, this is a certain sign of this issue. Another relatively easy method to test for this condition is to decrease the output power of the radio system (at each end, one end at a time). A poor RF cable termination may be reflecting too much RF energy back into the radio system, and reducing output power reduces the reflected energy at a faster rate than the transmitted energy towards the far end. Be careful not to reduce the output power to the point where the radios threshold is reached. Typically, a reduction of just 3 to 6dB is enough to determine if this is the issue. If the reduction of output power clears the error condition, this is the likely cause. Use a reflectometer or meter that can read VSWR at the operating frequency to identify poor terminations as well as poor antenna feeds. Note: The Praxsym VSWR meter is an excellent tool for this purpose 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 66 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Multipath Propagation Multipath propagation is a term that encompasses changes to the RF path, such as reflections and/or refraction, causing partial or complete destruction of the radio signal, and thus excessive bit errors and/or system outages. Rapid changes in temperature, inversion layers, humidity, air pressure, water evaporation, as well as standing water or moisture on objects along the path are all examples of changes that can cause multipath propagation. New building construction near either end of the path or along the path can cause new reflection characteristics. If your system has been operating without issue and is suddenly experiencing issues that are symptomatic of a certain time of day or related to change in climatic events or some of the external factors listed above, this is likely the cause. Consult a professional RF path engineer in these cases. Often, minor repositioning of the antennas at either or both ends can reduce or eliminate these problems. RF Interference RF interference is usually indicative of another radio system nearby either end of your radio system or aimed towards one or both ends of your radio system usually at or near the same frequency and usually with a similar signal level. Other forms of RF interference also exist, such as electronic equipment placed close to the radio chassis or transmitters that couple onto the cabling or grounding system of the radio. Microwave ovens and wireless communication devices used near the equipment or cabling are examples of electronic equipment interference. Note: The Exalt EX-5 series Digital Microwave Radios operate in license-
exempt bands. Microwave ovens, wireless Internet devices and cordless phone technology may also use this frequency band. It may be necessary to separate the radio chassis, cabling system and antenna from these devices. RF interference, like most other causes of problems, is indicated by significant bit errors and/or system outages. One means to determine presence of interference is the use of a spectrum analyzer that covers the same range as the radio system. A professional RF engineer can use a spectrum analyzer to locate sources of interference, measure these sources, and determine potential remedies to take to operate in the presence of interference. If a spectrum analyzer is not available, the radios RSL port can help determine RSL levels of interfering signals. By turning the far-end radio off, the residual RSL measured by the radio indicates the level of interference seen by the radio. It is possible that interference levels below that which can be measured still have an impact on the radio system especially if the radio system has low fade margin or is using a high order modulation. Exalt Digital Microwave Radios provides considerable flexibility to tune to different frequencies across the bands within which they operate. This is the easiest method to use to try to avoid 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 67 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual existing interference. In addition, the occupied bandwidth of the radio can be reduced. This, along with re-tuning, can be very effective, however throughput is reduced. Repositioning the antenna and/or changing polarization, or upgrading the antenna to a higher gain, and/or using a high-performance antenna, are all secondary means that can be used. It may be necessary to perform combinations of both radio changes (retuning, occupied bandwidth reduction) and antenna system changes (position, polarization, upgrade). The EX-4.9r radio operates under licensed regulations. If interference is suspected, the local frequency coordination organization, or other users of the spectrum should be consulted before re-tuning the radio to a different frequency channel. Path Obstruction A path obstruction is defined as an object, such as a building or tree, impeding the proper path of the radio system. If the system design was proper at the time of installation and issues arise at a later date, an updated path profile and survey may be necessary to identify changes in path clearance. Misaligned Antenna At the time of initial installation, it is critical that the antennas at each end are properly aligned and that the designed RSL is achieved. However, antennas may become misaligned due to high winds, changes in the guy-wiring systems keeping the antenna mast stable, or loosening of the antenna mounting hardware. A reduction in the RSL of the link is symptomatic of this condition, but this condition is not the only condition that results in a reduction of RSL. However, if conditions occur where the antenna alignment may be suspected, the mechanics must be inspected and the antennas realigned. Faulty Antenna A faulty antenna is rare, but is still a possibility. In some cases, the mechanics of the antenna feed can get moisture inside, or a bad or weak connection in the pin and connector structure of the antenna may occur. A VSWR measurement of the antenna connection can be made to verify this condition. Improper Grounding In addition to being a potential human safety issue, improper system grounding is a somewhat common condition that can cause continuous bit errors or bit errors when metal objects come in contact with the radio, transmission system, or racking system. If touching the radio causes errors, grounding is the cause. It can be difficult to identify grounding problems, but a professional electrician can normally inspect a system and identify if there are deficiencies in the grounding system. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 68 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Insufficient Link Margin Ideally, the link was designed with enough link margin (fade margin) to allow for multipath propagation and atmospheric fading and still remain reliable. In some cases, link margin is compromised by economic factors, such as using low-cost RF cabling or lower-cost antennas that have less gain or deficient performance compared to higher cost transmission system components. In some cases, there may be antenna size restrictions that forced the design to not have the desired amount of link margin. If the link was designed with poor link margin, there are likely many cases of bit errors and outages. The antenna system and transmission line can be upgraded to help reduce this. If the link design was installed with sufficient margin, but RSL is reduced, the remaining link margin may no longer be enough to maintain a reliable link. The causes of RSL reduction were previously described, but are usually due to new path obstruction(s) or antenna misalignment due to wind or mechanical factors. The antenna height or location can be changed to overcome new obstructions. Realignment of the antenna, and/or improvement to mechanical structures can help overcome antenna misalignment. Moisture in the Transmission System If the connectors on cables and antennas and egress junctions are not properly weatherproofed, moisture can get into the transmission system and cause significant error conditions and erratic performance. In many cases, the transmission system must be replaced. A VSWR meter is one means to identify such issues. Physical inspection can be helpful, and if changes to the weatherproofing occur (such as cracks), the weatherproofing must be replaced before it leaks. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 69 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Specifications This section presents specifications for the EX-5r series of Digital Microwave Radios. Physical Specifications Physical Configuration Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Operating Temperature Altitude Humidity Environmental Safety EMC Outdoor unit (ODU) 13 x 13 x 4.25"/33 x 33 x 10.8 cm 15 lbs; 6.8 kg 40 to +149F /40 to +65C;
15,000'/4.6 km 100% condensing NEMA4/IP56 EN 60950-1, IEC 60950-1 EN 301 489-17 Common System Specifications Tuning Resolution Power Control Step Size Selectable Modulation Modes Selectable Channel Bandwidths Selectable Frame Lengths (ms) 1MHz (5MHz for 4.9 GHz Products) 0.5dB Mode 1 (QPSK); Mode 2 (16QAM) 8MHz, 16MHz, 32MHz*, 64MHz*
0.5, 1, 2, 2.5, 4, 5 13 27 Mbps Mode 1 Mode 2 8 /10 MHz 16 / 20 MHz Maximum Aggregate User Capacity
*Not all BW selections are available in every country. And, in some cases, certain BW selections are only available after purchasing a software upgrade license key, for countries where wider operating bandwidths are allowed. 10-12
+7 ppm 96-bit Security Code Error Floor Frequency Stability Link Security 32 / 40 MHz*
64 MHz*
110 216 110 55 27 54 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 70 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual EX-4.9r System Specifications Frequency Band Tunable Range Output Power (at full power, Mode 1) Output Power (at minimum power) Selectable Channel Bandwidths 4940 to 4990 MHz 4945 to 4985 MHz
+24dBm (20MHz BW)
+22dBm (10MHz BW)
+20dBm (40MHz BW)
+4dBm 10MHz, 20MHz,*
Receiver Threshold (BER=10-6) Maximum RSL Non-overlapping channels Regulatory Compliance FCC ID IC ID dBm 10MHz 20MHz Mode 1 Mode 2
-86
-83
-78
-75*
Mode 1: -25dBm error-free; 0dBm no damage 10MHz: 5; 20MHz: 2 FCC Part 90; IC RSS-111 TTM-104P90R 6254A-104P90R 10MHz Emission Designator(s)
*For the EX-4.9r, firmware options are required to enable Mode 2/20MHz BW 10M9W7D 21M8W7D 20MHz 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 71 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual System Specifications, 5.3GHz Band Frequency Band Tunable Range Output Power (at full power) Output Power (at minimum power) -7dBm 5250 to 5350 MHz 5260 to 5332 MHz
+13dBm (0.02W) Receiver Threshold (BER=10-6) dBm Mode 1 Mode 2 8MHz 16MHz 32MHz*
64MHz*
-86
-83
-80
-77
-78
-75
-72
-69 Maximum RSL Non-overlapping channels Regulatory Compliance Contains FCC ID IC ID Mode 1: -25dBm error-free; 0dBm no damage 8MHz: 10; 16MHz: 5; 32MHz*: 2; 64MHz*: 1 FCC 15.407; IC RSS-210; EN 301 893 TTM-105P25M 6254A-105P25R 8MHz 16MHz 8M7W7D Emission Designator(s)
*Not all BW selections are available in every country. And, in some cases, certain BW selections are only available after purchasing a software upgrade license key, for countries where wider operating bandwidths are allowed. 34M5W7D 67M9W7D 17M2W7D 32MHz*
64MHz*
5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 72 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual System Specifications, 5.4GHz Band Frequency Band Tunable Range Output Power (at full power) Output Power (at minimum power) -7dBm 5470 to 5725 MHz 5488 to 5715 MHz
+13dBm (0.02W) Receiver Threshold (BER=10-6) dBm Mode 1 Mode 2 8MHz 16MHz 32MHz*
64MHz*
-86
-83
-80
-77
-78
-75
-72
-69 Maximum RSL Non-overlapping channels Regulatory Compliance Contains FCC ID IC ID Mode 1: -25dBm error-free; 0dBm no damage 8MHz: 29; 16MHz: 14; 32MHz*: 7; 64MHz*: 3 FCC 15.407; IC RSS-210; EN 301 893 TTM-105P25M 6254A-105P25R 8MHz 16MHz 8M7W7D Emission Designator(s)
*Not all BW selections are available in every country. And, in some cases, certain BW selections are only available after purchasing a software upgrade license key, for countries where wider operating bandwidths are allowed. 34M5W7D 67M9W7D 17M2W7D 32MHz*
64MHz*
5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 73 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual System Specifications, 5.8GHz Band Frequency Band Tunable Range Output Power (at full power) Output Power (at minimum power) +4dBm 5725 to 5850 MHz 5731 to 5844 MHz
+24dBm (0.25W), Mode 1
+21dBm (0.13W), Mode 2 Receiver Threshold (BER=10-6)
(dBm) Mode 1 Mode 2 8MHz 16MHz 32MHz*
64MHz*
-86
-83
-80
-77
-78
-75
-72
-69 Maximum RSL Non-overlapping channels Regulatory Compliance Contains FCC ID IC ID Mode 1: -25dBm error-free; 0dBm no damage 8MHz: 15; 16MHz: 7; 32MHz*: 3; 64MHz*: 1 FCC 15.247; IC RSS-210; EN 302 502 TTM-105P25M 6254A-105P25R 8MHz 16MHz 9M1W7D Emission Designator(s)
*Not all BW selections are available in every country. And, in some cases, certain BW selections are only available after purchasing a software upgrade license key, for countries where wider operating bandwidths are allowed. 31M8W7D 61M6W7D 16M5W7D 32MHz*
64MHz*
5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 74 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Interfaces RF (x2, EX-5r-(x)c only) Connector Impedance T1/E1 (x2, 2 interfaces each) Connector T1 Impedance T1 Line Codes T1 LBO Settings (in ft.) T1 Clocking Speed T1 Compliance E1 Impedance E1 Line Codes E1 Clocking Speed E1 Compliance Ethernet Connectors Interface Speed Duplex Compliance Sync-In Connector Signal Power Power Injector Connector Input Voltage Consumption N-type female 50 Ohms RJ-45 (RJ48C), female 100 Ohms, balanced AMI, B8ZS, selectable 0-133, 133-266, 266-399, 399-533, 533-655 1.544 Mbps ANSI T1.102-1987; ITU-T; G.823; GR-49T-CORE 120 Ohms, balanced HDB3 2.048 Mbps CEPT-1; G.703; ITU-T-G703 RJ-45, female, auto-MDIX 10 or 100 Mbps Half, full, auto, selectable 802.3 RJ-45, female 1pps (GPS) 6-pin barrier strip 48VDC
<60 W (1.25A) 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 75 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Integrated Antenna (EX-5r(-x) only) Gain (midband) 3dB Beamwidth Polarization 20dBi 15 degrees Switch-selectable vertical or horizontal 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 76 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Back-to-back Bench Testing Use back-to-back bench testing to test the radio before installation, pre-configure the radio and connected equipment before installation, or in the troubleshooting process to identify if the radio hardware is the source of a system issue. It is a critical process, and often required or highly desirable for any installation or troubleshooting exercise. This section describes how to properly configure the radio hardware and accessories for a proper back-to-back bench test. For radio testing, there are two types of back-to-back configurations:
1. Basic test (test general operation) 2. Specification performance verification (EX-5r-c only) Basic Test The basic test is a simple test of radio functionality. It verifies that the radios are properly configured to communicate to one another, and verifies general radio performance as operational. For the basic test, the following items are needed:
Radio pair Powering source Computer/terminal with Ethernet port EX-5r-c only RF interconnect cable(s) (any length short is best) Fixed or variable attenuation, between 60 and 90dB (note: attenuation for basic test does not to be calibrated or precise) Connections EX-5r-c only Connect the items as follows:
1. Connect attenuation and (known-good) RF cable(s) between radio pair, shown in Figure 34. 2. Configure one radio as Radio A; the other as Radio B 3. Power on radio pair 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 77 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual RF PORTS ATTENUATION
(60-90DB) RADIO B POWER INJECTOR RADIO A POWER INJECTOR COMPUTER AC POWER
(CONNECT LAST) AC POWER
(CONNECT LAST) Basic back-to-back bench test configuration Figure 34 EX-5r Basic Test Configuration When the radios are near one another, the integral antenna provides the connection. Place an RF-absorptive material such as wood or RF absorbing foam between the units to provide attenuation. Caution: Do not point the radios directly towards one another when they are in close proximity. Power received from an adjacent radio at full power will damage both radios. Turn the transmitter power down and separate the radios as far apart as possible. Use an RF-absorptive material in between the antennas for additional safety. Verify Connection After connecting and powering on, observe the front panel LEDs to verify that the LINK and STATUS LEDs are green. If so, the radios are communicating and all radio-related alarm conditions are normal. It can be beneficial to have a computer to verify configuration in case of red LEDs or to pre-
configure the radio as desired for operation. Follow the instructions in Configuration and Management. Specification Performance VerificationEX-5r-(x)c only The specification performance verification is a more detailed test that allows you to verify that the radios output power and threshold specifications are being met. This is typically a test that would only be performed in a troubleshooting scenario, but can be performed before installation to provide a detailed record or ensure radio performance before installation. This test is identical to the basic test, but in place of the fixed attenuation, it requires the use of calibrated variable attenuation, or a set of calibrated fixed attenuators, or a combination of both, adding to a total attenuation value of 120dB, as measured at the operating frequency of the radio. In addition, a volt meter or computer is also required. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 78 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Connect the system as shown in Figure 34, using the combination of fixed and variable attenuation between the radios RF ports. Connect the volt meter to either radios RSL test point and associated reference ground connection. In this test, it is desirable to use pre-tested RF cables, known to be good, and the insertion loss is known at the operating frequency. If the cables are short (6'/2m or less), you can estimate the loss, including connectors, to be less than 1dB each. The estimate of cable loss is critical to the overall confidence of the measurements made in this test. There are two critical specifications that can be tested in this configuration:
1. RF output power 2. Radio receiver threshold To measure transmitter output power, simply insert any value of attenuation between the radios between 60 and 90dB. Ensure that both RF output power settings are at maximum. Use the volt meter to measure RSL in both directions. The RSL measured value should match the appropriate value according to the inserted attenuation, such as:
RSL = RF Output Power cabling losses total attenuation Verify output power by adjusting output power using the Exalt GUI (in administration mode) and evaluate the corresponding change to the RSL measurement. For threshold testing, the key is to insert a measured amount of loss that is close to, but not exceeding the radios specified system gain. System gain is the difference between RF output power and receiver threshold. At your selected modulation and bandwidth settings, determine the specified threshold performance, and choose a value of attenuation (including cable losses) that adds to roughly 5 to 15dB less than the system gain. For example, for a setting of Mode1 and 8 MHz, if the threshold for your measurement is
-86dBm, the output power is +24dBm, so the system gain is 110dB. Choose a value of total attenuation in the range of roughly 100105dB. Once this attenuation is inserted, verify RSL readings as in the first step, and then, using the GUI, reduce radio output power in 1dB steps until the receiving radio (the one whose output power not being adjusted) Link LED turns from green to yellow. This indicates that threshold has been reached. At this point, verify the equation for system gain using the new output power level setting and verify that the threshold performance is meeting or exceeding the published specification. Note: Due to the variation of measurements and accuracies involved in this test, you may read a measurement that is 1dB to as much as 2dB off of the expected value. It should be of no concern unless the value is more than 3dB worse than expected. Once threshold is verified in this direction, repeat the process in the opposite direction by adjusting RF output power of the radio at the opposite end. Return the first radio to its original power setting before adjusting the second radio. Perform threshold measurement tests for all combinations of bandwidth and mode (modulation) being usedespecially when troubleshooting. It should not be necessary to vary center frequency, 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 79 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual as this does not have any appreciable impact on system gain performance, however, try any setting combination to gain confidence in the radio performance parameters. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 80 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Interface Connections This section provides the pin number assignment and wiring information for the connectors on the EX-5r. All connectors are shown as viewed from the radio front panel, as shown in Figure 35. Figure 35 T1/E1 Connections Ex-5r connector orientation POWER/ETHERNET T1/E1 2&4 T1/E1 1&3 GPS/RSL There are two connectors for T1/E1, each connector has two T1/E1 circuits available. Figure 36 illustrates the pin orientation and functionality of these connectors. 1 8 Pin Function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Tip Out (from radio) Ch.1 & 2 Ring Out (from radio) Ch.1 & 2 Tip Out (from radio) Ch.3 & 4 Tip In (to radio) Ch.1 & 2 Ring In (to radio) Ch.1 & 2 Ring Out (from radio) Ch.3 & 4 Tip In (to radio) Ch.3 & 4 Ring In (to radio) Ch.3 & 4 T1/E1 connectors 81 Figure 36 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual RSL & GPS Sync Connector 1 1 Pin Function
+5V out to GPS antenna This connector can be used during the antenna alignment process, to provide a received signal level (RSL) voltage to a voltmeter. The connector is also used for connection to an optional Exalt GPS antenna for the purposes of GPS synchronization. The figure below illustrates the pin orientation and functionality for this connector. Figure 37 Power/Ethernet Connector 1pps signal from GPS antenna Enable signal to GPS antenna Received Signal Level (RSL) Rx Data from GPS antenna Tx Data to GPS antenna RSL & GPS connector Unused Ground 3 6 2 8 5 4 7 8 This connector is the primary connector on the radio, and must be connected to provide power to the radio, and primary Ethernet communications for traffic and Ethernet. The figure below illustrates the pin orientation and functionality for this connector. The Ethernet connector implements Auto-MDIX, and therefore either straight or crossover Ethernet cables may be used, independent of the wiring of the connected device. The wiring follows typical wiring for Power-over-Ethernet (PoE), however the power consumption requirement for the EX-5r does not allow for standard (802.3af) PoE, and only the Exalt power injector shall be used. In addition, the Exalt power injector provides critical reset and alarm capability that would not be available from a generic PoE injector, even if the power consumption requirement is met. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 82 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual 1 8 Pin Function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Paired with Pin 2 Paired with Pin 1 Paired with Pin 6
+DC Power (48V) In
+DC Power (48V) In Paired with Pin 3
-DC Power (48V) In
-DC Power (48V) In Power/Ethernet connector Figure 38 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 83 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Copyright Notices This section presents copyright notices for third-party software licensed to Exalt Communications, Inc. Net-SNMP The following copyright notice applies to the open-source licensing agreement for Net-SNMP. Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000 Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California All Rights Reserved Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU and The Regents of the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written permission. CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE. Network Associates Technology, Inc. Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 84 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Cambridge Broadband, Ltd. Portions of this code are copyright (c) 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 85 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Sun Microsystems, Inc. Copyright 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, California 95054, U.S.A. All rights reserved. Use is subject to license terms below. This distribution may include materials developed by third parties. Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Sparta, Inc. Copyright (c) 2003-2005, Sparta, Inc All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 86 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Sparta, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Cisco, Inc. Copyright (c) 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Cisco, Inc, Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications, nor the names of their contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 87 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co. Copyright (c) Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG, 2003 oss@fabasoft.com Author: Bernhard Penz Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* The name of Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG or any of its subsidiaries, brand or product names may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 88 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Appendix A - Regulatory Compliance As of this printing, Exalt Communications, Inc. has approvals for the products that are covered by this manual as indicated in Table 6 below. If your application or country is not listed, please check with your Sales Representative for the current status. Table 6 Product Approvals EX-4.9r series
Country Austria Belgium Canada Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Ghana Great Britain Hungary Iceland Ireland Italy Liechtenstein Lithuania Luxembourg Mexico Netherlands Norway Poland Portugal Romania 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 EX-5r series, 5.3 GHz
EX-5r series, 5.4 GHz
89 EX-5r series, 5.8 GHz
Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Slovak Republic Slovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Turkey United States
General Regulatory Notices Dynamic Frequency Selection
Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) may be required by regional legislation in some frequency bands in order to avoid causing interference to radar systems. Prior to the start of any transmission, the device equipped with DFS monitors the spectrum and is not permitted to transmit on a part of the spectrum that is already in use for radar transmissions for a period of 30 minutes. During operation of the device, the spectrum is continually monitored by the DFS to detect if radar begins transmission on a frequency that is being used by the device to transmit on. If the DFS software detects radar, the device must move off channel within a specified time period so that the device transmission does not interfere with the radar transmission. The device equipped with DFS is required to stay off that part of the spectrum for a minimum of 30 minutes, after which time the device may then check the spectrum for radar transmissions and begin transmitting if no radar is detected. Antennas The EX-4.9r may use any antenna. The following Table list antennas recommended for use with the EX-5r-Series radios. In some countries, antennas exceeding a certain level of gain may be unlawful. Refer to RF Output Power Setting in this Appendix for details on regulatory limits. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 90 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Table 7 lists antennas supported by the EX-5r family of Digital Microwave Radios. Table 7 EX-5r supported antennas Manufacturer Model #
Description Mid-band Gain dBi Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel MTI MTI MTI MTI Radio Waves Radio Waves Radio Waves Radio Waves Radio Waves Radio Waves Radio Waves Radio Waves Radio Waves RFS RFS RFS RFS P2F-52-N P3F-52-N P4F-52-NXA P6F-52-NXA HP2F-52-NPA HP3F-52-NPA HP4F-52-NPA HP6F-52-NPA FPA5250D06-N FPA5250D12-N DFPS.5-52 DFPD1-52 DFPD2-52 QF2-52-N QF2.5-52-N QF4-52-N QF6-52N HQF2-52-N HQF4-52-N HQF6-52-N MT-485001 MT-485002 MT-486004 MT-486001 FP.5-5-18 FP1-5-24 FP2-5-28 SP1-5.2 SP2-5.2 HP2-5.2 SP3-5.2 SP4-5.2 SP6-5.2 SPF2-52A SPF3-52A SPF4-52A SPF6-52A 2-foot Dish 3-foot Dish 4-foot Dish 6-foot Dish 2-foot HP Dish 3-foot HP Dish 4-foot HP Dish 6-foot HP Dish 6-inch Panel 1-foot Panel 6-inch Panel 1-foot Panel 2-foot Panel 2-foot Dish 2.5-foot Dish 4-foot Dish 6-foot Dish 2-foot HP Dish 4-foot HP Dish 6-foot HP Dish 7.5-inch Panel 1-foot Panel 18-inch Panel 2-foot Panel 6-inch Panel 1-foot Panel 2-foot Panel 1-foot Dish 2-foot Dish 2-foot HP Dish 3-foot Dish 4-foot Dish 6-foot Dish 2-foot Dish 3-foot Dish 4-foot Dish 6-foot Dish
(mid-band) 29.4 33.4 34.9 37.6 29.0 33.0 34.5 37.2 18.0 23.6 18.0 23.5 28.0 28.5 31.2 34.8 37.8 28.2 34.4 37.4 19.0 23.0 26.0 28.0 18.0 23.8 28.0 22.5 29.0 28.6 32.0 34.8 37.9 27.9 31.4 33.9 37.4 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 91 3dB (Azimuth/Elevation) Beamwidth
(degrees) 5.4 3.8 3.0 1.8 5.4 3.8 3.0 1.8 19.3 9.6 19.0 9.4 4.6 5.6 4.4 2.7 1.9 5.7 2.8 1.9 18.0 9.0 6.0 4.5 20.0 10.0 4.5 11.1 6.1 6.1 4.0 3.0 2.0 6.2 4.2 3.1 2.1 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Manufacturer Model #
Description Mid-band Gain dBi RFS RFS RFS RFS RFS SDF4-52A SDF6-52A MA0528-19AN MA0528-23AN MA0528-28AN 4-foot HP Dish 6-foot HP Dish 7.5-inch Panel 1-foot Panel 2-foot Panel
(mid-band) 33.9 37.4 19.0 23.0 28.0 3dB (Azimuth/Elevation) Beamwidth
(degrees) 3.1 2.1 18.0 9.0 4.5 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 92 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Region 1 Specifics Region 1 is designated for USA and Canada installations. Note: The professional installer is responsible to ensure that RF output power is properly adjusted to not exceed the regulatory limit. 4.9 GHz Model The EX-4.9r is a licensed-band product operating within Part 90 of the FCC regulations and RSS-111 of Industry Canada. This band is specifically reserved for Public Safety applications and related agencies. Transmitter power reduction may be required, depending on transmission system gains and losses, in accordance with instructions found in RF Output Power Setting on page 9. The transmitter power of the device must be reduced by 1 dB for every 1 dB that the antenna gain exceeds 26 dBi (inclusive of transmission system losses). In this Appendix you will find information about the Regulatory Compliance Regulations in your particular country. Federal Communications Commission (FCC), United States The device is allowed to be used provided it does not cause interference to other devices. It is not guaranteed to provide protection against interference from other electronic and radio devices. The system has been tested and found to comply with the limits of a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Shielded cables and I/O cords must be used for this equipment to comply with the relevant FCC regulations. Changes or modifications not expressly approved in writing by Exalt may void the users authority to operate this equipment. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 93 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual This device must be professionally installed. To comply with regulations, the output power of this device may need to be adjusted in accordance to the associated transmission system. See RF Output Power Setting in this Appendix for details. The antenna associated with the EX-5r family shall be mounted in a location that is at least 10/3m away from humans that may be subject to long-term or continuous exposure. Important: Where required by regional regulations, DFS is enabled by the system keys and cannot be disabled. United States Compliance The EX-5r product family operates under FCC Rule Parts 15.247 and/or 15.407 as a license-
exempt device. The EX-4.9r products operate under FCC Rule Part 90 as a licensed device. They may only be used as a point-to-point transmission device for fixed or temporary-fixed (non-
mobile) installations. The devices are subject to the following restrictions:
Do not use external amplifiers to boost the power or overcome transmission system losses, unless the specific amplifier/cable/antenna combination has expressly been authorized by the FCC. The output power must never exceed +30 dBm. Cross-border transmissions are expressly prohibited, except with written permission from both the FCC and the governing body of the neighboring country (Cofetel for Mexico;
Industry Canada for Canada). Use only parabolic dish antennas or directional flat-panel antennas. No other types of antennas (omni-directional, yagi, and so on) are authorized. Parabolic dishes of either grid or solid type are allowed. Maximum mid-band gain of each type of antenna certified is:
EX-4.9r models:
Parabolic dish: 26dBi (larger gains are allowed, with Tx power reduction) Directional flat panel: 26 dBi (larger gains are allowed, with Tx power reduction)
EX-5r models:
Parabolic dish: 37.9 dBi (6'/1.8m diameter) Directional flat panel: 28 dBi (~2'/61cm square) Industry Canada (IC), Canada This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
3. 4. this device may not cause interference, and this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 94 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Antennas Supported in Canada The EX-5r family has been designed to operate with the antennas listed in Table 11 which have a maximum gain of 37.9 dBi. Antennas not included in the list or having a gain greater than 37.9 dBi are prohibited for use with this device. The required antenna impedance is 50 Ohms. The antenna associated with the EX-5r family shall be mounted in a location that is at least 10/3m away from humans that may be subject to long-term or continuous exposure. Important: Where required by regional regulations, DFS is enabled by the system keys and cannot be disabled. Canada Compliance The EX-5r models operate under RSS-210 of Industry Canada regulations. The EX-4.9r model operates under RSS-111 of Industry Canada regulations. Operation is subject to the following conditions, unless express permission is granted by Industry Canada to operate in a different manner:
External amplifiers cannot be used to boost the power or to overcome transmission system losses, unless the specific amplifier/cable/antenna combination is expressly authorized by Industry Canada. Cross-border transmissions are expressly prohibited, except with written permission from both Industry Canada and the governing body of the neighboring country (FCC for USA) Only parabolic dish antennas or directional flat-panel antennas may be used. No other types of antennas (omni-directional, yagi, and so on) are authorized. Parabolic dishes of either grid or solid type are allowed. Maximum gain of each type of antenna allowed is:
EX-4.9r models:
Parabolic dish: 26 dBi (larger gains are allowed with Tx power reduction) Directional flat panel: 26 dBi (larger gains are allowed with Tx power reduction)
EX-5r models:
Parabolic dish: 37.9 dBi (6'/1.8m diameter) Directional flat panel: 28 dBi (~2'/61cm square) A complete list of allowed antennas can be found in United States Compliance The EX-5r product family operates under FCC Rule Parts 15.247 and/or 15.407 as a license-
exempt device. The EX-4.9r products operate under FCC Rule Part 90 as a licensed device. They may only be used as a point-to-point transmission device for fixed or temporary-fixed (non-
mobile) installations. The devices are subject to the following restrictions:
Do not use external amplifiers to boost the power or overcome transmission system losses, unless the specific amplifier/cable/antenna combination has expressly been authorized by the FCC. The output power must never exceed +30 dBm. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 95 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Cross-border transmissions are expressly prohibited, except with written permission from both the FCC and the governing body of the neighboring country (Cofetel for Mexico;
Industry Canada for Canada). Use only parabolic dish antennas or directional flat-panel antennas. No other types of antennas (omni-directional, yagi, and so on) are authorized. Parabolic dishes of either grid or solid type are allowed. Maximum mid-band gain of each type of antenna certified is:
EX-4.9r models:
Parabolic dish: 26dBi (larger gains are allowed, with Tx power reduction) Directional flat panel: 26 dBi (larger gains are allowed, with Tx power reduction)
EX-5r models:
Parabolic dish: 37.9 dBi (6'/1.8m diameter) Directional flat panel: 28 dBi (~2'/61cm square) Industry Canada (IC), Canada on page 94. EX-4.9r EIRP for the USA and Canada For the EX-4.9r model within the 49404990 MHz band, the maximum EIRP allowed is +50 dBm. The maximum conducted power of the radio is +24 dBm for Mode 1 and +21 dBm for Mode 2. The following formula is used to determine the output power:
P = CP G + L where:
P
= Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm CP dBm G L
= Maximum Conducted Power of transmitter output power of radio, in
= Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 4940 to 4990 MHz
= Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 4940 and 4990 MHz 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 96 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual EX-5r EIRP for the US and Canada 5250-5350 MHz Band For the EX-5r models within the 52505350 MHz band, the maximum transmit power is 30 dBm. The maximum output of the radio is +13 dBm. P = CP G + L where:
P
= Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm CP dBm G L
= Maximum Conducted Power of transmitter output power of radio, in
= Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 5250 to 5350 MHz
= Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 5250 and 5350 MHz 5470-5725 MHz Band For the EX-5r models within the 5470-5725 MHz band, the maximum EIRP allowed is 30 dBm. The maximum output power of the radio is +13 dBm. P = CP G + L where:
P
= Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm CP dBm G L
= Maximum Conducted Power of transmitter output power of radio, in
= Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 5470 to 5725 MHz
= Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 5470 and 5725 MHz 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 97 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual 5725-5850 MHz Band For the EX-5r models within the 57255850 MHz band, the maximum EIRP allowed is 61.9 dBm. The maximum output power of the radio is +24 dBm in Mode 1 and +21 dBm in Mode 2. P = CP G + L where:
P
= Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm CP dBm G L
= Maximum Conducted Power of transmitter output power of radio, in
= Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 5725 to 5850 MHz
= Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 5725 and 5850 MHz 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 98 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Region 2 Specifics The countries that are covered by this region are: Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Great Britain, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Netherlands, Switzerland, and Turkey. Note: The professional installer is responsible to ensure that RF output power is properly adjusted to not exceed the regulatory limit. Europe/ITU (ETSI and CE Mark) The EX-5r family complies with ETS 301 893 for the 5.3 and 5.47 GHz bands for license-
exempt use for most countries recognizing ETSI or ITU band assignments. This band is not yet harmonized for all countries recognizing ETSI or ITU band assignments These bands require Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) and Transmitter Power Control (TPC) for radar-detection and avoidance. There is a +30dBm EIRP limit applied to this band. Transmitter power must be adjusted accordingly with respect to the RF cabling losses and antenna gains associated with each terminal. The EX-5r family complies with ETS 302 502 for the 5.8 GHz band. This band is not yet harmonized for all countries recognizing ETSI or ITU band assignments. Consult the individual country regulations or your Exalt Communications representative for details. This band requires DFS and TPC for radar-detection and avoidance. There is a +33dBm EIRP limit for use of the 10MHz BW setting (called 8MHz on GUI), and a +36dBm EIRP limit for use of the 20MHz BW setting (called 16MHz on GUI). All models comply with the requirements for CE Mark (EN 60950-1 and IEC 60950-1) and EMC (EN 301 489-17). No substitutions shall be made, and all wiring and grounding instructions contained in this manual must be followed to ensure safety in accordance to the standards. 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 99 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Declaration of Conformity to the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC English:
This equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Deutsch:
Dansk:
Espaol:
Franais:
Dieses Gert entspricht den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den weiteren entsprecheneden Vorgaben der Richtlinie 1999/5/EU. Dette udstyr er i overensstemmelse med de vsentlige krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i Directiv 1999/5/EF. Este equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales asi como con otras disposiciones de la Directive 1999/5/EC. 1999/5/E. Cet appareil est conforme aux exigencies essentialles et aux autres dispositions pertinantes de la Directive 1999/5/EC. slenska:
essi bnaur samrmist lgbonum krfum og rum kvum tilskipunar 1999/5/ESB. Italiano:
Questo apparato conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed agli altri principi sanciti dalla Direttiva 1999/5/EC. Nederlands: Deze apparatuur voldoet aan de belangrijkste eisen en andere voorzieningen van richtlijn 1999/5/EC. Norsk:
Dette utstyret er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i EU-directiv 1999/5/EC. Portugus:
Este equipamento satisfaz os requisitos essenciais e outras provises da Directiva 1999/5/EC. Suomalainen: Tm laite tytt direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleelliset vaatimukset ja on siin asetettujen muidenkin ehtojen mukainen. Svenska:
Denna utrustning r i verensstmmelse med de vsentliga kraven och andra relevanta bestmmelser i Direktiv 1999/5/EC. For 5 GHz radios, the following standards were applied:
Radio: EN 301 893, EN 302 502 EMC: EN 301 489-1, EN 301 489-17 Safety: EN 60950-1, IEC 60950-1 The following CE mark is affixed to the product:
EU WEEE Exalt is committed to meeting the requirements of the European Unions Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive. The Directives require producers of electrical and electronic equipment to finance the take-back for re-use or recycling of their products placed on the EU market after 13 August 2005. Exalt products that are within the scope of the Directives are labeled with a crossed-out
"wheelie-bin" symbol as required by the Directives. This indicates that the product was placed on the market after 13 August 2005 and that end-users should segregate the product from other wastes at end-of-life. The WEEE Directives are being implemented in each of the 28 EU and European Economic Area (EAA) countries through national legislation. This has resulted in considerable variation in the detailed requirements across the EU, many of which require presence in the EU. As a result, Exalts WEEE compliance approach is to require the distributors and/or resellers in the EU to 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 100 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual comply with each countrys national legislation by registration of the distributor or reseller as the producer and for the reseller/distributor to carry out and fulfill the legislative requirements of each national compliance scheme. Below is the crossed out wheelie bin symbol as required by the WEEE Directive. EU RoHS RoHS is the acronym used to refer to the European Union (EU) Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. Hazardous materials are those chemicals and substances that are legislatively, market, or customer banned or restricted for use in products and/or manufacturing. There are six (6) RoHS substances: lead (Pb), cadmium (Cd), mercury (Hg), hexavalent chromium (Cr+6), polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) and polybrominated diphenylethers (PBDE). Other countries may be introducing legislation that results in similar restrictions of hazardous substances. Many Exalt products will continue to use lead-based solder under the exemption allowed for network infrastructure equipment. Small amounts of lead, cadmium, mercury, hexavalent chromium, PBB, and PBDE can also be found in a few electrical and electrical components. Europe Compliance The EX-4.9r devices are currently not permitted in any EU member or affiliate countries. The EX-5r family operates under EN 301 893 and EN 302 502 rules as a license-exempt device. All of these permitted devices must be professionally installed. They may only be used as a point-to-
point transmission device for fixed or temporary-fixed (non-mobile) installations. The devices are subject to the following restrictions:
Do not use external amplifiers to boost the power or overcome transmission system losses, unless the specific amplifier/cable/antenna combination has expressly been authorized by the specific country regulations. The output power must never exceed that specified in the Tables 1 and 2. Use only parabolic dish antennas or directional flat-panel antennas. No other types of antennas (omni-directional, yagi, and so on) are authorized. Parabolic dishes of either grid or solid type are allowed. Maximum mid-band gain of each type of antenna certified is:
EX-5r models:
5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 101 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Parabolic dish: 37.9 dBi (6'/1.8m diameter) Directional flat panel: 28 dBi (~2'/61cm square) 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 102 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual EX-5r EIRP by Country Table 13 summarizes the maximum power by band and country for Exalts EX-5r series products. 52505350 MHz band For the EX-5r models within the 52505350 MHz band, the maximum transmit power is 23 dBm. The maximum output of the radio is +13 dBm. P = CP G + L where:
P
= Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm
= Maximum Conducted Power of transmitter output power of radio, in
= Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 5250 to 5350 MHz
= Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 5250 and 5350 MHz CP dBm G L 54705725 MHz band For the EX-5r models within the 5470-5725 MHz band, the maximum EIRP allowed is 30 dBm. The maximum output power of the radio is +13 dBm. P = CP G + L where:
P
= Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm CP dBm G L
= Maximum Conducted Power of transmitter output power of radio, in
= Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 5470 to 5725 MHz
= Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 103 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 5470 and 5725 MHz 5725-5850 MHz band For the EX-5r models, within the 5725-5850 MHz band, the maximum transmit power with respect to specific country EIRP regulations is determined based on the channel bandwidth. The EIRP power limit is 33 dBm for 10 MHz channels and 36 dBm for 20 MHz channels. The Exalt EX-5r series maximum transmitter conducted power is +24 dBm. Use the following equation to determine the EIRP:
P = CP G + L where:
P
= Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm
= Maximum Conducted Power of transmitter output power of radio, in CP dBm G
= Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 5725-5850 MHz
= Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF L connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 5725 and 5850 MHz 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 104 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Table 8 Region 2 Country Specific Power Levels for EX-r Series Country Maximum EIRP Output Power, 5.3 GHz band Maximum EIRP Output Power, 5.4 GHz band Maximum EIRP Output Power, 5.8 GHz band
(BW dependent) see note 1 5 dBm 5 dBm 33/36 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm Austria Belgium Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Great Britain Hungary Iceland Ireland Italy Liechtenstein Lithuania Luxembourg Netherlands Norway Poland Portugal Romania Slovak Republic Slovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Turkey Note 1: If the output power is designated as 33/36 dBm, the EIRP is limited to 33 dBm for 10 MHz bandwidth transmissions and 36 dBm for 20 MHz bandwidth transmissions. 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 5 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 5 dBm 33/36 dBm 5 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 5 dBm 33/36 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 105 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual Index A AC adapter, 21, 22 accessory kit contents, 7 Administration Settings page, 38 administrator privileges, 33 AIS enabling/disabling, 46 alarm conditions, 36 alarms, 44, 54, 59 clearing, 59 Temperature, 55 Alarms page, 54 AMI, 46 antenna port parameter, 43 antennas alignment, 28, 68 EX-5r Canada, 95 US, 91 mounting, 3, 24 indoor, 27 mounting height, 6 polarization orientation, 6 site preparation considerations, 6 system grounding, 6 transmission line, 25 troubleshooting, 68 B B8ZS, 46 back-to-back bench test, 8, 77 back-to-back bench test configuration, 78 bandwidth, 5, 6 Bandwidth parameter, 41, 51 battery source, 21 BER, 60 browsers, 31 buzzer timeout selection parameter, 43 C cables Ethernet (CAT5), 9 RF, 4, 6 T1/E1, 9 troubleshooting improper RF cable termination, 66 carrier-to-interference tolerance, 6 center frequency, 9 center frequency tuning, 5 channel bandwidth, 5 CLI, 30 main menu, 30 menu options, 30 configuration file, 49 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 106 connectors, 19 GPS/RSL, 19 Power/Ethernet, 19, 82 T1/E1, 81 T1/E1 1&3, 19 T1/E1 2&4, 19 contact information, 1 Current BER field, 56 Current RSL field, 56 D data communication interface, 4 date and time, 38 DC power source, 21 Diagnostic Charts page, 60 dimensions, 70 documentation, related, 1 duplex 100/full-duplex, 44 duplex settings, 44 E E1 channels, 47 E1 Interface Configuration page, 47 effective isotropic radiated power (EIRP), 9 encryption, 5 Endpoint Identifier, 34, 42, 51 Errored Seconds (ES) field, 57 Ethernet, 6 Ethernet configuration parameters, 51 Ethernet connectors, 82 Ethernet interface, 75 throughput settings, 45 Ethernet Interface Configuration page, 44 Event Log page, 59 ExaltCalc tool, 10, 65 external loopback modes, 48 F factory default settings, 24, 50 fade margin, 6, 69 features, 4 File Activation page, 49, 52 File Transfer page, 49 file transfers, 49 files activating stored, 52 default configuration file, 50 frame length. See TDD frame frequency center, 7 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual G gateway (default), 51 GPS/RSL connector, 19 GPS/RSL LED, 20 grounding, 68 GUI Administration Settings page, 38 Alarms page, 54 browsers supported, 31 description, 31 Diagnostic Charts page, 60 E1 Interface Configuration page, 47 Ethernet Interface Configuration page, 44 Event Log page, 59 File Activation page, 49, 52 File Transfer page, 49 IP address (default), 32 log in, 32 login privileges, 33 navigation panel, 35, 36 Performance page, 56 Radio A configuration, 32 Radio Information page, 37 Reboot page, 62 Spectrum Analyzer page, 61 summary status information, 35 System Configuration page, 40 T1 Interface Configuration page, 46 T1/E1 Configuration page, 45 H hop, 7 I interfaces Ethernet, 75 power, 75 RF, 75 T1/E1, 75 interference, 57 interference profile, 6 IP address, 51 IP address conflicts, 32 IP address subnet, 32 IP settings, 9 IP subnet mask, 51 L latency optimization, 5 LEDs GPS/RSL, 20 Power Injector, 20 Power/Ethernet, 20 T1/E1 1&3, 20 T1/E1 2&4, 20 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 107 License Key, 39 lightning arrestor, 6 lightning arrestors, 27 Line Build Out (LBO), 46 Line Code, 46 link, 6 orientation, 11 RF link testing, 8 synchronization, 11 Link Distance parameter, 42, 51 link margin, 69 Link Name parameter, 51 link parameters, 35 Link Security Key, 38 Link Security Key parameter, 51 login names, 33 login privileges, 33 loopback, 46, 47 external (local), 47 external (remote), 47 internal, 47 M Maximum RSL field, 57 MIB files, 49 Minimum RSL field, 57 Minimum RSL Timestamp field, 57 Mode parameter, 41 mounting hardware, 17 multipath, 65 multipath propagation, 67 muting, 44 N noise profile, 6 P parameters antenna port, 43 buzzer timeout selection, 43 passwords, 9, 33, 51 path obstruction, 68 performance degradation, 65 Performance page, 56 power system LEDs and, 22 Power connector, 82 power injector, 22 power interface, 75 Power/Ethernet connector, 19 R radio default settings, 11 grounding, 6, 68 initiation tasks, 14 installation tasks, 14 maximum transmit power setting, 41 mounting, 6, 17 parameters, 9 rebooting, 59, 62 transmitter output power, 6 Radio A, 11 Radio A configuration, 7 radio configuration, 7 radio features, 4 radio firmware files, 49 radio frequency, 2 Radio Information page, 37 radio mount enclosure, 3 connections, 4 indoor, 3 connections, 4 Radio Name parameter, 50 Radio Transmit Power parameter, 40 Reboot page, 62 received signal level (RSL). See RSL receiver threshold, 6 receiver threshold performance, 9 record keeping, 16 regulatory requirements, 10 EX-4.9r FCC EIRP, 96 EX-5r FCC EIRP, 98 USA, 94, 95 regulatory rquirements Canada, 95 RESET button, 21 RF cable length, 4 RF connector termination, 22 RF Frequency parameter, 42, 51 RF interface, 75 RF interference, 67 RF lightning arrestor, 27 RF output power, 9 RSL, 9 current RSL readings, 56 diagnostics, 60 Maximum RSL field, 57 Minimum RSL Timestamp field, 57 monitor for performance, 65 RSL voltage, 28 S security mode, 9 Set to E1 button, 45 Set to T1 button, 45 shipping box contents, 7 site preparation, 6 SNMP, 53 specifications, 70 Spectrum Analyzer page, 61 Swap button, 49, 52 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual System Configuration page, 40 system latency, 6 system parameters default settings, 24 system performance, 56 system reboot, 59 system settings Current BER field, 56 Errored Seconds (ES) field, 57 grounding, 68 Maximum RSL, 57 Minimum RSL field, 57 Time Since Reset field, 58 Unavailable Seconds field, 57 system specifications, 70 T T1 clocking, 20 T1 Interface Configuration page, 46 T1/E1 1&3 connector, 19 T1/E1 2&4 connector, 19 T1/E1 2&4 LED, 20 T1/E1 circuits, 45 T1/E1 Configuration page, 45 T1/E1 configuration parameters, 51 T1/E1 connections, 81 T1/E1 connectors, 81 T1/E1 interfaces, 75 T1/E1 loopback, 47 TDD factors, 10 TDD frame length, 6, 7 TDD frame size, 7 TDD Frame Size parameter, 43, 51 TDM circuit, 6 TDM circuits, 41 TDM interfaces, 11 Telnet session, 30 temperature, 60 Temperature alarm, 55 testing, 77 back-to-back bench, 8 threshold, 79 threshold measurement, 79 threshold measurement tests, 79 threshold testing, 79 time division duplex (TDD). See TDD frame Time Since Reset, 58 transmission line coaxial, 25 transmitter output power, 9 transmitter output power, 6 troubleshooting, 60, 64 U Unavailable Seconds (UAS), 57 unfaded error-free performance, 9 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 108 Update button, 38 user privileges, 33 Exalt Communications, Inc. r-series Installation and Management Manual V voltage test, 28 VSWR, 66 5000007 (ETSI) 2007-06-28 109 2006 Exalt Communications Inc. 580 Division St. Campbell, CA 95008 USA 5000007 2006-09-19
1 2 3 | Module Manual | Users Manual | 171.36 KiB | May 07 2007 / July 09 2007 |
EX-5 Series Digital Microwave Radio Module Part Number: 5xxxxxxx Date: 2007-06-29 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt EX-5 Series Module Guide Legal Notice The information contained herein is the property of Exalt Communications, Inc. (Exalt) and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part of this document may be reproduced, in any form, except as authorized by contract or other written permission from the owner. Any brand names and product names included in this manual are trademarks, registered trademarks, or trade names of their respective holders. The contents of this document are current as of the date of publication. Exalt reserves the right to change the contents without prior notice. The publication of information in this document does not imply freedom from patent or other rights of Exalt or others. 2007 Exalt Communications Inc. All rights reserved. The Exalt logo is a trademark of Exalt Communications, Inc. Open-Source License Information In addition to proprietary software/firmware, which is the sole intellectual property of Exalt, the Exalt EX-5 Series of Digital Microwave Radios make use of public (open-
source) software/firmware within the terms of use of their respective shared license agreements. Exalt will supply copies of any of this code, within the terms of their individual licensing agreements, upon request. Open-Source Code License Agreement Linux Operating System GNU GPL Version 2 BusyBox CLI GNU GPL Version 2 GoAhead Web Server Copyright (c) 2003 GoAhead Software, Inc. All Rights Reserved. U-boot Boot Code GNU GPL Version 2 Website www.gnu.org www.gnu.org;
www.busybox.net www.goahead.com www.gnu.org www.sourceforge.net Net-SNMP
(see Copyright Notices on page 14) www.sourceforge.net 5xxxxxxx 2007-06-29 1 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt EX-5 Series Guide About this Document This manual provides a description of the Exalt EX-5 Series Digital Microwave Radio Module. Revision History Date Products and Release code 2007-06-29 EX-5 Series Radio Module Guide 5xxxxxxx 2007-06-29 2 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt EX-5 Series Module Guide General Compliance and Safety The usage of radio transmission devices is subject to specific regulatory requirements governed by regional legislation. In most cases, the specific device must be authorized for use in a given country and must be installed and adjusted in accordance with specific radio-frequency settings and in a manner that has been authorized specific to the device itself in accordance with the specific location of the device. Some users may be completely or partially restricted from use of the device. Please consult local governmental agency/agencies for regulatory requirements before use, or contact Exalt or your Exalt authorized dealer for assistance. Do not modify this device in any way without the express written consent of Exalt. Modification voids the manufacturer warranty, and may also be illegal in accordance to government regulations. In addition, there are no user-serviceable parts or assemblies inside the product housing. There may also be voltages, signals, and mechanisms within the device that could be harmful to human safety. The mounting of the system and associated peripherals and connections (inclusive of antenna mast, antenna, cabling, egress, lightning protection devices, grounding, power, and so on) may be subject to regional requirements for health and human safety. A qualified professional installer and an electrician may be required by law. Exalt cannot warranty the device or be found liable for any unauthorized use or installation of the device. Safety Icons The following icons denote specific types of information. Note This symbol means take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to materials not contained in the manual. Caution This symbol means be careful. There is a risk of equipment damage, loss of data, or injury to persons. To reduce the risk, follow the instructions. This is a general warning, caution, or risk of danger. Warning This warning symbol means there is a risk of electric shock. This situation could cause bodily injury. To reduce the risk, before working on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents. 5xxxxxxx 2007-06-29 3 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt EX-5 Series Guide Safety Notices 1. Review this entire guide for important installation instructions BEFORE attempting to install this product. 2. The end-product is intended to be installed, used, and maintained by experienced telecommunications personnel only. 3. Do not move or alter the marking labels. 5xxxxxxx 2007-06-29 4 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt EX-5 Series Module Guide Table of Contents Legal Notice........................................................................................................................ 1 Open-Source License Information...................................................................................... 1 About this Document .......................................................................................................... 2 Revision History ............................................................................................................. 2 General Compliance and Safety.......................................................................................... 3 Safety Icons..................................................................................................................... 3 Safety Notices ..................................................................................................................... 4 Introduction......................................................................................................................... 7 Related Documentation and Software ............................................................................ 7 The Exalt EX-5 Series of Digital Microwave Radio Module......................................... 7 Radio A/B Configuration............................................................................................ 8 Installation........................................................................................................................... 9 Specifications.................................................................................................................... 10 Common System Specifications ................................................................................... 10 EX-5 System Specifications, 5.3 GHz Band ................................................................ 11 EX-5 System Specifications, 5.4 GHz Band ................................................................ 12 EX-5 System Specifications, 5.8 GHz Band ................................................................ 13 Copyright Notices ............................................................................................................. 14 Net-SNMP..................................................................................................................... 14 General Regulatory Notices.............................................................................................. 19 Dynamic Frequency Selection ...................................................................................... 19 Antennas ....................................................................................................................... 19 Region 1 Specifics ............................................................................................................ 22 Federal Communications Commission (FCC), United States ...................................... 22 United States Compliance................................................................................................. 23 Industry Canada (IC), Canada....................................................................................... 23 Antennas Supported in Canada................................................................................. 23 Canada Compliance .......................................................................................................... 24 EX-5 EIRP for the US and Canada................................................................................... 24 5250-5350 MHz Band................................................................................................... 24 5xxxxxxx 2007-06-29 5 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt EX-5 Series Guide 5470-5725 MHz Band................................................................................................... 25 5725-5850 MHz Band................................................................................................... 25 Region 2 Specifics ............................................................................................................ 26 Europe/ITU (ETSI and CE Mark)................................................................................. 26 Declaration of Conformity to the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC.............................. 27 EU WEEE ......................................................................................................................... 27 EU RoHS .......................................................................................................................... 28 Europe Compliance........................................................................................................... 28 EX-5 EIRP by Country ..................................................................................................... 30 52505350 MHz band................................................................................................... 30 54705725 MHz band................................................................................................... 30 5725-5850 MHz band ................................................................................................... 31 Index ................................................................................................................................. 33 List of Tables Table 1 Table 2 Table 3 Factory Default Settings ................................................................................. 8 EX-5 supported antennas .............................................................................. 20 Region 2 Country Specific Power Levels for EX-5 Series........................... 32 5xxxxxxx 2007-06-29 6 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt EX-5 Series Module Guide Introduction Exalt Communications, Inc. thanks you for your purchase. Our goal is to build the highest quality, highest reliability digital microwave radio products. This commitment to quality and reliability extends to our employees and partners alike. We appreciate any comments on how we can improve our products, as well as your sales and Customer Care experience. Customer Care Hotline (USA):
(408) 871-9890 Toll-Free Customer Care Hotline (USA):
(877) EXALT-01 (392-5801) Direct-Dial Telephone (USA):
(408) 871-1804 Website:
www.exaltcom.com Sales e-mail:
sales@exaltcom.com Customer Care e-mail:
support@exaltcom.com Mailing Address:
Exalt Communications, Inc. 580 Division St. Campbell, CA 95008 USA Related Documentation and Software This manual makes reference to other documentation and software files that may be necessary. Any document or software mentioned in this manual can be found at:
http://www.exaltcom.com/support/downloads.htm The Quick Start Guide provides any necessary username and password information to gain access to these documents. The Exalt EX-5 Series of Digital Microwave Radio Module The Exalt EX-5 Series of Digital Microwave Radios are the most advanced carrier-class point-to-point terrestrial radio communications devices operating in the 5250 to 5850 MHz frequency bands, respectively. The EX-5 Series radios connect voice and/or digital data from one location to another, obviating the need for copper or fiber connectivity, or enhancing existing connectivity by providing a redundancy solution, a primary solution, and/or additional capacity. The EX-5 Series Digital Microwave Radio Module is installed in Exalts EX-5 Series products. Please refer to the Installation and Management Guide for your end-product for detailed information on installation, set-up, troubleshooting, and maintenance. There are no user serviceable parts inside the end-product including the EX-5 Series Module, opening the end-product voids all warranties. 5xxxxxxx 2007-06-29 7 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt EX-5 Series Guide Generally, the EX-5 Series products require a clear line-of-sight and proper path clearance to achieve a high-performance, reliable connection. Perform professional path engineering and site planning BEFORE installing this equipment. Note: It is the professional installers responsibility to ensure that the radio system is implemented in a legal fashion. Exalt is not liable for any unsafe or illegal installations. Radio A/B Configuration Use the Exalt GUI to configure the radio terminals for Radio A and Radio B orientation. Since many other parameters also need to be set, and the Exalt GUI is needed for these configurations, this is the best way to completely configure the radio terminals. Radios arrive from manufacture in default configuration, orientated as Radio B and configured as shown in Table 1. Table 1 Factory Default Settings Parameter Frequency Transmit Power Bandwidth Mode Link Distance TDD Frame Size Link Security Key Administration Password User Password IP Address IP Mask IP Gateway Ethernet Interfaces AUX port NMS Access T1/E1 Settings (-16 models) T1/E1 Settings (std. models) 5xxxxxxx 2007-06-29 EX-5 5788 MHz
+4 dBm 8 MHz Mode 1
<10 miles 2ms 000000000000 password password 10.0.0.1 255.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Enabled, 100/Full In-Band All Enabled, T1, B8ZS, AIS Disabled 8 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt EX-5 Series Module Guide Installation Each Exalt Digital Microwave Radio Module is installed in an EX-5 Series product. There are no user-serviceable parts, Installation and Management need to be as described in the Installation and Management Guide applicable to the end-product. 5xxxxxxx 2007-06-29 9 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt EX-5 Series Guide Specifications This section presents specifications for the EX-5 Series of Digital Microwave Radios. Common System Specifications Tuning Resolution Power Control Resolution Selectable Modulation Modes Selectable Frame Lengths (ms) 1MHz 0.5dB Mode 1 (QPSK); Mode 2 (16QAM) 0.5, 1, 2, 2.5, 4, 5 27 13 27 Mbps 8 / 10 MHz 16 / 20 MHz*
Mode 1 Mode 2 Maximum Aggregate User Capacity Error Floor Frequency Stability Link Security
*Not all Bandwidth and Mode combinations are available on all radio models, and some may require specific software license keys, which may be purchased from an authorized Exalt representative. 10-12
+7 ppm 96-bit Security Code 64MHz*
110 216 54 5xxxxxxx 2007-06-29 10 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt EX-5 Series Module Guide EX-5 System Specifications, 5.3 GHz Band Frequency Band Tunable Range Output Power (at full power) Output Power (at minimum power) -7dBm Selectable Channel Bandwidths 5250 to 5350 MHz 5260 to 5332 MHz
+13dBm (0.02W) 8MHz, 16MHz, 32MHz, 64MHz*
Receiver Threshold (BER=10-6) Maximum RSL Non-overlapping channels Regulatory Compliance Contains FCC ID IC ID dBm 8MHz 16MHz 32MHz 64MHz*
Mode 1 Mode 2
-86
-83
-80
-77
-78
-75
-72
-69 Mode 1: -25dBm error-free; 0dBm no damage 8MHz: 10; 16MHz: 5; 32MHz: 2; 64MHz*: 1 FCC 15.407; IC RSS-210; EN 301 893 TTM-105P25M 6254A-105P25I/R 8MHz 8M7W7D Emission Designator(s)
*For the EX-5 Series, a firmware option may be required to enable 64 MHz BW. 67M9W7D 17M2W7D 34M5W7D 64MHz*
16MHz 32MHz 5xxxxxxx 2007-06-29 11 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt EX-5 Series Guide EX-5 System Specifications, 5.4 GHz Band Frequency Band Tunable Range Output Power (at full power) Output Power (at minimum power) -7dBm Selectable Channel Bandwidths 5470 to 5725 MHz 5488 to 5715 MHz
+13dBm (0.02W) 8MHz, 16MHz, 32MHz*, 64MHz*
Receiver Threshold (BER=10-6) Maximum RSL Non-overlapping channels Regulatory Compliance Contains FCC ID IC ID dBm Mode 1 Mode 2 8MHz 16MHz 32MHz 64MHz*
-86
-83
-80
-77
-78
-75
-72
-69 Mode 1: -25dBm error-free; 0dBm no damage 8MHz: 29; 16MHz: 14; 32MHz: 7; 64MHz*: 3 FCC 15.407; IC RSS-210; EN 301 893 TTM-105P25M 6254A-105P25I/R 8MHz Emission Designator(s)
* For the EX-5 Series, a firmware option may be required to enable 64 MHz BW. 67M9W7D 17M2W7D 34M5W7D 8M7W7D 64MHz*
16MHz 32MHz 5xxxxxxx 2007-06-29 12 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt EX-5 Series Module Guide EX-5 System Specifications, 5.8 GHz Band Frequency Band Tunable Range Output Power (at full power) Output Power (at minimum power) +4dBm Selectable Channel Bandwidths 5725 to 5850 MHz 5731 to 5844 MHz
+24dBm (0.25W), Mode 1
+21dBm (0.13W), Mode 2 8MHz, 16MHz, 32MHz*, 64MHz*
Receiver Threshold (BER=10-6) Maximum RSL Non-overlapping channels Regulatory Compliance Contains FCC ID IC ID
(dBm) 8MHz 16MHz 32MHz 64MHz*
Mode 1 Mode 2
-86
-83
-80
-77
-78
-75
-72
-69 Mode 1: -25dBm error-free; 0dBm no damage 8MHz: 15; 16MHz: 7; 32MHz: 3; 64MHz*: 1 FCC 15.247; IC RSS-210; EN 302 502 TTM-105P25M 6254A-105P25I/R 8MHz 9M1W7D Emission Designator(s)
* For the EX-5 Series, a firmware upgrade may be required to enable 64 MHz BW. 61M6W7D 16M5W7D 31M8W7D 64MHz*
16MHz 32MHz 5xxxxxxx 2007-06-29 13 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt EX-5 Series Guide Copyright Notices This section present copyright notices for third-party software licensed to Exalt Communications, Inc. Net-SNMP The following copyright notice applies to the open-source licensing agreement for Net-SNMP. Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000 Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California All Rights Reserved Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU and The Regents of the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written permission. CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE. 5xxxxxxx 2007-06-29 14 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt EX-5 Series Module Guide Network Associates Technology, Inc. Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Cambridge Broadband, Ltd. Portions of this code are copyright (c) 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED 5xxxxxxx 2007-06-29 15 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt EX-5 Series Guide TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Sun Microsystems, Inc. Copyright 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, California 95054, U.S.A. All rights reserved. Use is subject to license terms below. This distribution may include materials developed by third parties. Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. 5xxxxxxx 2007-06-29 16 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt EX-5 Series Module Guide Sparta, Inc. Copyright (c) 2003-2005, Sparta, Inc All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Sparta, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Cisco, Inc. Copyright (c) 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Cisco, Inc, Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications, nor the names of their contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. 5xxxxxxx 2007-06-29 17 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt EX-5 Series Guide THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co. Copyright (c) Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG, 2003 oss@fabasoft.com Author: Bernhard Penz Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* The name of Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG or any of its subsidiaries, brand or product names may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. 5xxxxxxx 2007-06-29 18 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt EX-5 Series Module Guide Appendix A - Regulatory Compliance General Regulatory Notices Exalts EX-5 Series products are equipped with base software that does not include Regulatory License Key (RLK) information. The professional installer is required to enter the License Key based on regional regulations. License keys are issued by serial number, it is important that the license key used for installing the radio is the correct license key for the serial number on the product. Dynamic Frequency Selection Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) may be required by regional legislation in some frequency bands in order to avoid causing interference to radar systems. Prior to the start of any transmission, the device equipped with DFS monitors the spectrum and is not permitted to transmit on a part of the spectrum that is already in use for radar transmissions for a period of 30 minutes. During operation of the device, the spectrum is continually monitored by the DFS to detect if radar begins transmission on a frequency that is being used by the device to transmit on. If the DFS software detects radar, the device must move off channel within a specified time period so that the device transmission does not interfere with the radar transmission. The device equipped with DFS is required to stay off that part of the spectrum for a minimum of 30 minutes, after which time the device may then check the spectrum for radar transmissions and begin transmitting if no radar is detected. Antennas Table 2 lists antennas recommended for use with the EX-5 Series radios. In some countries, antennas exceeding a certain level of gain may be unlawful. 5xxxxxxx 2007-06-29 19 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt EX-5 Series Guide Table 2 lists antennas supported by the EX-5 family of Digital Microwave Radios. Table 2 EX-5 supported antennas Manufacturer Model #
Description Mid-band Gain dBi P2F-52-N P3F-52-N P4F-52-NXA P6F-52-NXA HP2F-52-NPA HP3F-52-NPA HP4F-52-NPA HP6F-52-NPA FPA5250D06-N FPA5250D12-N DFPS.5-52 DFPD1-52 DFPD2-52 QF2-52-N QF2.5-52-N QF4-52-N QF6-52N HQF2-52-N HQF4-52-N HQF6-52-N MT-485001 MT-485002 MT-486004 MT-486001 FP.5-5-18 FP1-5-24 FP2-5-28 SP1-5.2 SP2-5.2 HP2-5.2 SP3-5.2 SP4-5.2 SP6-5.2 SPF2-52A SPF3-52A SPF4-52A SPF6-52A SDF4-52A 2-foot Dish 3-foot Dish 4-foot Dish 6-foot Dish 2-foot HP Dish 3-foot HP Dish 4-foot HP Dish 6-foot HP Dish 6-inch Panel 1-foot Panel 6-inch Panel 1-foot Panel 2-foot Panel 2-foot Dish 2.5-foot Dish 4-foot Dish 6-foot Dish 2-foot HP Dish 4-foot HP Dish 6-foot HP Dish 7.5-inch Panel 1-foot Panel 18-inch Panel 2-foot Panel 6-inch Panel 1-foot Panel 2-foot Panel 1-foot Dish 2-foot Dish 2-foot HP Dish 3-foot Dish 4-foot Dish 6-foot Dish 2-foot Dish 3-foot Dish 4-foot Dish 6-foot Dish 4-foot HP Dish Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel MTI MTI MTI MTI Radio Waves Radio Waves Radio Waves Radio Waves Radio Waves Radio Waves Radio Waves Radio Waves Radio Waves RFS RFS RFS RFS RFS 5xxxxxxx 2007-06-29
(mid-band) 29.4 33.4 34.9 37.6 29.0 33.0 34.5 37.2 18.0 23.6 18.0 23.5 28.0 28.5 31.2 34.8 37.8 28.2 34.4 37.4 19.0 23.0 26.0 28.0 18.0 23.8 28.0 22.5 29.0 28.6 32.0 34.8 37.9 27.9 31.4 33.9 37.4 33.9 20 3dB (Azimuth/Elevation) Beamwidth
(degrees) 5.4 3.8 3.0 1.8 5.4 3.8 3.0 1.8 19.3 9.6 19.0 9.4 4.6 5.6 4.4 2.7 1.9 5.7 2.8 1.9 18.0 9.0 6.0 4.5 20.0 10.0 4.5 11.1 6.1 6.1 4.0 3.0 2.0 6.2 4.2 3.1 2.1 3.1 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt EX-5 Series Module Guide Manufacturer Model #
Description Mid-band Gain dBi RFS RFS RFS RFS SDF6-52A MA0528-19AN MA0528-23AN MA0528-28AN 6-foot HP Dish 7.5-inch Panel 1-foot Panel 2-foot Panel
(mid-band) 37.4 19.0 23.0 28.0 3dB (Azimuth/Elevation) Beamwidth
(degrees) 2.1 18.0 9.0 4.5 5xxxxxxx 2007-06-29 21 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt EX-5 Series Guide Region 1 Specifics Region 1 is designated for USA and Canada installations. Note: The professional installer is responsible to ensure that RF output power is properly adjusted to not exceed the regulatory limit. Federal Communications Commission (FCC), United States The device is allowed to be used provided it does not cause interference to other devices. It is not guaranteed to provide protection against interference from other electronic and radio devices. The system has been tested and found to comply with the limits of a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Shielded cables and I/O cords must be used for this equipment to comply with the relevant FCC regulations. Changes or modifications not expressly approved in writing by Exalt may void the users authority to operate this equipment. This device must be professionally installed. To comply with regulations, the output power of this device may need to be adjusted in accordance to the associated transmission system. The antenna associated with the EX-5 family shall be mounted in a location that is at least 10/3m away from humans that may be subject to long-term or continuous exposure. Important: Where required by regional regulations, DFS is enabled by the system keys and cannot be disabled. 5xxxxxxx 2007-06-29 22 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt EX-5 Series Module Guide United States Compliance The EX-5 product families operate under FCC Rule Parts 15.247 and/or 15.407 as a license-exempt device. They may only be used as a point-to-point transmission device for fixed or temporary-fixed (non-mobile) installations. The devices are subject to the following restrictions:
Do not use external amplifiers to boost the power or overcome transmission system losses, unless the specific amplifier/cable/antenna combination has expressly been authorized by the FCC. The output power must never exceed +30 dBm. Cross-border transmissions are expressly prohibited, except with written permission from both the FCC and the governing body of the neighboring country (Cofetel for Mexico; Industry Canada for Canada). Use only parabolic dish antennas or directional flat-panel antennas. No other types of antennas (omni-directional, yagi, and so on) are authorized. Parabolic dishes of either grid or solid type are allowed. Maximum mid-band gain of each type of antenna certified is:
EX-5 models:
Parabolic dish: 37.9 dBi (6'/1.8m diameter) Directional flat panel: 28 dBi (~2'/61cm square) Industry Canada (IC), Canada This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
4. 5. this device may not cause interference, and this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Antennas Supported in Canada The EX-5 family has been designed to operate with the antennas listed in Table 2 which have a maximum gain of 37.9 dBi. Antennas not included in the list or having a gain greater than 37.9 dBi are prohibited for use with this device. The required antenna impedance is 50 Ohms. The antenna associated with the EX-5 family shall be mounted in a location that is at least 10/3m away from humans that may be subject to long-term or continuous exposure. Important: Where required by regional regulations, DFS is enabled by the system keys and cannot be disabled. 5xxxxxxx 2007-06-29 23 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt EX-5 Series Guide Canada Compliance EX-5 models operate under RSS-210 of Industry Canada regulations. Operation is subject to the following conditions, unless express permission is granted by Industry Canada to operate in a different manner:
External amplifiers cannot be used to boost the power or to overcome transmission system losses, unless the specific amplifier/cable/antenna combination is expressly authorized by Industry Canada. Cross-border transmissions are expressly prohibited, except with written permission from both Industry Canada and the governing body of the neighboring country (FCC for USA) Only parabolic dish antennas or directional flat-panel antennas may be used. No other types of antennas (omni-directional, yagi, and so on) are authorized. Parabolic dishes of either grid or solid type are allowed. Maximum gain of each type of antenna allowed is:
EX-5 models:
Parabolic dish: 37.9 dBi (6'/1.8m diameter) Directional flat panel: 28 dBi (~2'/61cm square) EX-5 EIRP for the US and Canada 5250-5350 MHz Band For the EX-5 models within the 52505350 MHz band, the maximum transmit power is 30 dBm. The maximum output of the radio is +13 dBm. P = CP G + L where:
P
= Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm
= Maximum Conducted Power of transmitter output power of CP radio, in dBm G L
= Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 5250 to 5350 MHz
= Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 5250 and 5350 MHz 5xxxxxxx 2007-06-29 24 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt EX-5 Series Module Guide 5470-5725 MHz Band For the EX-5 models within the 5470-5725 MHz band, the maximum EIRP allowed is 30 dBm. The maximum output power of the radio is +13 dBm. P = CP G + L where:
P
= Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm
= Maximum Conducted Power of transmitter output power of CP radio, in dBm G L
= Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 5470 to 5725 MHz
= Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 5470 and 5725 MHz 5725-5850 MHz Band For the EX-5 models within the 57255850 MHz band, the maximum EIRP allowed is 61.9 dBm. The maximum output power of the radio is +24 dBm in Mode 1 and +21 dBm in Mode 2. P = CP G + L where:
P
= Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm
= Maximum Conducted Power of transmitter output power of CP radio, in dBm G L
= Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 5725 to 5850 MHz
= Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 5725 and 5850 MHz 5xxxxxxx 2007-06-29 25 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt EX-5 Series Guide Region 2 Specifics The countries that are covered by this region are: Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Great Britain, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Netherlands, Switzerland, and Turkey. Note: The professional installer is responsible to ensure that RF output power is properly adjusted to not exceed the regulatory limit. Europe/ITU (ETSI and CE Mark) The EX-5 family complies with ETS 301 893 for the 5.3 and 5.47 GHz bands for license-
exempt use for most countries recognizing ETSI or ITU band assignments. This band is not yet harmonized for all countries recognizing ETSI or ITU band assignments These bands require Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) and Transmitter Power Control (TPC) for radar-detection and avoidance. There is a +30dBm EIRP limit applied to this band. Transmitter power must be adjusted accordingly with respect to the RF cabling losses and antenna gains associated with each terminal. The EX-5 family complies with ETS 302 502 for the 5.8 GHz band. This band is not yet harmonized for all countries recognizing ETSI or ITU band assignments. Consult the individual country regulations or your Exalt Communications representative for details. This band requires DFS and TPC for radar-detection and avoidance. There is a +33dBm EIRP limit for use of the 10MHz BW setting (called 8MHz on GUI), and a +36dBm EIRP limit for use of the 20MHz BW setting (called 16MHz on GUI). All models comply with the requirements for CE Mark (EN 60950-1 and IEC 60950-1) and EMC (EN 301 489-17). No substitutions shall be made, and all wiring and grounding instructions contained in this manual must be followed to ensure safety in accordance to the standards. 5xxxxxxx 2007-06-29 26 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt EX-5 Series Module Guide Declaration of Conformity to the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC English:
This equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Deutsch:
Dansk:
Espaol:
Franais:
Dieses Gert entspricht den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den weiteren entsprecheneden Vorgaben der Richtlinie 1999/5/EU. Dette udstyr er i overensstemmelse med de vsentlige krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i Directiv 1999/5/EF. Este equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales asi como con otras disposiciones de la Directive 1999/5/EC. 1999/5/E. Cet appareil est conforme aux exigencies essentialles et aux autres dispositions pertinantes de la Directive 1999/5/EC. slenska:
essi bnaur samrmist lgbonum krfum og rum kvum tilskipunar 1999/5/ESB. Italiano:
Questo apparato conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed agli altri principi sanciti dalla Direttiva 1999/5/EC. Nederlands: Deze apparatuur voldoet aan de belangrijkste eisen en andere voorzieningen van richtlijn 1999/5/EC. Norsk:
Dette utstyret er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i EU-
directiv 1999/5/EC. Portugus:
Este equipamento satisfaz os requisitos essenciais e outras provises da Directiva 1999/5/EC. Suomalainen: Tm laite tytt direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleelliset vaatimukset ja on siin asetettujen muidenkin ehtojen mukainen. Svenska:
Denna utrustning r i verensstmmelse med de vsentliga kraven och andra relevanta bestmmelser i Direktiv 1999/5/EC. For 5 GHz radios, the following standards were applied:
Radio: EN 301 893, EN 302 502 EMC: EN 301 489-1, EN 301 489-17 Safety: EN 60950-1, IEC 60950-1 The following CE mark is affixed to the product:
EU WEEE Exalt is committed to meeting the requirements of the European Unions Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive. The Directives require producers of electrical and electronic equipment to finance the take-back for re-use or recycling of their products placed on the EU market after 13 August 2005. Exalt products that are within the scope of the Directives are labeled with a crossed-out
"wheelie-bin" symbol as required by the Directives. This indicates that the product was placed on the market after 13 August 2005 and that end-users should segregate the product from other wastes at end-of-life. The WEEE Directives are being implemented in each of the 28 EU and European Economic Area (EAA) countries through national legislation. This has resulted in considerable variation in the detailed requirements across the EU, many of which require presence in the EU. As a result, Exalts WEEE compliance approach is to require the 5xxxxxxx 2007-06-29 27 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt EX-5 Series Guide distributors and/or resellers in the EU to comply with each countrys national legislation by registration of the distributor or reseller as the producer and for the reseller/distributor to carry out and fulfill the legislative requirements of each national compliance scheme. Below is the crossed out wheelie bin symbol as required by the WEEE Directive. EU RoHS RoHS is the acronym used to refer to the European Union (EU) Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. Hazardous materials are those chemicals and substances that are legislatively, market, or customer banned or restricted for use in products and/or manufacturing. There are six (6) RoHS substances: lead (Pb), cadmium (Cd), mercury
(Hg), hexavalent chromium (Cr+6), polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) and polybrominated diphenylethers (PBDE). Other countries may be introducing legislation that results in similar restrictions of hazardous substances. Many Exalt products will continue to use lead-based solder under the exemption allowed for network infrastructure equipment. Small amounts of lead, cadmium, mercury, hexavalent chromium, PBB, and PBDE can also be found in a few electrical and electrical components. Europe Compliance The EX-5 family operates under EN 301 893 and EN 302 502 rules as a license-exempt device. All of these permitted devices must be professionally installed. They may only be used as a point-to-point transmission device for fixed or temporary-fixed (non-mobile) installations. The devices are subject to the following restrictions:
Do not use external amplifiers to boost the power or overcome transmission system losses, unless the specific amplifier/cable/antenna combination has expressly been authorized by the specific country regulations. The output power must never exceed that specified. Use only parabolic dish antennas or directional flat-panel antennas. No other types of antennas (omni-directional, yagi, and so on) are authorized. Parabolic dishes of either grid or solid type are allowed. Maximum mid-band gain of each type of antenna certified is:
EX-5 models:
5xxxxxxx 2007-06-29 28 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt EX-5 Series Module Guide Parabolic dish: 37.9 dBi (6'/1.8m diameter) Directional flat panel: 28 dBi (~2'/61cm square) 5xxxxxxx 2007-06-29 29 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt EX-5 Series Guide EX-5 EIRP by Country Table 13 summarizes the maximum power by band and country for Exalts EX-5 series products. 52505350 MHz band For the EX-5 models within the 52505350 MHz band, the maximum transmit power is 23 dBm. The maximum output of the radio is +13 dBm. P = CP G + L where:
P
= Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm
= Maximum Conducted Power of transmitter output power of CP radio, in dBm
= Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 5250 to 5350 MHz
= Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 5250 and 5350 MHz G L 54705725 MHz band For the EX-5 models within the 5470-5725 MHz band, the maximum EIRP allowed is 30 dBm. The maximum output power of the radio is +13 dBm. P = CP G + L where:
P
= Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm
= Maximum Conducted Power of transmitter output power of CP radio, in dBm G L
= Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 5470 to 5725 MHz
= Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all 5xxxxxxx 2007-06-29 30 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt EX-5 Series Module Guide cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 5470 and 5725 MHz 5725-5850 MHz band For the EX-5 models, within the 5725-5850 MHz band, the maximum transmit power with respect to specific country EIRP regulations is determined based on the channel bandwidth. The EIRP power limit is 33 dBm for 10 MHz channels and 36 dBm for 20 MHz channels. The Exalt EX-5 series maximum transmitter conducted power is +24 dBm. Use the following equation to determine the EIRP:
P = CP G + L where:
P
= Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm
= Maximum Conducted Power of transmitter output power of CP radio, in dBm G
= Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 5725-5850 MHz
= Total transmission system losses of all elements between the L radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 5725 and 5850 MHz 5xxxxxxx 2007-06-29 31 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt EX-5 Series Guide Table 3 Region 2 Country Specific Power Levels for EX-5 Series Country Maximum EIRP Output Power, 5.3 GHz band Maximum EIRP Output Power, 5.4 GHz band Maximum EIRP Output Power, 5.8 GHz band
(BW dependent) see note 1 5 dBm 5 dBm 33/36 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm Austria Belgium Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Great Britain Hungary Iceland Ireland Italy Liechtenstein Lithuania Luxembourg Netherlands Norway Poland Portugal Romania Slovak Republic Slovenia Sweden Switzerland Turkey Note 1: If the output power is designated as 33/36 dBm, the EIRP is limited to 33 dBm for 10 MHz bandwidth transmissions and 36 dBm for 20 MHz bandwidth transmissions. 5xxxxxxx 2007-06-29 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 5 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 5 dBm 33/36 dBm 5 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 5 dBm 33/36 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 32 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt EX-5 Series Module Guide R radio default settings, 8 Radio A, 8 regulatory requirements EX-5 FCC EIRP, 25 USA, 23 regulatory rquirements Canada, 24 S specifications, 10 system specifications, 10 Index A antennas EX-5 Canada, 23 US, 20 C contact information, 7 D dimensions, 10 documentation, related, 7 5xxxxxxx 2007-06-29 33 Exalt Communications, Inc. Exalt EX-5 Series Guide 2007 Exalt Communications Inc. 580 Division St. Campbell, CA 95008 USA) 5xxxxxxx 2007-06-29
1 2 3 | User Manual 1 | Users Manual | 2.05 MiB |
Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Installation and Management Guide Models:
EX-2.4i/EX-2.4i Lite EX-2.4i-16/EX-2.4i-16 K EX-4.9i EX-5i/EX-5i Lite EX-5i-16/EX-5i-16 K EX-5i-DS3 206501-019 2016-05-24 i Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Legal Notice The information contained herein is the property of Exalt Wireless, Inc. (Exalt) and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part of this document may be reproduced, in any form, except as authorized by contract or other written permission from the owner. Any brand names and product names included in this manual are trademarks, registered trademarks, or trade names of their respective holders. The contents of this document are current as of the date of publication. Exalt reserves the right to change the contents without prior notice. The publication of information in this document does not imply freedom from patent or other rights of Exalt or others. 2011 Exalt Wireless Inc. All rights reserved. The Exalt logo is a trademark of Exalt Wireless, Inc. ExtendAir is a registered trademark of Exalt Wireless Inc. Open-Source License Information Per the terms of your Exalt Limited Hardware Warranty, Software License, and RMA Procedures Agreement with Exalt Wireless, Inc. and/or its subsidiaries, certain Third Party Software may be provided with and as part of the Exalt products provided to you, and any such Third Party Software files provided are governed by the terms of their separate Third Party Licenses, which licenses give you at least the license rights licensed to you in the Exalt End User Agreement and may give you additional license rights as to the Third Party Software, but only with respect to the particular Third Party Software to which the Third Party License applies. The Exalt Products may include or be bundled with some or all of the following third party software. Copies of the copyright notices and license agreements for any or all of these may be requested by contacting Exalt support at email: support@exaltcom.com. Open Source Code Embedded Linux - OS U-Boot Busy Box License Agreement Boot Code. Both licensed under GPL Version 3 Website www.gnu.org www.sourceforge.net Linux Commands. Licensed under GPL Version 2 www.gnu.org and www.busybox.net www.gnu.org www.openssl.org Expat Wrapper. Licensed under LGPL Version 3 SSL Web Access. Licensed under dual license SNMP Agent. Licensed under NetSNMP (see Copyright Notices) SSH 2 Server; Expat - XML Parser; BarelyFitz Java Script Tabifier; jQuery; and Flotr Java Script Plotting Library. All of which are licensed under MIT License Licensed under GoAhead License Agreement Scew OpenSSL Net-SNMP Dropbear GoAhead Webserver ii www.opensource.org/
licenses/mit-license.php www.goahead.com 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Table of Contents Legal Notice . ii Open-Source License Information . ii List of Figures . vii List of Tables . viii About this Document . ix Revision History . ix Icons . x Introduction . 1 Related Documentation and Software . 1 The Exalt i-Series Digital Microwave Radios . 1 Pre-installation Tasks . 6 Link Engineering and Site Planning . 6 Familiarization with the i-Series Radios . 6 Shipping Box Contents . 7 Initial Configuration and Back-to-Back Bench Test . 8 RF Output Power Setting . 9 Time Division Duplex (TDD) Factors . 9 Link Orientation and Synchronization . 10 Radio A/B Configuration . 11 Radio Synchronization . 12 Synchronization Modes . 12 Internal Synchronization. 12 External Synchronization . 13 Offset Timing . 14 When Sync is Lost . 15 LEDs . 15 Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) . 15 Link Symmetry . 16 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) . 17 System Installation and Initiation Process . 18 Record Keeping . 19 Installation . 20 Mechanical Configuration and Mounting . 20 Rack Mounting . 20 Table or Rack Shelf Mounting the System. 21 Radio Ports and Indicators . 21 Connector Overview . 22 LED Indicators . 23 RMT (Remote) Button . 25 Power . 25 Terminating the RF Connector . 25 AC Power . 26 DC Power . 26 Reset to Critical Factory Settings . 28 Antenna/Transmission System . 28 Initial Antenna Mounting . 29 206501-019 2016-05-24 iii Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Transmission Line from Antenna to Egress . 29 RF Lightning Arrestor . 31 Transmission Line from Egress to Radio . 32 Antenna Alignment . 32 Configuration and Management . 34 Command Line Interface (CLI) . 34 Connect to the Radio with a Serial Connection . 34 Telnet into the Command Line Interface (CLI) . 34 Connect to the Radio in a Telnet Session . 34 Exalt Graphical User Interface (GUI) . 35 Preparing to Connect . 35 Log In . 36 Login Privileges . 37 Quick Start . 38 Navigating the GUI . 39 Summary Status Section . 39 Navigation Panel. 40 Radio Information Page . 42 Administration Settings Page . 43 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Configuration . 45 SNMP v1/v2c/v3 Support Options . 45 SNMP Traps . 46 File Transfer Page . 48 File Activation Page . 51 Access Security Page . 52 System Configuration Page . 54 MHS Configuration Page . 58 Ethernet Interface Configuration Page . 59 VLAN Configuration Page . 60 T1/E1 Configuration Pages . 62 T1 Interface Configuration Page. 62 E1 Interface Configuration Page. 63 T1/E1 Loopback . 64 DS3 Configuration Page . 65 GPS Information Page . 66 Alarms Page . 67 MHS Status Page . 69 Performance Page . 70 Event Log Page . 72 User Throughput Page . 73 Diagnostic Charts Page . 75 Spectrum Analyzer Page . 77 Ethernet Utilization Page . 79 Reboot Page . 80 Manual Page . 81 Specifications . 82 Physical Specifications . 82 iv 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Common System Specifications . 82 EX-2.4i System Specifications . 83 EX-4.9i System Specifications . 84 EX-5i System Specifications, 5.3GHz Band . 85 EX-5i System Specifications, 5.4GHz Band . 86 EX-5i System Specifications, 5.8GHz Band . 87 Interfaces . 88 Interface Connections . 90 T1/E1 Connections . 90 Ethernet Connections . 91 Sync Connections . 92 Alarm Connector . 93 Console Connector . 94 DC Power Connector . 95 DIP Switch Settings (-16 Models Only) . 96 Antennas . 98 DC Coupler for Antenna Alignment . 100 Required Items . 100 Interconnections . 100 Troubleshooting . 102 General Practices . 102 Typical Indications of Issues . 103 Improper RF Cable Termination . 104 Multipath Propagation . 104 RF Interference . 104 Path Obstruction . 105 Misaligned Antenna . 105 Faulty Antenna . 105 Improper Grounding . 106 Insufficient Link Margin . 106 Moisture in the Transmission System . 106 Back-to-back Bench Testing . 107 Basic Test . 107 Specification Performance Verification . 108 General Compliance and Safety . 110 Dynamic Frequency Selection . 111 Safety Notices . 112 Regulatory Notices . 113 4.9GHz Model . 113 United States Compliance . 113 Federal Communications Commission (FCC), United States . 113 Canada Compliance . 114 Industry Canada (IC), Canada . 115 Antennas Supported in Canada. 115 Europe and ITU Country Compliance . 115 Regulatory Compliance . 117 Regulatory Domain Keys . 119 206501-019 2016-05-24 v Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios EIRP Limits for the United States and Canada . 120 EX-2.4i EIRP for the USA and Canada . 120 EX-4.9i EIRP for the USA and Canada . 120 EX-5i Series EIRP for the US and Canada . 120 52505350 MHz Band . 120 54705725 MHz Band . 121 57255850 MHz Band . 121 EIRP Limits for the European Union and ITU Countries . 122 EX-2.4i-Series EIRP . 122 EX-5i Series EIRP . 123 52505350 MHz band . 123 54705725 MHz band . 124 57255850 MHz band . 124 EIRP Limits for Australia . 126 EX-5i Series EIRP for Australia . 126 54705725 MHz Band . 126 57255850 MHz Band . 126 Declaration of Conformity to the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC . 127 EU WEEE . 128 EU RoHS . 128 END USER AGREEMENT . 130 Copyright Notices . 135 Index . 139 vi 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios List of Figures EX-2.4i Digital Microwave Radio . 1 Figure 1 Indoor mount interconnection . 4 Figure 2 Enclosure mount interconnection . 4 Figure 3 Basic radio interconnectivity using internal synchronization . 12 Figure 4 Figure 5 Collocated radios, one in AUTO SYNC mode to provide redundancy . 13 Figure 6 Multiple-link site configuration, using AUTO SYNC for redundancy . 13 Figure 7 GPS as primary sync source using AUTO SYNC . 14 Synchronized GPS sources using AUTO SYNC . 14 Figure 8 Figure 9 Radio installation tasks . 18 Figure 10 Front flush mount configuration . 20 Figure 11 Front projection mount configuration . 20 Figure 12 Rear-mount locations . 21 Figure 13 Front panel (EX-2.4i, EX-4.9i, or EX-5i) . 21 Figure 14 Front panel (EX-2.4i-16 or EX-5i-16) . 22 Figure 15 Front panel (EX-5i-DS3) . 22 Figure 16 Primary front panel connectors (standard models) . 22 Figure 17 EX-5i-DS3 connectors and grounding switches . 23 Figure 18 DC connector . 27 Figure 19 CLI root menu . 35 Figure 20 Initiating the browser connection . 36 Figure 21 Browser Login screensmodel dependent . 37 Figure 22 Radio Information page . 38 Figure 23 Exalt GUI window description . 39 Figure 24 Summary status information . 40 Figure 25 Radio Information page . 42 Figure 26 Administration Settings page . 43 Figure 27 Changed fields and Update button . 43 Figure 28 SNMP Configuration page . 45 Figure 29 Trap Configuration page . 46 Figure 30 File Transfer page . 48 Figure 31 File Transfer pagedownload file link . 49 Figure 32 File Activation page . 51 Figure 33 Access Security page . 52 Figure 34 System Configuration page . 54 Figure 35 MHS Configuration page . 58 Figure 36 Ethernet Interface Configuration page . 59 Figure 37 VLAN Configuration page . 60 Figure 38 T1 Interface Configuration page . 63 Figure 39 E1 Interface Configuration page . 63 Figure 40 External (remote) loopback . 64 Figure 41 External (local) loopback . 64 Figure 42 DS3 Configuration page . 65 Figure 43 GPS Information page . 66 Figure 44 Alarms page . 67 Figure 45 MHS Status page . 69 Figure 46 Performance page . 70 Figure 47 Event Log page . 72 Figure 48 User Throughput page . 73 Figure 49 Aggregate User Throughput Help page . 74 206501-019 2016-05-24 vii Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Figure 50 Diagnostic Charts page . 75 Figure 51 Spectrum Analyzer page . 77 Figure 52 Spectrum analyzer graph example . 78 Figure 53 Ethernet Utilization page . 79 Figure 54 Reboot page . 80 Figure 55 Manual page . 81 Figure 56 T1/E1 connectors . 90 Figure 57 Ethernet connectors (MAIN and AUX) . 91 Figure 58 Sync In connector . 92 Figure 59 Sync Out connector . 92 Figure 60 Alarm Connector . 93 Figure 61 Console Connector . 94 Figure 62 DC Power connector . 95 Figure 63 DIP Switch Orientation . 96 Figure 64 DC coupler interconnection . 101 Figure 65 Basic back-to-back bench test configuration . 107 List of Tables Factory default settings . 11 Table 1 Connectors . 22 Table 2 LED indicators . 23 Table 3 Recommended transmission line . 30 Table 4 Table 5 Default login information . 37 Table 6 Alarm status indicators . 67 Table 7 DIP Switch Functions . 96 Table 8 Standard Factory Defaults (-16 Models) . 96 Table 9 Common DIP Switch Applications . 97 Table 10 EX-2.4i supported antennas . 98 Table 11 EX-5i supported antennas . 99 Table 12 Product approvals . 117 Table 13 Regulatory Domain Keys . 119 Table 14 EU and ITU Country-Specific EIRP Levels for the EX-2.4i Series . 122 Table 15 EU and ITU Country Specific EIRP Levels for EX-5i Series . 124 viii 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios About this Document This manual provides a complete description of the EX-i Series (TDD) of Exalt Digital Microwave Radios and related software. This manual provides planners, engineers, installers, system administrators, and technicians general and specific information related to the planning, installation, operation, management, and maintenance of these devices. Revision History Date 2006-04-28 EX-2.4i release 1.0 2006-05-03 EX-2.4i release 1.01 (also valid for 1.0.2) 2006-07-06 EX-5i release 1.0.0 (also valid for 1.0.1) 2006-09-01 EX-2.4i release 1.1.0 (Mode 2 feature release) Products and Release code EX-5i-16 release 1.0.0 EX-2.4i-16 release 1.0.0 EX-5i release 1.1.0 (SNMP feature release) 2006-09-27 EX-2.4i and EX-5i release 1.1.0 (SNMP feature release) 2006-10-27 EX-2.4i v1.2.0 (Sync and VLAN feature releases) EX-5i release v2.0.0 (Sync and VLAN feature releases) EX-2.4i and EX-5i-16 v1.1.1 (Sync feature release) 2007-02-28 EX-4.9i (initial release) 2007-04-20 EX-4.9i release v1.1.0 (AES and GPS Sync feature releases) 2007-05-07 EX-5i release v3.0.0 (Symmetry, Enhanced Event Log, and Legacy SNMP feature releases) 2007-07-16 EX-5i v3.1.0 (Regulatory Domain Key, Base License Key, and Dynamic Frequency Selection feature releases) EX-5i-16 v2.0.0 (Regulatory Domain Key, Base License Key, and Dynamic Frequency Selection feature releases) 2007-10-18 EX-5i-DS3 v1.0.0 2007-11-30 EX-5i release 3.2.0 (Spectrum Analyzer, AES-256, Enhanced CLI, SNMP Traps, MIB-II enhancements feature releases) 2008-05-16 Related documentation update. 2009-12-15 EX-2.4i-16 and EX-5i-16 release 4.0.0 (VLAN, User Throughput, Ethernet Utilization Diagnostics, SSL/
SSH and DHCP feature releases) 2011-10-26 EX-5i-DS3 release v4.2.0 (major feature release and first release of management security feature) 2012-01-20 EX-5i release v4.2.1 (management security feature and other minor features) 2014-06-27 2015-11-06 Updated to include current contact information 2016-05-24 Updated for FCC Class II Permissive Change EX-5i release v4.3 (multiple SNMP server support) 206501-019 2016-05-24 ix Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Icons The following icons denote specific types of information:
Note: This symbol means take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to materials not contained in the manual. Warning! This symbol means there is a risk of electric shock or bodily injury. Before working on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents. Caution! This symbol means be careful. There is a risk of doing something that might result in equipment damage or loss of data. This is a general warning, caution, or risk of danger. x 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Introduction Exalt Wireless, Inc. thanks you for your purchase. Our goal is to build the highest quality, highest reliability digital microwave radio products. This commitment to quality and reliability extends to our employees and partners alike. We appreciate any comments on how we can improve our products, as well as your sales and Customer Care experience.f Customer Care Hotline (USA):
Toll-Free Customer Care Hotline (USA):
Website:
Sales e-mail:
Customer Care e-mail:
Mailing Address:
(408) 740-3622
(844) EXALT-01 (392-5801) www.exaltcom.com sales@exaltcom.com support@exaltcom.com Exalt Wireless, Inc. 530 Division Street Campbell, CA 95008 USA Related Documentation and Software This manual makes reference to other documentation and software files that may be necessary. To access all documents and software mentioned in this manual visit:
http://login.exaltcom.com You must have a user account to view all downloads. Follow the online instructions to create a user account and request access. The Exalt i-Series Digital Microwave Radios The Exalt i-Series Digital Microwave Radios are the most advanced carrier-class point-to-point terrestrial radio communications devices operating in the 2400 to 2483.5 MHz, 4940 to 4990MHZ, and 5250 to 5850MHz frequency bands, respectively. Figure 1 shows the EX-2.4i Digital Microwave Radio. Figure 1 EX-2.4i Digital Microwave Radio The i-Series radios connect voice and/or digital data from one location to another, obviating the need for copper or fiber connectivity, or enhancing existing connectivity by providing a redundancy solution, a primary solution, and/or additional capacity. 206501-019 2016-05-24 1 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios The following models of radios are covered in this manual:
Configured for 100Mbps + 4xT1/E1 (32MHz/Mode2) EX-2.4i, 10/100 Ethernet + 4xT1/E1 With license-key upgrade for 200Mbps capacity (64MHz/Mode2) With license-key upgrade for FIPS-197 compliant 128-bit or 256-bit AES encryption EX-2.4i Lite, 10/100 Ethernet + 4xT1/E1 Configured for 27Mbps (8MHz/Mode2 and 16MHz/Mode1) With license-key upgrade for 55Mbps With license-key upgrade for 100Mbps With license-key upgrade for 2xT1/E1 With license-key upgrade for 4xT1/E1 With license-key upgrade for FIPS-197 compliant 128-bit or 256-bit AES encryption EX-2.4i-16 (or EX-2.4i-16 K, exclusively for Korea), 10/100 Ethernet + 16xT1/E1 Configured for 4xT1/E1, 100Mbps (32MHz/Mode2) With license-key upgrade for 8xT1/E1, 100Mbps (32MHz/Mode2) With license-key upgrade for 12xT1/E1, 100Mbps (32MHz/Mode2) With license-key upgrade for 16xT1/E1, 200Mbps (64MHz/Mode2) With license-key upgrade for FIPS-197 compliant 128-bit or 256-bit AES encryption EX-4.9i, 10/100 Ethernet + 4xT1/E1 Configured for 2xT1/E1, 27Mbps (10MHz/Mode2, 20MHz/Mode1) With license-key upgrade for 4xT1/E1, 55Mbps (20MHz/Mode2) With license-key upgrade for FIPS-197 compliant 128-bit or 256-bit AES encryption EX-5i, 10/100 Ethernet + 4xT1/E1 Configured for 100Mbps (32MHz/Mode2) With license-key upgrade for 200Mbps capacity (64MHz/Mode2) With license-key upgrade for FIPS-197 compliant 128-bit or 256-bit AES encryption EX-5i Lite, 10/100 Ethernet + 4xT1/E1 Configured for 27Mbps (8MHz/Mode2 and 16MHz/Mode1) With license-key upgrade for 55Mbps With license-key upgrade for 100Mbps With license-key upgrade for 2xT1/E1 With license-key upgrade for 4xT1/E1 With license-key upgrade for FIPS-197 compliant 128-bit or 256-bit AES encryption EX-5i-DS3 10/100 Ethernet + 1xDS3 + 16xT1/E1 Configured for 100Mbps + 4xT1/E1 (32MHz/Mode2) 2 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios With license-key upgrade for 200Mbps + 16xT1/E1 (64MHz/Mode2) With license-key upgrade for 200Mbps + 1xDS3 (64MHz/Mode2) With license-key upgrade for FIPS-197 compliant 128-bit or 256-bit AES encryption EX-5i-16 (or EX-5i-16 K, exclusively for Korea), 10/100 Ethernet + 16xT1/E1 Configured for 4xT1/E1, 100Mbps (32MHz/Mode2) With license-key upgrade for 8xT1/E1, 100Mbps (32MHz/Mode2) With license-key upgrade for 12xT1/E1, 100Mbps (32MHz/Mode2) With license-key upgrade for 16xT1/E1, 200Mbps (64MHz/Mode2) With license-key upgrade for FIPS-197 compliant 128-bit or 256-bit AES encryption Generally, the i-Series models require a clear line-of-sight and proper path clearance to achieve a high-
performance, reliable connection. Perform professional path engineering and site planning BEFORE installing this equipment. The primary focus of this document is the installation and maintenance of the digital microwave radio, and assumes that path engineering and site planning were already performed. The EX-2.4i models utilize radio frequencies in the range of 2400 to 2483.5MHz. The EX-5i models utilize radio frequencies in the range of 5250 to 5850 MHz. In most countries these frequency bands are considered as license-exempt or unlicensed. This means that virtually any user may use these frequencies freely, without paying for access, or any type of pre-notification, post-notification or registration. As a result of this designation, users may also move or change these systems at any time, with significant flexibility to the location, orientation and configuration of the system. However, also due to this designation, there may be uncontrolled interference from other similar devices occupying this spectrum. In these cases, it is up to engineering and maintenance personnel to design the system with existing and future interference sources in mind, recognizing that there is a chance that the interference conditions could be very dynamic, and outages may occur on the system as a result, and that, in some very rare cases, the system may cause interference into another system and may be required to be disengaged or modified/re-oriented to eliminate the interference. If the spectrum in your country is designated as license-exempt or similar, this does not infer that the installer may configure the system in any manner at any location. In most cases, there are regulations, or device-based conditions that limit the use of the device, such as maximum gain antenna, antenna types and maximum output power, as well as, in some cases, application limits, limited geography of use, and other unique regulations. The link design engineer and/or professional installer must determine these limitations and engineer/install the system within the confines of all local regulations. Also, it is required to examine any regulations that may apply to peripheral equipment, installation and cabling of the system that may be regulated for human safety, electrical code, air-traffic control, and other safety-related categories. In certain countries, the spectrum for this product is NOT considered to be license-exempt. In these cases, there may be additional regulatory requirements concerning the location, frequency, power, orientation, configuration, and other aspects of the system, including, in some cases, a need for link registration, coordination, and fees that may apply to the system usage. Please consult your local regulatory organization(s) to determine usage requirements. The EX-4.9i utilizes frequencies in the 49404990MHz range, and is typically a licensed band reserved for use by Public Safety agencies and applications. In almost all cases, either for license-exempt or other designation, the product itself must be authorized for use in your country. Either Exalt or Exalts agent must have applied for certification or 206501-019 2016-05-24 3 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios authorization to allow the sale and deployment of the system within the country. It is also possible that only certain versions or configurations of the device are allowed within a particular country. Please contact Exalt or your authorized Exalt representative for information pertaining to your country. Note: It is the professional installers responsibility to ensure that the radio system is implemented in a legal fashion. Exalt is not liable for any unsafe or illegal installations. Figure 2 Indoor mount interconnection Figure 3 Enclosure mount interconnection For highest performance and reliability, it is advised to minimize the length of RF cable and associated transmission system losses between the antenna and the radio's antenna port. Depending on model, combinations of the following data communication interfaces are provided:
4 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios 10/100BaseT Ethernet Up to 16xT1/E1 interfaces for synchronous voice traffic (number of TDM interfaces is determined by specific model and license-key configuration) Low-latency optimization and control for voice and data connections Up to 1xDS-3 interface for synchronous voice traffic The i-Series radios feature a wide-mouth direct DC connection (24V or 48V), and are also provided with an external AC adapter. All models provide the following primary features and benefits:
Very high throughput and flexible interface configurations with voice+data combinations Encryption for extreme wireless security Easy-to-use management and configuration Flexible utilized channel bandwidth selection for interference avoidance and frequency coordination Flexible center frequency tuning for interference avoidance and frequency coordination 206501-019 2016-05-24 5 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Pre-installation Tasks This section describes the steps necessary to prepare a site for the installation of the Exalt Digital Microwave Radio. Link Engineering and Site Planning Design all terrestrial wireless links prior to purchase and installation. Generally, professional wireless engineering personnel are engaged to determine the viability and requirements for a well-engineered link to meet the users needs for performance and reliability. The reader is referred to the Exalt document, Guidance for Engineering and Site Planning of Terrestrial Wireless Links. This document and calculator aid in the pre-planning and engineering required to determine following attributes:
Antenna type/gain at each end of the link Antenna mounting height/location for proper path clearance Antenna polarization orientation RF cabling type, length, connectors, route, and mounting Antenna system grounding Radio mounting location and mechanisms Radio grounding Radio transmitter output power setting Anticipated received signal level (RSL) at each end Anticipated fade margin and availability performance at each end Radio settings for TDD frame length and occupied bandwidth Anticipated throughput performance (TDM circuit support and Ethernet) Anticipated system latency With respect to radio path and site planning, these radios are generally identical to other microwave terrestrial wireless systems. Engineering of these systems requires specific knowledge about the radios, including:
RF specifications (transmitter output power, receiver threshold, occupied channel bandwidth, and Lightning arrestor type(s), location(s), and grounding carrier-to-interference tolerance) Regulatory limitations on transmitter output power setting and antenna type/gain Noise/interference profile for the intended location Familiarization with the i-Series Radios The Exalt i-Series radios utilize time division duplex (TDD) radio transmission. This means that the transmitted signal in both directions uses the same center frequency and transmits in one direction for a period of time, and then in the opposite direction for another period of time. This total period of time is referred to as the frame length or TDD frame length, and is further discussed in Time Division Duplex (TDD) Factors. 6 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios The two radio terminals are identical hardware, except for the TDD setting in software. When the radios are in their default state, both radios are configured as Radio B. One end of the link must be configured as Radio A before the two ends of the radio system can communicate. It can be considered that Radio A is the primary radio in the link. Radio A provides the master clock and control to Radio B. For most applications, it is not important how the radio link is oriented, only that one end is configured for Radio A and the other for Radio B. For some applications (such as, multi-radio hub sites or repeaters), the orientation of the radio systems may be more critical. See Link Orientation and Synchronization. There are three ways to configure the radios for Radio A/B determination:
1 Use the Exalt browser-based graphical user interface (GUI) preferred. 2 Use the Command Line Interface (CLI) through Telnet on the AUX port or a Serial connection to the Console port. 3 Use the front panel DIP switch, in case of emergency (EX-2.4i-16 model only). Exalt recommends using the Exalt GUI for radio configuration. This interface requires a computer with an Ethernet port and web browser software, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or above. See Configuration and Management for details on how to connect to and use the browser-based GUI interface.
-16 and -DS3 models: The front panel DIP switch provides a fast temporary means for Radio A/
Radio B configuration. EX-5i-16 and EX-5i-DS3 models may also require installation of the Regulatory Domain Key prior to DIP switch operation. See DIP Switch Settings (-16 Models Only). Note: Models with the Access Security management feature ignore DIP switch configurations after any reset. See the Access Security Page. Shipping Box Contents Unless purchased as a spare terminal, the radios are shipped as a complete hop (that is, a radio link pair consisting of two terminals). An outer box has labeling that indicates the contents of the box, with the part number and serial number details for both radio terminals. Inside the outer box are two identical boxes, each of these boxes is also marked with the part number and serial number of the individual terminal contained inside the box. The terminal box contains the following items:
Radio terminal (configured as Radio B) AC adapter Accessory kit Flange mounting hardware (4 x M4 screws; 4 x M4 wave washers) Rack mount flanges DC power connector (1) Grounding hardware (1 x M5 screw; 1 x M5 wave washer; 2 x M5 flat washers) Registration card Quick-start guide 206501-019 2016-05-24 7 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Inspect the outer packaging and the contents of the boxes upon receipt. If you suspect any shipping damage or issues with the contents, contact Exalt Customer Care. Note: Register your system as soon as possible. A 2-year Warranty period applies to products registered within 90 days of purchase. The Warranty period is reduced to 1-year for unregistered products and products registered after the first 90 days. See Exalt Limited Hardware Warranty. Initial Configuration and Back-to-Back Bench Test Every Exalt digital microwave radio goes through extensive quality testing and performance evaluation over the full operating temperature range prior to shipment. However, before installation, it is strongly advised to perform several tests and tasks that are much more difficult to perform once the radio link endpoints are distant from one another. A back-to-back bench test and pre-configuration will provide confidence that the radio link is operational and properly configured prior to installation, so that if troubleshooting is necessary, the radio hardware and configuration settings are eliminated from the troubleshooting process. Verify the following in the back-to-back testing:
Confirm that the radio system is generally operational Radios power-up with planned power and wiring solutions Regulatory Domain Key (RDK) entry successful Note: Exalt radios with the RDK function are DISABLED when initially shipped. To ENABLE the radio, a valid RDK must be entered on the Administration Settings Page of the Exalt GUI. The RDK references the unit's serial number and is provided based on the country and/or region where the radio system will be deployed. The RDK is obtained through your Exalt Authorized distributor or reseller. RF link connects in both directions Traffic passes across the link Note: Some countries require Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS), which delays the transmitter turn-on time during the initial Clear Channel Assessment period of 1 minute. In accordance with these regulations, the radios boot up, and then wait for 1 minute before linking. Configure connected equipment and cabling Test Ethernet (CAT5) cabling, and/or T1/E1 cabling, any auxiliary connector cabling and configure all interfaces Configure IP settings for configuration and management Configure passwords and security modes Become familiar with the configuration and management interfaces through the Exalt GUI interface Configure radio parameters, including installing any optional software license keys and configuring features controlled by license keys Set transmitter output power to engineered or allowed level (see RF Output Power Setting) Set operating center frequency 8 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Set link distance, occupied channel bandwidth, and frame length Make detailed radio performance measurements Measure transmitter output power Measure receiver threshold performance Confirm unfaded error-free performance Some of these tasks may not be possible or practical within a bench test environment due to the nature of the remote connectivity of peripheral equipment. However, it is good practice to perform as much as possible in this environment to minimize field/installation time and troubleshooting efforts. Detailed performance measurements are usually not required for pre-installation, but can be easily performed at this stage and may be helpful for later troubleshooting efforts or for internal records. During troubleshooting, there may often be a point at which a back-to-back bench test should be performed to verify many or all of the above items, and in the case of a suspected faulty device, to help confirm the fault and determine which end of the system is at fault and in need of repair or replacement. Note: See Back-to-back Bench Testing for detailed instructions. RF Output Power Setting The maximum RF output power is bounded by one of the following criteria:
Maximum RF output power setting capability of the radio device Maximum RF output power allowed/authorized by the local government regulations and for this specific device Maximum effective isotropic radiated power (EIRP) of the transmission system allowed/
authorized by the local government regulations and for this specific device Desired RSL to not exceed the maximum RSL allowed by the device Desired RSL to minimize/eliminate interference into neighboring systems 1 Link distance Time Division Duplex (TDD) Factors The i-Series radios are very dynamic, allowing the installer to optimize and control the performance of the radio system for the intended application. The following parameters must be carefully determined during the link engineering phase:
Bandwidth Mode (modulation) The setting of the above parameters determines the following performance factors:
Number of supported T1/E1/DS3 channels Ethernet throughput TDD frame size 206501-019 2016-05-24 9 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios System latency (delay) The following generalizations can be made with regards to these factors:
The shorter the TDD frame size, the lower the latency The shorter the link distance, the lower the latency, the higher the throughput The longer the TDD frame size, the higher the throughput The higher the bandwidth, the higher the capacity The higher the mode, the higher the capacity Note: Disable all T1/E1/DS3 ports if there are no T1/E1/DS3 interfaces connected. This shifts all available throughput to the Ethernet interface. Note: If a selected combination of the Link Distance, Frame Size, Bandwidth, and Mode parameters cannot support all the desired TDM ports, the ports that cannot be supported are automatically disabled. Priority is placed on the DS3 port, and then the T1/E1 port number. That is, the first port to be disabled, if necessary, is the highest T1/E1 port number, such as Port 4 for the standard models, and Port 16 for -16 or -DS3 models (assuming that the DS3 and/or all 16 TDM interfaces are licensed for use). See T1/E1 Configuration Pages for more information. Link Orientation and Synchronization Link orientation refers to the Radio A and Radio B placement in your network. Link synchronization refers to using external or internal timing to coordinate multiple links. For every link, one end of the radio link must be configured as Radio A, while the other end is configured as Radio B. In single-link systems, it does not matter which end of the system is mounted at which end of the link, and there is typically no requirement for any link synchronization. Link orientation and synchronization are more important for networks with site(s) where there is more than one link of the same type or for sites using the same type of radio that are very close to each another at one or both ends. Configure collocated radio terminals for the same link orientation. That is, configure all radios at the same location as Radio A or Radio B. It can be advantageous to utilize link synchronization for collocated links. The radios allow the use of an optional GPS synchronization kit. This synchronization controls the transmitter and receiver frame timing so that collocated radios are transmitting at the same time and receiving at the same time. This can substantially reduce the opportunity for self-interference. Without synchronization, collocated radios may be transmitting and receiving at the same time, incurring near-end interference. Note: It is not always necessary to synchronize collocated radios. If antennas are substantially separated or blocked from one another and/or frequency separation tuning is used, the opportunity for near-end interference can be eliminated. Note: The GPS sync feature is not available on all models. Contact your Exalt Wireless representative for details. 10 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Radio A/B Configuration Use the Exalt GUI to configure the radio terminals for Radio A and Radio B orientation. Since many other parameters also need to be set, and the Exalt GUI is needed for these configurations, this is the best way to completely configure the radio terminals. Radios arrive from manufacture in default configuration, orientated as Radio B and configured as shown in Table 1. EX-5i 5788 MHz; 5600 or 5785 MHz if the regulatory domain does not allow 5788 MHz
+4dBm 8MHz; 10MHz for some regulatory domains Table 1 Factory default settings EX-2.4i Parameter Frequency 2441 MHz EX-4.9i 4965 MHz Transmit Power Bandwidth Mode Link Distance TDD Frame Size Link Security Key Administration Password User Passworda IP Address IP Mask IP Gateway
+7dBm 8MHz
+4dBm 10MHz Mode 1
<10 miles 2ms 000000000000 password password 10.0.0.1 255.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Ethernet Interfaces MAIN: Alarm Enabled, 100/Full; AUX: Alarm Disabled, 100/Full AUX port NMS Access In-Band T1/E1 Settings a. Some firmware releases use passwords of admin and user instead of the global password. All Enabled, T1, B8ZS, AIS Note: In many cases, the system design will not be identical to the factory default configuration, and in some cases, these differences prohibit the installation of the radio. If at all possible, obtain a computer and configure the radio terminals using the browser-based GUI. See Exalt Graphical User Interface (GUI). DIP Switch Configuration (-16 and -DS3 Models only) The -16 and -DS3 models have a DIP switch to allow temporary configuration for Radio A and Radio B. See DIP Switch Settings (-16 Models Only) for information on DIP switch functions. Note: Models with the Access Security management feature ignore DIP switch configurations after any reset. See the Access Security Page. 206501-019 2016-05-24 11 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Radio Synchronization The radio synchronization feature improves the performance of Exalt radios operating in the same frequency band and that are collocated (such as in repeater and hub configurations). Radio synchronization ties radio systems together to operate off of a common clock system, ensuring that all radios simultaneously transmit and receive, and thus eliminating near-field interference issues and related radio system coupling. Note: The synchronization function is not currently available on all Exalt radio models. A firmware upgrade may be required for models without sync if sync is desired. Contact your Exalt representative for details. Synchronization Modes Synchronization can be accomplished using either an internal or external source. In either case, one radio in the network must be defined as the primary sync source (A) radio. A Global Positioning System (GPS) kit from Exalt is required to implement external source synchronization. GPS synchronization is not available on all radio models. Contact your Exalt representative for details. Synchronization implementation only requires one synchronization source for any interconnected network. The system also implements a redundancy configuration to maintain a majority of the synchronization functions in case of primary radio failure. For internal synchronization, the primary radio is designated SYNC SOURCE. This radio provides the master timing for all interconnected radios. SYNC SOURCE radios and collocated radios must be configured as Radio A. Collocated radios must be in SYNC RECIPIENT mode; they receive sync signaling from the SYNC SOURCE, either directly or daisy-chained with other collocated radios. Alternatively, the radio(s) can be placed in AUTO SYNC mode. AUTO SYNC synchronizes the radios to any source provided on the SYNC IN port. However, if an appropriate synchronization signal is unavailable, the radio becomes the SYNC SOURCE for all connected radios. Internal Synchronization Figure 4 illustrates the basic interconnectivity of a radio system using internal synchronization. In this scenario, there are two radios collocated at one site. Figure 4 Basic radio interconnectivity using internal synchronization In Figure 5, there are three collocated radios. In this configuration it may be desirable to make one radio a secondary sync source using AUTO SYNC. This provides redundancy if the primary sync source radio (A) loses power or experiences any other failure. 12 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Figure 5 Collocated radios, one in AUTO SYNC mode to provide redundancy The synchronization function can be carried across links to additional collocation sites. For example, Figure 6 illustrates a multi-link backbone with two hub sites. Figure 6 Multiple-link site configuration, using AUTO SYNC for redundancy Note: Currently, the configuration shown in Figure 6 is not supported in all models. Consult your Exalt representative for details. Virtually any combination of hubs and repeater sites, star configurations, and/or backbones can be implemented with synchronization using these configurations. It is typically necessary or ideal in each configuration to match the following parameters on every radio in the network:
Link Distance Match to the longest distance link in the network. Frame Length Match to the lowest frame length to optimize total system latency (for example, for TDM networks) or match to a highest frame length to optimize user throughput. Choose an intermediate value to compromise between latency and throughput. Mode It is desirable, but not always necessary, to match the mode for all collocated links. Bandwidth It is desirable, but not always necessary, to match the bandwidth for all collocated links. For complex networks, an Exalt engineer should review multi-link networks before deployment as several factors can optimize the network for desired performance. External Synchronization Use an external GPS source as an alternative to the internal synchronization source for system synchronization. This is ideal for links that are nearby each other, but are not directly collocated at the 206501-019 2016-05-24 13 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios same site. Figure 7 illustrates using a GPS source for the primary synchronization at a typical site with collated radios. Note: When GPS Sync is enabled, link initiation typically takes 1 to 3 minutes to allow for the radio to properly synchronize to the available GPS satellites. Figure 7 GPS as primary sync source using AUTO SYNC Figure 8 illustrates two separate radio locations benefiting from synchronized GPS sources. Figure 8 Synchronized GPS sources using AUTO SYNC Offset Timing Manual control of offset timing is also allowed. This provides a means to delay the synchronization signal using a user-defined offset. This is helpful when Exalt radios are near other devices operating in the same frequency band that also use a timing source, such as GPS. The timing source to the Exalt radios can be adjusted to match the other radio system timing source mechanism. Offset timing can also optimize timing intervals for repeaters and backbones. As the distance of each link results in a unique factor for speed-of-light transmission of the radio signal, a subsequent radio can be delayed in timing so that the overall synchronization of radios is precisely maintained. Offset timing can be adjusted in 1-ms intervals, from zero to the radios frame length setting. For example, if using a 2-ms frame length, the offset timing can be set from zero up to 1999 ms. 14 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Note: Offset timing is not supported in all models at the time of this writing. Consult your Exalt representative for details. When Sync is Lost If the primary sync source (for example, the sync source radio or GPS source) signal is lost due to equipment failure, a disconnected sync cable, or other conditions, the first radio in the daisy-chain configuration set to AUTO SYNC resumes the sync function for the remaining connected radios. If a radio is configured as SYNC RECIPIENT, transmission ceases if the sync signal does not appear at the SYNC IN connector. A radio running in AUTO SYNC (without the sync source) is said to be flywheeling. That is, the clock is free-running off internal clocking and is no longer synchronized to any source. If the original sync source is restored to the flywheeling radio configuration, the flywheeling radio attempts to synchronize to this signal without causing transmission interruption. All interconnected radios receiving sync from the flywheeling radio also continue to operate without interruption. When the flywheeling radio runs independently for long periods of time, the synchronization signal can be too far outside of the capture range of the synchronization loop, and portions of transmission frames can be lost during the re-synchronization process. This condition is temporary and all interconnected radios re-synchronize to the sync source, as necessary. For GPS synchronization, the wiring inside the Exalt radio carries the GPS signal to the next radio cabled in the system, even when power is removed from the SYNC SOURCE radio or during radio failures. This provides redundancy for catastrophic failure of the SYNC SOURCE and maintains GPS synchronization. If the GPS source is lost (for example, due to failure of the GPS unit, a disconnected cable, or satellite blockage), the AUTO SYNC radio resumes synchronization duties for all collocated radios. LEDs There are two LEDs on both the SYNC OUT and SYNC IN ports. Table 3 describes the two SYNC IN and two SYNC OUT LEDs. Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) VLAN segments information in a single connection and creates multiple separate connections to secure information of one type or for one set of users from other information types or for other sets of users. Exalts VLAN communications implementation adheres to the IEEE standard 802.1q. In most cases, an Exalt radio acting as a Layer 2 bridge between two locations is only required to pass traffic with VLAN tagging. Without additional configuration, all Exalt radios support frame sizes in excess of 1900 bytes, which currently supports all defined VLAN packet sizes. Note: If an application only requires the transparent passing of VLAN traffic, disable the VLAN function. Some situations require Exalt radios to act upon VLAN traffic and perform any or all of the following functions:
Connect specific traffic, using VLAN tagging, to a specific port on the radio, such as management traffic to the AUX port. 206501-019 2016-05-24 15 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Allow only traffic with specifically assigned VLANs to pass across the link, blocking all other VLANs or any non-VLAN traffic. Allow management access only through a VLAN connection, leaving the main traffic transparent. Allow management access without a VLAN connection, but flowing only specific VLAN traffic across the link. Link Symmetry The default configuration of i-Series radios provides 50/50 symmetrical throughput. The Tx/Rx Throughput Ratio setting enables programming different symmetry for applications where significantly higher throughput in one direction is anticipated such as for video broadcast, video aggregation, or remote server/storage WANs. Exalt does not recommend placing two links with asymmetry back-to-back in a serial configuration due to the TDD cycle of the radios. This configuration requires that one radio transmits in an overlapping time period while another radio is receiving. Physical antenna isolation and/or frequency channel spacing may accommodate this configuration. Asymmetry is, however, ideal for single-hop, multi-link hub/spoke architectures, or simply single independent links. Note: Asymmetry is only supported for a specific subset of system configurations that are optimized for typical asymmetric applications. 16MHz/Mode1 16MHz/Mode2 32MHz/Mode1 32MHz/Mode2 64MHz/Mode1 (64MHz requires a license key) TDD frame sizes of 2ms and 5ms are supported. The 5ms configuration maximizes the aggregate throughput of the radio for every situation. The 2ms configuration reduces latency to meet latency-
critical applications, especially for multi-link and TDM circuit support. The following RF BW/mode combinations are supported for these two configurations:
The following Tx/Rx ratios are supported for these two configurations:
For example, a radio configuration of 32MHz/Mode2 with a 5ms TDD frame size supports up to 110Mbps user capacity or 55Mbps full-duplex. By selecting 80/20 on one side of the link and 20/80 on the other side, the radio allows up to 88Mbps in one direction, and 22Mbps in the opposite direction. 65/35 and 35/65 80/20 and 20/80 Note: Internal and GPS sync is supported with asymmetric settings, but in addition to the other requirements for sync, all radios tied to sync must be set with matching ratios. T1/E1 is supported with asymmetric settings. However, based on the BW/mode setting (and in some cases, TDD frame size and distance), the direction with the limited throughput limits the number of T1 or E1 connections obtained. For example, the 16MHz/Mode1 setting typically supports up to 27Mbps aggregate throughput. In the 80/20 ratio configuration, one direction is limited to 5.4Mbps, which is less than 3xE1 and less than 4xT1. Since TDM connections must be symmetrical, this setting therefore limits throughput to no more than 2xE1 or 3xT1. 16 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) The Exalt radios primarily use a browser-based graphical user interface (GUI) for radio configuration and management, as described in Exalt Graphical User Interface (GUI). In addition, a command line interface (CLI) is provided for serial and/or Telnet access, as described in Command Line Interface
(CLI). SNMP is often used for management of larger networks as described here. Use SNMP to manage networked devices and execute the following functions:
GET: Obtain information from the device, such as a configuration setting or parameter. SET: Change a configuration setting on the device. TRAP: The device proactively informs the management station of a change of state, usually used for critical alarms or warnings. One feature of the SNMP implementation is that system configuration changes do not take effect using the SET command. Instead, groups of configuration settings can be preconfigured for global change, and a single 'Save' (Commit) command implements all changes. When some parameters are changed, a link may drop and/or management control lost. MIB files allow many parameters to be set at once, allowing only a temporarily dropped link or management control issue. The opposite end radio can be quickly reconfigured, with little downtime for the link and management control. The save (Commit) command is similar to the Update button. Dropped links or management control issues do not occur with every parameter change. Many configuration changes do not impact traffic or management access. Exalt radios utilize SNMPv3, a high security version of SNMP, to ensure secure access to and storing of management data. The SNMPv3 security string matches the admin and user passwords. Passwords must be eight characters or longer. Some Exalt radio models also allow for legacy SNMP support for SNMPv1 and SNMPv2. Configuration of all passwords and community strings is performed from a separate Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Configuration page. 206501-019 2016-05-24 17 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios System Installation and Initiation Process The tasks required for radio installation and initiation are outlined in the following figure. Transmission System Tasks Radio Preparation Tasks Path & Site Analysis Link Design Build Antenna Structures &
Egress Read This Manual Completely Pre-configure Radios Perform Back-to-Back Test Mount Antennas &
Transmission Line Install & Test Network &
Power Wiring Both Transmission System & Radio Preparation Tasks Must Be Complete Mount Radios Connect Transmission Line Connect Power Align Antennas to Planned RSL Verify LEDs for Good Link Test Network Connectivity Connect &
Test Primary Services Test Network Management System Figure 9 Radio installation tasks 18 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Length/type of primary transmission lines at each site Length/type of secondary transmission line(s) Transmitter output power setting as installed at each site Record Keeping After installation, record the following items for ongoing maintenance and future troubleshooting. Keep a record for each end of the radio link and store a copy of these records at the radio location, at the opposite end radio location, and a central record storage location. GPS coordinates for antenna locations at each site Antenna heights above ground level (AGL), as mounted Antenna model numbers, serial numbers, and specifications Antenna polarization as mounted Model number and serial number of RF lightning arrestors RSL as measured after antenna alignment at each site Designed RSL per original design at each site RSL reading with far-end power off (from each end) Spectrum analyzer plot with far end off at each site Voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR)/return loss at radios antenna connector at each site Radios network management IP address at each site Radios network management gateway address at each site Radios operating frequency, bandwidth setting, and mode of operation Optionally purchased extended warranty and/or emergency service contract details In addition, certain information may be desired for central record-keeping only:
Link security codes and log in passwords (stored in a secure place) Photographs of complete installation End-user sign-off/acceptance documentation (if any) Photo of product identification label (part number, serial number, MAC address information) Electronic copy of radios configuration file Electronic copy of radios installed software 206501-019 2016-05-24 19 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Installation This section presents all tasks required to install the Exalt Digital Microwave Radio. Mechanical Configuration and Mounting The i-Series radios are one-piece designs intended for deployment in a telecom equipment rack indoors or in an appropriate environmental enclosure. The device must be deployed within an ambient temperature range as specified, and properly ventilated with no obstructions to the air intake and exhaust. The standard models occupy 1 rack unit (1RU = 1.75"/4.5cm) height in a typical telecom rack. The -16 and -DS3 models occupy 1.5 RU (2.625"/6.7cm). In most cases, additional racked equipment can be placed directly above and/or below the device with no empty spaces in the rack. However, depending on power consumption and ventilation for adjoining devices, they may pass heat to the device, not allowing the radio to cool properly and increasing the risk of malfunction. Heat dissipation from the radio may also affect adjoining devices. Provide air space above and below the device, where possible. If not possible, a thermal analysis may be required by a professional engineer to determine the impact of thermal transfer between all adjoining units. Provide proper clearance for all cables and connectors attached to the device. Notably, the RF cable connector may require significant clearance for the bend radius of the coaxial cable assembly. Use a properly specified 90 RF connector to minimize clearance requirements, which may be necessary in enclosure implementations. All RF connectors, cables, and adapters must be rated for operation within the radios frequency range (24002483.5 MHz for EX-2.4i; 49404990 MHz for EX-4.9i; 52505850 MHz for EX-5i). RF connector losses must be accounted for within the link engineering design and output power settings. Rack Mounting Rack mounting hardware for a standard 19" (48cm) rack is included in the accessory kit. Attach the rack mounting brackets to the sides of the unit with the provided screws. The radio can be mounted in one of four configurations:
Front flush mount (front panel even with the rack mounting surface) Figure 10 Front flush mount configuration Front projection mount (front panel extended forward from the rack mounting surface) Figure 11 Front projection mount configuration 20 206501-019 2016-05-24 Rear flush mount (rear panel even with the rack mounting surface) Rear projection mount (rear panel extended forward from the rack mounting surface) Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Figure 12 Rear-mount locations The rack mounting brackets accommodate identical mounting configurations as shown in the previous figures, and can be mounted three different ways with respect to the vertical orientation in the rack:
1 Projecting down, using one full rack space and half of the space below, and leaving a half-space gap below. 2 Projecting up, using one full rack space and half of the space above, and leaving a half-space gap above. 3 Centered within two spaces, with rack space gap above and below. Two radios mounted in the same rack can be mounted in adjoining spaces, utilizing a total of three rack spaces. Note: Screws for attaching the radio to the telecom rack are not provided; use the appropriate screw type that matches the equipment rack. Table or Rack Shelf Mounting the System Affix rubber feet or adhesive-backed non-slip pads (not included) near the corners of the unit along the bottom panel when mounting on a table or a rack shelf. These pads help keep the radio stable on a wooden or metal surface. In many areas, it is necessary to strap the equipment to a table or rack shelf if mounting in this manner. In case of earthquake or other shock or vibration, or an accidental pull of a cable, the unit should be secured from falling. It may also be necessary to secure the AC adapter, if it is used. Radio Ports and Indicators This section provides a brief overview of the connectors, controls, and indicators on the device. Details about each item are in other sections of this document. The EX-2.4i front panel is shown in Figure 13. The EX-4.9i and EX-5i front panel are identical to the EX-2.4i model, except for the model number shown in the upper-right corner. Figure 13 Front panel (EX-2.4i, EX-4.9i, or EX-5i) 206501-019 2016-05-24 21 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios The EX-2.4i-16 front panel is shown in Figure 14. The EX-5i-16 front panel is identical, except for the model number shown in the upper-right corner. Figure 14 Front panel (EX-2.4i-16 or EX-5i-16) The EX-5i-DS3 model front panel is shown in Figure 15. Figure 15 Front panel (EX-5i-DS3) Connector Overview The primary user interfaces are shown in Figure 16 provides details of the front panel connectors of the EX-2.4i EX-4.9i, or EX-5i. Detailed pin structures for each connector are in Interface Connections. Figure 16 Primary front panel connectors (standard models) Table 2 Connectors Label Antenna T1/E1 (14 or 116) DS3 (IN/OUT) ETHERNET (MAIN/
AUX) Type N RJ-48C BNC RJ-45 SYNC (IN/OUT) RJ-45 CONSOLE 9-pin sub-D ALARMS 9-pin sub-D 22 Gender F F F F F F F Function Transmission line connection to antenna. Primary ports for User T1 or E1 circuits to traverse link. Primary ports for User DS3 circuit to traverse link. Primary ports for user Ethernet and/or management data (10BaseT or 100BaseT) to traverse link. Internal or external radio synchronizing source
(for example, GPS) input and output. Management port (serial) for PC/PDA for Command Line Interface (CLI) communications. External alarm inputs and outputs. 206501-019 2016-05-24 Table 2 Connectors (Continued) Label GND (Ground) Type Bantam RSL Bantam 2448VDC 6-pin modular
(Ground) Threaded (M5) receptacle Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Gender F F M F Function Common (return) volt meter test point for measuring RSL. Voltmeter test point for measuring received signal level. DC power input from DC source or AC adapter. Chassis ground connection (M5 x 0.8 threads). DS3 IN and DS3 OUT connections (Figure 17) may be independently grounded or ungrounded to the chassis using a small DIP switch between the connectors. Ground loops to connected equipment must be avoided. Set the DIP switches accordingly. Figure 17 EX-5i-DS3 connectors and grounding switches LED Indicators Table 3 provides details of the LED indicators on all models. Table 3 LED indicators Location/Label LINK STATUS 206501-019 2016-05-24 Type Function 3-color LED 3-color LED Indicates RF link status:
Green Solid = Error-free connection (BER<10e-6) Yellow Solid = Errored connection (10e-3>BER >10e-6) Red Solid = No link (BER>10e-3) Red Flash= No remote information available (when RMT is pressed and held) Off = Improperly powered or fatal system failure Indicates system status:
Green Solid = No alarm conditions (normal operation) Yellow Solid = Alarm conditions, not traffic effecting Yellow Slow Flash = In loopback (from this end) Yellow Fast Flash = In loopback (at this end) Red Solid = Alarm conditions; traffic effecting Red Flash = No remote information available (when RMT is pressed and held) Off = Improperly powered or fatal system failure 23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Table 3 LED indicators (Continued) Location/Label Type Function DS3 RADIO A 3-color LED 3-color LED Indicates DS3 connection status:
Green Solid = No alarm conditions (normal operation) Yellow Solid = DS3 signal present, but DS3 is not enabled Red Solid = DS3 enabled, but not present Off = DS3 not in use Indicates radio orientation:
Green Solid = Radio is configured as Radio A, based on software setting Off = Radio is configured as Radio B ETHERNET MAIN/AUX Left Corner Green LED Solid/Flashing = Data present ETHERNET MAIN/AUX Right Corner Off = No data present Green LED Solid = Negotiated @ 100Mbps Flash = Negotiated @ 10Mbps Off = No connection negotiated T1/E1 Left Corner Green LED Solid = Connection present (clocking confirmed) T1/E1 Right Corner Fast Flash = Connection present; coding/clock problem Slow Flash = Connection present, but unexpected Off = No connection/clock Green LED Solid = In a loopback state RMT (LED inside button) Amber LED Fast Flash = Automatic indication signal (AIS) is active Off = No loopback; no AIS activity Off = Remote end LINK and STATUS LEDs are both green Solid = No remote end status available Flash = Alarm conditions at the remote end (LINK and/or STATUS LEDs are non-green) SYNC IN Left Corner Green LED Solid on = GPS is normal (no alarms) SYNC IN Right Corner Green LED Flash = GPS is in alarm Off = No GPS source detected Solid on = Sync locked, no alarms Flash = Sync signal detected, but not locked Off = No input sync signals detected SYNC OUT Left Corner Green LED Solid on = Radio configured as SYNC SOURCE Flash = Radio configured as AUTO SYNC Off = Radio configured as SYNC RECIPIENT or sync is disabled SYNC OUT Right Corner Green LED Solid on = SYNC SOURCE is external (GPS 1 pps) Off = SYNC SOURCE is internal 24 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Table 3 LED indicators (Continued) Location/Label Type Function
(Unmarked LED on rear panel) 2-color LED Indicates overall status (from the rear panel):
Green = LINK and STATUS LEDs are both green Red Flash = LINK and/or STATUS are in a yellow state; no red states exist Red Solid = LINK and/or STATUS are in a red state Off = Improperly powered or fatal system failure RMT (Remote) Button The RMT button is the only external control on the radios. This button allows easy and quick evaluation of the status of the remote-end radio. When the RMT LED is amber flashes, this is an alert that the remote end has an alarm condition. Press the RMT button to determine the alarm conditions. When the RMT button is pressed and held and local LEDs flash, this indicates that no remote-end information is available. This indicates that the remote radio is either not powered, is booting, or is not linked in the direction towards the local radio, or the local radio is receiving excessive errors in this direction. It could also indicate a serious failure of either radio. Local-end LEDs (when this button is not pressed) in combination with remote-end information (from a technician located at the far end, and/or when the button is pressed) can substantially aid in rapid troubleshooting analysis. Power The radio requires a DC power source within specifications. The DC can be provided from a DC battery source, central lab/rack supply, or from the supplied AC adapter. Read this section completely before applying power. Terminating the RF Connector Before applying power, the devices RF connector must be properly terminated into a 50-Ohm load. If this is not performed, the radio may be damaged by simply applying power. Also, there are human safety factors to consider regarding potentially harmful RF radiation. There are a few simple means to accommodate proper termination:
Connect a 50-Ohm coaxial termination device to the RF port of the radio. The termination must be rated to 1W (or more). Example(s) include:
Broadwave Technologies P/N 552-200-002, or similar Connect the complete transmission system. That is, the RF cabling including the antenna. The cabled antenna provides a proper termination for the RF output. Connect a fixed (or a series of fixed) 50-Ohm attenuator(s) to the RF connector, either directly or at the end of an RF transmission line. The attenuator must be at least 30dB as specified at the operating frequency (~2400 MHz for the EX-2.4i; ~4950 MHz for the EX-4.9i; ~5700 MHz for the EX-5i), and rated for a minimum of 1W input power. Examples include:
Broadwave Technologies P/N 352-103-xxx 206501-019 2016-05-24 25 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Bird 2-A-MFN-xx JFW Industries 50FP-xxx-H6-N AC Power The AC adapter easily connects to the device. The AC rating of the adapter accepts most standard voltages and frequencies worldwide. Refer to the input voltage requirements stated on the label affixed to the adapter to ensure that the adapter can be used with the AC mains supply. The AC plug outlet provided with the adapter may need to be replaced to match the country configuration. The adapter cable uses a standard connector for this cable for use of a pre-wired cable appropriate to the outlet configuration. If the appropriate cable is not available, the existing AC plug end can be severed and a replacement plug affixed. Consult a qualified electrician for this activity. Do not plug the adapter into the mains power. First, verify that the RF connector is properly terminated
(see Power), and then plug in the radio-side connector from the AC adapter to the radio. If the AC mains can be turned off using a switch, disable the power, plug the AC side of the adapter into the AC mains socket, and then enable power to the circuit. If the AC mains cannot be turned off, plug in to the AC main socket to apply power. Verify that the radio is active by observing LED activity. All LEDs on the radio flash at initial power cycle. It is strongly encouraged that the AC mains supply be fused or on a separate breaker to ensure against over-voltage and/or over-current situations and to provide some form of protection to the radio electronics and other devices connected to the same supply. In addition, if the AC power is subject to significant spikes or variation, power conditioning is a worthwhile investment, as the quality of mains power may have a direct impact on the device operation, performance and/or reliability. An Uninterruptible Power Source (UPS) or other form of battery-backed system protects against brown-out and black-out conditions, and condition the power presented to the adapter. Evaluate the opportunity for lightning or other similar surges to be present on the powering system, including the ability for surges to couple to the power wiring system. If an evaluation indicates that there is a potential likelihood for these conditions to occur, additional surge protection is recommended for the input power wiring, especially to protect the radio electronics between the adapter and the radios DC input connector. The above statement is similarly true for every wired connection to the device. While the configuration for surge suppression or line conditioning is of a different type for each kind of signal interface, the opportunity for damage to the device, loss of communications and property is significant. In some cases, there can also be a risk to human life by not protecting against lightning entering a building through wiring or improper grounding. If you do not have experience in this type of installation practice, consult a qualified electrician and/or telecoms professional during the installation and wiring of the equipment. DC Power The device accepts DC power within the voltage specifications. For some EX-2.4i terminals, the DC voltage is 48 volts, nominal. For all other i-Series models, the DC voltage input accepts either 24 volts or 48 volts, nominal. Ensure that the power source is specified for the proper amount of current delivery capacity. The DC power may be connected as a positive or negative voltage supply, and be referenced to ground or floating (differential voltage). There are different system grounding considerations depending on the nature of the DC supply grounding, and consult a qualified electrician or telecoms professional on the proper wiring and grounding process. 26 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios To connect a DC source, with the power disabled on the DC supply, connect proper gauge wiring to the DC supply. For most (short) power cable runs, 18AWG or 24AWG wire can be typically used. Strip the ends just long enough for enclosure to the DC radio connector (approximately 0.25 inches/6mm). If using stranded wire, the stripped ends inserted into the DC terminal connector must be solder-tipped. If using solid wire, a solder tip is not necessary. Ensure that the power wiring is long enough to neatly traverse, when properly dressed, between the source supply and the radio mounting location. If DC wires are to be exposed to outdoor environments, use wire in the proper weatherproof wiring jacket. For longer runs of DC wiring, use a higher gauge wire and/or higher current source supply to overcome the additional resistance of the DC wiring. However, the DC connector for the radio may not be able to accept a high diameter wire, transition to thinner gauge near the end of the wiring run or use the maximum diameter wire for the entire wiring run, as long as it meets the powering requirements considering total resistance of the wiring and the power source current load capacity. Insert the wiring ends into the DC mating connector (supplied) and tighten the terminal screws to secure the wire into the connector. Do not connect the mating connector to the radio system and disable the power system. Pay close attention to the polarization of the DC signals coming from the DC supply and the ground conductor (if any), and ensure that they are connected to the proper pins of the DC mating connector. The connector mate on the radio is clearly marked on the front panel for proper polarization and for ground connection. Wire across the plus (+) and minus (-) terminals from the DC supply. In addition, place a separate jumper between the proper terminal and the ground terminal to reference one side of the power supply line to the radio chassis ground. In some cases, the DC system may need to be floating and this ground jumper is not necessary; however, many configurations require one side to be grounded for proper electrical safety. Warning! Consult a qualified electrician if uncertain about how to properly ground the system and connect power. Figure 18 DC connector Once the wires are connected to the mating connector, do not connect to the radio. First test the DC connection to the connector from the DC supply. Engage power on the DC supply, and use a volt meter to verify proper voltage level and polarity. Verify that the RF connector is properly terminated, as described in Terminating the RF Connector. Disengage power once again on the DC source, and connect the mating connector to the radio device. Engage power on the DC source. Verify radio is active by observing LED activity. All LEDs flash during the initial power cycle to verify that they are operational. Secure the DC connector using the integral captive screws at each end. This prevents accidental disconnection. 206501-019 2016-05-24 27 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios See Power regarding fusing, breakers, lightning protection, surge protection and power conditioning. Follow these recommendations for a DC supply. Reset to Critical Factory Settings If necessary, the radio terminal may be reset to critical factory settings. This may be necessary if the IP address and/or passwords for the system are not known. All other configurations are left at their current settings. If a complete default factory configuration is desired, load the Default Configuration File into the system, as described in File Activation Page. The following parameters are configured after a reset to critical factory settings:
Administration password = password (or admin1) User password = password (or user1) Endpoint Identifier = Radio B (on some models, depending on firmware version and/or DIP switch position) IP Address = 10.0.0.1 IP Mask = 255.0.0.0 IP Gateway = 0.0.0.0 VLAN disabled Disabled management interfaces are enabled Note: Models that have the access security management feature that also have DIP switches on the front panel ignore DIP switch configurations after any reset. See the Access Security Page. To perform a reset to critical factory settings:
1 Remove power. 2 Remove connections to the ALARMS port. 3 Hold the RMT button on the front panel while applying power. Continue to hold the RMT button through the entire boot cycle (approximately 45 seconds). The front-panel LEDs toggle during the boot cycle. 4 Release the RMT button when LED behavior stabilizes. Antenna/Transmission System This section provides guidance to mounting and connecting the RF transmission system, which consists of the antenna, RF cabling, and RF lightning arrestors. Consult the manufacturer's instructions for proper mounting, grounding, and wiring of these devices, and for definitive direction. These manufacturer's instructions supersede any information in this section. See Antennas for a list of supported antennas. 1. Some firmware versions use the passwords admin and user instead of the global password of password. 28 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Initial Antenna Mounting The antenna must be an exact model recommended by the path and site planning engineer(s). Mount the antenna at the proper height, mast/mounting location and polarization orientation as determined by the path and site planning engineer(s). The model type, location, and orientation of the antenna is critical with respect to achieving proper path clearance, as well as to mitigate external or self- interference from nearby or collocated systems operating in or near the same frequency band. Warning! Mount the antenna in a restricted area and in a manner preventing long-term human exposure to the transmitted RF energy. To comply with FCC and Industry Canada regulations, the minimum safe distance from the antenna for continuous human exposure for the EX-2.4i models is 10'/3m, 3.3' (1m) for EX-4.9i models, and 10.5'/3.2m for EX-5i models. The antenna structure must be secure and safe with respect to the mounting of the antenna, transmission system weight, and the combined weight of any personnel that may climb or attach to the structure. The combined weight of items and forces on the structure must be carefully considered in the design and construction of the structure. This must include the weight bearing on the structure in the highest wind conditions possible in the region, and with respect to all objects affixed to the structure. If additional objects are affixed to the structure in the future, it may be important to evaluate both the mechanical impact of these planned additions (with respect to wind and weight loading), as well as the potential impact to RF interference and frequency coordination (if additional radio equipment is anticipated). This is especially important if future equipment is likely to operate within the same frequency band. Once the antenna is mounted, cabled, and aligned, your goal is to never require modification. This prior planning is important in the path and site planning stages and in construction of the antenna structure. Follow the antenna manufacturers instructions for mechanical mounting of the antenna. Ensure that there is enough room around the antenna for alignment activities (moving the antenna in vertical and horizontal arcs), and for the RF transmission line to connect to the antenna connector unobstructed and within the specified bend radius requirements of the transmission line. At this point, the antenna mounts should be fully secure to the structure, the feed of the antenna securely mounted to the antenna (if the feed is a separate assembly), and the azimuth and elevation adjustments not completely tightened in preparation of the antenna alignment activity. It is a good practice to connect the transmission line to the antenna connector as early in the process as possible, to reduce the opportunity for debris or moisture to enter either the antenna connector or the transmission line connector. Use a connector cover or other temporary measures to ensure that the connector is kept clear. Take extra care if the antenna is installed during inclement weather to ensure that no moisture gets inside the antenna connector at any time. Now the antenna can be aimed in the general direction required for the link. Use a compass, a reference bearing, binoculars or any other similar device to point the antenna in the direction (generally) of the far end radio, and then slightly tighten the azimuth and elevation adjustments so that the antenna maintains its general position and is safe to be left without additional securing. Refer to the Exalt white paper, Antenna Alignment, for more information on antenna alignment techniques. Transmission Line from Antenna to Egress Most installations use coaxial transmission line for the connection between the antenna and the radio device. Coaxial transmission line can either have a solid or braided shield. Solid-shield cables are more resistant to external signal coupling and interference, but are generally stiffer than braided cables. 206501-019 2016-05-24 29 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Consult the path or site engineer(s) to ensure that the proper materials are chosen for the installation and that all factors were considered. Refer to the Exalt white paper, Transmission Line for Exalt Indoor Radio Systems. Generally, the larger the diameter of the transmission line, the lower the loss. So for longer runs of transmission line, larger diameter cables are highly advised. However, at every frequency, there is a maximum diameter cable that supports the operating frequency. Verify the specifications. This is determined in the path and site planning process. In some cases, the choice of transmission line is not coaxial cable, but is instead air-dielectric waveguide. This is an expensive solution and is generally not necessary, but may be required for very long transmission line runs, and/or very long link distances, and/or for systems requiring extremely high reliability. Table 4 lists representative samples of transmission line types recommended for the Exalt Digital Microwave Radio. Table 4 Recommended transmission line Manufacturer Type Andrew Andrew Times Times RFS RFS Description 1/2-inch solid shield 5/8-inch solid shield 1/2-inch braided shield 5/8-inch braided shield 1/2-inch solid shield 5/8-inch solid shield LDF4-50 LDF4.5-50 LMR-600 LMR-900 LCF12-50J LCF12-58J Loss at 2.4GHz Loss at 4.9GHz Loss at 5.3GHz Loss at 5.8GHz 3.3dB/100ft. 2.5dB/100ft. 4.3dB/100ft. 2.9dB/100ft. 3.5dB/100ft. 2.8dB/100ft. 5.7dB/100ft. 4.4dB/100ft. 6.9dB/100ft. 4.6dB/100ft. 5.6dB/100ft. 4.5dB/100ft. 5.6dB/100ft. 4.3dB/100ft. 6.8dB/100ft. 4.5dB/100ft. 5.5dB/100ft. 4.4dB/100ft. 6.0dB/100ft. 4.7dB/100ft. 7.3dB/100ft. 4.9dB/100ft. 5.9dB/100ft. 4.8dB/100ft. There are several other brands and models of transmission line that are perfectly acceptable. However, for extremely long transmission lines and/or extremely long radio paths, it may be necessary to use waveguide transmission line instead of coaxial transmission line. In these cases, waveguide type EW20 is recommended for EX-2.4i models (0.45dB/100ft. loss at 2.4GHz), type EW52 for the EX-4.9i and EX-5i models (1.2dB/100ft. loss at 5.8GHz, 1.35dB/100ft. loss at 5.3GHz). It is critical that the transmission line and antenna be capable of supporting the same type of connector, or easily adapted. It can be important to minimize the number of connectors and adapters, and it is ideal that they match directly without adaptation. In most cases, transmission line allows for N-type male connectors and antennas have N-type female connectors. For waveguide, the waveguide flange can typically accommodate a direct adapter to an N connector, or alternatively, the antenna can be purchased with a direct waveguide connection. But often a flexible coaxial jumper is required to connect between the waveguide and antenna, as waveguide is generally inflexible and can be mechanically challenging to align to the exact antenna connector location. If possible, connect the primary transmission line directly to the antenna. It is desired to have the fewest possible pieces of transmission line in the system, to minimize losses and points of failure from connectors. The antenna can typically accommodate a direct connection if planned in advance. Use a 90 adapter for the connection to the antenna, if necessary, but confirm that all connectors and transmission lines are properly specified for the operating frequency with minimum loss, proper impedance (50 Ohm) and proper VSWR characteristics. Transmission line connector termination is a critical element of the installation. Many factory built RF transmission lines do not provide the proper characteristics for proper transmission, despite their published specifications, often due to the fully or semi-automated process of factory termination, which may not have considered the frequency of your system. When buying pre-terminated transmission line, it is strongly advised to obtain the documentation of test measurements on the connected transmission 30 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios line showing that the loss characteristics and VSWR are within the specified limits specifically at your operating frequency. In addition to factory-built transmission line, self-terminated transmission line can suffer the same issues. Caution! Always follow the manufacturers termination process EXACTLY, and only use the manufacturers authorized tools and connectors for a given transmission line type. The manufacturers of transmission line typically offer instruction and certification for transmission line termination, and may also provide videos illustrating the process. There is no amount of extra care, education, precision, and effort that can be overstated for this process. Once the transmission line is connected to the antenna, traverse the exact route provided by the site planner. There is often a need for a small excess of transmission line near the antenna to accommodate both the need for extra slack as the antenna is loosened and moved for the alignment process, and to accommodate a drip loop for the transmission line and the initial transmission line securing hardware and grounding near the antenna. In addition, the transmission line is typically very stiff, and can provide undue pulling force on the antenna connector. Take care to align the cable with the connector so that it does not provide any torque or strain on the connector. Consult your transmission line manufacturer for the proper transportation, hoisting, securing, and grounding process. Always be very mindful of the entire length of transmission line to ensure that the transmission line is never twisted, kinked, or over-bent beyond the specified bend radius. Once a transmission line is over-bent or kinked, it will likely never recover its specified characteristics, even after straightening, and will often be completely unusable. The opposite end of this primary transmission line typically terminates at the building or enclosure egress point. This is where to locate the RF lightning arrestor. Ensure that a proper termination to the connector-type of the lightning arrestor is made at this location. A drip loop may be required and proper securing hardware and grounding must be accommodated. As soon as practical, weatherproof the connected ends of the transmission line to the antenna and lightning arrestor. This process should be delayed as long as possible to ensure that all systems are working properly before applying the weatherproofing. Once weatherproofing is applied, it may have to be removed for testing or installation modification. With this in mind, if the installation is occurring during inclement weather, take extra care at all times to ensure that no moisture enters any connector at any time. If moisture is suspected to have compromised the antenna or transmission line, it may render those devices useless without any means for remedy except for full replacement. Indoor Mounting On rare occasions the antenna can be mounted indoors behind a window. In these cases, there would not be a need for drip loops or an RF lightning arrestor. Use a very short transmission line connected directly between the antenna and the radio mounted nearby. The weatherproofing process can also be omitted. RF Lightning Arrestor RF lightning arrestors provide a direct path to ground for lightning strikes that may couple to or directly hit the outdoor transmission system or antenna structure. The RF lightning arrestor prevents any associated voltage and current from entering the building or enclosure, where it might harm the radio equipment, other equipment, or humans. The following lightning arrestors are examples of proper devices for Exalt Digital Microwave Radios:
206501-019 2016-05-24 31 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Polyphaser AL-LSXM Citel PRC5800 Mount and ground the RF lightning arrestor in accordance to the manufacturers recommendations. Place it as close as possible to the egress point where the next piece of transmission line enters the building or enclosure. Minimize the distance to the egress to lessen the opportunity for lightning to couple to or strike the unprotected section of transmission line (if any). Where possible, use a bulkhead connector to eliminate any opportunity of this risk. Keep cable lengths behind the arrestor and into the egress substantially short (less than 3'/1m) as a safe practice. Consult a qualified electrician or installer in all cases of grounding and lightning arrestor implementation. Transmission Line from Egress to Radio A single transmission line section from the egress to the radio RF connection is always desired. Minimize the number of connectors and adapters. For indoor runs, a cable ladder or tray may be needed to properly secure the cable. In some cases, a short flexible jumper allows ease of connection to the radios RF connector. A properly specified 90 connector can often eliminate this need. An installation with space around the radio to accommodate a gentle bend radius of the transmission line is also good for a direct connection. In all cases, ensure that the transmission line is not a pulling force of the RF connector on the radio. Transmission lines can be very stiff and can damage the connector if not dressed properly. Also, follow the transmission line manufacturers instructions for the proper use of cable securing devices. Antenna Alignment Antennas must be installed at both ends of the planned link to commence precision alignment. Refer to the Exalt white paper, Antenna Alignment. Antennas are typically aligned using the radio hardware for precise alignment. However, there are many very useful tools available to aid in this process, inclusive of devices specifically designed for the purpose of aligning antennas. Some examples are:
XL Microwave Path Align-R Use of these devices may be extremely advantageous as compared to using the radio, because they employ many unique facilities to aid in this process. Using these tools also makes it possible to align the antennas before the radio equipment is delivered. However, many installers successfully use the radios as the means for antenna alignment. There are two primary facilities when using the radio to align the antenna:
RSL voltage test point using a volt meter (recommended) Teletronics 17-402 The RSL test point DC voltage is inversely proportional and numerically calibrated to the received signal level. The voltage rises as the antennas are less in alignment, and falls as antennas are more in alignment. The voltage measurement corresponds to the received signal level in measurements of dBm (a negative number for RSL measurements). For example, an RSL of -60dBm yields an RSL voltage measurement of 0.60VDC; an RSL of -45dBm measures 0.45VDC. GUI RSL reading indicates the current RSL in dBm. Alignment of the antennas using the RSL test point can be accomplished in the following ways:
Radio near or at antenna location 32 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Temporarily connect the radio to the antenna using a short piece of transmission line, so that the radio is very close to the antenna location Run wires, as necessary, from the RSL test point to the volt meter so that the antenna installer can directly view the volt meter Note: Using this method, the final RSL voltage readings during alignment may be different
(better) than the planned RSL, due to the short RF transmission line. Use the path calculation tool to determine the RSL that should result in this temporary configuration to ensure proper ideal alignment. Run separate wires from radio mounted location to antenna location Temporarily connect a set of wires from the RSL test point to the antenna location, to allow the radio installer to use a local volt meter Note: Due to the resistance of the cable, the RSL readings might be impacted. Use the thickest wiring possible. Test the impact of the voltage reading due to the wiring by comparing a direct measurement at the RSL test point as opposed to the end of the wiring. RF/DC coupler Install a temporary DC coupling device at the radio antenna port and at the antenna connector. Connect the RSL test point to the radio antenna port coupler, and the volt meter to the antenna connector coupler. See DC Coupler for Antenna Alignment for more information Verbal relay/walkie-talkie/mobile radio/cell phone A person located at the radio front panel can use a short-range communication device or verbal relay to communicate to the antenna installer and read off RSL voltage measurements Only use the browser-based GUI for antenna alignment if there is no other means available. If this method is required, refer to Exalt Graphical User Interface (GUI). The RSL reading can be read on a PC or any handheld computing device that supports an HTML browser and Ethernet connectivity. Note: There is a slight delay in RSL readings in the GUI as the RSL levels change. In this case, fine alignment can be done in small adjustments allowing a small gap of time so that the impact of the adjustment on the GUI display catches up to real time. 206501-019 2016-05-24 33 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Configuration and Management This section describes the command line interface (CLI) and Exalt graphical user interface (GUI). Command Line Interface (CLI) Exalt Digital Microwave Radios provide a CLI to set key parameters on the system. Use the Console port for serial devices, or use the Ethernet MAIN or AUX ports for a Telnet session over a network connection. Connect to the Radio with a Serial Connection For serial interface to the CONSOLE port, on your PC, PDA, dumb terminal, or any other device with a serial interface and text input capabilities, use Hyperterminal or a similar application with the following settings:
Bits per second:
Data bits:
Parity:
Stop bits:
Flow Control:
9600 8 None 1 None Use a standard straight-through serial cable to connect between most computer serial ports and the Console port on the radio. A null modem cable is not properly wired for this interface. See Interface Connections for wiring details. After establishing the serial connection, press ENTER to display the login prompt. Telnet into the Command Line Interface (CLI) Use a Telnet connection to access the CLI in the Exalt Digital Microwave Radios. Use the CLI to set key parameters on the system. Connect to the Radio in a Telnet Session Make the Telnet connection to the radio through the Ethernet port. Use Windows and perform the following steps:
1 Open a command prompt or MS-DOS prompt (Start>Run). 2 Type C:\>Telnet <IP Address> at the command line:
The default IP address is 10.0.0.1 Note: The accessing computer must be on the same IP subnet as the radio. If the radio supports DHCP and DHCP is enabled (see Ethernet Interface Configuration Page), which is the default setting for a radio shipped from Exalt (for the models with this feature), and your computers Ethernet port is set for DHCP addressing, the radio will configure your computer to an IP address value which is either 2 or 10 higher than the radios current IP address (for example, if the radio is set to 10.0.0.1, the computer will be set to 10.0.0.3 or 10.0.0.11, depending on the radio model and the software version running on the radio). Use Telnet when prompted to enter the administration level login and password. The default administration login is admin and password is password. It is recommended that the default administration password be reset by performing a radio reset (see Reset to Critical Factory Settings). 34 206501-019 2016-05-24 Figure 19 shows the menu choices available after log in. Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios 0 = back to previous screen 9 = help Figure 19 CLI root menu The following selections can be made on all screens:
Ctrl+\ (control and backslash keys) = exit session Exalt Graphical User Interface (GUI) The Exalt GUI is the primary user interface for configuring and troubleshooting the radio and radio system. A computer or hand-held device with a conventional HTML browser and Ethernet port is required. Microsoft Internet Explorer is the preferred browser. Netscape, Mozilla, and Firefox are also supported. Preparing to Connect If the radios are new, both radios are preconfigured as Radio B, and have the same IP address. The initial priority is to configure one radio to Radio A and assign different IP addresses, unique to each radio. There are two ways to change the IP address:
1 Reset the radio to the critical default factory settings (see Reset to Critical Factory Settings). 2 Connect to the GUI using the default IP address (10.0.0.1), and change the IP address through the GUI interface. 206501-019 2016-05-24 35 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Note: To connect to the radios Ethernet port and use the GUI interface, the accessing computer must match the radios IP address subnet. It is therefore necessary to either change the radios IP address through the CLI to match the subnet of the computer, or change the computers IP address to match the subnet of the radio (such as, a computer IP address of 10.0.0.10 if trying to connect to a radio set to the factory default IP address of 10.0.0.1). If the radio supports DHCP and DHCP is enabled (see Ethernet Interface Configuration Page), which is the default setting for a radio shipped from Exalt (for the models with this feature), and your computers Ethernet port is set for DHCP addressing, the radio will configure your computer to an IP address value which is either 2 or 10 higher than the radios current IP address (for example, if the radio is set to 10.0.0.1, the computer will be set to 10.0.0.3 or 10.0.0.11, depending on the radio model and the software version running on the radio). To configure a radio as Radio A, connect to the GUI and change the configuration, as discussed in this section. Log In Use the following steps to log in to the Exalt GUI. 1 Open a browser window. Microsoft Internet Explorer is the recommended browser. Netscape, Mozilla, and Firefox are also supported. If there are issues with your browser, please report it to Exalt Customer Care. You may be required to use a different browser to immediately overcome issues. 2 Type the IP address of the radio in the address bar. Figure 20 Initiating the browser connection The following window displays after pressing the Enter key or clicking the Go button in the browser window. 36 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Figure 21 Browser Login screensmodel dependent Note: Some models support SSL/SSH secure browser management, and display the login screen on the right. Browser security can be enabled or disabled for these models. Login Privileges There are two levels of login privileges:
Administrator (admin) assigned complete permissions to view, edit, and configure User (user) assigned limited, view-only permissions with no edit or configuration rights The default login names and passwords are as follows:
Table 5 Default login information Privilege level Administrator User User name admin user Default password password Alternate passworda Admin password User a. Early firmware versions use the alternate passwords. Administrator login credentials are required for configuration purposes. Type the user name and passwords for Administrator level and click OK. The following screen displays. 206501-019 2016-05-24 37 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Figure 22 Radio Information page Quick Start To establish a link on the bench, apply the following basic configurations to the radio terminal. Use the steps in the Quick Start Guide included with the radio. A summary of the items that need to be configured are:
Radio IP address for each end. Each end must have a different IP address and cannot match the accessing computers IP address or any address assigned if radios are part of a larger network. It may be required to change the IP address of the accessing computer after changing the IP address of the radio so that the IP subnet matches. The radio IP address is listed on the Administration Settings page. Install the Regulatory Domain Key (RDK) for RDK-enabled radios only. The radio is non-functional without the RDK. RDK references the units serial number and the country/region where the radio will be RDK is entered on the Administration Settings Page. deployed. RDK is obtained through your Exalt Authorized reseller or distributor. Set one radio as Radio A. The radio selected as Radio A must be configured. Radio A/B selection is the Endpoint Identifier parameter on the System Configuration page. Even though both radios are set as Radio B by default, confirm this configuration on the radio intended to be Radio B. If all other parameters are still configured at their factory default settings, the radios can now be connected back-to-back to verify that the link is communicating and perform any other desired tests. See Back-to-back Bench Testing for test information. 38 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Link Security Key (Administration Settings Page) Navigating the GUI describes each page of the GUI. Most configuration parameter settings are intuitive. The following link parameters must match at both ends for the link to communicate:
Bandwidth (File Transfer Page) RF Frequency (System Configuration page) Link Distance (System Configuration page) TDD Frame Size (System Configuration page) Note: Changing any of these parameters causes a temporary loss of link. The GUI displays a warning and provides an opportunity to cancel changes. Navigating the GUI The GUI provides the primary interface for all configuration and management. There are three sections of the main GUI window:
Navigation panel Main window Summary status information section (upper-left corner) SUMMARY STATUS LINK TO REMOTE RADIO NAVIGATION PANE MAIN WINDOW Figure 23 Exalt GUI window description Summary Status Section This section of the Exalt GUI provides a review of the system status. Note: Click the radio IP address link to access that radio for management. In the screens in Figure 23, the top bar illustrates the alarm condition of the link. The information inside the bar is equivalent to the entry of the Link Name set by the administrator in the Administration Settings page. The color of the panel indicates alarm status:
Green indicates the system is communicating and all functions are normal 206501-019 2016-05-24 39 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Yellow indicates a minor non-traffic affecting alarm condition Red indicates a major traffic affecting alarm condition The left panel summarizes the alarm conditions of the local radio (the radio that matches the IP address). The information displayed is the IP address and the endpoint identifier (Radio A or Radio B). The right panel summarizes the alarm conditions of the remote radio (the radio linked to the local radio). Note: The local radio might be the near-end or the far-end radio, depending on the management interface connection. The terms local and remote refer to the orientation of the radio terminals relative to the IP address you are managing. When making certain changes to a near-end radio without first making changes to the far-end radio, the link may become disconnected unless configuration changes are reverted to their original settings. When making changes that may disrupt the link, always change the far-end radio first, and then the near-end radio to match. The Summary Status Section allows the Exalt GUI to be a rudimentary management system. Minimize the browser window to display just the top bar or the top bar and radio information, and open several browsers on the desktop. When a window status changes to yellow or red, you can quickly maximize that window to determine the issues. Figure 24 Summary status information Navigation Panel In the navigation panel, pages with sub-pages have a plus (+) to the left of the page link. Click the plus sign or page name title to view sub-page titles. The pages can be collapsed to hide the sub-pages when a minus () sign appears to the left of the page link. Management pages are indicated with an X to the left of the page name. Click the X or page name to display the page within the main window. 40 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Note: The local radio might be the near-end or the far-end radio, depending on the management interface connection. The terms local and remote refer to the orientation of the radio terminals relative to the IP address you are managing. When making certain changes to a near-end radio without first making changes to the far-end radio, the link may become disconnected unless configuration changes are reverted to their original settings. When making changes that may disrupt the link, always change the far-end radio first, and then the near-end radio to match. 206501-019 2016-05-24 41 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Radio Information Page This page provides general information about the local radio terminal. This information is helpful for troubleshooting and for record keeping. Figure 25 Radio Information page 42 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Administration Settings Page This page allows contains general parameters for the radio system. The Current Value column lists entries actual settings. Desired changes are entered in the New Value column. Figure 26 Administration Settings page As shown in Figure 27, on all pages changed fields display with an orange background. After all desired changes are entered, click the Update button to accept and enable changes. Figure 27 Changed fields and Update button 206501-019 2016-05-24 43 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Most entries on this page are self-explanatory. The following lists unique or important parameters. Fill in the date and time fields as soon as practical. Events are captured with time/date stamps, which is valuable information for troubleshooting. Set the Link Security Key to something other than the factory default setting (12 characters, all zeros) at each end. The link security key must match at both sides of the link. If the security key remains at the factory setting, the radio link is open to sabotage by a party with the same radio model. Each link should have a unique security key. If using the same security key for every link in the network, the radio could link to any other radio with the same security key. This is problematic in multi-radio networks. Note that the security key must be exactly 12 characters. Any alphanumeric character can be used. The link security key is case sensitive. Note: Changing the link security key interrupts transmission until the opposite end is changed to match. Always change the far-end radio first, and then change the near-end radio. Reset the admin and user passwords. These passwords should not match. If the admin password remains at the factory default setting, it provides an opportunity for random reassignment by a network-connected user. The new password must be entered twice. If the passwords do not match and the Update button clicked, the password is not changed and remains set to the previous password. Enter the license key provided by Exalt to access extended features or diagnostic capabilities. Click Update to accept the changes and enable the new features. License keys are issued by radio serial number, so ensure that the license key used was issued for this particular radio. The Regulatory Domain Key establishes the frequency bands, tuning frequencies, bandwidths, output power and Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) requirements, in accordance with the regulations that apply in the country where the product is deployed. The RDK must be typed in to enable ANY functionality for the radio. The RDK is issued to the Exalt Authorized distributor or reseller, and is paired to the specific serial number of the radio. AES (Advance Encryption Standard) can be implemented to provide additional data security for the wireless link. This function requires an upgrade license key (purchased separately). Both radios in the link must have a valid AES upgrade license key to implement AES. Different bit-
length encryption license keys (for example, 128-bit and 256-bit) are also available, depending on model type. If the required upgrade license key is present, simply insert a matching hexadecimal string on both terminals and select the Enable AES On option for AES encryption. Note that similar to the administration and user passwords, the AES string must be entered twice for each terminal. 44 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Configuration This page allows the enabling and disabling of the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) functions. Use SNMP to manage networked devices and execute the following functions:
GET: Obtain information from the device, such as a configuration setting or parameter. SET: Change a configuration setting on the device. TRAP: The device proactively informs the management station of a change of state, usually used for critical alarms or warnings. See SNMP Traps. Figure 28 SNMP Configuration page One feature of the SNMP implementation is that system configuration changes do not take effect using the SET command. Instead, groups of configuration settings can be preconfigured for global change, and a single Save (Commit) command implements all changes. When some parameters are changed, a link may drop and/or management control lost. MIB files allow many parameters to be set at once, allowing only a temporarily dropped link or management control issue. The opposite end radio can be quickly reconfigured, with little downtime for the link and management control. The save (Commit) command is similar to the Update button. Dropped links or management control issues do not occur with every parameter change. Many configuration changes do not impact traffic or management access. EX-i Series (TDD) utilize SNMPv3, a high security version of SNMP, to ensure secure access to and storing of management data. The SNMPv3 security string matches the admin and user passwords. Passwords must be eight characters or longer. The SNMP MIBs are organized similar to the GUI. Become familiar with the GUI before using the SNMP function. SNMP v1/v2c/v3 Support Options Enable the SNMPv1/v2c options to allow entering read and read/write community strings. 206501-019 2016-05-24 45 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Note: Users are encouraged to avoid enabling SNMPv1/V2c support due to known security loopholes in these protocols. Enable the SNMPv3 options to allow entering read and read/write user names and passwords. These entries are de-coupled from the standard radio user names and passwords. SNMPv3 provides full management security. SNMP Traps SNMP traps alert the central network management system with important issues about the radio system. Trap filters are set on the Traps Configuration page (Figure 29). Not all i-Series radios support SNMP traps. Consult the release notes for more information. Trap support for all versions of SNMP are provided and can be independently enabled. Enter the IP address(es) to which the traps are directed in the Trap Destination IP Address field. The AUX port (or the MAIN port when using in-band management) must be connected to the network to allow trap information to reach the designated IP address. In a bridged network, this may not require special network settings. In a routed network, the connected router must have a defined path for the IP address. Figure 29 Trap Configuration page Note: The Update button must be clicked to save any changes to this page. 46 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios The following traps are available:
Authentication Trap: This is an SNMP standard trap when password information for SNMP is incorrect. This can help identify unwanted intrusions into the management system and for diagnosis of SNMP issues for valid users. Radio Reboot Trap: This trap is sent after any radio reboot to inform the manager of the reboot status. Local/Remote Link Status Trap: This trap is sent when Link is in erroreds state (equivalent to the Link LED on the radio front panel or the Link status bar in the upper-left of the Exalt GUI window). Local/Remote Status Trap: This trap is sent when Status is in errored state (equivalent to the Status LED on the front panel or the radio status box in the upper-left of the Exalt GUI window). Local RSL Status Trap: This trap is sent when the local RSL drops below the value set in the Threshold Value (dBm) field. Buffers are provided so that continuous traps are not sent if the RSL is bouncing near the set threshold value. This trap is reset only if the RSL rises to 3dBm above the set threshold value and then drops below that value. Exalt recommends that this trap be set to a value 5dBm or 10dBm above the threshold as a warning that the system has faded and may be approaching an outage. Temperature Status Trap: This trap is sent when the internal temperature reaches the warning point. This conveys that the external temperature control is in a fault state. Buffers are applied to this trap to avoid multiple traps when the temperature remains near the warning point. 206501-019 2016-05-24 47 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios File Transfer Page This page allows the administrator to upload and download files to and from the radio. Three types of files can be uploaded: configuration, radio firmware, and Regulatory Domain Database (RDD). When uploading Configuration Files, current configuration parameters are immediately overwritten, and the unit automatically reboots. When uploading radio firmware files, the file is placed into reserve memory space. After the new radio firmware file uploads, use the File Activation page to enable the files (see File Activation Page). Figure 30 File Transfer page Up to four types of files can be downloaded: radio firmware, configuration, MIB, and event log. The MIB file refers to the Management Information Base related to the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) function, and is only available on models which support SNMP. See Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Configuration for more information. Note: Check the File Activation page before uploading radio firmware files. New file uploads overwrite the secondary file location. If important files reside in the primary or secondary file location, download them before uploading the new files. Only the active radio firmware file can be downloaded. Therefore, to download the reserve file, it must first be activated (using the Swap button). The current radio firmware and RDD versions can be viewed on the Radio Information Page. Note: Issues with the RDK may be caused when the Regulatory Domain Database (RDD) is not up to date. Go to the Exalt Web site to download the current RDD. 48 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Use the following steps to download a file. 1 Select the type of file to download (configuration or radio firmware). 2 Click the Download button and wait for the radio to prepare the file for download. 3 For the MIB file download, a second page/link appears. 4 Left-click the link on the page to download the file to a desired location. Figure 31 File Transfer pagedownload file link File download and upload is useful when configuring several radios with similar settings. A copy of the configuration file can also help restore radio settings. In addition, a copy of the Exalt default configuration file is helpful to restore the radio to factory settings. Note: Do not change the name of any download file. The configuration file must be named config.nv. To keep track of multiple configuration files, use a folder naming system or temporarily rename the file, however, it must be named config.nv before it can be uploaded to a radio. Never change radio firmware file names under any circumstances. If copying the same configuration file into multiple radios, take as some parameters will match and that may be undesirable. However, it may be easier to change just a subset of parameters rather than every parameter. The following parameters can cause problems or confusion if they match at each of a link:
Radio Name Endpoint Identifier IP Address 206501-019 2016-05-24 49 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Link Name Link Security Key (although each link should be different) IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway The following parameters can match at both ends of the link:
Admin and User passwords Bandwidth RF Frequency Link Distance Ethernet configurations 50 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios File Activation Page Use this page to move stored or uploaded files for use on the radio. The page indicates which file is currently in use, and which file is available for use. Click the Swap button to place the file in the Alternative File column into the active state and move the file in the Current File column to the Alternative File column. Figure 32 File Activation page Note: In all cases, the radio reboots after a new file is selected using the Swap function. This places the radio out of service for a short time. 206501-019 2016-05-24 51 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Access Security Page Note: As of this writing, this feature is not yet released on all models. This feature allows all radio management interfaces such as HTTP, HTTPS, SSH, Telnet, and serial to be independently disabled/enabled. The default is all interfaces are enabled. Note that SNMP interfaces are independently enabled/disabled on the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Configuration page. One management interface must be enabled at all times and the internal software ensures that one interface is always available. Figure 33 Access Security page The reset to critical factory defaults procedure is labeled Rescue on this page, and restores only those configurations required to access the radio (such as the IP address, mask, passwords, disables VLANs, and so on). This feature also ensures that all management interfaces are enabled after reset. Note that Rescue is the standard reset function and is recommended to retain all other configurations of the radio after a reset. The reset feature can then be changed to reset all configurations to factory defaults. When this feature is used, the entire radio configuration is changed back to the settings in the radio at 52 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios manufacture, except for installed License Keys and/or Regulatory Domain Keys, which are retained even after a factory default reset. For additional security, the Ethernet interfaces (MAIN and AUX) can be individually disabled. If both interfaces are disabled, no Ethernet traffic can pass across the radio link and Ethernet cannot be used for management. In this case, HTTP, HTTPS, Telnet, SSH, and all forms of SNMP are not available;
the only available management interface is Serial. This is only appropriate for radios exclusively running TDM traffic (T1, E1, DS3), where serial access is sufficient. This feature is not available on all models. Root access is used by Exalt for remote software diagnosis (if the radio is accessible over the Internet to Exalt and login credentials were provided). Root access is enabled by default. Note: If root access is disabled, there are conditions where Exalt may not be able to address remotely that result in an RMA return that otherwise may not have been necessary had root access been enabled. For this reason, it is advised to leave root access enabled, unless there are significant concerns about access to the radios management ports where hacking may try to attack the Telnet or serial interfaces to gain access to the radios root directory. To allay these types of issues, use private networks (such as VPN or VLAN) for management access. If management security features on this page are used, then the management security features must be manually reconfigured after any reset. Alternatively, after a reset you can upload a configuration file to restore settings. Note: Models with this management security feature that also have DIP switches on the front panel ignore DIP switch configuration after any reset. 206501-019 2016-05-24 53 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios System Configuration Page This page contains several critical system parameters. Figure 34 System Configuration page Note: For models requiring a Regulatory Domain Key (RDK), you must enter a valid RDK to edit this page. Most entries on this page are self-explanatory. The following lists unique or important parameters. Set the Radio Transmit Power (dBm) parameter to the designed level. The professional installer sets this value or dictates the value of this setting to the system administrator following the system design and local regulations. In many cases, this value must be set to a proper value to comply with legal restrictions. Improper values can result in liability to the user and/or installer. Note: Changing Radio Transmit Power may temporarily interrupt traffic. Small changes in output power do not normally interrupt traffic, but larger changes may. Do not adjust the Radio Transmit Power parameter to a value higher than is legally allowed. Do not adjust the Radio Transmit Power parameter lower than the link budget and fade margin can afford. 54 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Note: The link may be lost and unrecoverable through GUI control. If the link is lost due to reduction of Radio Transmit Power, travel to the radio location(s) may be required to reset the value. Set the Bandwidth (MHz) parameter to the designed level. The value of this is determined in the design/engineering stage. The Bandwidth parameter must also match at both ends of the link. In conjunction with the Mode parameter, the Bandwidth parameter directly relates to the capacity, latency, and the number of TDM circuits supported. The transmitter and receiver bandwidth are modified using this parameter, making it critical that it be set with respect to the local RF noise and interference profile, and/or in relation to any multi-link network design. Note: Changing Bandwidth will temporarily interrupt traffic. The Bandwidth parameter must match at each end. Adjust the far-end radio first, and then the near-end radio. Changing Bandwidth changes the radios threshold. A narrower bandwidth has better threshold performance and improved interference immunity, therefore if changing to a wider bandwidth, there is an opportunity that the link may be lost and unrecoverable through GUI control. Check the available fade margin and interference profile to determine if the impact to threshold and increased bandwidth is acceptable to maintain the link and the desired performance. If the link is lost due to increasing the Bandwidth parameter, travel to the radio location(s) may be required to reset the value. Set the Mode parameter to the designed selection. The value of this setting is determined in the design/engineering stage. The Mode parameter must match at both ends of the link. In conjunction with the Bandwidth parameter, the Mode parameter setting directly relates to the capacity of the system, as well as critical RF parameters, including receiver threshold, carrier-to-interference ratio, and in some cases, maximum radio transmit power. Note: Changing Mode will temporarily interrupt traffic. The Mode setting must match at each end. Adjust the far-end radio first, and then the near-end radio. Changing Mode changes the radios threshold, carrier-to-interference ratio, and also may have impact on the Radio Transmit Power. A lower mode has better threshold performance and carrier-to-interference ratio, and in some cases, higher output power, therefore if changing to a higher mode (for example, from Mode 1 to Mode 2), there is an opportunity that the link may be lost and unrecoverable through GUI control. Check the available fade margin and interference profile, and determine if the impact to RF performance is sufficient to maintain the link and desired performance. If the link is lost due to increasing the Mode parameter, travel to the radio location(s) may be required to reset the value. Set the RF Frequency (GHz) parameter to the designed point. The value of this setting is determined in the design/engineering stage. RF Frequency must match at both ends of the link. It may be critical to set RF Frequency with respect to the local RF noise and interference profiles, and/or in relation to any multi-link network design. The frequency selection section includes the ability to select from either the complete list of frequencies (All) that can be tuned for the selected band and bandwidth, or, in some cases, a pre-
selected list of non-overlapping center frequencies (Preferred) that Exalt determined provides the most flexible collocation opportunities for large networks of Exalt radios The frequency selection section includes a band selection button that must be enabled for the frequency band of operation for which the link was engineered. Some bands may not be selectable due to regulatory constraints. Some bands also require Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS), based 206501-019 2016-05-24 55 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios on the active RDK. DFS is automatically enabled for these bands and is selectable for all other bands. Note: Changing RF Frequency will temporarily interrupt traffic. The RF Frequency parameter setting must match at each end. Adjust the far-end radio first, and then the near-end radio. If the RF Frequency parameter is changed to a frequency with interference, the link may be lost and unrecoverable through GUI control. If the link is lost due to changing the RF Frequency parameter, travel to the radio location(s) may be required to reset the value. Set the Endpoint Identifier so that one end of the link is set to Radio A and the opposite end set to Radio B. In single-link networks, it is unimportant which end is designated A or B. In multi-link networks, however, it may be important to orient the links so that at any collocation site (where there are multiple radios of the same type at the same site), all radios are set to the same Endpoint Identifier (A or B). See Link Orientation and Synchronization. Note: Changing the Endpoint Identifier parameter requires a reboot of the radio to take effect. The reboot temporarily interrupts traffic. DFS is automatically enabled for any band where required based on the regulations that match the active RDK. For bands where DFS is not required, it can still be selected. For DFS to operate properly, set the antenna gain figure to match the installed transmission system gain (that is, the gain of the antenna minus all losses between the radio and the antenna). Note: When DFS is enabled, the radio temporarily stops transmitting for at least 60 seconds to ensure that no radar interference is present. This is called Channel Availability Check
(CAC). The DFS status displays on the Alarms Page. Once CAC passes, the radio resumes normal operation. If at any time during CAC or regular operation a qualifying radar signature is detected, the radio shuts down communications for a minimum of 30 minutes. This is the Non-Occupancy Period (NOP). Transmission only resumes after the NOP completes and then only after a successful CAC. Set the Link Distance (miles) parameter to the range that is equal to or greater than the actual link distance. The value of this setting is determined in the design/engineering stage. Note: Changing the Link Distance parameter will temporarily interrupt traffic. The Link Distance setting must match at each end and must not be less than the actual link distance. Adjust the far-end radio first, and then the near-end radio. If the Link Distance parameter is changed to a setting less than the actual distance, the link may be lost and unrecoverable through GUI control. If the link is lost due to this situation, travel to the radio location(s) may be required to reset the value. If the Link Distance parameter setting is set to a distance unnecessarily higher than the actual link distance, the radio may have substantially reduced performance with respect to throughput and latency. Set the TDD Frame Size (ms) parameter to the designed level. The value of this setting is determined in the design/engineering stage. The TDD Frame Size parameter must match at both ends of the link. The TDD Frame Size parameter setting directly relates to the capacity, latency, and number of TDM circuits that can be supported over the given link distance. In multi-link networks, especially where there are collocated links, it is also important to set all radios to the same TDD Frame Size setting to avoid self-interference. Future enhancement: The GPS or internal sync function may be necessary for these networks. See RF Output Power Setting and Link Orientation and Synchronization for more information. 206501-019 2016-05-24 56 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Note: Changing the TDD Frame Size parameter will temporarily interrupt traffic. TDD Frame Size parameters must match at each end. Adjust the far-end radio first, and then the near-end radio. If the TDD Frame Size parameter is set to a value that cannot be supported for the link distance, the link may be lost and unrecoverable through GUI control. If the link is lost due to this situation, travel to the radio location(s) may be required to reset the value. Set the TX/RX Throughput Ratio (%) parameter to program radio symmetry. The default setting is 50/50 for symmetrical, full-duplex throughput. Other throughput ratio options are 20/80, 80/20, and 65/35, 35/65. See Link Symmetry. For asymmetric throughput, only TDD frame size settings of 2ms and 5ms and RF Bandwidth settings of 16MHz and higher are supported. The 64MHz/Mode2 configuration does not support asymmetry due to capacity limitations of the 100BaseT interface. Radio Collocation enables the Sync feature. See Radio Synchronization. The External Alarm Inputs parameter can be ignored unless connecting external alarm sources to the radio for monitoring the status of these external alarms through the radio management system
(see Interface Connections). Aggregate User Throughput parameter provides information about user capacity of the wireless link, in the current configuration. The new value column reflects throughput if changes are made to Bandwidth, Mode, Link Distance, and/or TDD Frame Size. Click the Aggregate User Throughput link for details on aggregate capacity. 206501-019 2016-05-24 57 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios MHS Configuration Page The -16 versions provide the Monitored Hot Standby (MHS) feature. The MHS kit is sold separately and requires a valid license key, which is included with the kit. The radio system can be configured for hardware redundancy at either end or both ends of the radio link. This configuration uses two radio terminals per end with special hardware and cabling that switches the standby radio into the path when the primary radio or its interfaces go offline. This minimizes any down-time for the link especially for hard-to-reach radio locations or critical traffic applications. Figure 35 shows the MHS configuration screen. Figure 35 MHS Configuration page Refer to the MHS Implementation Guide for more information. 58 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Ethernet Interface Configuration Page This page allows the administrator to set the muting, alarm, and duplex settings of both the ETHERNET MAIN and AUX connections. It also allows determination of the management information for in-band (carried over the air and available from both the MAIN and AUX connectors on either end of the link) or out-of-band (not carried over the air and only available from the local AUX connector). Figure 36 Ethernet Interface Configuration page To ignore Ethernet alarms, disable the alarming of the MAIN and/or connector. Muting the MAIN connection is desirable when connected equipment senses Ethernet signaling and makes decisions
(such as, spanning tree protocol enable) based on the Ethernet signal. If the MAIN connection has muting enabled, the port is muted when the link is not active. It may be desirable to disable the alarming of the AUX connector if it is not used. Set the Ethernet interfaces on the radio and connected equipment to 100/full-duplex for best performance. If the Ethernet ports are set to auto-negotiation, poor throughput performance may be a result, as well as intermittent disconnections of the Ethernet connection. Some models support the DHCP feature. When enabled, DHCP provides basic DHCP functions to ease interfacing with a computer. By default DHCP is enabled for models that support it. If the Ethernet port on the computer is set for DHCP addressing, on radio bootup (for up to 10 minutes) the radio provides an IP address to the computer that is either 2 or 10 higher than the radios current IP address (for example, if the radios IP address is 10.0.0.1, the computer will be set to 10.0.0.3 or 10.0.0.11, depending on the radio model and the software version running on the radio). The radio also senses any DHCP server on the network and, if detected, mutes its own internal DHCP function. 206501-019 2016-05-24 59 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios VLAN Configuration Page VLAN is disabled as the default setting for Exalt radios. The Exalt radios still pass VLAN and non-
VLAN traffic across the link, but do not examine the VLAN traffic or act upon it. Enable VLAN using the Exalt GUI for expanded VLAN support. Figure 37 VLAN Configuration page When VLAN is first enabled, all Ethernet interface ports (Aux and Main) are assigned as Default VLAN, until the ports are configured with specific VLAN IDs. For example, a specific VLAN for management access to the radio must be manually configured. Note: Once a management VLAN is configured or modified and the Update button clicked, the management connection will likely be lost. The management connection to the radio must follow the configuration to the assigned VLAN. After configuring and enabling the management VLAN on the radio, reconfigure your networks management access to match the settings on the radio. If any VLANs are configured in addition to the management VLAN, the radio automatically discards traffic that not matching a configured VLAN. Non-tagged traffic, or traffic with tags matching VLANs that are not configured, do not flow across the radio link. Up to 16 unique VLANs can be configured. VLAN ID numbering ranges from 1 to 4094. The Native
(default) VLAN ID can be changed from the default setting. Every configured VLAN can also have a logical name to help track the function of each VLAN. VLAN configurations are maintained even when VLAN is disabled. That is, the VLANs can be configured and the configuration saved, even though they are not active until VLAN is enabled. Use 60 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios the following methods to restore the management connection if a mistake was made assigning the management VLAN and access cannot be restored:
Reset the radio to the critical factory defaults (see Reset to Critical Factory Settings). Connect to the Console port using a serial interface and the CLI, as described in Command Line Interface (CLI), and reconfigure the VLAN settings. Note: Only one entry per VLAN ID is allowed. If the same VLAN ID is entered into the table more than once, the radio uses the first assignment found in the table and ignores duplicate entries. Four VLAN configurations are provided:
802.1q Block Untagged: To pass desired VLANs across the radio, they must be listed in the lower tables per their respective interfaces. All other traffic, including untagged traffic, is not passed across the link. The radio must be managed on a VLAN whose ID is set in the upper table. This management VLAN ID is available to any interface IDs listed in this lower table. 802.1q Pass Untagged: To pass desired VLANs across the radio, they must be listed in the lower tables per their respective interfaces. All other VLAN traffic is not passed across the link, and untagged traffic is passed across the link with no changes. The radio must be managed on a VLAN whose ID is set in the upper table. This management VLAN ID is available to any interface IDs listed in this lower table. 802.1q Tag Untagged: To pass desired VLANs across the radio, they must be listed in the lower tables per their respective interfaces. All other VLAN traffic is not passed across the link, and untagged traffic is tagged with the programmed Default VLAN, per interface, as set in the upper table. Any interface requiring the default VLAN ID to pass must have the Default VLAN ID listed in the table below. The radio must be managed on a VLAN whose ID is set in the upper table. This management VLAN ID is available to any interface IDs listed in the lower table. Management only: All traffic is passed transparently, except the radio is managed on an assigned Management VLAN ID, as programmed in the upper table. 206501-019 2016-05-24 61 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios T1/E1 Configuration Pages These pages allow the administrator to selectively enable or disable the T1 or E1 circuits, one at a time. For enabled T1/E1 circuits, additional configuration, including loopback functions, are available. Disable the unused T1 or E1 so that the alarms are turned off and more throughput is allocated to the Ethernet interface. Every enabled T1 or E1 input, even if there is no T1 or E1 signal present, reduces the aggregate throughput of the Ethernet interface by roughly 3Mbps (for T1) or 4Mbps (for E1). This page toggles between T1 and E1, as required, by clicking the Set to T1 or Set to E1 button. A warning displays that a reboot is necessary, and the radio reboots if the administrator continues. This will interrupt traffic. It may be necessary to re-login to the radio after the reboot completes. T1/E1 mode self-coordinates across the link if the link is active. This means that it only needs to be set while connected at one end. In addition, enabling and disabling T1/E1 circuits also self-coordinates across the link if the link is active. If a link is not active and T1/E1 enabling is a mismatch when a link is first created, the Radio A configuration for T1/E1 enabling supersedes the settings on the Radio B configuration, and changes the settings on Radio B. Note: Certain combinations of the TDD Frame Size, Link Distance, Mode, and Bandwidth parameter settings limit the number of T1/E1 circuits that can be carried by the radio. In these cases, certain fields on the T1/E1 Interface Configuration pages are not available, starting with the highest port number. For example, for a 4x T1/E1 radio version, if only three (3) circuits can be carried, port 4 is not available for configuration and is disabled. If only two circuits can be carried, both ports 3 and 4 are not available. Increasing the TDD frame size and Mode parameters, and/or increasing the Bandwidth parameter results in an increase in the supported number of T1/E1 circuits. T1 Interface Configuration Page This page allows the administrator to enable/disable each individual T1 channel, set the Line Build Out
(LBO), Line Code (either AMI or B8ZS), and AIS enabling/disabling for each input. If enabled, the radio places an AIS code on the output of the associated interface if and when the link fails or when there is no T1 signal available from the far end to provide the user at the local end. Loopback controls are also provided (see T1/E1 Loopback). 62 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Figure 38 T1 Interface Configuration page E1 Interface Configuration Page This page allows the administrator to enable/disable each individual E1 channel. The AIS can also be enabled and disabled for each input. If enabled, the radio places an AIS code on the output of the associated interface if and when the link fails or when there is no E1 signal available from the far end to provide the user at the local end. Loopback controls are also provided (see T1/E1 Loopback). Figure 39 E1 Interface Configuration page 206501-019 2016-05-24 63 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios T1/E1 Loopback Loopback is provided for any enabled T1 or E1 port. As shown in Figure 38 and Figure 39, the choices are:
No Loopback (default) External (local) External (remote) Internal Note: Only one Internal loopback can be enabled at any time. All loopback configurations control the loop at the Line Interface integrated circuit, which is the device wired directly to the front panel ports. External loopback modes are used in conjunction with an external test source. The designation of local or remote refers to where the loopback is occurring relative to the location where the loopback is implemented. That is, on the radio being accessed, if External (remote) is selected, this loops the signal back at the remote radio interface back towards the local radio. Likewise, if External (local) is selected, the signal loops back at the local interface towards the remote radio (Figure 40 and Figure 41). Figure 40 External (remote) loopback Figure 41 External (local) loopback When a local T1/E1 port is configured for External (remote) loopback, it is the same as configuring the remote radio for External (local) loopback. 64 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios DS3 Configuration Page This page allows the administrator to configure the DS3 interface (EX-5i-DS3 model only). The interface should be disabled if there is no DS3 connected. The associated throughput is then allocated to T1/E1 and/or Ethernet. Figure 42 DS3 Configuration page The Line Build Out (LBO) can be set for this interface. Also, the Automatic Insertion Signal (AIS) can be disabled, or set to an All-Ones (AIS) or All-Zeros (AOS) signal type. In addition, some loopback functions are provided, similar to the T1/E1 loopbacks described in T1/E1 Loopback. 206501-019 2016-05-24 65 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios GPS Information Page This page provides information on how many GPS satellites are within the view of the Exalt GPS receiver. This page is active for implementations that include the GPS receiver connection for synchronization. This information can be helpful for troubleshooting GPS issues. Figure 43 GPS Information page 66 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Alarms Page This page provides an easy-to-read summary of the alarm status of both local and remote radios. The colors on this page reflect the color of the alarms displayed on the radio front panel. However, additional detail displays on this page to aid in quick assessment of issues and status. Figure 44 Alarms page Table 6 lists alarm status conditions that appear on this page. Table 6 Alarm status indicators Label Link Status Indicates RF link status:
Green Solid = Error-free connection (BER<10e-6) Yellow Solid = Errored connection (10e-3>BER >10e-6) Red Solid = No link (BER>10e-3) Indicates the status of the Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS). Green = No DFS activity, normal transmission Red = Either CAC or NOP is in progress. Indicates the enabled/disabled status with Internal or GPS sync and current alarm status. Green Solid = Sync enabled and sync input present Yellow Solid = Sync enabled and missing proper sync input signal Grey = Disabled DFS Collocation 206501-019 2016-05-24 67 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Table 6 Alarm status indicators (Continued) Label DS3 Status Indicates the status of the DS3 interface. Green = Enabled and connection present Yellow = Disabled and connection present Red = Enabled and no connection present Grey = Disabled or unavailable due to configuration Green Solid = Data present Grey = Disabled Red Solid = No data present (and alarms are enabled) Green Solid = Alarm enabled and connection present Yellow Solid = Alarm enabled and connection not present Grey = Alarm disabled Red Solid = No data present (and alarms are enabled) Green = Enabled and connection present (clocking confirmed) Red = Enabled and no connection present Grey = Disabled or unavailable due to configuration Green Solid = Normal temperature range Yellow Solid = Exceeding normal temperature range Indicates the internal fan status. There are 3 fans for redundancy Green = Fan OK Yellow = Fan in alarm Indicates the status of the external alarm inputs from the ALARMS connector, in accordance with the open/closed logic defined on the System Configuration Page. Green = Normal Yellow = In alarm Indicates the status of the front panel DIP switch for models without Access Security. Yellow = Enabled Grey = Disabled Ethernet Main Ethernet Aux T1/E1 Input Temperature Internal Fan External Inputs
(1 and 2) DIP Switch 68 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios MHS Status Page Note: MHS is a future enhancement. For -16 models with the MHS option, the MHS Status page shows the present alarm status of the MHS functions. Figure 45 shows the MHS Status page. Figure 45 MHS Status page Refer to the MHS Implementation Guide for more information. 206501-019 2016-05-24 69 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Performance Page This page provides statistical information about the performance of the system in relation to the integrity of the user data and the RF link. Figure 46 Performance page The Current BER field indicates the current bit error rate of the link. If the link is operating perfectly, this should indicate zero. Generally, the link should remain at a BER less than 1x10-6 (1 bit out of every million bits errored). This is the threshold performance specification and the standard to which the link was engineered. However, radio links can and are affected by weather, interference, and other external sources and will occasionally have a higher error rate. A link remains operational unless the BER exceeds 1x10-3 (1 bit out of every hundred bits errored). Consult the link design engineer for an understanding of the predicted error rate of the radio link as it has been designed. Many applications are unaffected by bit errors, but TDM circuits (for example, T1 or E1) are more sensitive. Also, if the link operator is providing a service guarantee, this value may need to be monitored or examined in cases of service issues. The behavior of BER in relation to other alarms or measurements and external events can be very helpful in troubleshooting activities. Current RSL is the measurement of the received signal level at the radio antenna port. This is the measured level of the RF signal coming from the opposite end of the radio link. The link was engineered to a specific RSL by the link design engineer, and this RSL should be obtained during installation and remain relatively stable during the operation of the link. RSL can and will vary as a result of weather changes and other external sources, such as path obstructions. Once again, this variation was part of the original design to achieve a certain level of performance over time. Bit errors occur when the RSL falls to a level within roughly 3dB of the threshold specification. When the RSL falls below the threshold specification, the link disconnects and will not reconnect until the RSL is above the threshold specification. The behavior of RSL in relation to other alarms or measurements and external events can be very helpful in troubleshooting activities. 70 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Errored Seconds (ES) indicates the total number of seconds that occurred where there was at least one bit error since the last time that the radio statistics counter was reset. Generally, ES are not a significant concern, so long as they are not continuous or above the anticipated performance based on the original link engineering goals. If ES are continuous or at a high rate, this is normally an indication of poor link performance due to poor RSL or interference, or severe impact by weather or other environmental factors. However, similar to the performance factors previously listed, ES can and will occur in any radio link. Once again, consult the link engineer to determine the original design goals, and compare actual performance to these expectations to determine if any improvements are necessary or if other problems may be causing excessive ES. Note: Unavailable Seconds do not register as ES. In other words, the ES counter counts all seconds that are errored NOT INCLUDING the seconds that were classified as unavailable. The total number of seconds with errors or outages is the sum of ES and Unavailable Seconds. Unavailable Seconds (also called UAS) are similar to ES, but this counter keeps track of every second where the bit error rate equals or exceeds 1x10-3, as well as any seconds where there is a complete loss of radio communication, over the period since the last counter reset. If Unavailable Seconds are continuous or at a high rate, this is normally an indication of poor link performance due to poor RSL or interference, or severe impact by weather or other environmental factors. However, similar to the performance factors listed above, Unavailable Seconds can and do occur in any radio link. Consult the link engineer to determine the original design goals, and compare actual performance to these expectations to determine if any improvements are necessary or if other problems may be causing excessive Unavailable Seconds. Minimum RSL indicates the worst (lowest) received signal level that occurred since the last counter reset. It is helpful to know if the RSL dropped significantly from the normal level, or has reached a level near or below threshold. Minimum RSL Timestamp indicates the date and time when the Minimum RSL occurred. This is helpful for general troubleshooting, and especially comparing to items in the event log or diagnostic charts from the same time period. Maximum RSL indicates the best (highest) RSL that occurred since the last counter reset. This indicates the best performance of the radio link, which is normally equal to the installed value, and is usually the designed value. Time Since Reset indicates the amount of time passed since the last counter reset. This helps to quantify the seriousness of other statistics, such as ES and Unavailable Seconds, if there have been high numbers of ES and/or Unavailable Seconds over a relatively short period of time. All end-of-link statistics can be independently reset using the respective reset statistics button. It is good practice to reset the statistics during link commissioning (after all antenna alignment is complete and stable RSL at designed levels is achieved, and no more system reboots are anticipated). Regularly review this page to record performance and reset the statistics so that the counters can more precisely pinpoint issues. Note: Resetting statistics from one end also resets the statistics for the same radio at the opposite end. That is, if the Local statistics are reset, logging into the remote end shows the Remote statistics on that end (which is the local radio in the first condition) as being reset at the same time. 206501-019 2016-05-24 71 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Event Log Page Use this page to review a list of the events logged by the radio. The following items are listed in the event log:
Alarms Alarms clearing (normal) Radio reboots Radio configuration changes Every event is tagged with the time that the event occurred, and a severity and type. The event log also allows filtering to limit the view of the log to only the level(s) of desired information. The log contains the last 1000 events. Events are deleted on a FIFO basis, erasing the oldest entries to make room for the newest entries. The event log can be cleared and downloaded from the file transfer page (some models may require a software upgrade to enable this feature). System logins Figure 47 Event Log page 72 206501-019 2016-05-24 User Throughput Page This page illustrates the user throughput of the radio, as configured. Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Figure 48 User Throughput page Click the help icon (
) to go to page on how this information is determined (Figure 49). 206501-019 2016-05-24 73 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Figure 49 Aggregate User Throughput Help page 74 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Diagnostic Charts Page Use this page as an aid in troubleshooting. This page illustrates the historical (and current) performance for three parameters: RSL, Radio Temperature, and BER. The horizontal scale illustrates 120 points of time measurement and is synchronized on all three graphs. The scale displays in minutes, hours, or days from the last two hours (120 minutes), five days
(120 hours), or four months (120 days). All information is stored, so all of these periods are available for short- and long-term performance analysis. The right side of a graph represents the most recent measurement, and data marches from the right-to-left at every interval. The vertical scale of each chart independently scales to show the maximum resolution based on the maximum variation of the data over the selected time measurement. Figure 50 Diagnostic Charts page Use the cursor to point to any spot on any of the three charts, and all three charts illustrate the measurements taken for that time interval in the upper-left corner of each chart. The time interval is indicated by T=(value). This is followed by the value of the measurement, listing the highest value, lowest value and average value measured over that time interval. For example, if the displayed time interval is minutes, and the cursor is held at the T=17 mark on the horizontal axis, the measurements shown indicate performance from 17 minutes ago. The high/low/
average values shown on each chart are measurements made across that specific one-minute interval. 206501-019 2016-05-24 75 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Changes in RSL often have an impact on BER, and this can be confirmed by looking for synchronized events. When BER events occur without corresponding changes in RSL, this normally indicates interference, atmospheric changes, transmission system issues (such as problems with cables, connectors, or antennas), or possibly radio hardware problems. 76 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Spectrum Analyzer Page The spectrum analyzer feature provides a useful pre-planning and troubleshooting tool. This feature is only available on radios with firmware supporting the spectrum analyzer. Perform a spectrum analysis after deployment and just before commissioning to maintain a record of the spectrum at the time of deployment. Figure 51 shows the Spectrum Analyzer page. Figure 51 Spectrum Analyzer page While a professional spectrum analyzer provides higher levels of control and precision for pre-
planning, the Spectrum Analyzer page allows evaluation of the RF spectrum as seen at the radios RF input port prior to deployment. This is useful for pre-planning the center frequency and occupied bandwidth, and to determine polarization and antenna type and mounting locations. For troubleshooting, enable the spectrum analyzer to scan the desired segment or full band of the frequency range. Select the step size and set the remote radio transmitter ON or OFF. This allows viewing of the clean spectrum without the remote transmitter on and a comparison of the remote transmitter in the midst of other signals. 206501-019 2016-05-24 77 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Note: Enabling the spectrum analyzer interrupts all radio traffic for the duration of the analysis. In addition, access to the radios GUI may also be interrupted, depending on the location of the interfaced computer relative to the radio where the spectrum analysis is occurring. The GUI is available at the completion of the spectrum analysis. Use the smallest step size to obtain the finest view of the spectrum. The spectrum analyzer can be set to match the start and stop frequency for a dwell mode. Peak and average detection modes are also available. Peak detection is helpful for capturing intermittent events such as pulsed emissions. It is best to set the Scan Time option to a time value as opposed to using the infinity setting. If your management computer is connected to the radio through the radio link, access to the GUI is interrupted during the duration of the analysis. Note: The result of selecting infinity may be complete loss of contact to that radio and may require a physical visit to the radio location to disable the spectrum analyzer. The spectrum analyzer graph displays received signals in red, gray, or green (Figure 52), normalized in dBm to the resolution bandwidth of the analyzer. Red indicates the highest level detected during the entire scan. Gray indicates the lowest value seen during the scan. Green indicates the last value measured at that frequency. Figure 52 Spectrum analyzer graph example A completely green vertical box indicates that the signal maintained a steady level for the entire scan or that the last scan measured at a strong or stronger level than the rest of the analysis. A completely red vertical box indicates that there was a signal at some point during the scan, but that the signal was not detected at the last scan. A graph displaying green on the lower part and red at the upper part indicates that at some time during the scan, a signal was detected at a higher level than was detected during the last scan. A gray bar usually has a small green and/or red dot at the top or a green and/or red bar extending above it. The top of a gray bar indicates the lowest value seen during the scan. The last spectrum analyzer scan performed displays in this page until the radio is rebooted. You can do a screen capture for record keeping and for comparison to future analyses. The time and date of the analysis displays on the page, which is handy as a reference in a screen capture. 78 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Ethernet Utilization Page This page shows a chart for each Ethernet interface to illustrate inbound and outbound packet utilization. This is shown as a percentage of the interface configuration (that is, if your interface is set for 100BaseT, then 100% represents 100Mbps. Compare offered load (inbound) to delivered load
(outbound) to determine if radio capacity is a bottleneck for the data transfer. This chart can illustrate inbound and/or outbound utilization, and uses different colors for data entry. The legend can be hidden. Figure 53 Ethernet Utilization page Note that outbound utilization never exceeds the rate where a radio is configured. For example, if the radio is configured for a 55 Mbps capacity, outbound utilization will never exceed 55 Mbps at 100BaseT. The Ethernet Utilization Watermark level function allows administrators to receive an SNMP trap when watermark conditions are exceeded. For example, if a radio is configured for 55 Mbps capacity, the administrator may wish to be warned if the radio exceeds 50 Mbps for more than 1 hour per day. In this case, set the Watermark level to 50% and the trap duration to 60 minutes. Traps must be enabled to activate this function. When the watermark level function is enabled, a line on the chart appears for data comparison to the watermark. 206501-019 2016-05-24 79 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Reboot Page Use this page to reboot the radio. The function may never be required, but can be used in emergencies. All configurations that require a reboot automatically reboot on administrator confirmation. Figure 54 Reboot page 80 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Manual Page The manual (this document or the version that matches the installed firmware) is available within the GUI. Adobe Acrobat Reader 5.5 or higher is required (go to www.adobe.com to download Acrobat Reader). Click the Manual link to display the manual within the browser window. Once the manual displays, click the save button on the PDF toolbar to download the manual locally. Figure 55 Manual page 206501-019 2016-05-24 81 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Specifications This section presents specifications for the i-Series of Digital Microwave Radios. Physical Specifications Physical Configuration Dimensions (HxWxD), (std models) Dimensions (HxWxD), (-16 models) Weight (std models) Weight (-16 models) Operating Temperature Altitude Humidity Safety EMC Single-piece Indoor Unit (IDU) 1RU: 1.75" x 17" x 14"/ 4.5 x 43.2 x 35.6 cm 1.5RU: 2.63" x 17" x 14"/ 6.7 x 43.2 x 35.6 cm 11.3 lbs/5.1 kg 12 lbs/5.5kg
-13 +149F /-25 to +65C 15,000'/4.6 km 95% non-condensing EN 60950-1, IEC 60950-1 EN 301 489-17 (EX-5i and EX-2.4i series), FCC Part 15, IC Part 15 Common System Specifications Tuning Resolution Power Control Step Size Selectable Modulation Modes Selectable Channel Bandwidths Selectable Frame Lengths (ms) Maximum Aggregate User Capacity 1MHz; 5MHz for EX-4.9i and some regulatory domains 0.5dB Mode 1 (QPSK); Mode 2 (16QAM) 8MHz, 16MHz, 32MHz, 64MHza EX-4.9i and some regulatory domains:
10MHz, 20MHz, 40MHz 0.5, 1, 2, 2.5, 4, 5 Mbps 8 / 10 16 / 20MHz 32/40MHz 64MHz1 Mode 1 Mode 2 13 27 27 55 110 55 110 216 Error Floor Frequency Stability Link Security 10-12
+7 ppm 96-bit Security Code, optional NIST FIPS-197 compliant 128-bit or 256-bit AES encryption. a. Not all bandwidth and mode combinations are available on all radio models. Some radios may require specific software license keys, which can be purchased from your authorized Exalt representative. 82 206501-019 2016-05-24 EX-2.4i System Specifications Frequency Band Tunable Range Output Power (at full power) Output Power (at minimum power) Selectable Channel Bandwidths Receiver Threshold (BER=10-6) Maximum RSL Non-overlapping channels Regulatory Compliance FCC ID IC ID Emission Designator(s) Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios 2400 to 2483.5MHz 2406 to 2468MHz
+27dBm (0.5W), Mode 1
+24dBm (0.25W), Mode 2
+7dBm 8MHz, 16MHz, 32MHz, 64MHza dBm 8MHz 16MHz 32MHz Mode 1
-88 Mode 2
-80
-85
-82
-77
-74
-79
-71 64MHz1 Mode 1: -25dBm error-free; 0dBm no damage 8MHz: 8; 16MHz: 4; 32MHz: 2; 641: 1 FCC 15.247; IC RSS-210 TTM-102P40I 6254A-102P40I 8MHz 16MHz 32MHz Mode 1 10M2W7D Mode 2 9M9W7D 17M3W7D 19M0W7D 34M7W7D 36M0W7D 64MHz*
60M7W7D 61M3W7D a. 64MHz BW is enabled for the EX-2.4i though a firmware option. 64MHz BW is enabled for the EX-2.4i-16 when the 16xT1/E1 license key is enabled. 206501-019 2016-05-24 83 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios EX-4.9i System Specifications Frequency Band Tunable Range Output Power (at full power, Mode 1) Output Power (at minimum power) Selectable Channel Bandwidths Receiver Threshold (BER=10-6) 4940 to 4990 MHz 4945 to 4985 MHz
+24dBm (20MHz BW)
+22dBm (10MHz BW)
+4dBm 10MHz, 20MHza Maximum RSL Non-overlapping channels Regulatory Compliance FCC ID IC ID Emission Designator(s) dBm 10MHz 20MHz Mode 1
-86
-83 Mode 2
-78
-751 Mode 1: -25dBm error-free; 0dBm no damage 10MHz: 5; 20MHz: 2 FCC Part 90; IC RSS-111 TTM-104P90I 6254A-104P90I 10MHz 20MHz 8M72W7D 19M0W7D a. Mode 2 for 20MHz BW is enabled through firmware options for the EX-4.9i. 84 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios EX-5i System Specifications, 5.3GHz Band Frequency Band Tunable Range Output Power (at full power) Output Power (at minimum power) Receiver Threshold (BER=10-6) 5250 to 5350 MHz 5260 to 5332 MHz
+13dBm (0.02W)
-7dBm dBm 8/10MHz Mode 1
-86 Mode 2
-78 16/20MHz 32/40MHz
-83
-80
-75
-72 Maximum RSL Non-overlapping channels Regulatory Compliance FCC ID IC ID Emission Designator(s)
-77
-69 64MHz1 Mode 1: -25dBm error-free; 0dBm no damage 8MHz: 10; 16MHz: 5; 32MHz: 2; 64MHza: 1 FCC 15.407; IC RSS-210 TTM-105P25M 6254A-105P25I 8MHz 16MHz 32MHz 64MHz1 7M8W7D 15M7W7D 30M9W7D 60M8W7D a. 64MHz BW is enabled through a firmware option for the EX-5i. 64MHz BW is enabled when the 16xT1/E1 license key is enabled for the EX-5i-16. 206501-019 2016-05-24 85 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios EX-5i System Specifications, 5.4GHz Band Frequency Band Tunable Range Output Power (at full power) Output Power (at minimum power) Receiver Threshold (BER=10-6) 5470 to 5725 MHz 5488 to 5715 MHz
+13dBm (0.02W)
-7dBm Maximum RSL Non-overlapping channels Regulatory Compliance FCC ID:
IC ID:
Emission Designator(s) dBm 8/10MHz 16/20MHz 32/40MHz 64MHz1 Mode 1
-86 Mode 2
-78
-83
-80
-77
-75
-72
-69 Mode 1: -25dBm error-free; 0dBm no damage 8MHz: 29; 16MHz: 14; 32MHz: 7; 64MHza: 3 FCC 15.407; IC RSS-210 TTM-105P25M 6254A-105P25I 8MHz 16MHz 32MHz 64MHz1 8M27W7D 16M7W7D 33M0W7D 65M0W7D a. 64MHz BW is enabled through a firmware option for the EX-5i. 64MHz BW is enabled when the 16xT1/E1 license key is enabled for the EX-5i-16. 86 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios EX-5i System Specifications, 5.8GHz Band Frequency Band Tunable Range Output Power (at full power) 5725 to 5850 MHz 5731 to 5844 MHz
+24dBm (0.25W), Mode 1
+21dBm (0.13W), Mode 2
+4dBm Output Power (at minimum power) Receiver Threshold (BER=10-6) Maximum RSL Non-overlapping channels Regulatory Compliance FCC ID IC ID Emission Designator(s)
(dBm) 8/10MHz Mode 1
-86 Mode 2
-78 16/20MHz 32MHz 64MHz1
-83
-80
-77
-75
-72
-69 Mode 1: -25dBm error-free; 0dBm no damage 8MHz: 15; 16MHz: 7; 32MHz: 3; 64MHza: 1 FCC 15.407 (b) (4) (ii); IC RSS-210 TTM-105P25M 6254A-105P25I 8MHz 16MHz 32MHz 64MHz1 8M4W7D 16M7W7D 33M1W7D 64M5W7D a. 64MHz BW is enabled through a firmware option for the EX-5i. 64MHz BW is enabled when the 16xT1/E1 license key is enabled for the EX-5i-16. 206501-019 2016-05-24 87 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Interfaces RF Connector Impedance T1/E1 (x4 or x16) Connector T1 Impedance T1 Line Codes T1 LBO Settings (in ft.) T1 Clocking Speed T1 Compliance E1 Impedance E1 Line Codes E1 Clocking Speed E1 Compliance DS3 Connector DS3 Impedance DS3 Line Code DS3 LBO Settings (in ft.) DS3 Clocking Speed DS3 Compliance Ethernet (x2) Connectors Interface Speed Duplex Compliance Console (Serial) Connector Interface Speed Compliance Alarm Connector Inputs Outputs 88 N-type female 50 Ohms RJ-45 (RJ48C), female 100 Ohms, balanced AMI, B8ZS, selectable 0-133, 133-266, 266-399, 399-533, 533-655 1.544 Mbps ANSI T1.102-1987; ITU-T; G.823; GR-49T-CORE 120 Ohms, balanced HDB3 2.048 Mbps CEPT-1; G.703; ITU-T-G703 BNC, female (x2, In/Out) 75 Ohms, unbalanced B3ZS 0-133, 1330266, 266-399, 399-533, 533-655 44.736 Mbps ANSI T1.102-1993; GR-499-CORE RJ-45, female, auto-MDIX 10 or 100 Mbps Half, full, auto, selectable 802.3 9-pin sub-D, female 9600 bps EIA-574 DTE (RS-232) 9-pin sub-D, female
(2) TTL/Closure
(2) Relay (Form C) 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios RJ45, female 1 pps (GPS) Sync (In and Out) Connector Signal Power Connector Input Voltage (EX-2.4i) 6-pin barrier strip 4060VDC (most EX-2.4i radios conform to the same power as EX-5i below, the front panel of the radio indicates the proper input per the manufacturing date of the radio)
<34W (0.7A @ 48V) 2060VDC
<38.5W (0.8A @ 48V; 1.6A @ 24V) Consumption (EX-2.4i) Input Voltage (EX-5i and EX-4.9i) Consumption (EX-5i and EX-4.9i) Input Voltage (-16 models and DS3 models) 2060VDC Consumption (-16 models and DS3 models) < 45W (0.9A @ 48V; 1.8A @ 24V) 206501-019 2016-05-24 89 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Interface Connections This section provides the pin number assignment and wiring information for the connectors on the i-Series radios. All connectors are shown as viewed from the radio front panel. T1/E1 Connections There are two orientations of T1/E1 connections. Channels 1 and 2 have the securing tab towards the top of the connector while Channels 3 and 4 have the securing tab towards the bottom of the connector. Figure 56 illustrates the pin orientation and functionality of these connectors. Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Function Tip Out (from radio) Ring Out (from radio) Ground Tip In (to radio) Ring In (to radio) Ground Unused Unused Figure 56 T1/E1 connectors 90 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Ethernet Connections There are two orientations of Ethernet connections. AUX has the securing tab towards the top of the connector while MAIN has the securing tab towards the bottom of the connector. Figure 57 illustrates the pin orientation and functionality of these connectors. Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Function Paired with Pin 2 Paired with Pin 1 Paired with Pin 6 Unused Unused Paired with Pin 3 Unused Unused Figure 57 Ethernet connectors (MAIN and AUX) The Ethernet connections implement Auto-MDIX, and therefore either straight or crossover Ethernet cables can be used, independent of the wiring of the connected device. Depending on the settings of in-band or out-of-band NMS, both the MAIN and AUX ports can access the far-end radio (if in-band) or not (out-of-band). In the case of out-of-band setting, only the AUX port can access the GUI, while only the MAIN port carries Ethernet traffic across the link. 206501-019 2016-05-24 91 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Sync Connections There are two sync connectors: Sync In and Sync Out. The Sync In connector is normally connected to a (custom) GPS antenna system, or to the Sync Out connector of a collocated radio. Figure 58 Sync In connector Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Function
+5V Power Out (to GPS antenna) Ground Tx Data (to GPS antenna) Enable (to GPS antenna) Rx Data (from GPS antenna) 1 pps Timing Signal (from GPS antenna) Unused Unused Function
+5V Power In (from connected radio) Ground Tx Data (to connected radio) Unused Rx Data (from connected radio) 1 pps Timing Signal (to connected radio) Unused Unused Figure 59 Sync Out connector For internal sync, connect pins 2 and 6 and cross over pins 3 and 5. For GPS connections, the interconnection cable between radios must cross over pins 3 and 5, with all other pins wired straight through. All configurations do not require connections on pins 4, 7, and 8. 92 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Alarm Connector The Alarm connector provides two alarm outputs that can be connected to external alarm collection equipment. The connector also allows connection of up to two external alarm sources, where the radio will report the status of these connections through the radio network management. Output alarm connections are Form C style connections, performing alarm logic based on either Normally Opened
(NO) or Normally Closed (NC) connections compared to a Common (C) pin. Input alarm connections can be TTL logic or NO/NC style relay closures. Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Function Alarm Output 1 - NC Alarm Output 1 - NO Ground (for Alarm Inputs) Alarm Output 2 NC Alarm Output 2 NO Alarm Output 1 Common Alarm Input 1 Alarm Input 2 Alarm Output 2 Common Figure 60 Alarm Connector Alarm Output 1 is in alarm any time that there is a traffic-impacting alarm condition (Major). Alarm Output 2 is in alarm any time that there is an alarm that is not traffic-impacting (Minor). The administrator can set the polarity of the alarm inputs. 206501-019 2016-05-24 93 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Console Connector The Console connector provides a serial interface for the Command Line Interface (CLI) functions. Typically, a straight-through serial cable is used between a computers serial port and the Console connector. Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Function Unused Tx (from radio) Rx (into radio) Unused Ground Unused Unused Unused Unused Figure 61 Console Connector 94 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios DC Power Connector The nominal voltage of the DC connector is 48V for the EX-2.4i, all other i-Series radios accept either 24VDC or 48VDC input. Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 Function Power Return (-) Ground Power (+) Power (+) Ground Power Return (-) Figure 62 DC Power connector 206501-019 2016-05-24 95 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios DIP Switch Settings (-16 Models Only) Note: Models with the Access Security management feature ignore DIP switch configurations after any reset. See the Access Security Page. The -16 models incorporate a front panel DIP switch. Use the DIP switch for emergency configuration or restoration for installations where there is no computer available for complete radio configuration. Only use the DIP switch for temporary purposes, for the purpose of a bench test or antenna alignment. Use the Exalt GUI for complete system configuration, as required before final system deployment. The DIP switch is only read when the critical factory reset procedure is implemented (see Reset to Critical Factory Settings). That is, when the RMT button is pressed and held during power up, and held through the boot cycle (approximately 45 seconds, until LED behavior stabilizes). If changes are made while the radio is already powered or when power is not applied, the changes are not executed until a reset is executed. depicts DIP switch positions 1 through 8, left to right, when facing the front panel. Also, the switch is considered in the One position when it is toggled upward, and in the Zero position when it is toggled downward (default). Figure 63 DIP Switch Orientation Figure 7 describes the function of each switch when placed in either position. Table 7 DIP Switch Functions Switch Position 1 0 (DOWN) Ignore all DIP switch positions Position 2 Radio B 1 (UP) If RMT button is held during boot cycle (reset to critical factory defaults procedure), reset to factory defaults, except IP address and password information, and make changes as described in this table. Radio A Position 3*
TDM circuits = T1 TDM circuits = E1 Position 4 Standard factory defaults Positions 58 Unused Standard factory defaults, except <50miles link distance and full transmit power. Unused Figure 8 provides the standard factory defaults for the -16 models. Table 8 Standard Factory Defaults (-16 Models) Parameter Frequency Transmit Power EX-2.4i-16 2441 MHz
+7 dBm EX-5i-16 5788 MHz
+4dBm 96 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Table 8 Standard Factory Defaults (-16 Models) (Continued) Parameter Link Distance Bandwidth Mode TDD Frame Size Ethernet Interfaces AUX port NMS Access T1/E1 Settings EX-2.4i-16
<10 miles 8 MHz Mode 1 2ms Enabled, 100/Full In-Band All Enabled, T1, B8ZS, AIS EX-5i-16 There are several scenarios for using the DIP switches. Figure 9 describes common configurations and related applications. Table 9 Common DIP Switch Applications Application Reset all critical factory defaults Switch Positions 0xxxxxxx Reset complete factory defaults except for IP information and passwords 1x00xxxx Configure the radio as Radio A while resetting. 11xxxxxx Change TDM interfaces to E1 1x1xxxxx Configure for ideal antenna alignment configuration 1xx1xxxx Comments If the IP address and/or passwords are forgotten or lost, use this setting and execute the critical reset procedure (RMT button held through boot cycle). If the IP address and/or passwords are already reset or are known but the configuration of the radio parameters is unknown, use this setting to restore all parameters to factory defaults. Execute the critical reset procedure with these settings. If trying to establish a link, configure one radio as Radio A, the other as Radio B using position 2. Choose the desired reset function using position 4. Reset one radio as Radio A with position 2 up, so that a link can be established. Choose the desired reset function using position 4. Reset both radios with position 3 up to configure E1 at each end. One radio must be Radio B, and the other Radio A (using position 2). Reset the radio with position 4 up to configure for the best setting to optimize antenna alignment. One radio must be configured as Radio A, the other as Radio B (using position 2). 206501-019 2016-05-24 97 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Antennas The following tables list antennas recommended for use with the EX-2.4i Series and EX-5i Series radios. The EX-4.9i may use any antenna. In some countries, antennas exceeding a certain level of gain may be unlawful. Refer to RF Output Power Setting for details on regulatory limits. Table 10 EX-2.4i supported antennas Manufacturer Model #
Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel RadioWaves RadioWaves RadioWaves RadioWaves RadioWaves RadioWaves RadioWaves RadioWaves RFS RFS RFS RFS RFS RFS 19T-2440-1 21T-2441-1 18T-2400-1 26T-2400-1 P2F-23 P4F-23 KP3F-23 KP4F-23 KPR3F-23 KPR4F-23 QD-2402 DFPS.5-23 DFPS1-23 P-24A36 P-24A48 SSP2-23 SSP4-23 SSP6-23 HSSP2-23 HSSP4-23 HSSP6-23 SP1-2.4 SP2-2.4 SP3-2.4 SP4-2.4 SP6-2.4 G3-2.4 G4-2.4 G6-2.4 MGAR2-23 MGAR3-23 MGAR4-23 SPF2-23 SPF3-23 SPF4-23 Description 16-inch Solid Parabolic Dish 24-inch Solid Parabolic Dish Semi-parabolic Grid Semi-parabolic Grid 2-foot Solid Parabolic Dish 4-foot Solid Parabolic Dish 3-foot Grid Parabolic Dish 4-foot Grid Parabolic Dish 2-foot Grid Parabolic Dish 4-foot Grid Parabolic Dish 11-inch Panel 6-inch Panel 1-foot Panel 3-foot Grid Parabolic Dish 4-foot Grid Parabolic Dish 2-foot Solid Parabolic Dish 4-foot Solid Parabolic Dish 6-foot Solid Parabolic Dish 2-foot Solid HP Parabolic Dish 4-foot Solid HP Parabolic Dish 6-foot Solid HP Parabolic Dish 1-foot Solid Parabolic Dish 2-foot Solid Parabolic Dish 3-foot Solid Parabolic Dish 4-foot Solid Parabolic Dish 6-foot Solid Parabolic Dish 3-foot Grid Parabolic Dish 4-foot Grid Parabolic Dish 6-foot Grid Parabolic Dish 2-foot Grid Parabolic Dish 3-foot Grid Parabolic Dish 4-foot Grid Parabolic Dish 2-foot Solid Parabolic Dish 3-foot Solid Parabolic Dish 4-foot Solid Parabolic Dish Mid-band Gain
(dBi) 19 21 17 23 21.6 27.3 25.1 27.5 23.6 27.3 16 10.3 16.5 25.7 27.7 20.7 26.7 30.3 20.5 26.3 30.0 14 21.3 24.3 27.2 30.3 24.5 27 30.3 20.8 24.2 27.2 20.5 24.2 27.1 3dB (Azimuth/Elevation) Beamwidth (degrees) 16/17 10/11 14/13 7.5/10 12/13.3 6.9 8.1 6.9 7.9/8.7 6.2/6.7 27 35/53 36 8.4 6.5 14.5 7.2 4.8 14.5 7.2 4.8 28 14 9.5 7.3 4.8 9.2 7.1 4.6 13.7 8.6 7 13.8 9.2 6.9 98 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Table 11 lists antennas supported by the EX-5i family of Digital Microwave Radios. Table 11 EX-5i supported antennas Manufacturer Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Andrew Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel Gabriel MTI MTI Radio Waves Radio Waves Radio Waves Radio Waves Radio Waves Radio Waves Radio Waves RFS RFS RFS RFS RFS RFS RFS Model #
P2F-52-N P3F-52-N P4F-52-NXA P6F-52-NXA HP2F-52-NPA HP3F-52-NPA HP4F-52-NPA HP6F-52-NPA FPA5250D12-N DFPD1-52 DFPD2-52 QF2-52-N QF2.5-52-N QF4-52-N QF6-52N HQF2-52-N HQF4-52-N HQF6-52-N MT-486004 MT-486001 FP1-5-24 FP2-5-28 SP2-5.2 HP2-5.2 SP3-5.2 SP4-5.2 SP6-5.2 SPF2-52A SPF3-52A SPF4-52A SPF6-52A SDF4-52A SDF6-52A MA0528-28AN Description 2-foot Dish 3-foot Dish 4-foot Dish 6-foot Dish 2-foot HP Dish 3-foot HP Dish 4-foot HP Dish 6-foot HP Dish 1-foot Panel 1-foot Panel 2-foot Panel 2-foot Dish 2.5-foot Dish 4-foot Dish 6-foot Dish 2-foot HP Dish 4-foot HP Dish 6-foot HP Dish 18-inch Panel 2-foot Panel 1-foot Panel 2-foot Panel 2-foot Dish 2-foot HP Dish 3-foot Dish 4-foot Dish 6-foot Dish 2-foot Dish 3-foot Dish 4-foot Dish 6-foot Dish 4-foot HP Dish 6-foot HP Dish 2-foot Panel Mid-band Gain dBi
(mid-band) 29.4 33.4 34.9 37.6 29.0 33.0 34.5 37.2 23.6 23.5 28.0 28.5 31.2 34.8 37.8 28.2 34.4 37.4 26.0 28.0 23.8 28.0 29.0 28.6 32.0 34.8 37.9 27.9 31.4 33.9 37.4 33.9 37.4 28.0 3dB (Azimuth/Elevation) Beamwidth (degrees) 5.4 3.8 3.0 1.8 5.4 3.8 3.0 1.8 9.6 9.4 4.6 5.6 4.4 2.7 1.9 5.7 2.8 1.9 6.0 4.5 10.0 4.5 6.1 6.1 4.0 3.0 2.0 6.2 4.2 3.1 2.1 3.1 2.1 4.5 206501-019 2016-05-24 99 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios DC Coupler for Antenna Alignment One challenge associated with an all-indoor radio construction is the alignment of the antennas. It can sometimes be challenging to place the radio near the antenna alignment personnel, and can also be challenging to run a separate set of wires for the voltmeter to be in view of the alignment personnel. If any of the conventional methods mentioned in the manual are difficult to achieve, one of the simplest methods to use is to employ the use of a DC coupling system as a temporary test configuration exclusively for the purpose of aligning the antennas. This type of system simply couples the DC voltage associated with RSL measurement at the radio location, over the RF transmission line, up to the antenna port. Warning! Remove all DC-blocked lightning arrestors in the transmission system prior to applying the DC coupler system. Failure to do so can result in electric shock and/or damage to the lightning arrestors and/or other equipment. Required Items The following items are needed for the DC coupling system, per radio end (double the quantities of these items for a complete link for simultaneous use at both ends):
2ea DC couplers: mini-circuits ZNBT-60-1W 1ea BNC male-male extension cable: Pomona 2249 1ea BNC female-to-mini Bantam (stackable Pin-tip plugs): Pomona 3221 1ea BNC female-to-banana male: Pomona 52681 1ea digital volt meter Interconnections Connect the items as shown in Figure 64. For the coupler installation, ensure that the DC side of the coupler is facing away from the radio and away from the antenna towards the RF transmission line system. Using the BNC adapters and cables, attach the radio end DC coupler to the RSL port on the radio, and the antenna end DC coupler to the DVM that the antenna alignment personnel will use. The DC voltage from the RSL port is now coupled to the transmission line system between the radio and the antenna, and is available at the antenna location. This allows the antenna alignment personnel to view the DVM output directly while adjusting the antenna. 1. This type of plug is typical for most professional hand-held digital volt meters (DVMs). However, verify that your DVM can accept this type of Bantam connector. If not, a different part number or adapter may be required to connect to the DVM. 100 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Figure 64 DC coupler interconnection Note: After completing antenna alignment, remove the DC couplers and associated wiring at both radio and antenna ends. 206501-019 2016-05-24 101 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Troubleshooting This section provides information regarding troubleshooting of common issues and alarms on these radios. Exalt Digital Microwave Radio systems are designed by Exalts expert engineers with extensive experience through multiple generations of microwave radio design. These new-generation systems contain extensive diagnostic tools, alarm indications, and troubleshooting aids. And, as compared to other systems in their class, are easier to install, maintain, and troubleshoot. The GUI provides information to aid in troubleshooting (see Diagnostic Charts Page). Contact Exalt Customer Care for further assistance with issues with your Exalt radio and with suggestions on how the radio and documentation can be improved. General Practices Troubleshooting a microwave radio link can be a complex task. Approach troubleshooting as a process of elimination, and first determine which portions of the system are operating properly. In a vast majority of cases, failures or poor performance of microwave links is attributed to something other than the microwave radio hardware. In this respect, the back-to-back bench test (see Back-to-
back Bench Testing) is very important to determine if radio hardware is operating properly and eliminate many variables in the troubleshooting process. If a back-to-back bench test fails, then the radio hardware is either broken or the radios are improperly configured. Upgrade the radio to the most current release of firmware, and/or reset the radio to its critical factory settings, following the quick start guide instructions and those in Configuration and Management, helps to confirm if configuration issues cause failure. The most common issues with microwave radio links are:
An improperly terminated RF cable Multipath propagation RF interference Path obstruction Misaligned antenna Moisture in the transmission system (antenna feed and/or RF cable) If the radio link has been operating without issues and is exhibiting new poor performance behavior or becomes completely inoperative, the troubleshooting process should pay close attention to any conditions that may have changed between the time when the system was working without issue and the time when the issues started. Also, it can be helpful to compare some performance parameters of the system before and after the presence of issues. Often the source of the issues can be determined by thoughtful consideration of changes, such as:
Changes in weather, including high winds Changes made to the radio equipment, transmission system, or connected equipment New radio systems or electronic equipment the nearby radio or transmission system Faulty antenna Improper grounding Insufficient link margin in the design/implementation 102 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Tree growth, flooded fields, or changes in rivers/lakes along the path T1/E1 enabling matches at each end of the link Link security key matches at each end of the link Link distance matches at each end of the link TDD Frame Length matches at each end of the link Endpoint Identifier is different at each end of the link (one end Radio A, one end Radio B) Ethernet interfaces are enabled, as desired New construction nearby either end of the link, or along the path Verify that configurations are set as follows:
RF matches at each end of the link Bandwidth matches at each end of the link AUX Ethernet is set for in-band or out-of-band NMS, as desired Also, in the design phase determine the optimum setting for the Bandwidth and TDD Frame Length parameters for the given link distance, and provides guidance to the expected RF link performance, as well as throughput, latency, and number of supported T1/E1 circuits. Typical Indications of Issues In many cases, microwave radio users do not notice changes or degradation to the radio system until the radio system fails completely or becomes highly errored or significantly intermittent. However, regular management of the radio system can help indicate changes in performance that have not yet impacted user performance, but may impact performance at a later date if left unchecked or unaddressed. The administrator can use this as an opportunity to be proactive and monitor the radio link performance regularly, watching for unexplained or unexpected changes in performance and trends in performance changes. Most importantly, monitoring radio system RSL over time indicates the performance of the radio system. Address any long-term drop in RSL and erratic or unsteady RSL. Some RSL changes are expected and weather patterns and the related multipath can cause dramatic RSL changes resulting in system outage. However, that outage should not occur at a significantly greater rate than the designed long-term performance. Consult the path design engineer for more information about link reliability expectations and anticipated RSL deviation. In addition, regular inspection of the transmission system (RF cables and antennas) and paying close attention to changes along the path, such as construction or tree height, or new microwave radio installations nearby, can be extremely helpful and proactive. When link performance is very poor, alarms on the radio front panel and within the radios management system indicates particular failures. Consult this manual for more information on the specific alarms and diagnostics, or contact Exalt Customer Care for assistance. Exalt Customer Care is primarily motivated to determine if the radio hardware is faulty and require return for repair, and to help execute an effective and efficient repair and return process for radio terminals believed to be faulty. However, Exalt Customer Care provides advice regarding the total radio system and RF path engineering and environment, and advises on troubleshooting. End users should first contact the installer and/or designer of the system. In many cases, an in-depth understanding of RF design is required, and on-site analysis and special test equipment, may be 206501-019 2016-05-24 103 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios necessary. Compared to phone support from Exalt Customer Care, troubleshooting is much more expeditious if the professional installer and/or link designer examines the system and reviews the management information in the GUI. In turn, if the professional installer and/or link designer contacts Exalt Customer Care, the process to rectify the system is much more expedient due to the in-depth knowledge related to the implementation and the RF environment. Improper RF Cable Termination Improper RF cable termination is a very common problem. In many cases, this is a problem that occurs during installation and is not a problem that suddenly appears. However, if cables are moved or flexed, especially near the termination points, and radio errors, changes in RSL, or other performance issues occur, this is a certain sign of this issue. Another relatively easy method to test for this condition is to decrease the output power of the radio system (at each end, one end at a time). A poor RF cable termination may be reflecting too much RF energy back into the radio system, and reducing output power reduces the reflected energy at a faster rate than the transmitted energy towards the far end. Be careful not to reduce the output power to the point where the radios threshold is reached. Typically, a reduction of just 3 to 6dB is enough to determine if this is the issue. If the reduction of output power clears the error condition, this is the likely cause. Use a reflectometer or meter that can read VSWR at the operating frequency to identify poor terminations as well as poor antenna feeds. Note: The Praxsym VSWR meter is an excellent tool for this purpose. Multipath Propagation Multipath propagation is a term that encompasses changes to the RF path, such as reflections and/or refraction, causing partial or complete destruction of the radio signal, and thus excessive bit errors and/
or system outages. Rapid changes in temperature, inversion layers, humidity, air pressure, water evaporation, as well as standing water or moisture on objects along the path are all examples of changes that can cause multipath propagation. New building construction near either end of the path or along the path can cause new reflection characteristics. If your system has been operating without issue and is suddenly experiencing issues that are symptomatic of a certain time of day or related to change in climatic events or some of the external factors listed above, this is likely the cause. Consult a professional RF path engineer in these cases. Often, minor repositioning of the antennas at either or both ends can reduce or eliminate these problems. RF Interference RF interference is usually indicative of another radio system nearby either end of your radio system or aimed towards one or both ends of your radio system usually at or near the same frequency and usually with a similar signal level. Other forms of RF interference also exist, such as electronic equipment placed close to the radio chassis or transmitters that couple onto the cabling or grounding system of the radio. Microwave ovens and wireless communication devices used near the equipment or cabling are examples of electronic equipment interference. 104 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Note: Exalt Digital Microwave Radios operate in license-exempt bands. Microwave ovens, wireless Internet devices and cordless phone technology may also use this frequency band. It may be necessary to separate the radio chassis, cabling system and antenna from these devices. RF interference, like most other causes of problems, is indicated by significant bit errors and/or system outages. One means to determine presence of interference is the use of a spectrum analyzer that covers the same range as the radio system. A professional RF engineer can use a spectrum analyzer to locate sources of interference, measure these sources, and determine potential remedies to take to operate in the presence of interference. If a spectrum analyzer is not available, the radios RSL port can help determine RSL levels of interfering signals. By turning the far-end radio off, the residual RSL measured by the radio indicates the level of interference seen by the radio. It is possible that interference levels below that which can be measured still have an impact on the radio system especially if the radio system has low fade margin or is using a high order modulation. Exalt Digital Microwave Radios provides considerable flexibility to tune to different frequencies across the bands within which they operate. This is the easiest method to use to try to avoid existing interference. In addition, the occupied bandwidth of the radio can be reduced. This, along with re-
tuning, can be very effective, however throughput is reduced. Repositioning the antenna and/or changing polarization, or upgrading the antenna to a higher gain, and/or using a high-performance antenna, are all secondary means that can be used. It may be necessary to perform combinations of both radio changes (retuning, occupied bandwidth reduction) and antenna system changes (position, polarization, upgrade). The EX-4.9i radio operates under licensed regulations. If interference is suspected, the local frequency coordination organization, or other users of the spectrum should be consulted before re-tuning the radio to a different frequency channel. Path Obstruction A path obstruction is defined as an object, such as a building or tree, impeding the proper path of the radio system. If the system design was proper at the time of installation and issues arise at a later date, an updated path profile and survey may be necessary to identify changes in path clearance. Misaligned Antenna At the time of initial installation, it is critical that the antennas at each end are properly aligned and that the designed RSL is achieved. However, antennas may become misaligned due to high winds, changes in the guy-wiring systems keeping the antenna mast stable, or loosening of the antenna mounting hardware. A reduction in the RSL of the link is symptomatic of this condition, but this condition is not the only condition that results in a reduction of RSL. However, if conditions occur where the antenna alignment may be suspected, the mechanics must be inspected and the antennas realigned. Faulty Antenna A faulty antenna is rare, but is still a possibility. In some cases, the mechanics of the antenna feed can get moisture inside, or a bad or weak connection in the pin and connector structure of the antenna may occur. A VSWR measurement of the antenna connection can be made to verify this condition. 206501-019 2016-05-24 105 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Improper Grounding In addition to being a potential human safety issue, improper system grounding is a somewhat common condition that can cause continuous bit errors or bit errors when metal objects come in contact with the radio, transmission system, or racking system. If touching the radio causes errors, grounding is the cause. It can be difficult to identify grounding problems, but a professional electrician can normally inspect a system and identify if there are deficiencies in the grounding system. Insufficient Link Margin Ideally, the link was designed with enough link margin (fade margin) to allow for multipath propagation and atmospheric fading and still remain reliable. In some cases, link margin is compromised by economic factors, such as using low-cost RF cabling or lower-cost antennas that have less gain or deficient performance compared to higher cost transmission system components. In some cases, there may be antenna size restrictions that forced the design to not have the desired amount of link margin. If the link was designed with poor link margin, there are likely many cases of bit errors and outages. The antenna system and transmission line can be upgraded to help reduce this. If the link design was installed with sufficient margin, but RSL is reduced, the remaining link margin may no longer be enough to maintain a reliable link. The causes of RSL reduction were previously described, but are usually due to new path obstruction(s) or antenna misalignment due to wind or mechanical factors. The antenna height or location can be changed to overcome new obstructions. Realignment of the antenna, and/or improvement to mechanical structures can help overcome antenna misalignment. Moisture in the Transmission System If the connectors on cables and antennas and egress junctions are not properly weatherproofed, moisture can get into the transmission system and cause significant error conditions and erratic performance. In many cases, the transmission system must be replaced. A VSWR meter is one means to identify such issues. Conduct physical inspections often. If changes to the weatherproofing (such as cracking) are noticed, replace the weatherproofing before leakage occurs. 106 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Back-to-back Bench Testing Use back-to-back bench testing to test the radio before installation, pre-configure the radio and connected equipment before installation, or in the troubleshooting process to identify if the radio hardware is the source of a system issue. It is a critical process, and often required or highly desirable for any installation or troubleshooting exercise. This section describes how to properly configure the radio hardware and accessories for a proper back-to-back bench test. For radio testing, there are two types of back-to-back configurations:
1 Basic test (test general operation) 2 Specification performance verification Basic Test The basic test is a simple test of radio functionality. It verifies that the radios are properly configured to communicate to one another, and verifies general radio performance as operational. For the basic test, the following items are needed:
Radio pair RF interconnect cable(s) (any length short is best) Fixed or variable attenuation, between 60 and 90dB (note: attenuation for basic test does not to be calibrated or precise) Powering source Computer/terminal with either serial or Ethernet port Connect the items as follows:
1 Connect attenuation and (known-good) RF cable(s) between radio pair, shown in Figure 65. 2 Configure one radio as Radio A; the other as Radio B 3 Power on radio pair Figure 65 Basic back-to-back bench test configuration After connecting and powering on, observe the front panel LEDs to verify that the LINK and STATUS LEDs are green. If so, the radios are communicating and all radio-related alarm conditions are normal. It can be beneficial to have a computer to verify configuration in case of red LEDs or to pre-configure the radio as desired for operation. Follow the instructions in Configuration and Management. 206501-019 2016-05-24 107 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Specification Performance Verification The specification performance verification is a more detailed test that allows you to verify that the radios output power and threshold specifications are being met. This is typically a test that would only be performed in a troubleshooting scenario, but can be performed before installation to provide a detailed record or ensure radio performance before installation. This test is identical to the basic test, but in place of the fixed attenuation, it requires the use of calibrated variable attenuation, or a set of calibrated fixed attenuators, or a combination of both, adding to a total attenuation value of 120dB, as measured at the operating frequency of the radio. In addition, a volt meter or computer is also required. Connect the system as shown in Figure 65, using the combination of fixed and variable attenuation between the radios RF ports. Connect the volt meter to either radios RSL test point and associated reference ground connection. In this test, it is desirable to use pre-tested RF cables, known to be good, and the insertion loss is known at the operating frequency. If the cables are short (6'/2m or less), you can estimate the loss, including connectors, to be less than 1dB each. The estimate of cable loss is critical to the overall confidence of the measurements made in this test. There are two critical specifications that can be tested in this configuration:
RF output power Radio receiver threshold To measure transmitter output power, simply insert any value of attenuation between the radios between 60 and 90dB. Ensure that both RF output power settings are at maximum. Use the volt meter to measure RSL in both directions. The RSL measured value should match the appropriate value according to the inserted attenuation, such as:
RSL = RF Output Power cabling losses total attenuation Verify output power by adjusting output power using the Exalt GUI (in administration mode) and evaluate the corresponding change to the RSL measurement. For threshold testing, the key is to insert a measured amount of loss that is close to, but not exceeding the radios specified system gain. System gain is the difference between RF output power and receiver threshold. At your selected modulation and bandwidth settings, determine the specified threshold performance, and choose a value of attenuation (including cable losses) that adds to roughly 5 to 15dB less than the system gain. For example, for the EX-2.4i, if the threshold for your measurement is -85dBm, the output power is
+27dBm, so the system gain is 112dB. Choose a value of total attenuation in the range of roughly 100 105dB. Once this attenuation is inserted, verify RSL readings as in the first step, and then, using the GUI, reduce radio output power in 1dB steps until the receiving radio (the one whose output power not being adjusted) Link LED turns from green to yellow. This indicates that threshold has been reached. At this point, verify the equation for system gain using the new output power level setting and verify that the threshold performance is meeting or exceeding the published specification. Note: Due to the variation of measurements and accuracies involved in this test, you may read a measurement that is 1dB to as much as 2dB off of the expected value. It should be of no concern unless the value is more than 3dB worse than expected. 108 206501-019 2016-05-24 Once threshold is verified in this direction, repeat the process in the opposite direction by adjusting RF output power of the radio at the opposite end. Return the first radio to its original power setting before adjusting the second radio. Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios 206501-019 2016-05-24 109 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios General Compliance and Safety The usage of radio transmission devices is subject to specific regulatory requirements governed by regional legislation. In most cases, the specific device must be authorized for use in a given country and must be installed and adjusted in accordance with specific radio-frequency settings and in a manner that has been authorized specific to the device itself in accordance with the specific location of the device. Some users may be completely or partially restricted from use of the device. Please consult local governmental agency/agencies for regulatory requirements before use, or contact Exalt or your Exalt authorized dealer for assistance. Do not modify this device in any way without the express written consent of Exalt. Modification voids the manufacturer warranty, and may also be illegal in accordance to government regulations. In addition, there are no user-serviceable parts or assemblies inside the product housing. There may also be voltages, signals, and mechanisms within the device that could be harmful to human safety. The mounting of this device and associated peripherals and connections (inclusive of antenna mast, antenna, cabling, egress, lightning protection devices, grounding, power, and so on) may be subject to regional requirements for health and human safety. A qualified professional installer and an electrician are highly recommended, and may be required by law. 110 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Dynamic Frequency Selection Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) may be required by regional legislation in some frequency bands to avoid causing interference to radar systems. Prior to the start of any transmission, the device equipped with DFS monitors the spectrum and is not permitted to transmit on a part of the spectrum that is already in use for radar transmissions for a period of 30 minutes. During operation of the device, the spectrum is continually monitored by the DFS to detect if radar begins transmission on a frequency that is being used by the device to transmit on. If the DFS software detects radar, the device must move off channel within a specified time period so that the device transmission does not interfere with the radar transmission. The device equipped with DFS is required to stay off that part of the spectrum for a minimum of 30 minutes, after which time the device may then check the spectrum for radar transmissions and begin transmitting if no radar is detected. 206501-019 2016-05-24 111 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Safety Notices 1 Review this entire guide for important installation instructions BEFORE attempting to install this product. 2 This product is intended to be installed, used, and maintained by experienced telecommunications personnel only. 3 Employ a properly licensed or authorized electrician to install or evaluate/certify the installation of all power and grounding related to the use of this equipment and all connected devices. 4 The device(s) shall only be connected to AC power sources provided by the supplier or to DC sources within the device specifications. Use a separate breaker circuit at the power source. 5 Lightning, surge protection devices, and earth grounding are required for most installations to ensure human safety. Consult a qualified electrician. 6 Servicing of this device should be performed by authorized personnel only. Do not disassemble this device. By opening or removing any covers you may expose yourself to hazardous energy parts. Incorrect reassembly of this product can cause a malfunction, and/or electrical shock, when the unit is subsequently used. 7 Do not connect or disconnect the power connection to the device when the power supply is plugged into an AC outlet. To connect, first connect the power connection to the device, and then apply power (or plug in) at the outlet. To disconnect, disengage power at the outlet or unplug, and then disconnect the direct connection to the device. 8 Do not insert any object of any shape or size inside this product at any time, whether powered or not. Objects may contact hazardous energy components that could result in a risk of fire or personal injury. 9 Liquids shall not come in contact with, or enter the inside of the device at any time. 10 Proper ventilation and/or airflow shall be provided surrounding the equipment. Items shall not come in contact with heat-sinking materials. Ensure that ambient operational and storage temperature specifications are maintained at all times. 11 Equipment is suitable for mounting on noncombustible surfaces only. 12 Do not move or alter the marking labels. 13 A CSU or similar isolating device is necessary between the equipment and the public telecommunications network. The equipment has not been evaluated for direct connection to the public telecommunications network. 112 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Regulatory Notices This section presents the Regulatory Compliance Regulations for your country. 4.9GHz Model The EX-4.9i is a licensed-band product operating within Part 90 of the FCC regulations and RSS-111 of Industry Canada. These bands are specifically reserved for Public Safety applications and related agencies, in accordance with these regulations. Transmitter power reduction may be required, depending on transmission system gains and losses, in accordance with instructions found in this appendix. The transmitter power of the device must be reduced by 1 dB for every 1 dB that the antenna gain exceeds 26 dBi (inclusive of transmission system losses). United States Compliance The EX-2.4i and EX-5i product families operate under FCC Rule Parts 15.247 and/or 15.407 as a license-exempt device. The EX-4.9i products operate under FCC Rule Part 90 as a licensed device. They may only be used as a point-to-point transmission device for fixed or temporary-fixed (non-
mobile) installations. The devices are subject to the following restrictions:
Do not use external amplifiers to boost the power or overcome transmission system losses, unless the specific amplifier/cable/antenna combination has expressly been authorized by the FCC. The output power must never exceed +30 dBm. Cross-border transmissions are expressly prohibited, except with written permission from both the FCC and the governing body of the neighboring country (Cofetel for Mexico; Industry Canada for Canada). Use only parabolic dish antennas or directional flat-panel antennas. No other types of antennas
(omni-directional, yagi, and so on) are authorized. Parabolic dishes of either grid or solid type are allowed. Maximum mid-band gain of each type of antenna certified is:
EX-2.4i models:
Parabolic dish: 30.3 dBi (6'/1.8m diameter) Directional flat panel: 20.5 dBi (~2'/61cm square) EX-4.9i models:
Parabolic dish: 26dBi (larger gains are allowed, with Tx power reduction) Directional flat panel: 26 dBi (larger gains are allowed, with Tx power reduction) EX-5i models:
Parabolic dish: 37.9 dBi (6'/1.8m diameter) Directional flat panel: 28 dBi (~2'/61cm square) 206501-019 2016-05-24 113 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Note: The 5GHz model is approved under FCC Rule Part 15.407(b)(4)(ii) for antenna gains greater than 10dBi. The 5GHz model cannot be manufactured, marketed, or sold after March 2, 2018 unless it is re-
certified under FCC Rule Part 15.407(b)(4)(i). Check with Exalt Wireless for status of re-certification. Federal Communications Commission (FCC), United States The device is allowed to be used provided it does not cause interference to other devices. It is not guaranteed to provide protection against interference from other electronic and radio devices. The system has been tested and found to comply with the limits of a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Shielded cables and I/O cords must be used for this equipment to comply with the relevant FCC regulations. Changes or modifications not expressly approved in writing by Exalt may void the users authority to operate this equipment. This device must be professionally installed. To comply with regulations, the output power of this device may need to be adjusted in accordance to the associated transmission system. See RF Output Power Setting for details. The antenna associated with EX-2.4i family shall be mounted in a location that is at least 10 feet away from humans that may be subject to long-term or continuous exposure. The antenna associated with the EX-5i family shall be mounted in a location that is at least 10/3m away from humans that may be subject to long-term or continuous exposure. Important: Where required by regional regulations, DFS is enabled by the system keys and cannot be disabled. Canada Compliance The EX-2.4i and EX-5i models operate under RSS-210 of Industry Canada regulations. The EX-4.9i model operates under RSS-111 of Industry Canada regulations. Operation is subject to the following conditions, unless express permission is granted by Industry Canada to operate in a different manner:
114 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios External amplifiers cannot be used to boost the power or to overcome transmission system losses, unless the specific amplifier/cable/antenna combination is expressly authorized by Industry Canada. Cross-border transmissions are expressly prohibited, except with written permission from both Industry Canada and the governing body of the neighboring country (FCC for USA) Only parabolic dish antennas or directional flat-panel antennas may be used. No other types of antennas (omni-directional, yagi, and so on) are authorized. Parabolic dishes of either grid or solid type are allowed. Maximum gain of each type of antenna allowed is:
EX-2.4i models:
Parabolic dish: 30.3 dBi (6'/1.8m diameter) Directional flat panel: 20.5 dBi (~2'/61cm square) EX-4.9i models:
Parabolic dish: 26 dBi (larger gains are allowed with Tx power reduction) Directional flat panel: 26 dBi (larger gains are allowed with Tx power reduction) EX-5i models:
Parabolic dish: 37.9 dBi (6'/1.8m diameter) Directional flat panel: 28 dBi (~2'/61cm square) Industry Canada (IC), Canada This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1 2 this device may not cause interference, and this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Antennas Supported in Canada The EX-2.4i is designed to operate with the antennas listed in Table 10, which have a maximum gain of 30.3 dBi. Antennas not included in the list or having a gain greater than 30.3 dBi are prohibited for use with this device. The required antenna impedance is 50 Ohms. The antenna associated with the EX-2.4i family shall be mounted in a location that is at least 10 feet away from humans that may be subject to long-term or continuous exposure. The EX-5i family has been designed to operate with the antennas listed in Table 11, which have a maximum gain of 37.9 dBi. Antennas not included in the list or having a gain greater than 37.9 dBi are prohibited for use with this device. The required antenna impedance is 50 Ohms. The antenna associated with the EX-5i family shall be mounted in a location that is at least 10/3m away from humans that may be subject to long-term or continuous exposure. Important: Where required by regional regulations, DFS is enabled by the system keys and cannot be disabled. 206501-019 2016-05-24 115 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Europe and ITU Country Compliance All of these permitted devices must be professionally installed. They can only be used as a point-to-
point transmission device for fixed or temporary-fixed (non-mobile) installations. Note: Do not use external amplifiers to boost the power or overcome transmission system losses, unless the specific amplifier/cable/antenna combination has expressly been authorized by the specific country regulations. The output power must never exceed that specified in Specifications. The EX-2.4i product family operates under EN 300 328 rules as a license-exempt device. The 2.4 GHz band is not yet harmonized in all countries recognizing ETSI or ITU band assignments. There is a
+20dBm EIRP limit applied to this band. Transmitter power must be adjusted accordingly with respect to the RF cabling losses and antenna gains associated with each terminal. The EX-4.9i devices are currently not permitted in any EU member or affiliate countries. The EX-5i product family operates under EN 301 893 and EN 302 502 rules as a license-exempt device. The EX-5i product family complies with ETS 301 893 for the 5.3 and 5.47 GHz bands for license-
exempt use for most countries recognizing ETSI or ITU band assignments. This band is not yet harmonized for all countries recognizing ETSI or ITU band assignments. These bands require Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) and Transmitter Power Control (TPC) for radar-detection and avoidance. There is a +30dBm EIRP limit applied to this band. Transmitter power must be adjusted accordingly with respect to the RF cabling losses and antenna gains associated with each terminal. The EX-5i product family complies with ETS 302 502 for the 5.8 GHz band. This band is not yet harmonized for all countries recognizing ETSI or ITU band assignments. Consult the individual country regulations or your Exalt Wireless representative for details. This band requires DFS and TPC for radar-detection and avoidance. There is a +33dBm EIRP limit for use of the 10 MHz BW setting, and a +36dBm EIRP limit for use of the 20 MHz BW setting. Some countries limit the EIRP to +5dBm for all bandwidths in this band. All models comply with the requirements for CE Mark (EN 60950-1 and IEC 60950-1) and EMC
(EN 301 489-17). No substitutions shall be made, and all wiring and grounding instructions contained in this manual must be followed to ensure safety in accordance to the standards and local rules. 116 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Regulatory Compliance As of this printing, Exalt Wireless, Inc. has approvals for the products that are covered by this manual, as indicated in Table 12. If your application or country is not listed, check with your Sales Representative for the current status. Table 12 Product approvals EX-2.4i Series EX-4.9i Series EX-5i Series, 5.3 GHz EX-5i Series, 5.4 GHz EX-5i Series, 5.8 GHz Country Austria Australia Belgium Canada Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Ghana Great Britain Hungary Iceland Ireland Italy Liechtenstein Lithuania Luxembourg Malta Mexico Netherlands Norway Philippines Poland Portugal 206501-019 2016-05-24 117 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Table 12 Product approvals (Continued) Country Romania Slovak Republic Slovenia South Korea Sweden Switzerland Turkey United States EX-2.4i Series EX-4.9i Series EX-5i Series, 5.3 GHz EX-5i Series, 5.4 GHz EX-5i Series, 5.8 GHz 118 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Regulatory Domain Keys Exalt radios are designed to allow the professional installer to select frequency bands, determine signal bandwidths, tune center frequencies, limit output power, and enable or disable DFS options as permitted by regional regulations. For models with the Regulatory Domain Key (RDK) feature, the radios ship with the RDK information empty and the radio cannot be enabled without a valid key. The partner, distributor, or installer is responsible for installing the RDK based on the final installation country of the radio. Exalt issues RDK information to their distributors when ship-to country information is provided. Consult your local Exalt distributor or reseller to obtain the RDK. RDK 053A8 is supported in firmware 4.0.0 and later, and is the same as ETSI 053A4 with the 40 MHz bandwidth added in UNII bands. Countries are assigned to different regulatory domains based on current regulatory requirements. Each regulatory domain has the parameters set to ensure that when the radio is turned on, the default settings are complaint for local laws. Caution: It is critical that the RDK be set to the correct default setting so that the local regulations for the installation requirements are met. Regulatory Domain Keys are assigned by regulatory domain based on the local regulations. Table 13 Regulatory Domain Keys Regulatory Domain Key Name 024A0 049A0 053A0 Countries USA, Canada, EU, Ghana, Mexico USA, Canada USA (prior to July 20, 2007), Canada (prior to May 08, 2008), Singapore, Philippines Frequency Band(s) 2.4GHz 4.9GHz 5.3GHz, 5.4GHz, 5.8GHz 5.3GHz, 5.4GHz, 5.8GHz 5.8GHz 5.3GHz, 5.8GHz 5.3GHz, 5.4GHz, 5.8GHz 5.4GHz, 5.8GHz 5.3GHz, 5.4GHz, 5.8GHz 5.3GHz 5.4GHz 5.8GHz 5.3GHz 5.4GHz 5.8GHz 053A1 053A2 053A3 053A4 053A5 053A6 053A7 053A8 206501-019 2016-05-24 USA (after July 20, 2007), Canada (after May 08, 2008) China Mexico EU, Ghana Australia Philippines Unrestricted (for countries without specific band and/or DFS regulations) EU, adding 40MHz bandwidth channel support for 5.3GHz and 5.4GHz bands 119 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios EIRP Limits for the United States and Canada Note: The professional installer is responsible to ensure that RF output power is properly adjusted to not exceed the regulatory limit. EX-2.4i EIRP for the USA and Canada For EX-2.4i models, the maximum EIRP allowed is +52.2 dBm. The maximum conducted power of the radio is +27 dBm for Mode 1 and +24 dBm for Mode 2. The following formula is used to determine the output power:
P = 30 [(G-6)/3] + L where:
P =
G =
L =
Maximum transmitter output Power of radio, in dBm. Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 2400 to 2483.5 MHz. Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, and lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 2400 and 2483.5 MHz. EX-4.9i EIRP for the USA and Canada For the EX-4.9i models, within the 49404990 MHz band, the maximum EIRP allowed is +50dBm. The maximum output power of the radio shall never exceed +24dBm. For the EX-4.9i models, the transmit power must be reduced from maximum (+24dBm for 20MHz BW; +22dBm for 10MHz) by 1 dB for every 1dB that the antenna gain exceeds 26dBi (including transmission system losses) EX-5i Series EIRP for the US and Canada 52505350 MHz Band For EX-5i models within the 52505350 MHz band, the maximum EIRP is 30 dBm. The maximum output of the radio is +13 dBm. P = 30 G + L where:
P =
G =
L =
120 Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm. Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 5250 to 5350 MHz. Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 5250 and 5350 MHz. 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios 54705725 MHz Band For EX-5i models within the 54705725 MHz band, the maximum EIRP allowed is 30 dBm. The maximum output power of the radio is +13 dBm. P = 30 G + L where:
P =
G =
L =
Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm. Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 5470 to 5725 MHz. Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 5470 and 5725 MHz. 57255850 MHz Band For the EX-5i models within the 57255850 MHz band, the maximum EIRP allowed is 61.9 dBm. The maximum output power of the radio is +24 dBm in Mode 1 and +21 dBm in Mode 2. P = 61.9 G + L where:
P =
G =
L =
Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm. Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 5725 to 5850 MHz. Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 5725 and 5850 MHz. 206501-019 2016-05-24 121 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios EIRP Limits for the European Union and ITU Countries The countries that are covered by this Regulatory Domain are: Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Ghana, Great Britain, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Netherlands, Switzerland, and Turkey. Note: The professional installer is responsible to ensure that RF output power is properly adjusted to not exceed the regulatory limit. Use only parabolic dish antennas or directional flat-panel antennas. No other types of antennas
(omni-directional, yagi, and so on) are authorized. Parabolic dishes of either grid or solid type are allowed. Maximum mid-band gain of each type of antenna certified is:
EX-2.4i models:
Parabolic dish: 30.3 dBi (6'/1.8m diameter) Directional flat panel: 20.5 dBi (~2'/61cm square) EX-5i models:
Parabolic dish: 37.9 dBi (6'/1.8m diameter) Directional flat panel: 28 dBi (~2'/61cm square) EX-2.4i-Series EIRP For EX-2.4i models within the 24002483.5 MHz band, the maximum EIRP allowed is summarized in Table 14. The maximum output power of the radio is +27dBm in Mode 1 and +24dBm in Mode 2. P = ME G + L where:
P =
ME =
G =
L =
Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm. Maximum EIRP, as specified in Table 14. Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 2400 to 2483.5 MHz. Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 2400 and 2483.5 MHz. Table 14 EU and ITU Country-Specific EIRP Levels for the EX-2.4i Series Country Austria Maximum EIRP 20 dBm Belgium Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 122 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Table 14 EU and ITU Country-Specific EIRP Levels for the EX-2.4i Series (Continued) Country France Maximum EIRP 20 dBm Germany Great Britain Hungary Iceland Ireland Italy Liechtenstein Lithuania Malta Netherlands Norway Poland Portugal Romania Slovak Republic Slovenia Sweden Switzerland 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm 20 dBm Turkey EX-5i Series EIRP Table 15 summarizes the maximum power by band and country for EX-5i Series radios. 52505350 MHz band For EX-5i models within the 52505350 MHz band, the maximum EIRP is specified in Table 15. The maximum output of the radio is +13 dBm. P = ME G + L where:
P =
ME =
G =
L =
206501-019 2016-05-24 Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm. Maximum EIRP, as specified in Table 15. Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 5250 to 5350 MHz. Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 5250 and 5350 MHz. 123 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios 54705725 MHz band For EX-5i models within the 54705725 MHz band, the maximum EIRP allowed is specified in Table 15. The maximum output power of the radio is +13 dBm. P = ME G + L where:
P =
ME =
G =
L =
Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm. Maximum EIRP, as specified in Table 15. Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 5470 to 5725 MHz. Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 5470 and 5725 MHz. 57255850 MHz band For EX-5i models within the 57255850 MHz band, the maximum transmit power with respect to specific country EIRP regulations is determined based on the channel bandwidth. The EIRP power limit is specified in Table 15. The Exalt EX-5i series radios maximum transmitter conducted power is
+24 dBm. Use the following equation to determine the maximum transmitter power for the radio:
P = ME G + L where:
P =
ME =
G =
L =
Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm. Maximum EIRP, as specified in Table 15. Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 5725 to 5850 MHz. Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 5725 and 5850 MHz. Table 15 EU and ITU Country Specific EIRP Levels for EX-5i Series Country Austria Belgium Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Ghana 124 Maximum EIRP 5.3 GHz band 23 dBm Maximum EIRP 5.4 GHz band 30 dBm Maximum EIRP 5.8 GHz band
(BW dependent)a 5 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 206501-019 2016-05-24 Table 15 EU and ITU Country Specific EIRP Levels for EX-5i Series (Continued) Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Maximum EIRP 5.3 GHz band 23 dBm Maximum EIRP 5.4 GHz band 30 dBm Maximum EIRP 5.8 GHz band
(BW dependent)a 33/36 dBm Country Great Britain Hungary Iceland Ireland Italy Liechtenstein Lithuania Luxembourg Netherlands Norway Poland Portugal Romania 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm Slovak Republic 23 dBm Slovenia Sweden Switzerland 23 dBm 23 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 5 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 5 dBm 33/36 dBm 5 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 5 dBm 33/36 dBm 23 dBm Turkey a. transmissions and 36 dBm for 20 MHz bandwidth transmissions. 30 dBm If the output power is designated as 33/36 dBm, the EIRP is limited to 33 dBm for 10 MHz bandwidth 206501-019 2016-05-24 125 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios EIRP Limits for Australia Note: The professional installer is responsible to ensure that RF output power is properly adjusted to not exceed the regulatory limit. EX-5i Series EIRP for Australia 54705725 MHz Band Note: Australian regulations have a no-transmit band from 56005650 MHz, adjust the transmitter to avoid this range. For EX-5i models within the 54705725 MHz band, the maximum EIRP allowed is 30 dBm. The maximum output power of the radio is +13 dBm. P = 30 G + L where:
P =
G =
L =
Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm. Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 5470 to 5725 MHz. Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 5470 and 5725 MHz. 57255850 MHz Band For the EX-5i models within the 57255850 MHz band, the maximum EIRP allowed is 36 dBm. The maximum output power of the radio is +24 dBm in Mode 1 and +21 dBm in Mode 2. P = 36 G + L where:
P =
G =
L =
126 Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm. Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 5725 to 5850 MHz. Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 5725 and 5850 MHz. 206501-019 2016-05-24 Deutsch:
Dansk:
Espaol:
Franais:
slenska:
Italiano:
Norsk:
Portugus:
Svenska:
Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Declaration of Conformity to the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC English:
This equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Dieses Gert entspricht den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den weiteren entsprecheneden Vorgaben der Richtlinie 1999/5/EU. Dette udstyr er i overensstemmelse med de vsentlige krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i Directiv 1999/5/EF. Este equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales asi como con otras disposiciones de la Directive 1999/5/EC. Cet appareil est conforme aux exigencies essentialles et aux autres dispositions pertinantes de la Directive 1999/5/EC. essi bnaur samrmist lgbonum krfum og rum kvum tilskipunar 1999/5/
ESB. Questo apparato conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed agli altri principi sanciti dalla Direttiva 1999/5/EC. Nederlands: Deze apparatuur voldoet aan de belangrijkste eisen en andere voorzieningen van richtlijn 1999/5/EC. Dette utstyret er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i EU-directiv 1999/5/EC. Este equipamento satisfaz os requisitos essenciais e outras provises da Directiva 1999/5/EC. Suomalainen: Tm laite tytt direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleelliset vaatimukset ja on siin asetettujen muidenkin ehtojen mukainen. Denna utrustning r i verensstmmelse med de vsentliga kraven och andra relevanta bestmmelser i Direktiv 1999/5/EC. For 2.4 GHz radios, the following standards were applied:
Radio: EN 300 328-1, EN 300 328-2 EMC: EN 301 489-1, EN 301 489-17 Safety: EN 60950, IEC 60950, IEC 60950-1 For 5 GHz radios, the following standards were applied:
Radio: EN 301 893, EN 302 502 EMC: EN 301 489-1, EN 301 489-17 Safety: EN 60950-1, IEC 60950-1 206501-019 2016-05-24 127 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios The following CE mark is affixed to the product:
EU WEEE Exalt is committed to meeting the requirements of the European Unions Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive. The Directives require producers of electrical and electronic equipment to finance the take-back for re-use or recycling of their products placed on the EU market after 13 August 2005. Exalt products that are within the scope of the Directives are labeled with a crossed-out "wheelie-bin"
symbol as required by the Directives. This indicates that the product was placed on the market after 13 August 2005 and that end-users should segregate the product from other wastes at end-of-life. The WEEE Directives are being implemented in each of the 28 EU and European Economic Area
(EAA) countries through national legislation. This has resulted in considerable variation in the detailed requirements across the EU, many of which require presence in the EU. As a result, Exalts WEEE compliance approach is to require the distributors and/or resellers in the EU to comply with each countrys national legislation by registration of the distributor or reseller as the producer and for the reseller/distributor to carry out and fulfill the legislative requirements of each national compliance scheme. Below is the crossed out wheelie bin symbol as required by the WEEE Directive. EU RoHS RoHS is the acronym used to refer to the European Union (EU) Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. Hazardous materials are those chemicals and substances that are legislatively, market, or customer banned or restricted for use in products and/or manufacturing. There are six (6) RoHS substances:
lead (Pb), cadmium (Cd), mercury (Hg), hexavalent chromium (Cr+6), polybrominated biphenyls
(PBB) and polybrominated diphenylethers (PBDE). Other countries may be introducing legislation that results in similar restrictions of hazardous substances. Many Exalt products will continue to use lead-based solder under the exemption allowed for network infrastructure equipment. Small amounts of lead, cadmium, mercury, hexavalent chromium, PBB, and PBDE can also be found in a few electrical and electrical components. 128 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios 206501-019 2016-05-24 129 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios END USER AGREEMENT
(including Limited Hardware Warranty, Software License and RMA Procedure) THIS IS AN AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU (AS ORIGINAL END USER PURCHASER OF AN EXALT PRODUCT) AND EXALT WIRELESS, INC. ("EXALT"). THE END USER AGREEMENT APPLICABLE TO YOUR EXALT PRODUCT IS THE END USER AGREEMENT THAT IS PRE-LOADED ON THE EXALT PRODUCT, OR IF NONE IS PRE-LOADED, IT IS THE END USER AGREEMENT AVAILABLE ON THE EXALT WEBSITE @
WWW.EXALTCOM.COM/EULA ON THE DATE OF YOUR PURCHASE OF THE EXALT PRODUCT OR OTHERWISE DIRECTLY AVAILABLE FROM EXALT UPON REQUEST. BY ACCEPTING THIS AGREEMENT OR BY USING THE EXALT PRODUCT WITH OR FOR WHICH THIS AGREEMENT IS PROVIDED ("PRODUCT"), YOU ARE AGREEING TO ALL OF THE BELOW TERMS AND CONDITIONS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS, YOU SHOULD NOT USE THE PRODUCT AND PROMPTLY RETURN IT TO YOUR PLACE OF PURCHASE FOR A REFUND. "YOU" MEANS THE LEGAL END USER ENTITY THAT PURCHASED THE PRODUCT FOR ITS OWN USE. 1 Exalt Limited Hardware Warranty a. Exalt warrants solely to the original purchaser ("Purchaser") that the Exalt hardware product b. that this Agreement is provided with or for (the "Hardware Product") will substantially conform in all material respects to the relevant Exalt published specifications that apply at the time of manufacture of such Hardware Product for two (2) years from the date of purchase of Hardware Product by Purchaser (the "Warranty Period"). Proof-of-purchase in the form of an invoice, payment of invoice, or delivery waybill must be supplied, if requested by Exalt, in case of any dispute of warranty start date. In the event Purchaser notifies Exalt during the Warranty Period of a defective Hardware Product (material nonconformance with the published specifications), Exalt shall within the Warranty Period, at its own option either: (A) use reasonable efforts to remedy any reproducible Hardware Product defect covered by this limited warranty within a reasonable period of time; (B) replace the defective Hardware Product with a functionally equivalent product (repair parts and products may be either reconditioned or new, but, if reconditioned, shall be of the same quality as new parts or products); or (C) if Exalt determines that it is unable to repair or replace such Hardware Product, Exalt (or its applicable reseller) will refund to Purchaser the amount actually paid by Purchaser for the applicable Hardware Product. All replaced parts and products become the property of Exalt. c. The Exalt warranty does not cover any defective Hardware Product that (i) is subject to the exclusions set forth below in Section 3; (ii) cannot be demonstrated to have a defect of the types of defects covered by the Exalt warranty, or (iii) Purchaser is unable to provide adequate information describing how the Hardware Product failed that would allow Exalt to determine that the defect is covered by the Exalt warranty. Any Hardware Product that is returned by the Purchaser to Exalt and Exalt determines that such product is not covered by the Exalt warranty, will be, at Purchaser's option and expense (including any applicable shipping, handling, evaluation, repair, replacement and disposal fees), either be: (a) returned to Purchaser in the state received, (b) repaired or replaced, as applicable, and returned to Purchaser, or disposed of in accordance with Purchaser's instructions. Repaired or replaced Hardware Product will be warranted for the remainder of the original Warranty Period, but not less than ninety (90) days. 130 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios 2 Warranty Registration In order to facilitate warranty service and communication with Exalt, Exalt recommends that the Purchaser registers the Hardware Product with Exalt promptly following the Hardware Product purchase by providing to Exalt the requested registration information. Product registration may be performed by completing and submitting the product registration form on www.exaltcom.com/ProductRegistration. 3 Limited Hardware Warranty Exclusions This limited warranty will not apply to: (A) any Hardware Product that: (i) has been modified or altered by any party other than Exalt; (ii) has been subject to accident, misuse, neglect, or mistreatment; (iii) has been damaged during installation of the Hardware Product; (iv) has been damaged by failure of Purchaser or its agents to follow Exalt's instructions or specifications; (v) has been damaged by the equipment or system with which the Hardware Product is used; (vi) has sustained damage to the Hardware Products' interface or power connectors; (vii) is determined to be stolen; or (viii) has been damaged by water, fire, power changes, other hazards, or acts of God
(including without limitation lightning); (B) any Software included in any such Hardware Product
(see Software License below), or (C) any consumables. The warranty applies only to Hardware Products manufactured by or for Exalt and that can be identified by the Exalt trademark, trade name, serial number or logo affixed to them. Other products, including any third-party manufacturer products sold by Exalt on a resale basis, are subject to the applicable third-party manufacturer's warranty and end user agreement and are not warranted by Exalt. The Hardware Products covered by this warranty are not consumer products and are not intended for personal, family, or household purposes, nor are they intended for high-risk activities as described in Section 5 below. 4 Hardware Product RMA Procedure A return material authorization (RMA) is required prior to returning Hardware Product to Exalt for in-warranty or out-of-warranty repair/evaluation. As such, Purchaser must use the then current Exalt RMA procedure. Such procedure is available on the Exalt website @ www.exaltcom.com/
RMA or directly from Exalt upon request. PRODUCTS RETURNED WITHOUT A DULY ISSUED RMA NUMBER WILL BE RETURNED TO PURCHASER BY EXALT AT PURCHASER'S EXPENSE. 5 PRODUCT WARRANTY DISCLAIMER AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY a. THE ABOVE EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE HARDWARE PRODUCT, THE CONDITIONS AND OTHER TERMS SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, CONDITIONS AND OTHER TERMS WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, REGARDING THE PRODUCT (HARDWARE PRODUCT AND SOFTWARE) AND ANY SERVICES PROVIDED BY EXALT, AND EXALT, ITS SUPPLIERS AND LICENSORS HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM, TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY APPLICABLE LAW, ANY AND ALL SUCH EXPRESS, IMPLIED AND STATUTORY WARRANTIES, CONDITIONS AND OTHER TERMS, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY AND ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, INTERFERENCE WITH QUIET ENJOYMENT, NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY RIGHTS AND MERCHANTABILITY. FURTHER, EXALT DOES NOT WARRANT RESULTS OF USE OR THAT YOUR USE OF THE PRODUCT WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE. NO WARRANTIES ARE MADE BY EXALT'S SUPPLIERS OR LICENSORS. EXCEPT FOR THE ABOVE EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE HARDWARE PRODUCT, THE CONDITIONS AND OTHER TERMS STATED HEREIN, THE 206501-019 2016-05-24 131 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios PRODUCT IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND WITH ALL FAULTS. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU. b. THE PRODUCT IS NOT FAULT-TOLERANT AND IS NOT DESIGNED, MANUFACTURED OR INTENDED FOR USE OR RESALE AS ONLINE CONTROL EQUIPMENT IN HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTS REQUIRING FAIL-SAFE PERFORMANCE, SUCH AS IN THE OPERATION OF NUCLEAR FACILITIES, AIRCRAFT NAVIGATION OR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS, AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL, DIRECT LIFE SUPPORT MACHINES OR WEAPONS SYSTEMS, IN WHICH THE FAILURE OF THE PRODUCT COULD LEAD DIRECTLY TO DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY, OR SEVERE PHYSICAL OR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE. EXALT AND ITS SUPPLIERS AND LICENSORS SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR ANY HIGH-RISK USES LISTED ABOVE. c. REGARDLESS OF WHETHER ANY REMEDY SET FORTH HEREIN FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OR OTHERWISE, AND TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL EXALT, ITS SUPPLIERS OR LICENSORS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY UNDER ANY TORT, CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHER LEGAL OR EQUITABLE THEORY FOR ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST OR CORRUPTED DATA, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS, OR OTHER SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF (1) THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT OR (2) PRODUCT RELATED SERVICE OR SUPPORT, EVEN IF EXALT HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH LOSS OR DAMAGES AND WHETHER OR NOT SUCH LOSS OR DAMAGES ARE FORESEEABLE. IN NO EVENT SHALL EXALT'S AND ITS SUPPLIERS'/LICENSORS' AGGREGATE LIABILITY EXCEED AN AMOUNT EQUAL TO THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID BY PURCHASER FOR THE PRODUCT OR SERVICE THAT IS THE SUBJECT OF A CLAIM. ANY CLAIM ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THIS AGREEMENT MUST BE BROUGHT WITHIN ONE (1) YEAR AFTER THE OCCURRENCE OF THE EVENT GIVING RISE TO SUCH CLAIM. IN ADDITION, EXALT DISCLAIMS ALL LIABILITY OF ANY KIND OF EXALT'S SUPPLIERS/LICENSORS. d. 6 SOFTWARE LICENSE a. Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement, Exalt hereby grants You a non-
exclusive, non-transferable, non-sublicensable license to use the Software that comes with the Product, if any is provided as part of the Product, only as part of the normal operation, use and maintenance of the Hardware Product for which the Software was provided. You may make back-up copies of such Software. You shall not otherwise copy, distribute or alter the Software. Furthermore, except to the extent allowed by applicable law if located in the European Union, and then only with prior written notice to Exalt, You shall not disassemble or reverse engineer the Software in whole or in part or authorize others to do so. No rights to distribute or sublicense the Software are granted herein. b. There may be certain third-party owned software provided along with, or incorporated within the Product ("Third Party Software"), and which Third Party Software has a separate license agreement and which is governed exclusively by such separate license agreement ("Third Party License") and not this Agreement. Such Third Party Software and applicable Third Party Licenses are listed in the document "EXALT WIRELESS, INC. THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE AND THIRD-PARTY LICENSES USED WITH CERTAIN EXALT 132 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios PRODUCTS" available through the Web user interface application provided with this product or on the Exalt website. Except as Exalt may otherwise inform You in writing, the Third Party License gives You at least the license rights granted above in Section 6(a), and may provide additional license rights as to the Third-Party Software, but only with respect to the particular Third-Party Software to which the Third-Party License applies. SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY FROM EXALT AND ITS LICENSORS, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-
INFRINGEMENT. c. Exalt and its licensors are the sole and exclusive owners of the Software, and all underlying intellectual property rights in the Software and Hardware Product. All rights not expressly granted to You relating to the Software are reserved by Exalt and its licensors. You take unencumbered title to the Hardware Product, subject to Exalt's and its licensors' ownership in the underlying intellectual property, upon payment in full to Exalt or the Exalt reseller for the Product(s). d. All licenses to the Software hereunder shall terminate if You fail to comply with any of the provisions of this Agreement and do not remedy such breach within thirty (30) days after receiving written notice from Exalt. You agree upon termination to immediately cease using the Software and to destroy all copies of the Software which may have been provided or created hereunder. 7 GOVERNMENT RESTRICTIONS a. You agree that you will not export or re-export the Products without Exalt's prior written consent, and then only in compliance with all requirements of applicable law, including but not limited to U.S. export control regulations. You have the responsibility to obtain any required licenses to export, re-export or import the Products. You shall defend, indemnify and hold Exalt and its suppliers/licensors harmless from any claims arising out of Your violation of any export control laws relating to any exporting of the Products. By accepting this Agreement and receiving the Products, You confirm that You are not listed on any governmental export exclusion lists and will not export or re-export the Products to any country embargoed by the U.S. Applicable export restrictions and exclusions are available at the official web site of the U.S. Department of Commerce Bureau of Industry and Security (www.bis.doc.gov). b. For purchase by or on behalf of governmental entities (including federal, state or provincial, and local), the governmental entity's rights in any technical data and software in the Products include only those rights customarily provided to the public as defined in Exalt's standard End User Agreement. In connection with any purchase by or on behalf of a U.S. governmental entity, Exalt's customary commercial license in technical data and software is provided in accordance with FAR 12.211 (Technical Data) and FAR 12.212 (Software) and, for Department of Defense transactions, DFAR 252.227-7015 (Technical Data - Commercial Items) and DFAR 227.7202-3 (Rights in Commercial Computer Software or Computer Software Documentation). If a governmental entity has a need for rights not conveyed under these terms, it must negotiate a mutually acceptable written agreement with Exalt specifying and specifically conveying such rights. Any use, modification, reproduction, release, performing, displaying or disclosing of the Exalt Software by a governmental entity shall be governed solely by the terms of this Agreement. 8 CONFIDENTIALITY Purchaser acknowledges and agrees that information supplied by Exalt in connection with the Product or this Agreement and designated by Exalt as confidential is the confidential information of Exalt, which confidential information includes the Software. Purchaser agrees: (i) to hold the confidential information in confidence using the same degree of care that it uses to protect its own 206501-019 2016-05-24 133 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios confidential information of similar importance, but not less than a reasonable degree of care, (ii) not to make use of confidential information other than as contemplated by this Agreement, and
(iii) not to reproduce confidential information except as expressly authorized by this Agreement. Purchaser's obligations with respect to confidentiality do not apply to information which: (i) becomes generally available to the public other than as a result of unauthorized disclosure by Purchaser, or (ii) was in Purchaser's possession prior to disclosure by Exalt. 9 MISCELLANEOUS Exalt shall be excused from delay or failure in performance caused by anything beyond its reasonable control, including, without limitation, acts of God or of any third party, government action, compliance with laws or regulations, shortages, strikes, lockouts or industrial disputes, or the unavailability of deliveries, supplies, or software. Purchaser shall not sell, transfer or assign this Agreement without the prior written consent of Exalt. Any act in derogation of the foregoing shall be null and void, and Purchaser will remain obligated under this Agreement. This Agreement shall benefit and be binding upon the parties to this Agreement and their respective permitted successors and assigns. The waiver or failure of either party to exercise in any respect any right provided for in this Agreement shall not be deemed a waiver of any further right under this Agreement. If any provision of this Agreement is held by a court of competent jurisdiction to be contrary to law, the remaining provisions of this Agreement will remain in full force and effect. This Agreement and any disputes arising out of, or in any way related to or connected with, this Agreement, its termination or the relationship of the parties will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California, excluding its conflict of laws principles and excluding the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods. All disputes arising out of, or in any way related to or connected with, with this Agreement, the Products or Services shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association under its commercial arbitration rules by a single arbitrator appointed in accordance with the rules. Both parties consent that the arbitration shall take place in Santa Clara County, California. The award rendered by the arbitrator shall be final and binding on the parties and judgment on the award may be entered in any court having jurisdiction thereof. Any litigation relating to this Agreement or the arbitration shall take place in the state courts of Santa Clara County or in the federal courts of the Northern District of California. The foregoing notwithstanding, Exalt may obtain preliminary and/
or permanent injunctive relief in any court of competent jurisdiction worldwide to enforce the terms of Sections 6, 7 and 8. Purchaser hereby consents and submits to the exclusive jurisdiction and venue of these courts and agrees that process may be served in the manner provided or allowed by California or federal law. In any action or proceeding to enforce rights under this Agreement, the prevailing party shall be entitled to recover costs and attorneys' fees. If the party who initiates the proceeding unilaterally dismisses it, the other party will be deemed the prevailing party. This Agreement represents the complete agreement and understanding of the parties with respect to the subject matter herein. This Agreement may be modified only through a written instrument signed or otherwise agreed to by both parties.
-----------------------------------------
Part Number 203985 Revision 2.21, 11/6/2014 Exalt Confidential 134 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Copyright Notices This section presents copyright notices for third-party software licensed to Exalt Wireless, Inc. Net-SNMP The following copyright notice applies to the open-source licensing agreement for Net-SNMP. Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000 Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California All Rights Reserved Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU and The Regents of the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written permission. CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE. Network Associates Technology, Inc. Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING 206501-019 2016-05-24 135 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Cambridge Broadband, Ltd. Portions of this code are copyright (c) 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Sun Microsystems, Inc. Copyright 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, California 95054, U.S.A. All rights reserved. Use is subject to license terms below. This distribution may include materials developed by third parties. Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR 136 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Sparta, Inc. Copyright (c) 2003-2005, Sparta, Inc All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Sparta, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Cisco, Inc. Copyright (c) 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Cisco, Inc, Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications, nor the names of their contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. 206501-019 2016-05-24 137 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co. Copyright (c) Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG, 2003 oss@fabasoft.com Author: Bernhard Penz Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 138 206501-019 2016-05-24 Index A AC adapter 25, 26 accessory kit contents 7 Administration Settings page 43 administrator privileges 37 Advance Encryption Standard 44 AES 44 AIS enabling//disabling 62 alarm conditions 40 Alarm connector 93 alarms 67, 72, 88 clearing 72 Alarms page 67 AMI 62 antennas alignment 32, 105 EX-2.4i Canada 115 EX-5i Canada 115 US 99 mounting 29 indoor 31 mounting height 6 polarization orientation 6 site preparation considerations 6 system grounding 6 transmission line 29 troubleshooting 105 AUTO SYNC mode 12 B B8ZS 62 back-to-back bench test 8, 107 back-to-back bench test configuration 107 bandwidth 6 Bandwidth parameter 50, 55 battery source 25 BER 75 browsers 35 C cables RF 6 troubleshooting improper RF cable termination 104 carrier-to-interference tolerance 6 CLI 34 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios menu options 35 root menu 35 clock 15 connectors Alarm 93 CONSOLE 34, 94 DC 27 DC Power 95 Ethernet 91 front panel 22 Sync (In//Out) 92 T1/E1 90 Console connector 94 console interface 88 Current BER field 70 Current RSL field 70 D date and time 44 DC connector 27 DC coupler 33, 100 DC Power connector 95 DC power source 25 DFS 56 Diagnostic Charts page 75 dimensions 82 DIP switch 11 DIP switch (-16 and -DS3 models only) 7 DIP switch (-16 models only) 96 Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) 8, 111 E E1 channels 63 E1 Interface Configuration page 63 effective isotropic radiated power (EIRP) 9 Endpoint Identifier 38, 49, 56 Errored Seconds (ES) field 71 Ethernet 6 Ethernet configuration parameters 50 Ethernet connectors 91 Ethernet interface 88 throughput settings 62 Ethernet Interface Configuration page 59 Event Log page 72 External Alarm Inputs parameter 57 external GPS source 13 external loopback modes 64 206501-018 2015-11-06 139 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios F factory default settings 28, 49 fade margin 6, 106 File Activation page 51 files activating stored 51 default configuration file 49 frame length See TDD frame frequency center 6 G gateway (default) 50 Global Positioning System (GPS) kit 12 GPS Information page 66 GPS sync features 10 GPS synchronization 66 grounding 106 GUI Access Security page 52 Administration Settings page 43 Alarms page 67 browsers supported 35 description 35 Diagnostic Charts page 75 E1 Interface Configuration page 63 Ethernet Interface Configuration page 59 Event Log page 72 File Activation page 51 GPS Information page 66 IP address (default) 35 log in 36 login privileges 37 navigation panel 39, 40 Performance page 70 Radio A configuration 36 Radio Information page 42 Reboot page 80 Spectrum Analyzer page 77 summary status information 39 T1 Interface Configuration page 62 T1/E1 Configuration page 62 VLAN page 60 H hop 7 hub 13 I interfaces Regulatory Domain Key (RDK) 8, 38, 54 alarm 88 Ethernet 88 power 89 RF 88 serial console 88 Sync (In//Out) 89 T1/E1 88 interference 71 interference profile 6 IP address 49 IP subnet mask 50 K keys L License Key 44 lightning arrestor 6 lightning arrestors 31 Line Build Out (LBO) 62 Line Code 62 link 6 orientation 10 synchronization 10 Link Distance parameter 50, 56 link margin 106 Link Name parameter 50 link parameters 39 Link Security Key 44 Link Security Key parameter 50 login names 37 login privileges 37 loopback 62, 63, 64 external (local) 64 external (remote) 64 internal 64 M master timing 12 Maximum RSL field 71 Minimum RSL field 71 Minimum RSL Timestamp field 71 Mode parameter 55 modes AUTO SYNC 12 multi-link backbone 13 multi-link network 13 multipath 103 multipath propagation 104 140 206501-018 2015-11-06 muting 59 N noise profile 6 O offset timing 14 P passwords 37, 50 path obstruction 105 performance degradation 103 Performance page 70 ports SYNC IN 15 SYNC OUT 15 power AC adapter 26 DC specifications 26 DC wiring 27 system LEDs and 26 power interface 89 R rack mounting hardware 20 temperature considerations 20 radio default settings 11 grounding 6, 106 initiation tasks 18 installation tasks 18 maximum transmit power setting 55 mounting 6, 20 rebooting 72, 80 transmitter output power 6 Radio A 11 Radio A configuration 7 radio configuration 7 Radio Information page 42 Radio Name parameter 49 Radio Transmit Power parameter 54 Reboot page 80 received signal level (RSL) See RSL receiver threshold 6 record keeping 19 Regulatory Domain Key (RDK) 8, 38, 119 regulatory requirements Canada 114 EX-2.4i FCC EIRP 120, 122 EX-4.9i FCC EIRP 120 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios EX-5i FCC EIRP 121, 126 US 113 repeater 13 RF connector 32 RF connector termination 25 RF Frequency parameter 50, 55 RF interface 88 RF interference 104 RF lightning arrestor 31 RF output power 9 RMT button 25 RSL 9 current RSL readings 70 diagnostics 75 Maximum RSL field 71 Minimum RSL Timestamp field 71 monitor for performance 103 RSL voltage 32 S safety 110 serial connection settings 34 serial console interface 88 Set to E1 button 62 Set to T1 button 62 shipping box contents 7 site preparation 6 SNMP 17, 45 SNMP Traps 46 specifications 82 Spectrum Analyzer page 77 Swap button 51 Sync (In//Out) connectors 92 Sync (In//Out) interface 89 SYNC RECIPIENT radio 12 SYNC SOURCE radios 12 synchronization 12 internal 12 system latency 6 system parameters default settings 28 system performance 70 system reboot 72 system settings Current BER field 70 Errored Seconds (ES) field 71 grounding 106 Maximum RSL 71 206501-018 2015-11-06 141 VSWR 104 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios Minimum RSL field 71 Time Since Reset field 71 Unavailable Seconds field 71 system specifications 82 system synchronization 13 T T1 Interface Configuration page 62 T1/E1 circuits 62 T1/E1 Configuration page 62 T1/E1 connections 90 T1/E1 connectors 90 T1/E1 interfaces 88 T1/E1 loopback 64 TDD factors 9 TDD frame length 6 TDD Frame Size parameter 56 TDM circuit 6 TDM circuits 55 TDM interfaces 10 Telnet session 34 temperature 75, 82 testing 107 back-to-back bench 8 threshold 108 threshold testing 108 time division duplex (TDD) See TDD frame Time Since Reset 71 timing lost signal 15 master timing 12 offset timing 14 using an external GPS source 13 transmission line coaxial 29 egress 32 transmitter output power 6 traps 46 troubleshooting 75, 102 U Unavailable Seconds (UAS) 71 Update button 43 user privileges 37 V VLAN 15 tagging 15 VLAN page 60 voltage test 32 142 206501-018 2015-11-06 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Digital Microwave Radios 206501-018 2015-11-06 143 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) 144 206501-019 2016-05-24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Factory default settings . 11 Table 1 Connectors . 22 Table 2 LED indicators . 23 Table 3 Table 4 Recommended transmission line . 30 Table 5 Default login information . 37 Table 6 Alarm status indicators . 67 Table 7 DIP Switch Functions . 96 Table 8 Standard Factory Defaults (-16 Models) . 96 Table 9 Common DIP Switch Applications . 97 Table 10 EX-2.4i supported antennas . 98 Table 11 EX-5i supported antennas . 99 Table 12 Product approvals . 117 Table 13 Regulatory Domain Keys . 119 Table 14 EU and ITU Country-Specific EIRP Levels for the EX-2.4i Series . 122 Table 15 EU and ITU Country Specific EIRP Levels for EX-5i Series . 124 206501-016 2012-01-13 1 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) 2 206501-016 2012-01-13 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Figure 1 EX-2.4i Digital Microwave Radio . 1 Figure 2 Indoor mount interconnection . 4 Figure 3 Enclosure mount interconnection . 4 Figure 4 Basic radio interconnectivity using internal synchronization . 12 Figure 5 Collocated radios, one in AUTO SYNC mode to provide redundancy . 13 Figure 6 Multiple-link site configuration, using AUTO SYNC for redundancy . 13 GPS as primary sync source using AUTO SYNC . 14 Figure 7 Figure 8 Synchronized GPS sources using AUTO SYNC . 14 Figure 9 Radio installation tasks . 18 Figure 10 Front flush mount configuration . 20 Figure 11 Front projection mount configuration . 20 Figure 12 Rear-mount locations . 21 Figure 13 Front panel (EX-2.4i, EX-4.9i, or EX-5i) . 21 Figure 14 Front panel (EX-2.4i-16 or EX-5i-16) . 22 Figure 15 Front panel (EX-5i-DS3) . 22 Figure 16 Primary front panel connectors (standard models) . 22 Figure 17 EX-5i-DS3 connectors and grounding switches . 23 Figure 18 DC connector . 27 Figure 19 CLI root menu . 35 Figure 20 Initiating the browser connection . 36 Figure 21 Browser Login screensmodel dependent . 37 Figure 22 Radio Information page . 38 Figure 23 Exalt GUI window description . 39 Figure 24 Summary status information . 40 Figure 25 Radio Information page . 42 Figure 26 Administration Settings page . 43 Figure 27 Changed fields and Update button . 43 Figure 28 SNMP Configuration page . 45 Figure 29 Trap Configuration page . 46 Figure 30 File Transfer page . 48 Figure 31 File Transfer pagedownload file link . 49 Figure 32 File Activation page . 51 Figure 33 Access Security page . 52 Figure 34 System Configuration page . 54 Figure 35 MHS Configuration page . 58 Figure 36 Ethernet Interface Configuration page . 59 Figure 37 VLAN Configuration page . 60 Figure 38 T1 Interface Configuration page . 63 Figure 39 E1 Interface Configuration page . 63 Figure 40 External (remote) loopback . 64 Figure 41 External (local) loopback . 64 Figure 42 DS3 Configuration page . 65 Figure 43 GPS Information page . 66 Figure 44 Alarms page . 67 Figure 45 MHS Status page . 69 Figure 46 Performance page . 70 Figure 47 Event Log page . 72 Figure 48 User Throughput page . 73 Figure 49 Aggregate User Throughput Help page . 74 Figure 50 Diagnostic Charts page . 75 Figure 51 Spectrum Analyzer page . 77 206501-017 2014-06-27 1 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) Figure 52 Spectrum analyzer graph example . 78 Figure 53 Ethernet Utilization page . 79 Figure 54 Reboot page . 80 Figure 55 Manual page . 81 Figure 56 T1/E1 connectors . 90 Figure 57 Ethernet connectors (MAIN and AUX) . 91 Figure 58 Sync In connector . 92 Figure 59 Sync Out connector . 92 Figure 60 Alarm Connector . 93 Figure 61 Console Connector . 94 Figure 62 DC Power connector . 95 Figure 63 DIP Switch Orientation . 96 Figure 64 DC coupler interconnection . 101 Figure 65 Basic back-to-back bench test configuration . 107 2 206501-017 2014-06-27 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) 24i_radio.gif @ 300 dpi 1 24i_radio.gif @ 300 dpi i cover.gif i enclosure_mount.gif @ 150 dpi 4 euro_conformity.gif 128 euro_no_trash.gif 128 Exalt_logo_RGB.gif 143 fig10.jpg @ 300 dpi 20 fig11.jpg @ 300 dpi 20 fig12.jpg @ 300 dpi 21 fig13.jpg @ 300 dpi 21 fig14.jpg @ 300 dpi 22 fig15.jpg @ 300 dpi 22 fig16.jpg @ 300 dpi 22 fig17.jpg @ 300 dpi 23 fig18.jpg @ 300 dpi 27 fig19.gif @ 300 dpi 35 fig23.gif @ 300 dpi 39 fig24.gif @ 300 dpi 40 fig35.gif @ 300 dpi 63 fig36.gif @ 300 dpi 63 fig4.gif @ 300 dpi 12 fig5.gif @ 300 dpi 13 fig51.gif @ 300 dpi 89 fig51.gif @ 300 dpi 90 fig53.gif @ 300 dpi 91 fig54.gif @ 300 dpi 91 fig55.gif @ 300 dpi 92 fig55.gif @ 300 dpi 93 fig57.gif @ 300 dpi 94 fig58.gif @ 300 dpi 95 fig59.gif @ 300 dpi 101 fig6.gif @ 300 dpi 13 fig60.gif @ 300 dpi 107 fig7.gif @ 300 dpi 14 fig8.gif @ 300 dpi 14 ground_icon.gif @ 300 dpi 23 GUI_access_security_page.gif @ 300 dpi 51 GUI_address_bar.gif @ 300 dpi 36 GUI_admin_settings_page.gif @ 300 dpi 42 GUI_aggregate_user_throughput_page.gif @ 150 dpi 73 GUI_alarms_page.gif @ 300 dpi 66 GUI_diagnostic_charts_page.gif @ 300 dpi 74 206501-016 2012-01-13 1 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-i Series (TDD) GUI_DS3_interface_config_page.gif @ 300 dpi 64 GUI_E1_interface_config_page.gif @ 300 dpi 62 GUI_ethernet_interface_config_page.gif @ 300 dpi 58 GUI_ethernet_utilization_page.gif @ 150 dpi 78 GUI_event_log_page.gif @ 300 dpi 71 GUI_file_activation_page.gif @ 300 dpi 50 GUI_file_transfer_link_page.gif @ 300 dpi 48 GUI_file_transfer_page.gif @ 300 dpi 47 GUI_GPS_info_page.gif @ 300 dpi 65 GUI_login.gif @ 300 dpi 37 GUI_login1.gif @ 150 dpi 37 GUI_manual_page.gif @ 150 dpi 80 GUI_MHS_config_page.gif @ 300 dpi 57 GUI_MHS_status_page.gif @ 300 dpi 68 GUI_performance_page.gif @ 300 dpi 69 GUI_radio_info_page.gif @ 150 dpi 41 GUI_radio_info_page.gif @ 300 dpi 38 GUI_reboot_page.gif @ 300 dpi 79 GUI_snmp_config_page.gif @ 300 dpi 44 GUI_spectrum_analyzer_example.gif @ 300 dpi 77 GUI_spectrum_analyzer_page.gif @ 300 dpi 76 GUI_system_config_page.gif @ 300 dpi 53 GUI_T1_interface_config_page.gif @ 300 dpi 62 GUI_trap_config_page.gif @ 300 dpi 45 GUI_user_throughput_page.gif @ 150 dpi 72 GUI_VLAN_config_page.gif @ 300 dpi 59 help_icon.gif @ 150 dpi 72 indoor_mount.gif @ 150 dpi 4 2 206501-016 2012-01-13
1 2 3 | User Manual 2 | Users Manual | 1.87 MiB |
EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Installation and Management Guide Models:
EX-4.5r GigE EX-4.5r-c GigE EX-5r GigE EX-5r-c GigE 201872-004 2016-05-26 Legal Notice The information contained herein is the property of Exalt Wireless, Inc. (Exalt) and is supplied without liability for errors or omissions. No part of this document may be reproduced, in any form, except as authorized by contract or other written permission from the owner. Any brand names and product names included in this manual are trademarks, registered trademarks, or trade names of their respective holders. The contents of this document are current as of the date of publication. Exalt reserves the right to change the contents without prior notice. The publication of information in this document does not imply freedom from patent or other rights of Exalt or others. 2015 Exalt Wireless Inc. All rights reserved. The Exalt logo, ExtremeAir, and ExploreAir are registered trademarks of Exalt Wireless, Inc. Open-Source License Information Per the terms of your Exalt Limited Hardware Warranty, Software License, and RMA Procedures Agreement with Exalt Wireless, Inc. and/or its subsidiaries, certain Third Party Software may be provided with and as part of the Exalt products provided to you, and any such Third Party Software files provided are governed by the terms of their separate Third Party Licenses, which licenses give you at least the license rights licensed to you in the Exalt End User Agreement and may give you additional license rights as to the Third Party Software, but only with respect to the particular Third Party Software to which the Third Party License applies. The Exalt Products may include or be bundled with some or all of the following third party software. Copies of the copyright notices and license agreements for any or all of these may be requested by contacting Exalt support at email: support@exaltcom.com. Open Source Code Embedded Linux - OS U-Boot Busy Box License Agreement Boot Code. Both licensed under GPL Version 3 Website www.gnu.org www.sourceforge.net Scew OpenSSL Net-SNMP Dropbear GoAhead Webserver Linux Commands. Licensed under GPL Version 2 www.gnu.org and www.busybox.net www.gnu.org www.openssl.org Expat Wrapper. Licensed under LGPL Version 3 SSL Web Access. Licensed under dual license SNMP Agent. Licensed under NetSNMP (see Copyright Notices) SSH 2 Server; Expat - XML Parser; BarelyFitz Java Script Tabifier; and Flotr Java Script Plotting Library. All four are licensed under MIT License Licensed under GoAhead License Agreement www.opensource.org/
licenses/mit-license.php www.goahead.com Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Table of Contents Legal Notice . ii Open-Source License Information . ii List of Figures . vi List of Tables . vii About this Document . viii Revision History . viii Icons . viii Introduction . 1 Related Documentation and Software . 1 The EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios . 1 Basic Features . 3 Pre-installation Tasks . 6 Link Engineering and Site Planning . 6 Familiarization with the EX-r Series GigE Radios . 6 Shipping Box Contents . 7 Initial Configuration and Back-to-Back Bench Test . 8 RF Output Power Setting . 9 Time Division Duplex (TDD) Factors . 9 Link Orientation and Synchronization . 10 Radio A/B Configuration . 11 Radio Reset . 12 Radio Synchronization . 12 Synchronization Modes . 12 Internal Synchronization. 13 External Synchronization . 14 Offset Timing . 15 When Sync is Lost . 15 Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) . 16 Link Symmetry . 16 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) . 17 System Installation and Initiation Process . 19 Record Keeping . 20 Installation . 21 Mechanical Configuration and Mounting . 21 Mounting the System . 21 Radio Ports and Indicators . 22 Connector Overview . 23 LED Indicators . 24 Power . 25 Terminating the RF Connectors (EX-4.5r-c GigE and EX-5r-c GigE) . 25 AC Power . 25 Power Injector. 26 Lightning/Surge Protection . 27 Reset to Critical Factory Settings . 27 Antenna/Transmission System . 27 Initial Antenna Mounting (EX-4.5r-c GigE and EX-5r-c GigE) . 28 201872-003 2015-10-23 iii Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Transmission Line from Antenna to Radio (EX-4.5r-c GigE and EX-5r-c GigE) . 29 Indoor Mounting . 30 RF Lightning Arrestor . 30 Antenna Alignment . 31 Configuration and Management . 32 Telnet into the Command Line Interface (CLI) . 32 Connect to the Radio in a Telnet Session . 32 Telnet . 32 Exalt Graphical User Interface (GUI) . 33 Preparing to Connect . 33 Make Connections . 33 Log In . 34 Login Privileges . 34 Quick Start . 35 Navigating the GUI . 36 Summary Status Section . 37 Navigation Panel. 37 Radio Information Page . 39 Administration Settings Page . 40 Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Configuration . 42 SNMP v1/v2c/v3 Support Options . 43 SNMP Traps . 43 File Transfer Page . 45 File Activation Page . 48 System Configuration Page . 49 Ethernet Interface Configuration Page . 54 VLAN Configuration Page . 55 T1/E1 Configuration Pages . 57 T1 Interface Configuration Page. 57 E1 Interface Configuration Page. 58 T1/E1 Loopback . 59 GPS Information Page . 60 Alarms Page . 61 Performance Page . 63 Event Log Page . 65 Diagnostic Charts Page . 66 Spectrum Analyzer Page . 68 Reboot Page . 70 Manual Page . 71 Specifications . 72 Physical Specifications . 72 Integrated Antenna Models. 72 Connectorized Antenna Models . 72 Common System Specifications . 73 System Specifications, 4.5GHz Band . 74 System Specifications, 5.3GHz Band . 75 System Specifications, 5.4GHz Band . 76 iv 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios System Specifications, 5.8GHz Band . 77 Interfaces . 78 Interface Connections . 79 TDM Connections . 79 RSL & Sync In Connector . 80 Power/Ethernet Connector . 81 Ethernet 2 Connector . 81 Antennas . 82 Troubleshooting . 84 General Practices . 84 Typical Indications of Issues . 85 Improper RF Cable Termination . 86 Multipath Propagation . 86 RF Interference . 86 Path Obstruction . 87 Misaligned Antenna . 87 Faulty Antenna (EX-4.5r-c GigE and EX-5r-c GigE) . 87 Improper Grounding . 87 Insufficient Link Margin . 88 Moisture in the Transmission System . 88 Back-to-back Bench Testing . 89 Basic Test . 89 Specification Performance Verification . 90 General Compliance and Safety . 91 Dynamic Frequency Selection . 92 Safety Notices . 93 Regulatory Notices . 94 United States Compliance . 94 Federal Communications Commission (FCC), United States . 94 Canada Compliance . 95 Industry Canada (IC), Canada . 95 Antennas Supported in Canada. 95 Europe and ITU Country Compliance . 95 Regulatory Compliance . 97 Regulatory Domain Keys . 99 EIRP Limits for the United States and Canada . 100 EX-5r Series EIRP for the US and Canada . 100 52505350 MHz Band. 100 54705725 MHz Band. 100 57255850 MHz Band. 100 EIRP Limits for Australia . 101 EX-5r Series EIRP for Australia . 101 54705725 MHz Band. 101 57255850 MHz Band. 101 EIRP Limits for the European Union and ITU Countries . 102 EX-5r Series EIRP . 102 52505350 MHz band . 102 201872-003 2015-10-23 v Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios 54705725 MHz band . 102 57255850 MHz band . 103 Declaration of Conformity to the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC . 105 EU WEEE . 105 EU RoHS . 106 Copyright Notices . 107 END USER AGREEMENT . 112 Index . 117 List of Figures Figure 1 Exalt EX-5r GigE (integrated antenna model) ......................................................................2 Figure 2 Cablingintegrated antenna model .....................................................................................4 Figure 3 Cablingexternal antenna model .........................................................................................4 Figure 4 Basic radio interconnectivity using internal synchronization .............................................13 Figure 5 Collocated radios, one in AUTO SYNC mode to provide redundancy ..............................13 Figure 6 Multiple-link site configuration, using AUTO SYNC for redundancy ..............................13 Figure 7 GPS as primary sync source using AUTO SYNC ..............................................................14 Figure 8 Synchronized GPS sources using AUTO SYNC ................................................................15 Figure 9 Radio installation tasks .......................................................................................................19 Figure 10 Pole-mount example ...........................................................................................................21 Figure 11 EX-r Series GigE pole and wall mount (with azimuth and elevation adjustment) .............22 Figure 12 EX-5r-c GigE pole/wall mount ...........................................................................................22 Figure 13 EX-r Series GigE connectors ..............................................................................................23 Figure 14 Power injector connectors ...................................................................................................26 Figure 15 CLI main menu ...................................................................................................................32 Figure 16 Initiating the browser connection ........................................................................................34 Figure 17 Browser Login screen .........................................................................................................34 Figure 18 Radio Information page ......................................................................................................35 Figure 19 Exalt GUI window description ...........................................................................................36 Figure 20 Summary status information ...............................................................................................37 Figure 21 Radio Information page ......................................................................................................39 Figure 22 Administration Settings page ..............................................................................................40 Figure 23 SNMP Configuration page ..................................................................................................42 Figure 24 Trap Configuration page .....................................................................................................43 Figure 25 File Transfer page ...............................................................................................................45 Figure 26 File Transfer pagedownload file link ..............................................................................46 Figure 27 File Activation page ............................................................................................................48 Figure 28 System Configuration page .................................................................................................49 Figure 29 Ethernet Interface Configuration page ................................................................................54 Figure 30 VLAN Configuration page .................................................................................................55 Figure 31 T1 Interface Configuration page .........................................................................................58 Figure 32 E1 Interface Configuration page .........................................................................................58 Figure 33 External (remote) loopback .................................................................................................59 Figure 34 External (local) loopback ....................................................................................................59 Figure 35 Internal loopback ................................................................................................................59 Figure 36 GPS Information page .........................................................................................................60 Figure 37 Alarms page ........................................................................................................................61 Figure 38 Performance page ................................................................................................................63 Figure 39 Event Log page ...................................................................................................................65 vi 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Figure 40 Diagnostic Charts page ....................................................................................................... 66 Figure 41 Spectrum Analyzer page .................................................................................................... 68 Figure 42 Spectrum analyzer graph example ..................................................................................... 69 Figure 43 Reboot page ........................................................................................................................ 70 Figure 44 Manual page ....................................................................................................................... 71 Figure 45 EX-r Series GigE connector orientation ............................................................................. 79 Figure 46 TDM connectors ................................................................................................................. 79 Figure 47 RSL & Sync In connector .................................................................................................. 80 Figure 48 Power/Ethernet connector .................................................................................................. 81 Figure 49 Basic back-to-back bench test configuration ...................................................................... 89 List of Tables Factory default settings ...........................................................................................................11 Connectors ..............................................................................................................................23 LED indicators ........................................................................................................................24 Recommended transmission line ............................................................................................29 Default login information .......................................................................................................34 Alarm status indicators ...........................................................................................................61 Supported antennas .................................................................................................................82 Product Approvals ..................................................................................................................97 Regulatory Domain Keys ........................................................................................................99 EU and ITU Country Specific EIRP Levels for EX-5r Series ..............................................104 201872-003 2015-10-23 vii Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios About this Document This manual provides a complete description of the EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios and related software. This manual provides planners, engineers, installers, system administrators, and technicians general and specific information related to the planning, installation, operation, management, and maintenance of these devices. Revision History Date Products and Release code--
2006-09-19 EX-5r & EX-5r-c v.1.0.0 2007-02-19 EX-4.9r v1.0 2007-02-23 EX-5r and EX-5r-c v.2.0.0 (GPS, Sync, SNMP feature release) 2007-04-20 EX-4.9r v.1.1 (AES feature release) 2007-07-27 EX-5r IP and EX-5r-c IP v 2.1.0 EX-5r and EX-5r-c v.2.1.0 (Regulatory Domain Key, Base License Key, and Dynamic Frequency Selection feature releases) 2007-10-26 EX-5r, EX-5r-c, EX-5r-c IP v3.0 (Spectrum Analyzer, VLAN, Asymmetry, Legacy SNMP and Enhanced Event Log feature releases) 2008-03-08 New chassis release 2008-05-23 EX-5r GigE & EX-5r-c GigE v1.0.0 2009-05-26 EX-4.5r/r-c GigE release. v1.0.0 2015-10-15 Updated to include current contact information. Icons The following icons denote specific types of information:
Note: This symbol means take note. Notes contain helpful suggestions or references to materials not contained in the manual. Warning! This warning symbol means there is a risk of electric shock. This situation that could cause bodily injury. Before working on any equipment, be aware of the hazards involved with electrical circuitry and be familiar with standard practices for preventing accidents. Caution! This symbol means be careful. There is a risk of doing something that might result in equipment damage or loss of data. This is a general warning, caution, or risk of danger. viii 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Introduction Exalt Wireless, Inc. thanks you for your purchase. Our goal is to build the highest quality, highest reliability digital microwave radio products. This commitment to quality and reliability extends to our employees and partners alike. We appreciate any comments on how we can improve our products, as well as your sales and Customer Care experience. Customer Care Hotline (USA):
Toll-Free Customer Care Hotline (USA):
Website:
Sales e-mail:
Customer Care e-mail:
Mailing Address:
(408) 740-3622
(844) EXALT-01 (392-5801) www.exaltcom.com sales@exaltcom.com support@exaltcom.com Exalt Wireless, Inc. 530 Division Street Campbell, CA 95008 USA Related Documentation and Software This manual makes reference to other documentation and software files that may be necessary. To access all documents and software mentioned in this manual visit:
http://login.exaltcom.com/
You must have a user account to view all downloads. Follow the online instructions to create a user account and request access. The EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios The EX-r Series GigE Exalt Digital Microwave Radios are the most advanced carrier-class point-to-
point terrestrial radio communications devices operating in the 4400 to 4900 or 5250 to 5850MHz frequency band. The EX-r Series GigE radios are available in the following configurations:
EX-5r GigE and EX-4.5r GigE have an integrated software selectable dual-polarization antenna EX-5r-c GigE and EX-4.5r-c GigE external antenna connectors, which allow connection of a dual-
polarized antenna (with software selectable polarization) The EX-r Series GigE radios connect voice and/or digital data from one location to another, obviating the need for copper or fiber connectivity, or enhancing existing connectivity by providing a redundancy solution, a primary solution, and/or additional capacity. Figure 1 shows the Exalt EX-5r GigE digital microwave radio. 201872-004 2016-05-26 1 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Figure 1 Exalt EX-5r GigE (integrated antenna model) The EX-r Series GigE radios require a clear line-of-sight and proper path clearance to achieve a high-
performance, reliable connection. Perform professional path engineering and site planning before installing this equipment. The primary focus of this document is the installation and maintenance of the digital microwave radio, and assumes that path engineering and site planning has already been performed. The EX-5r GigE, and EX-5r-c GigE radios utilize radio frequencies in the 5250 to 5850 MHz range. In most countries these frequency bands are considered as license-exempt or unlicensed. This means that virtually any user may use these frequencies freely, without paying for access, or any type of pre-
notification, post-notification or registration. As a result of this designation, users may also move or change these systems at any time, with significant flexibility to the location, orientation and configuration of the system. However, due also to this designation, there may be uncontrolled interference from other similar devices that occupy this spectrum. In these cases, it is up to engineering and maintenance personnel to design the system with existing and future interference sources in mind, recognizing that there is a chance that the interference conditions could be very dynamic, and outages may occur on the system as a result, and that, in some very rare cases, the system may cause interference into another system and may be required to be disengaged or modified/re-oriented to eliminate the interference. If the spectrum in your country is designated as license-exempt or similar, this does not infer that the installer may configure the system in any manner at any location. In most cases, there are regulations, or device-based conditions that limit the use of the device, such as maximum gain antenna, antenna types and maximum output power, as well as, in some cases, application limits, limited geography of use, and other unique regulations. The link design engineer and/or professional installer must determine these limitations and engineer/install the system within the confines of all local regulations. Also, it is required to examine any regulations that may apply to peripheral equipment, installation and cabling of the system that may be regulated for human safety, electrical code, air-
traffic control, and other safety-related categories. In certain countries, the spectrum for this product is NOT considered to be license-exempt. In these cases, there may be additional regulatory requirements concerning the location, frequency, power, orientation, configuration, and other aspects of the system, including, in some cases, a need for link registration, coordination, and fees that may apply to the system usage. Please consult your local regulatory organization(s) to determine usage requirements. 2 201872-004 2016-05-26 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios The EX-4.5r GigE and EX-4.5r-c GigE operate in the 4400 to 4900 MHz band, which is generally reserved for Government operators, such as NATO. In most cases, this band is considered licensed and restricted to certain users. In almost all cases, either for license-exempt or other designation, the product itself must be authorized for use in your country. Either Exalt or Exalts agent must have applied for certification or authorization to allow the sale and deployment of the system within the country. It is also possible that only certain versions or configurations of the device are allowed within a particular country. Please contact Exalt or your authorized Exalt representative for information pertaining to your country. Note: It is the (professional) installers responsibility to ensure that the radio system is implemented in a legal fashion. Exalt is not liable for any unsafe or illegal installations. Basic Features The EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios are intended for all-outdoor mounting and come with an indoor-mounted power injector. In some cases, the radio can be mounted indoors or in an enclosure. Depending on the configuration purchased, the associated antenna is either integrated as part of the unit or connected separately. For the integrated antenna model, the entire unit is typically mounted on a tower or rooftop mast structure, with Ethernet/Power and other optional interface cables running from the unit location, through a structure penetration, and to the power injector and connected communications equipment. For the external antenna model, the unit is typically mounted very close to the external antenna to minimize RF cabling and associated losses. Alternatively, the unit can be mounted at an easily accessible location with longer RF cabling to the antenna. Proper lightning or surge suppression devices and associated grounding are required for all connections. 201872-004 2016-05-26 3 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Figure 2 Cablingintegrated antenna model Figure 3 Cablingexternal antenna model For highest performance and reliability, it is advised to minimize the length of RF cable and associated transmission system losses between the antenna and the radios antenna port. 4 201872-004 2016-05-26 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Low-latency optimization and control for voice and data connections 10/100/1000BaseT Ethernet 4xT1/E1 interfaces for synchronous voice traffic The EX-r Series GigE radios provide connections for a combination of the following data communication interfaces:
The EX-r Series GigE radios are powered by a combined Power/Ethernet cable, and associated power injector. The power injector provides 48VDC to the unit. The EX-r Series GigE radios provide the following primary features and benefits:
Very high throughput and flexible interface configurations with voice+data combinations Encryption for extreme wireless security Easy-to-use management and configuration Flexible utilized channel bandwidth selection for interference avoidance and frequency coordination Flexible center frequency tuning for interference avoidance and frequency coordination Flexible capacity to meet current connection requirements and future growth needs Carrier-class reliability and performance Connector covers (for covering and securing unused connectors) 201872-004 2016-05-26 5 Pre-installation Tasks This section describes the steps necessary to prepare a site for the installation of the Exalt Digital Microwave Radio. Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Lightning arrestor type(s), location(s), and grounding Link Engineering and Site Planning Design all terrestrial wireless links prior to purchase and installation. Generally, professional wireless engineering personnel are engaged to determine the viability and requirements for a well-engineered link to meet the users needs for performance and reliability. The reader is referred to the Exalt document, Guidance for Engineering and Site Planning of Terrestrial Wireless Links and the ExaltCalc path calculator. This document and calculator aid in the pre-planning and engineering required to determine following attributes:
Antenna type gain at each end of the link Antenna mounting height/location for proper path clearance Antenna polarization orientation RF cabling type, length, connectors, route, and mounting Antenna system grounding Radio mounting location and mechanisms Radio grounding Radio transmitter output power setting Anticipated received signal level (RSL) at each end Anticipated fade margin and availability performance at each end Radio settings for TDD frame length and occupied bandwidth Anticipated throughput performance (TDM circuit support and Ethernet) Anticipated system latency With respect to radio path and site planning, these radios are generally identical to other microwave terrestrial wireless systems. Engineering of these systems requires specific knowledge about the radios, including:
RF specifications (transmitter output power, receiver threshold, occupied channel bandwidth, and carrier-to-interference) Regulatory limitations on transmitter output power setting and antenna type/gain Noise/interference profile for the intended location Familiarization with the EX-r Series GigE Radios The EX-r Series GigE radios utilize time division duplex (TDD) radio transmission. This means that the transmitted signal in both directions uses the same center frequency and transmits in one direction for a period of time, and then in the opposite direction for another period of time. This total period of time is referred to as the frame length or TDD frame length, and is further discussed in Time Division Duplex (TDD) Factors. 201872-003 2015-10-23 6 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios The two radio terminals are identical hardware, except for the TDD setting in software. When the radios are in their default state, both radios are configured as Radio B. One end of the link must be configured as Radio A before the two ends of the radio system can communicate. It can be considered that Radio A is the primary radio in the link. Radio A provides the master clock and control to Radio B. For most applications, it is not important how the radio link is oriented, only that one end is configured for Radio A and the other for Radio B. For some applications (such as, multi-radio hub sites or repeaters), the orientation of the radio systems may be more critical. See Link Orientation and Synchronization for details. There are two ways to configure the radios for Radio A/B determination:
Use the Exalt browser-based graphical user interface (GUI) preferred. Connect to the radio using Telnet. Exalt recommends using the Exalt GUI for radio configuration. This interface requires a computer with an Ethernet port and web browser software, such as Microsoft Internet Explorer 5.0 or above. See Configuration and Management for details on how to connect to and use the browser-based GUI interface. Shipping Box Contents Unless purchased as a spare terminal, the radios are shipped as a complete hop (that is, a radio link pair consisting of two terminals). An outer box has labeling that indicates the contents of the box, with the part number and serial number details for both radio terminals. Inside the outer box are two identical boxes, each of these boxes is also marked with the part number and serial number of the individual terminal contained inside the box. The terminal box contains the following items:
Radio terminal (configured as Radio B) AC adapter Mounting kit (for pole or wall mounting) Accessory kit Power injector Grounding screw/washers Weather-sealing tape (required for RF connectors on the EX-5r-c GigE) RF connector cover (for the EX-4.5r-c GigE or EX-5r-c GigE covering the unused RF connector, where applicable) RSL adapter cable Registration card Quick-start guide Inspect the outer packaging and the contents of the boxes upon receipt. If you suspect any shipping damage or issues with the contents, contact Exalt Customer Care. Note: Register your system as soon as possible. A 2-year Warranty period applies to products registered within 90 days of purchase. The Warranty period is reduced to 1-year for unregistered products and products registered after the first 90 days. 7 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios The radio terminal boxes contain a single pre-terminated PoE cable intended for bench testing and to make the short connection between the radio and the PoE lightning arrestor near the radio. If running a longer cable from the radio to the PoE lightning protector (such as at the egress point), use pre-
terminated cables (sold separately). Pre-terminated cables are available in different lengths to meet a variety of applications, and can also be used for the T1/E1 connections (where applicable). Initial Configuration and Back-to-Back Bench Test Every Exalt digital microwave radio goes through extensive quality testing and performance evaluation over the full operating temperature range prior to shipment. However, before installation, it is strongly advised to perform several tests and tasks that are much more difficult to perform once the radio link endpoints are distant from one another. A back-to-back bench test and pre-configuration will provide confidence that the radio link is operational and properly configured prior to installation, so that if troubleshooting is necessary, the radio hardware and configuration settings are eliminated from the troubleshooting process. Verify the following in the back-to-back testing:
Confirm that the radio system is generally operational Radios power-up with planned power and wiring solutions Regulatory Domain Key (RDK) entry successful Note: Exalt radios with the RDK function are DISABLED when initially shipped. To ENABLE the radio, a valid RDK must be entered on the Administration Settings Page page of the Exalt GUI. The RDK references the unit's serial number and is provided based on the country and/or region where the radio system will be deployed. The RDK is obtained through your Exalt Authorized distributor or reseller. RF link connects in both directions Traffic passes across the link Note: Some countries require Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS), which delays the transmitter turn-on time during the initial Channel Availability Check period of 1 minute. In accordance with these regulations, the radios boot up, and then wait for 1 minute before linking. Configure connected equipment and cabling Test Ethernet (CAT5e or CAT6) cabling, and/or T1/E1 cabling, any auxiliary connector cabling and configure all interfaces Configure IP settings for configuration and management Configure passwords and security modes Become familiar with the configuration and management interfaces through the Exalt GUI interface Configure radio parameters Set transmitter output power to engineered or allowed level (see RF Output Power Setting) Set operating center frequency Set link distance, occupied channel bandwidth, and frame length Make detailed radio performance measurements 201872-003 2015-10-23 8 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Measure transmitter output power Measure receiver threshold performance Confirm unfaded error-free performance Some of these tasks may not be possible or practical within a bench test environment due to the nature of the remote connectivity of peripheral equipment. However, it is good practice to perform as much as possible in this environment to minimize field/installation time and troubleshooting efforts. Detailed performance measurements are usually not required for pre-installation, but can be easily performed at this stage and may be helpful for later troubleshooting efforts or for internal records. During troubleshooting, there may often be a point at which a back-to-back bench test should be performed to verify many or all of the above items, and in the case of a suspected faulty device, to help confirm the fault and determine which end of the system is at fault and in need of repair or replacement. Note: See Back-to-back Bench Testing for detailed instructions. RF Output Power Setting The maximum RF output power is bounded by one of the following criteria:
Maximum RF output power setting capability of the radio device Maximum RF output power allowed/authorized by the local government regulations and for this specific device Maximum effective isotropic radiated power (EIRP) of the transmission system allowed/
authorized by the local government regulations and for this specific device Desired RSL to not exceed the maximum RSL allowed by the device Desired RSL to minimize/eliminate interference into neighboring systems Note: In many cases the radio must be pre-configured for legal maximum output power before connecting to the antenna and transmission system. Instructions for adjusting the output power can also be found at the rear of this guide in the EIRP section for your region. Link distance Time Division Duplex (TDD) Factors The EX-r Series GigE radios are very dynamic, allowing the installer to optimize and control the performance of the radio system for the intended application. The following parameters must be carefully determined during the link engineering phase:
Bandwidth Mode (modulation) The setting of the above parameters determines the following performance factors:
Number of supported T1/E1 channels Ethernet throughput TDD frame size 9 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios System latency (delay) Use the ExaltCalc calculator to determine optimum settings for the above parameters to meet the needs of your application. The following generalizations can be made with regards to these factors:
The shorter the TDD frame size, the lower the latency The shorter the link distance, the lower the latency, the higher the throughput The longer the TDD frame size, the higher the throughput The higher the bandwidth, the higher the capacity The higher the mode, the higher the capacity Note: Disable all T1/E1 ports if there are no T1/E1 interfaces connected. This shifts all available throughput to the Ethernet interface. Note: If a selected combination of the Link Distance, Frame Size, Bandwidth, and Mode parameters cannot support all the desired T1 or E1 ports, the ports that cannot be supported are automatically disabled. Priority is placed on the T1/E1 port number. That is, the first port to be disabled, if necessary, is the highest port number, such as Port 4. See T1/E1 Configuration Pages for more information. Link Orientation and Synchronization Link orientation refers to the Radio A and Radio B placement in your network. Link synchronization refers to using external or internal timing to coordinate multiple links. For every link, one end of the radio link must be configured as Radio A, while the other end is configured as Radio B. In single-link systems, it does not matter which end of the system is mounted at which end of the link, and there is typically no requirement for any link synchronization. Link orientation and synchronization are more important for networks with site(s) where there is more than one link of the same type or for sites using the same type of radio that are very close to each another at one or both ends. Configure collocated radio terminals for the same link orientation. That is, configure all radios at the same location as Radio A or Radio B. Use link synchronization for collocated links. The radios allow the use of an internal synchronization source or an optional GPS synchronization kit. This synchronization controls the transmitter and receiver frame timing so that collocated radios are transmitting at the same time and receiving at the same time. This can substantially reduce the opportunity for self-interference. Without synchronization, collocated radios may be transmitting and receiving at the same time, incurring near-
end interference. 201872-003 2015-10-23 10 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Note: It is not always necessary to synchronize collocated radios. If antennas are substantially separated or blocked from one another and/or frequency separation tuning is used, the opportunity for near-end interference can be eliminated. Note: When GPS synchronization is required or desired, one GPS kit is required for each EX-
r Series GigE radio link in the connected or collocated network. Radio A/B Configuration Use the Exalt GUI to configure the radio terminals for Radio A and Radio B orientation. Since many other parameters also need to be set, and the Exalt GUI is needed for these configurations, this is the best way to completely configure the radio terminals. Radios arrive from manufacture in default configuration, orientated as Radio B and configured as shown in Table 1. Table 1 Factory default settings Parameter Transmit Power Setting
+4dBm Link Distance
<10 miles Bandwidth Mode TDD Frame Size 8 MHz (10 MHz for some regulatory domains) Mode 1 2ms Link Security Key 000000000000 Administration Password password User Password IP Address IP Mask IP Gateway password 10.0.0.1 255.0.0.0 0.0.0.0 Ethernet Interface Alarm Enabled, Auto-negotiate T1/E1 Enabling All Disabled Note: In many cases, the system design will not be identical to the factory default configuration, and in some cases, these differences prohibit the installation of the radio. If at all possible, obtain a computer and configure the radio terminals using the browser-based GUI. See Exalt Graphical User Interface (GUI) for details. 11 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Radio Reset Use the reset function if the IP address and/or passwords are lost. Use the following steps to perform a critical parameter reset:
1 Remove power from the radio by disconnecting the AC adapter from the power injector. 2 Hold down the RESET button on the power injector while applying power. IP address = 10.0.0.1 IP mask = 255.0.0.0 IP gateway = 0.0.0.0 Hold the RESET button down through the entire power cycle and monitor the DATA+POWER left LED on the power injector. Release the RESET button only after the LED is in the steady state
(approximately 2 minutes). 3 Release the RESET button. The following configurations are reset on the radio:
Administration password = password User password = password Radio Synchronization The radio synchronization feature improves the performance of Exalt radios operating in the same frequency band and that are collocated (such as in repeater and hub configurations). Radio synchronization ties radio systems together to operate off of a common clock system, ensuring that all radios simultaneously transmit and receive, and thus eliminating near-field interference issues and related radio system coupling. Synchronization Modes Synchronization can be accomplished using either an internal or external source. In either case, one radio in the network must be defined as the primary sync source (A) radio. A Global Positioning System (GPS) kit from Exalt is required to implement external source synchronization. GPS synchronization is not available on all radio models. Contact your Exalt representative for details. Synchronization implementation only requires one synchronization source for any interconnected network. The system also implements a redundancy configuration to maintain a majority of the synchronization functions in case of primary radio failure. For internal synchronization, the primary radio is designated SYNC SOURCE. This radio provides the master timing for all interconnected radios. SYNC SOURCE radios and collocated radios must be configured as Radio A. Collocated radios must be in SYNC RECIPIENT mode; they receive sync signaling from the SYNC SOURCE, either directly or daisy-chained with other collocated radios. Alternatively, the radio(s) can be placed in AUTO SYNC mode. AUTO SYNC synchronizes the radios to any source provided on the SYNC IN port. However, if an appropriate synchronization signal is unavailable, the radio becomes the SYNC SOURCE for all connected radios. 201872-003 2015-10-23 12 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Internal Synchronization Figure 4 illustrates the basic interconnectivity of a radio system using internal synchronization. In this scenario, there are two radios collocated at one site. Figure 4 Basic radio interconnectivity using internal synchronization In Figure 5, there are three collocated radios. In this configuration it may be desirable to make one radio a secondary sync source using AUTO SYNC. This provides redundancy if the primary sync source radio (A) loses power or experiences any other failure. Figure 5 Collocated radios, one in AUTO SYNC mode to provide redundancy The synchronization function can be carried across links to additional collocation sites. For example, Figure 6 illustrates a multi-link backbone with two hub sites. Figure 6 Multiple-link site configuration, using AUTO SYNC for redundancy Note: Currently, the configuration shown in Figure 6 is not supported in all models. Consult your Exalt representative for details. Virtually any combination of hubs and repeater sites, star configurations, and/or backbones can be implemented with synchronization using these configurations. It is typically necessary or ideal in each configuration to match the following parameters on every radio in the network:
13 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Link Distance Match to the longest distance link in the network. Frame Length Match to the lowest frame length to optimize total system latency (for example, for TDM networks) or match to a highest frame length to optimize user throughput. Choose an intermediate value to compromise between latency and throughput. Mode It is desirable, but not always necessary, to match the mode for all collocated links. Bandwidth It is desirable, but not always necessary, to match the bandwidth for all collocated links. For complex networks, an Exalt engineer should review multi-link networks before deployment as several factors can optimize the network for desired performance. External Synchronization Use an external GPS source as an alternative to the internal synchronization source for system synchronization. This is ideal for links that are nearby each other, but are not directly collocated at the same site. Figure 7 illustrates using a GPS source for the primary synchronization at a typical site with collated radios. Note: When GPS Sync is enabled, link initiation typically takes 1 to 3 minutes to allow for the radio to properly synchronize to the available GPS satellites. Figure 7 GPS as primary sync source using AUTO SYNC Figure 8 illustrates two separate radio locations benefiting from synchronized GPS sources. 201872-003 2015-10-23 14 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Figure 8 Synchronized GPS sources using AUTO SYNC Offset Timing Manual control of offset timing is also allowed. This provides a means to delay the synchronization signal using a user-defined offset. This is helpful when Exalt radios are near other devices operating in the same frequency band that also use a timing source, such as GPS. The timing source to the Exalt radios can be adjusted to match the other radio system timing source mechanism. Offset timing can also optimize timing intervals for repeaters and backbones. As the distance of each link results in a unique factor for speed-of-light transmission of the radio signal, a subsequent radio can be delayed in timing so that the overall synchronization of radios is precisely maintained. Offset timing can be adjusted in 1-ms intervals, from zero to the radios frame length setting. For example, if using a 2-ms frame length, the offset timing can be set from zero up to 1999 ms. When Sync is Lost If the primary sync source (for example, the sync source radio or GPS source) signal is lost due to equipment failure, a disconnected sync cable, or other conditions, the first radio in the daisy-chain configuration set to AUTO SYNC resumes the sync function for the remaining connected radios. If a radio is configured as SYNC RECIPIENT, transmission ceases if the sync signal does not appear at the SYNC IN connector. A radio running in AUTO SYNC (without the sync source) is said to be flywheeling. That is, the clock is free-running off internal clocking and is no longer synchronized to any source. If the original sync source is restored to the flywheeling radio configuration, the flywheeling radio attempts to synchronize to this signal without causing transmission interruption. All interconnected radios receiving sync from the flywheeling radio also continue to operate without interruption. When the flywheeling radio runs independently for long periods of time, the synchronization signal can be too far outside of the capture range of the synchronization loop, and portions of transmission frames can be lost during the re-synchronization process. This condition is temporary and all interconnected radios re-synchronize to the sync source, as necessary. For GPS synchronization, the wiring inside the Exalt radio carries the GPS signal to the next radio cabled in the system, even when power is removed from the SYNC SOURCE radio or during radio 15 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios failures. This provides redundancy for catastrophic failure of the SYNC SOURCE and maintains GPS synchronization. If the GPS source is lost (for example, due to failure of the GPS unit, a disconnected cable, or satellite blockage), the AUTO SYNC radio resumes synchronization duties for all collocated radios. Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) VLAN segments information in a single connection and creates multiple separate connections to secure information of one type or for one set of users from other information types or for other sets of users. Exalts VLAN communications implementation adheres to the IEEE standard 802.1q. In most cases, an Exalt radio acting as a Layer 2 bridge between two locations is only required to pass traffic with VLAN tagging. Without additional configuration, all Exalt radios support frame sizes in excess of 1900 bytes, which currently supports all defined VLAN packet sizes. Note: If an application only requires the transparent passing of VLAN traffic, disable the VLAN function. Some situations require Exalt radios to act upon VLAN traffic and perform any or all of the following functions:
Connect specific traffic, using VLAN tagging, to different purposes, such as management traffic to the radios NMS system. Allow only traffic with specifically assigned VLANs to pass across the link, blocking all other VLANs or any non-VLAN traffic. Allow management access only through a VLAN connection, leaving the main traffic transparent. Link Symmetry The default configuration of EX-r Series GigE radios provides 50/50 symmetrical throughput. The Tx/
Rx Throughput Ratio setting enables programming different symmetry for applications where significantly higher throughput in one direction is anticipated such as for video broadcast, video aggregation, or remote server/storage WANs. Exalt does not recommend placing two links with asymmetry back-to-back in a serial configuration due to the TDD cycle of the radios. This configuration requires that one radio transmits in an overlapping time period while another radio is receiving. Physical antenna isolation and/or frequency channel spacing may accommodate this configuration. Asymmetry is, however, ideal for single-hop, multi-link hub/spoke architectures, or simply single independent links. Note: Asymmetry is only supported for a specific subset of system configurations that are optimized for typical asymmetric applications. Asymmetry is not currently supported in all EX-r Series GigE radio models. Consult your Exalt representative for details. TDD frame sizes of 2ms and 5ms are supported. The 5ms configuration maximizes the aggregate throughput of the radio for every situation. The 2ms configuration reduces latency to meet latency-
critical applications, especially for multi-link and TDM circuit support. The following RF BW/mode combinations are supported for these two configurations:
16MHz/Mode1 16MHz/Mode2 201872-003 2015-10-23 16 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios 32MHz/Mode1 32MHz/Mode2 64MHz/Mode1 64MHz/Mode2 The following Tx/Rx ratios are supported for these two configurations:
For example, a radio configuration of 32MHz/Mode2 with a 5ms TDD frame size and dual-
polarization supports up to 220Mbps user capacity or 110Mbps full-duplex. By selecting 80/20 on one side of the link and 20/80 on the other side, the radio allows up to 176Mbps in one direction, and 44Mbps in the opposite direction. 65/35 and 35/65 80/20 and 20/80 Note: Sync is supported with asymmetric settings, but in addition to the other requirements for sync, all radios tied to sync must be set with matching ratios. T1/E1 is supported with asymmetric settings. However, based on the BW/mode setting (and in some cases, TDD frame size and distance), the direction with the limited throughput limits the number of T1 or E1 connections obtained. For example, the 16MHz/Mode1 single-polarization setting typically supports up to 27Mbps aggregate throughput. In the 80/20 ratio configuration, one direction is limited to 5.4Mbps, which is less than 3xE1 and less than 4xT1. Since TDM connections must be symmetrical, this setting therefore limits throughput to no more than 2xE1 or 3xT1. Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) The Exalt radios primarily use a browser-based graphical user interface (GUI) for radio configuration and management, as described in Exalt Graphical User Interface (GUI). In addition, a command line interface (CLI) is provided for serial and/or Telnet access, as described in Configuration and Management. SNMP is often used for management of larger networks as described here. Use SNMP to manage networked devices and execute the following functions:
GET: Obtain information from the device, such as a configuration setting or parameter. SET: Change a configuration setting on the device. TRAP: The device proactively informs the management station of a change of state, usually used for critical alarms or warnings. One feature of the SNMP implementation is that system configuration changes do not take effect using the SET command. Instead, groups of configuration settings can be preconfigured for global change, and a single Save (Commit) command implements all changes. When some parameters are changed, a link may drop and/or management control lost. MIB files allow many parameters to be set at once, allowing only a temporarily dropped link or management control issue. The opposite end radio can be quickly reconfigured, with little downtime for the link and management control. The save (Commit) command is similar to the Update button. Dropped links or management control issues do not occur with every parameter change. Many configuration changes do not impact traffic or management access. 17 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Exalt radios utilize SNMPv3, a high security version of SNMP, to ensure secure access to and storing of management data. The SNMPv3 security string matches the admin and user passwords. Passwords must be eight characters or longer. Some models also have legacy SNMP support for customers requiring SNMPv1 and/or SNMPv2. 201872-003 2015-10-23 18 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios System Installation and Initiation Process The tasks required for radio installation and initiation are outlined in the following figure. Transmission System Tasks Radio Preparation Tasks Path & Site Analysis Link Design Build Antenna Structures &
Egress Read This Manual Completely Pre-configure Radios Perform Back-to-Back Test Mount Antennas &
Transmission Line Install & Test Network &
Power Wiring Both Transmission System & Radio Preparation Tasks Must Be Complete Mount Radios Connect Transmission Line Connect Power Align Antennas to Planned RSL Verify LEDs for Good Link Test Network Connectivity Connect &
Test Primary Services Test Network Management System Figure 9 Radio installation tasks 19 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Length/type of primary transmission lines at each site Length/type of secondary transmission line(s) Transmitter output power setting as installed at each site Record Keeping After installation, record the following items for ongoing maintenance and future troubleshooting. Keep a record for each end of the radio link and store a copy of these records at the radio location, at the opposite end radio location, and a central record storage location. GPS coordinates for antenna locations at each site Antenna heights above ground level (AGL), as mounted Antenna model numbers, serial numbers, and specifications Antenna polarization as mounted Model number and serial number of RF lightning arrestors RSL as measured after antenna alignment at each site Designed RSL per original design at each site RSL reading with far-end power off (from each end) Spectrum analyzer plot with far end off at each site Voltage standing wave ratio (VSWR)/return loss at radios antenna connector at each site Radios network management IP address at each site Radios network management gateway address at each site Radios operating frequency, bandwidth setting, and mode of operation Optionally purchased extended warranty and/or emergency service contract details In addition, certain information may be desired for central record-keeping only:
Link security codes and log in passwords (stored in a secure place) Photographs of complete installation End-user sign-off/acceptance documentation (if any) Photo of product identification label (part number, serial number, MAC address information) Electronic copy of radios configuration file Electronic copy of radios installed software 20 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Installation This section presents all tasks required to install the Exalt Digital Microwave Radio. Mechanical Configuration and Mounting The EX-r Series GigE radios are environmentally sealed units intended for deployment outdoors. The device must be deployed within an ambient temperature range as specified, and with non-restrictive airflow around the chassis. The EX-5r-c GigE can also be mounted in an enclosure or indoors. The same airflow and temperature conditions apply. All EX-r Series GigE models can be mounted behind a window if window losses are considered in the link budget calculation. Note: The power injector and power supply must be placed indoors or in an enclosure. Provide proper clearance for all cables and connectors attached to the device. Note that for the EX-5r-c GigE the RF cable connector may require significant clearance for the bend radius of the coaxial cable assembly. All RF connectors, cables, and adapters must be rated for operation within the radios frequency range. RF connector losses must be accounted for within the link engineering design and output power settings. Note: There are two RF connectors on the EX-5r-c GigE that facilitate connection to a cross-
polarized antenna for polarization diversity. Seal the secondary connector when using a single-polarized antenna. Use the N-type cover cap and weather-seal tape included in the accessory kit to weatherproof this connector. Mounting the System Use the mounting system supplied with each terminal for wall or pole mounting (Figure 10). The pole mounting kit can accommodate a pole 25"/513cm in diameter. Install the mounting system first, and then affix the radio to the mount. The radio can also be affixed to the mount, and the entire assembly
(including radio) mounted. Figure 10 Pole-mount example Figure 11 illustrates the pole/wall mount assembly, showing the azimuth and elevation adjustment points. 21 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Figure 11 EX-r Series GigE pole and wall mount (with azimuth and elevation adjustment) Figure 12 illustrates the EX-5r-c GigE pole/wall mount assembly. Figure 12 EX-5r-c GigE pole/wall mount For the integrated antenna model, it is critical to mount the entire device at the predetermined location for proper path clearance to the link end. Ensure that there is adequate space around the mounting system and the radio to allow for antenna alignment for both azimuth and elevation adjustments. Note: Mount the EX-5r-c GigE as close as possible to the antenna to minimize the length and associated losses of RF cabling. Radio Ports and Indicators This section provides a brief overview of the connectors, controls, and indicators on the device. Details about each item are in other sections of this document. Figure 13 shows the connectors on the EX-r Series GigE radios. 201872-003 2015-10-23 22 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Figure 13 EX-r Series GigE connectors Connector Overview The primary user interfaces are shown in Figure 13. Table 2 provides details of the connectors. Detailed pin structures for each connector are in Interface Connections. Table 2 Connectors Connector TDM 2&4 Description Ports for up to two user T1 or E1 circuits to traverse link, port numbers 2 and 4. TDM 1&3 Ports for up to two user T1 or E1 circuits to traverse link, port numbers 1 and 3. Sync Out Sync In/RSL Ethernet 2 Power/Ethernet Connect to Sync In of neighboring radios for network synchronization.
(1) Connection to Sync Out of neighboring radio (optional) external GPS antenna for network synchronization.
(2) Antenna alignment RSL voltage (during installation) Secondary connector for 10BaseT, 100BaseT, or 1000BaseT for networking appliances or out-of-
band management configurations. Connected cables traverse to the power injector (Data+Power side), and provide the following functions:
Primary ports for user Ethernet data (10BaseT, 100BaseT, or 1000BaseT) to traverse link DC power from power injector
(Ground) Threaded (M5) receptacle. The connectors supplied with the radio have pre-inserted weatherproof inserts. Remove (and save) these inserts for any connectors that will be cabled. Keep the inserts in place for any unused connectors. 23 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios LED Indicators Table 3 provides details of the LED indicators on the EX-r Series GigE radios. Note that there are two LEDs, labeled top and bottom, associated with each connector. See Alarms Page for information on how the Exalt GUI displays LED status. Green LED Green LED Table 3 LED indicators Type Location TDM 2&4 Green LED Green LED TDM 2&4 Bottom TDM 1&3 TDM 1&3 Bottom Sync Out Sync Out Bottom Ethernet 2 Ethernet 2 Bottom Sync In/RSL Sync In/RSL Bottom Power/Ethernet Power/Ethernet Bottom Power Injector Green LED Green LED Green LED Green LED Green LED Green LED Green LED Green LED Function Solid when T1 clocking is present for input #2. Solid when T1 clocking is present for input #4. Solid when T1 clocking is present for input #1. Solid when T1 clocking is present for input #3. Solid when radio is configured as sync source. Solid when synch source is external (GPS).
(Future implementation.)
(Future implementation.) Solid when valid Sync In connection is detected. Unused. Solid when proper power is applied.
(Future implementation) DATA+POWER Left Green LED DATA+POWER Right Green LED Solid when no alarm conditions are present. Flashing when in Reset mode. Solid when proper power is applied. RESET Button There is only one external control on the EX-r Series GigE radios system, a button labeled RESET located on the power injector. This button performs a critical system parameter reset. Use the reset function if the IP address and/or passwords are lost. Use the following steps to perform a critical parameter reset:
1 Remove power from the radio by disconnecting the AC adapter from the power injector. 2 Hold down RESET button on the power injector while applying power. Hold the RESET button down through the whole power cycle and monitor the DATA+POWER left LED on the power injector. Release the RESET button only after the LED is in the steady state
(approximately 2 minutes). 3 Release the RESET button. The following configurations are reset on the radio:
IP address = 10.0.0.1 201872-003 2015-10-23 24 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios IP mask = 255.0.0.0 IP gateway = 0.0.0.0 Administration password = password User password = password Power The radio requires a DC power source within specifications. DC can be provided from a DC battery source, central lab/rack supply, or from the supplied AC adapter. Note: Read this section completely before applying power. Terminating the RF Connectors (EX-4.5r-c GigE and EX-5r-c GigE) Before applying power, the RF connectors must be properly terminated into a 50-Ohm load. If this is not performed, the radio may be damaged by simply applying power. Also, there are human safety factors to consider regarding potentially harmful RF radiation. The following lists a few simple ways to achieve proper termination:
Connect a 50-Ohm coaxial termination device to the RF port of the radio. The termination must be rated to 1W (or more). Example(s) include:
Broadwave Technologies P/N 552-200-002, or similar Connect the complete transmission system. That is, the RF cabling including the antenna. The cabled antenna provides a proper termination for the RF output. Connect a fixed (or a series of fixed) 50-Ohm attenuator(s) to the RF connector, either directly or at the end of an RF transmission line. The attenuator must be at least 30dB as specified at the operating frequency (~5700 MHz) and rated for a minimum of 1W input power. Examples include:
Broadwave Technologies P/N 352-103-xxx Bird 2-A-MFN-xx JFW Industries 50FP-xxx-H6-N Cover any unused connector with the connector cap and apply the weather-seal tape. Both cap and tape are included in the accessory kit. AC Power The AC adapter easily connects to the power injector. Refer to the input voltage requirements stated on the label affixed to the adapter to ensure that the adapter can be used with the AC mains supply. The AC plug outlet provided with the adapter may need to be replaced to match the country configuration. The adapter cable uses a standard connector for this cable for use of a pre-wired cable appropriate to the outlet configuration. If the appropriate cable is not available, the existing AC plug end can be severed and a replacement plug affixed. Consult a qualified electrician for this activity. Do not plug the adapter into the mains power. First, verify that the RF connector is properly terminated
(see Power), and then plug in the radio-side connector from the AC adapter to the radio. If the AC mains can be turned off using a switch, disable the power, plug the AC side of the adapter into the AC 25 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios mains socket, and then enable power to the circuit. If the AC mains cannot be turned off, plug in to the AC main socket to apply power. Verify that the radio is active by observing LED activity on the injector and radio. All LEDs on the radio flash at initial power cycle. Exalt strongly recommends that the AC mains supply be fused or on a separate breaker to ensure against over-voltage and/or over-current situations and to provide some form of protection to the radio electronics and other devices connected to the same supply. In addition, if the AC power is subject to significant spikes or variation, power conditioning is a worthwhile investment, as the quality of mains power may have a direct impact on the device operation, performance and/or reliability. An Uninterruptible Power Source (UPS) or other form of battery-backed system protects against brown-
out and black-out conditions, and condition the power presented to the adapter. Evaluate the opportunity for lightning or other similar surges to be present on the powering system, including the ability for surges to couple to the power wiring system. If an evaluation indicates that there is a potential likelihood for these conditions to occur, additional surge protection is recommended for the input power wiring, especially to protect the radio electronics between the adapter and the radios DC input connector. The above statement is similarly true for every wired connection to the device. While the configuration for surge suppression or line conditioning is of a different type for each kind of signal interface, the opportunity for damage to the device, loss of communications and property is significant. In some cases, there can also be a risk to human life by not protecting against lightning entering a building through wiring or improper grounding. If you do not have experience in this type of installation practice, consult a qualified electrician and/or telecoms professional during the installation and wiring of the equipment. Power Injector The EX-r Series GigE radios use a power injector to send DC power to the radio over the Ethernet cable, and including the Ethernet connections. Figure 14 shows the power injector connectors that connect the AC adapter (included with the system) and the radio. Figure 14 Power injector connectors Connect the network Ethernet connection to the DATA connection of the power injector. Connect the cable for the radio to the DATA+POWER connection of the power injector. Ground the power injector using the grounding receptacle. The injector can also be mount wall using the bottom panel brackets. 201872-003 2015-10-23 26 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Lightning/Surge Protection To provide for human safety and for the safety of connected network equipment, it is highly recommended to place a weatherproof lightning suppression device at the egress point where the Ethernet cable(s) enter the building, shelter, or cabinet. To protect the radio equipment, install a weatherproof lightning suppression device near the radio for all connected Ethernet cables. For the Power/Ethernet cable, specific voltage requirements must be met. The following devices are the only devices currently recommended:
Generally, use a short Ethernet cable supplied for the connection between the radio and the first arrestor. Use bulk outdoor-rated CAT5e or CAT6 cable for the longer run between arrestors, and indoor- or outdoor-rated cable with a standard Ethernet termination for the connection from the egress arrestor and power injector. Apply this same cabling method for the TDM connections. There are no special requirements for lightning arrestors. Vendors, such as Transtector and Polyphaser, offer single and multiple TDM weatherproof arrestors. Note that each connector on the radio can carry up to 2 TDM (Time Division Multiplexing) connections. Polyphaser IXG-05 Note: Use only outdoor-rated UV-resistant CAT5e or CAT6 cable. This cable must have an outer diameter between 0.25"/6.35 mm and 0.31"/7.87mm. Belden 1300A is recommended. Securely hand-tighten all connectors on the ODU to ensure a weatherproof seal. IP Address = 10.0.0.1 IP Mask = 255.0.0.0 IP Gateway = 0.0.0.0 Reset to Critical Factory Settings If necessary, the radio terminal may be reset to critical factory settings. This may be necessary if the IP address and/or passwords for the system are not known. All other configurations are left at their current settings. If a complete default factory configuration is desired, load the Default Configuration File into the system, as described in System Configuration Page. The following parameters are configured after a reset to critical factory settings:
Administration password = password User password = password Antenna/Transmission System This section provides guidance to mounting and connecting the RF transmission system, which consists of the antenna, RF cabling, and RF lightning arrestors. Consult the manufacturers instructions for proper mounting, grounding, and wiring of these devices, and for definitive direction. These manufacturers instructions supersede any information in this section. See Table 7 for a list of supported antennas. 27 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Initial Antenna Mounting (EX-4.5r-c GigE and EX-5r-c GigE) The antenna must be an exact model recommended by the path and site planning engineer(s). Mount the antenna at the proper height, mast/mounting location and polarization orientation as determined by the path and site planning engineer(s). The model type, location, and orientation of the antenna is critical with respect to achieving proper path clearance, as well as to mitigate external or self-
interference from nearby or collocated systems operating in or near the same frequency band. Warning! Mount the antenna in a restricted area and in a manner preventing long-term human exposure to the transmitted RF energy. To comply with FCC and Industry Canada regulations, the minimum safe distance from the antenna for continuous human exposure is 10'/3m. The antenna structure must be secure and safe with respect to the mounting of the antenna, transmission system weight, radio housing, and the combined weight of any personnel that may climb or attach to the structure. The combined weight of items and forces on the structure must be carefully considered in the design and construction of the structure. This must include the weight bearing on the structure in the highest wind conditions possible in the region, and with respect to all objects affixed to the structure. If additional objects are affixed to the structure in the future, it may be important to evaluate both the mechanical impact of these planned additions (with respect to wind and weight loading), as well as the potential impact to RF interference and frequency coordination (if additional radio equipment is anticipated). This is especially important if future equipment is likely to operate within the same frequency band. Once the antenna is mounted, cabled, and aligned, your goal is to never require modification. This prior planning is important in the path and site planning stages and in construction of the antenna structure. Follow the antenna manufacturers instructions for mechanical mounting of the antenna. Ensure that there is enough room around the antenna for alignment activities (moving the antenna in vertical and horizontal arcs), and for the RF transmission line to connect to the antenna connector unobstructed and within the specified bend radius requirements of the transmission line. At this point, the antenna mounts should be fully secure to the structure, the feed of the antenna securely mounted to the antenna (if the feed is a separate assembly), and the azimuth and elevation adjustments not completely tightened in preparation of the antenna alignment activity. It is a good practice to connect the transmission line to the antenna connector as early in the process as possible, to reduce the opportunity for debris or moisture to enter either the antenna connector or the transmission line connector. Use a connector cover or other temporary measures to ensure that the connector is kept clear. Take extra care if the antenna is installed during inclement weather to ensure that no moisture gets inside the antenna connector at any time. Now the antenna can be aimed in the general direction required for the link. Use a compass, a reference bearing, binoculars or any other similar device to point the antenna in the direction
(generally) of the far end radio, and then slightly tighten the azimuth and elevation adjustments so that the antenna maintains its general position and is safe to be left without additional securing. Refer to the Exalt white paper, Antenna Alignment, for more information on antenna alignment techniques. 201872-003 2015-10-23 28 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Transmission Line from Antenna to Radio (EX-4.5r-c GigE and EX-5r-c GigE) Most installations use a very short length of coaxial transmission line for the connection between the antenna and the radio device. Coaxial transmission line can either have a solid or braided shield. Solid-
shield cables are more resistant to external signal coupling and interference, but are generally stiffer than braided cables. Consult the path or site engineer(s) to ensure that the proper materials are chosen for the installation and that all factors were considered. Generally, the larger the diameter of the transmission line, the lower the loss. So for longer runs of transmission line, larger diameter cables are highly advised. However, at every frequency, there is a maximum diameter cable that supports the operating frequency. Verify the specifications. This should is determined in the path and site planning process. Table 4 lists representative samples of transmission line types recommended for the Exalt Digital Microwave Radio. Table 4 Recommended transmission line Manufacturer Andrew Type LDF4-50 Description 1/2-inch solid shield Loss at 5.3GHz 5.7dB/100'
Loss at 5.8GHz 6.0dB/100'
Andrew LDF4.5-50 5/8-inch solid shield 4.4dB/100'
Times Times RFS RFS LMR-600 1/2-inch braided shield 6.9dB/100'
LMR-900 5/8-inch braided shield 4.6dB/100'
LCF12-50J 1/2-inch solid shield LCF12-58J 5/8-inch solid shield 5.6dB/100'
4.5dB/100'
4.7dB/100'
7.3dB/100'
4.9dB/100'
5.9dB/100'
4.8dB/100'
It is critical that the transmission line and antenna be capable of supporting the same type of connector, or easily adapted. It can be important to minimize the number of connectors and adapters, and it is ideal that they match directly without adaptation. In most cases, transmission line allows for N-type male connectors and antennas have N-type female connectors. If possible, connect the primary transmission line directly to the antenna. It is desired to have the fewest possible pieces of transmission line in the system, to minimize losses and points of failure from connectors. The antenna can typically accommodate a direct connection if planned in advance. Use a 90 adapter for the connection to the antenna, if necessary, but confirm that all connectors and transmission lines are properly specified for the operating frequency with minimum loss, proper impedance (50 Ohm) and proper VSWR characteristics. Transmission line connector termination is a critical element of the installation. Many factory built RF transmission lines do not provide the proper characteristics for proper transmission, despite their published specifications, often due to the fully or semi-automated process of factory termination, which may not have considered the frequency of your system. When buying pre-terminated transmission line, it is strongly advised to obtain the documentation of test measurements on the connected transmission line showing that the loss characteristics and VSWR are within the specified limits specifically at your operating frequency. In addition to factory-built transmission line, self-
terminated transmission line can suffer the same issues. 29 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Caution: Always follow the manufacturers termination process EXACTLY, and only use the manufacturers authorized tools and connectors for a given transmission line type. The manufacturers of transmission line typically offer instruction and certification for transmission line termination, and may also provide videos illustrating the process. There is no amount of extra care, education, precision, and effort that can be overstated for this process. There is often a need for a small excess of transmission line near the antenna to accommodate both the need for extra slack as the antenna is loosened and moved for the alignment process, and to accommodate a drip loop for the transmission line and the initial transmission line securing hardware and grounding near the antenna. In addition, the transmission line is typically very stiff, and can provide undue pulling force on the antenna or radio connector. Take care to align the cable with the connector so that it does not provide any torque or strain on the connector. Consult your transmission line manufacturer for the proper transportation, hoisting, securing, and grounding process. Always be very mindful of the entire length of transmission line to ensure that the transmission line is never twisted, kinked, or over-bent beyond the specified bend radius. Once a transmission line is over-bent or kinked, it will likely never recover its specified characteristics, even after straightening, and will often be completely unusable. The opposite end of this primary transmission line typically terminates at the radio connector. If using a long transmission line (in excess of 3'/1m), an RF lightning arrestor is recommended to protect the radio equipment. As soon as practical, weatherproof the connected ends of the transmission line to the antenna and lightning arrestor and radio. This process should be delayed as long as possible to ensure that all systems are working properly before applying the weatherproofing. Once weatherproofing is applied, it may have to be removed for testing or installation modification. With this in mind, if the installation is occurring during inclement weather, take extra care at all times to ensure that no moisture enters any connector at any time. If moisture is suspected to have compromised the antenna or transmission line, it may render those devices useless without any means for remedy except for full replacement. Cap and weatherproof the second antenna connector on the radio if using a single-polarity antenna. Indoor Mounting On rare occasions the antenna can be mounted indoors behind a window. In these cases, there would not be a need for drip loops or an RF lightning arrestor. Use a very short transmission line connected directly between the antenna and the radio mounted nearby. The weatherproofing process can also be omitted. RF Lightning Arrestor RF lightning arrestors provide a direct path to ground for lightning strikes that may couple to or directly hit the outdoor transmission system or antenna structure. The RF lightning arrestor prevents any associated voltage and current from entering the radio equipment, other equipment, or humans. The following lightning arrestors are examples of proper devices for Exalt Digital Microwave Radios:
Andrew BB-BNFNFE-26 Mount and ground the RF lightning arrestor in accordance to the manufacturers recommendations. Place it as close as possible to the radio equipment. Minimize the distance to the radio to lessen the Polyphaser AL-LSXM 201872-003 2015-10-23 30 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios opportunity for lightning to couple to or strike the unprotected section of transmission line (if any). Consult a qualified electrician or installer in all cases of grounding and lightning arrestor implementation. Antenna Alignment Antennas must be installed at both ends of the planned link to commence precision alignment. Refer to the Exalt white paper, Antenna Alignment. The EX-r Series GigE radios have an integrated antenna. Antennas are typically aligned using the radio hardware for precise alignment. However, there are many very useful tools available to aid in this process, inclusive of devices specifically designed for the purpose of aligning antennas. Some examples are:
XL Microwave Path Align-R Use of these devices may be extremely advantageous as compared to using the radio, because they employ many unique facilities to aid in this process. Using these tools also makes it possible to align the antennas before the radio equipment is delivered. However, many installers successfully use the radios as the means for antenna alignment. The following are the primary facilities when using the radio to align the antenna:
RSL voltage connection using a volt meter (recommended) Teletronics 17-402 Insert the included adapter into the GPS connector on the radio housing and the opposite end connected to a volt meter. The RSL test point DC voltage is inversely proportional and numerically calibrated to the received signal level. The voltage rises as the antennas are less in alignment, and falls as antennas are more in alignment. The voltage measurement corresponds to the received signal level in measurements of dBm (a negative number for RSL measurements). For example, an RSL of -60dBm yields an RSL voltage measurement of 0.60VDC; an RSL of 45dBm measures 0.45VDC. Audio alignment buzzer Enable the audio alignment buzzer through the Exalt GUI. When enabled, the radio enclosure emits a sound. The pitch rises when higher (better) levels of RSL are achieved. Align the antennas until the highest pitch is accomplished. The tone is continuous when the two ends of the radio system are in communication. Otherwise, the buzzer beeps. Exalt GUI RSL reading indicates the current RSL in dBm. Note: There is a slight delay in RSL readings in the GUI as the RSL levels change. In this case, fine alignment can be done in small adjustments allowing a small gap of time so that the impact of the adjustment on the GUI display catches up to real time. Note: Only use the browser-based GUI for antenna alignment if there are no other means available. If this method is required, refer to Exalt Graphical User Interface (GUI). The RSL reading can be read on a PC or any handheld computing device that supports an HTML browser and Ethernet connectivity. 31 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Configuration and Management This section describes the command line interface (CLI) and Exalt graphical user interface (GUI). Telnet into the Command Line Interface (CLI) Use a Telnet connection to access the CLI in the Exalt Digital Microwave Radios. Use the CLI to set key parameters on the system. Connect to the Radio in a Telnet Session Make the Telnet connection to the radio through the Ethernet port. Use Windows and perform the following steps:
1 Open a command prompt or MS-DOS prompt (Start>Run). 2 Type C:\>Telnet <IP Address> at the command line:
The default IP address is 10.0.0.1 Note: The accessing computer must be on the same IP subnet as the radio. Telnet Use Telnet when prompted to enter the administration level login and password. The default administration login is admin and password is password. It is recommended that the default administration password be reset by performing a radio reset (see Reset to Critical Factory Settings). Figure 15 shows the menu choices available after log in. Figure 15 CLI main menu 201872-003 2015-10-23 32 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios The following selections can be made on all screens:
Ctrl+\ (control and backslash keys) = exit session 0 = back to previous screen 9 = help Exalt Graphical User Interface (GUI) The Exalt GUI is the primary user interface for configuring and troubleshooting the radio and radio system. A computer or hand-held device with a conventional HTML browser and Ethernet port is required. Microsoft Internet Explorer is the preferred browser. Netscape, Mozilla, and Firefox are also supported. Preparing to Connect If the radios are new, both radios are preconfigured as Radio B, and have the same IP address. The initial priority is to configure one radio to Radio A and assign different IP addresses, unique to each radio. There are two ways to change the IP address:
1 Reset the radio to the critical default factory settings (see Radio Reset). 2 Connect to the GUI using the default IP address (10.0.0.1), and change the IP address through the GUI interface. Note: To connect to the radios Ethernet port and use the GUI interface, the accessing computer must match the radios IP address subnet. It is therefore necessary to either change the radios IP address through the CLI to match the subnet of the computer, or change the computers IP address to match the subnet of the radio (such as, a computer IP address of 10.0.0.10 if trying to connect to a radio set to the factory default IP address of 10.0.0.1). To configure a radio as Radio A, connect to the GUI and change the configuration, as discussed in this section. Make Connections It is recommended that one radio at a time be configured, on a bench, before taking the radios to the field for installation:
(EX-4.5r-c GigE and EX-5r-c GigE models only) Terminate the RF connector with a 50-Ohm termination or a fixed attenuator of at least 20dB (see Power). Note: Do not connect the radios in a back-to-back configuration. If the radios are set to their factory default settings, both radios are configured as Radio B and cannot communicate. Both radios also have the same IP address, which causes IP address conflicts Note: The IP address subnet of the accessing computer must match the radios IP address subnet to connect using Ethernet. Once connected to the radio using Ethernet, log in to the Exalt GUI. 33 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Log In Use the following steps to log in to the Exalt GUI. 1 Open a browser window. Microsoft Internet Explorer is the recommended browser. Netscape, Mozilla, Safari, and Firefox are also supported. If there are issues with your browser, please report it to Exalt Customer Care. You may be required to use a different browser to immediately overcome issues. 2 Type the IP address of the radio in the address bar. Figure 16 Initiating the browser connection The following window displays after pressing the Enter key or clicking the Go button in the browser window. Figure 17 Browser Login screen Login Privileges There are two levels of login privileges:
Administrator (admin) assigned complete permissions to view, edit, and configure User (user) assigned limited, view-only permissions with no edit or configuration rights The default login names and passwords are as follows:
Table 5 Default login information Privilege level Administrator User User name admin user Default password password password 201872-003 2015-10-23 34 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Administrator login credentials are required for configuration purposes. Type the user name and passwords for Administrator level and click OK. The following screen displays. Figure 18 Radio Information page Quick Start To establish a link on the bench, apply the following basic configurations to the radio terminal. Use the steps in the Quick Start Guide included with the radio. A summary of the items that need to be configured are:
Radio IP address for each end. Each end must have a different IP address and cannot match the accessing computers IP address or any address assigned if radios are part of a larger network. It may be required to change the IP address of the accessing computer after changing the IP address of the radio so that the IP subnet matches. The radio IP address is listed on the Administration Settings Page. Install the Regulatory Domain Key (RDK) for RDK-enabled radios only. The radio is non-functional without the RDK. RDK is entered on the Administration Settings page. RDK references the units serial number and the country/region where the radio will be deployed. RDK is obtained through your Exalt Authorized reseller or distributor. Set one radio as Radio A. The radio selected as Radio A must be configured. Radio A/B selection is the Endpoint Identifier parameter on the System Configuration Page. Even though both radios are set as Radio B by default, confirm this configuration on the radio intended to be Radio B. 201872-003 2015-10-23 35 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Link Security Key (Administration Settings Page) If all other parameters are still configured at their factory default settings, the radios can now be connected back-to-back to verify that the link is communicating and perform any other desired tests. See Back-to-back Bench Testing for test information. Navigating the GUI describes each page of the GUI. Most configuration parameter settings are intuitive. The following link parameters must match at both ends for the link to communicate:
Bandwidth (System Configuration Page) RF Frequency (System Configuration page) Link Distance (System Configuration page) TDD Frame Size (System Configuration page) Polarization (System Configuration page) Note: Changing any of these parameters causes a temporary loss of link. The GUI displays a warning and provides an opportunity to cancel changes. Navigating the GUI The GUI provides the primary interface for all configuration and management. There are three sections of the main GUI window:
Navigation panel Main window Summary status information section (upper-left corner) SUMMARY STATUS NAVIGATION PANE MAIN WINDOW Figure 19 Exalt GUI window description 201872-003 2015-10-23 36 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Summary Status Section This section of the Exalt GUI provides a review of the system status. In the screens in Figure 19, the top bar illustrates the alarm condition of the link. The information inside the bar is equivalent to the entry of the Link Name set by the administrator in the Administration Settings Page. The color of the panel indicates alarm status:
Green indicates the system is communicating and all functions are normal Yellow indicates a minor non-traffic affecting alarm condition Red indicates a major traffic affecting alarm condition The left panel summarizes the alarm conditions of the local radio (the radio that matches the IP address). The information displayed is the IP address and the endpoint identifier (Radio A or Radio B). The right panel summarizes the alarm conditions of the remote radio (the radio linked to the local radio). Note: The local radio might be the near-end or the far-end radio, depending on the management interface connection. The terms local and remote refer to the orientation of the radio terminals relative to the IP address you are managing. When making certain changes to a near-end radio without first making changes to the far-end radio, the link may become disconnected unless configuration changes are reverted to their original settings. When making changes that may disrupt the link, always change the far-end radio first, and then the near-end radio to match. The Summary Status Section allows the Exalt GUI to be a rudimentary management system. Minimize the browser window to display just the top bar or the top bar and radio information, and open several browsers on the desktop. When a window status changes to yellow or red, you can quickly maximize that window to determine the issues. Figure 20 Summary status information Navigation Panel In the navigation panel, pages with sub-pages have a plus (+) to the left of the page link. Click the plus sign or page name title to view sub-page titles. The pages can be collapsed to hide the sub-pages when a minus () sign appears to the left of the page link. Management pages are indicated with an X to the left of the page name. Click the X or page name to display the page within the main window. 37 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Note: The local radio might be the near-end or the far-end radio, depending on the management interface connection. The terms local and remote refer to the orientation of the radio terminals relative to the IP address you are managing. When making certain changes to a near-end radio without first making changes to the far-end radio, the link may become disconnected unless configuration changes are reverted to their original settings. When making changes that may disrupt the link, always change the far-end radio first, and then the near-end radio to match. 201872-003 2015-10-23 38 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Radio Information Page This page provides general information about the local radio terminal. This information is helpful for troubleshooting and for record keeping. Figure 21 Radio Information page 39 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Administration Settings Page This page allows contains general parameters for the radio system. The Current Value column lists entries actual settings. Desired changes are entered in the New Value column. After all desired changes are entered, click the Update button to accept and enable changes. Figure 22 Administration Settings page Most entries on this page are self-explanatory. The following lists unique or important parameters. Fill in the date and time fields as soon as practical. Events are captured with time/date stamps, which is valuable information for troubleshooting. Set the Link Security Key to something other than the factory default setting (12 characters, all zeros) at each end. The link security key must match at both sides of the link. If the security key remains at the factory setting, the radio link is open to sabotage by a party with the same radio model. Each link should have a unique security key. If using the same security key for every link in the network, the radio could link to any other radio with the same security key. This is problematic in multi-radio networks. Note that the security key must be exactly 12 characters. Any printable ASCII character can be used. The link security key is case sensitive. 201872-003 2015-10-23 40 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Note: Changing the link security key interrupts transmission until the opposite end is changed to match. Always change the far-end radio first, and then change the near-end radio. Reset the admin and user passwords. These passwords should not match. If the admin password remains at the factory default setting, it provides an opportunity for random reassignment by a network-connected user. The new password must be entered twice. If the passwords do not match and the Update button clicked, the password is not changed and remains set to the previous password. Enter the license key provided by Exalt to access extended features or diagnostic capabilities. Click Update to accept the changes and enable the new features. License keys are issued by radio serial number, so ensure that the license key used was issued for this particular radio.
(5GHz models only) The Regulatory Domain Key establishes the frequency bands, tuning frequencies, bandwidths, output power and Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) requirements, in accordance with the regulations that apply in the country where the product is deployed. The RDK must be typed in to enable ANY functionality for the radio. The RDK is issued to the Exalt Authorized distributor or reseller, and is paired to the specific serial number of the radio. AES Advance Encryption Standard) can be implemented to provide additional data security for the wireless link. This function requires an upgrade license key (purchased separately). Both radios in the link must have a valid AES upgrade license key to implement AES. Different bit-length encryption license keys (for example, 128-bit and 256-bit) are also available, depending on model type. If the required upgrade license key is present, simply insert a matching ASCII string on both terminals and select the Enable AES On option for AES encryption. Note that similar to the administration and user passwords, the AES string must be entered twice for each terminal. 41 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) Configuration Use SNMP to manage networked devices and execute the following functions:
GET: Obtain information from the device, such as a configuration setting or parameter. SET: Change a configuration setting on the device. TRAP: The device proactively informs the management station of a change of state, usually used for critical alarms or warnings. Figure 23 SNMP Configuration page One feature of the SNMP implementation is that system configuration changes do not take effect using the SET command. Instead, groups of configuration settings can be preconfigured for global change, and a single Save (Commit) command implements all changes. When some parameters are changed, a link may drop and/or management control lost. MIB files allow many parameters to be set at once, allowing only a temporarily dropped link or management control issue. The opposite end radio can be quickly reconfigured, with little downtime for the link and management control. The save (Commit) command is similar to the Update button. Dropped links or management control issues do not occur with every parameter change. Many configuration changes do not impact traffic or management access. EX-series radios utilize SNMPv3, a high security version of SNMP, to ensure secure access to and storing of management data. The SNMPv3 security string matches the admin and user passwords. Passwords must be eight characters or longer. Note: SNMP MIB files are listed on the File Activation Page. The SNMP MIBs are organized similar to the GUI. Become familiar with the GUI before using the SNMP function. 201872-003 2015-10-23 42 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios SNMP v1/v2c/v3 Support Options Enable the SNMPv1/v2c options to allow entering read and read/write community strings. Note: Users are encouraged to avoid enabling SNMPv1/v2c support due to known security loopholes in these protocols. Enable the SNMPv3 options to allow entering read and read/write user names and passwords. These entries are de-coupled from the standard radio user names and passwords. SNMPv3 provides full management security. SNMP Traps SNMP traps alert the central network management system with important issues about the radio system. Trap filters are set on the Traps Configuration page (Figure 24). Trap support for all versions of SNMP are provided and can be independently enabled. Enter the IP address to which the traps are directed in the Trap Destination IP Address field. The AUX port (or the MAIN port when using in-band management) must be connected to the network to allow trap information to reach the designated IP address. In a bridged network, this may not require special network settings. In a routed network, the connected router must have a defined path for the IP address. Figure 24 Trap Configuration page Note: The Update button must be clicked to save any changes to this page. The following traps are available:
Authentication Trap: This is an SNMP standard trap when password information for SNMP is incorrect. This can help identify unwanted intrusions into the management system and for diagnosis of SNMP issues for valid users. 43 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Radio Reboot Trap: This trap is sent after any radio reboot to inform the manager of the reboot status. Local/Remote Link Status Trap: This trap is sent when Link is in errored state (equivalent to the Link LED on the radio front panel or the Link status bar in the upper-left of the Exalt GUI window). Local/Remote Status Trap: This trap is sent when Status is in errored state (equivalent to the Status LED on the front panel or the radio status box in the upper-left of the Exalt GUI window). Local RSL Status Trap: This trap is sent when the local RSL drops below the value set in the Threshold Value (dBm) field. Buffers are provided so that continuous traps are not sent if the RSL is bouncing near the set threshold value. This trap is reset only if the RSL rises to 3dBm above the set threshold value and then drops below that value. Exalt recommends that this trap be set to a value 5dBm or 10dBm above the threshold as a warning that the system has faded and may be approaching an outage. Temperature Status Trap: This trap is sent when the internal temperature reaches the warning point. This conveys that the external temperature control is in a fault state. Buffers are applied to this trap to avoid multiple traps when the temperature remains near the warning point. 201872-003 2015-10-23 44 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios File Transfer Page This page allows the administrator to upload and download files to and from the radio. Three types of files can be uploaded: configuration, radio firmware, and Regulatory Domain Database (RDD). When uploading Configuration Files, current configuration parameters are immediately overwritten, and the unit automatically reboots. When uploading radio firmware files, the file is placed into reserve memory space. After the new radio firmware file uploads, use the File Activation page to enable the files (see File Activation Page). Figure 25 File Transfer page Note: Issues with the RDK may be caused when the Regulatory Domain Database (RDD) is not up to date. Go to the Exalt Web site to download the current RDD. Up to four types of files can be downloaded: configuration, radio firmware, radio event log, and MIB. The MIB file refers to the Management Information Base related to the Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) function, and is only available on models which support SNMP. See Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP) for more information. Note: Check the existing loaded files before uploading new radio firmware files. New file uploads overwrite the secondary file location. If important files reside in the primary or secondary file location, download them before uploading the new files. Only the active radio firmware file can be downloaded. Therefore, to download the reserve file, it must first be activated (using the Swap button). See File Activation Page. The current radio firmware and RDD versions can be viewed on the Radio Information Page. Use the following steps to download a file. 1 Select the type of file to download (configuration or radio firmware). 2 Click the Download button and wait for the radio to prepare the file for download. 45 201872-003 2015-10-23 A second page/link appears (Figure 26). 3 Right-click the link on the page to download the file to a desired location. Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Figure 26 File Transfer pagedownload file link File download and upload is useful when configuring several radios with similar settings. A copy of the configuration file can also help restore radio settings. In addition, a copy of the Exalt default configuration file is helpful to restore the radio to factory settings. Note: Do not change the name of any download file. The configuration file must be named config.xml. To keep track of multiple configuration files, use a folder naming system or temporarily rename the file, however, it must be named config.xml before it can be uploaded to a radio. Never change radio firmware file names under any circumstances. If copying the same configuration file into multiple radios, some parameters will match and that may be undesirable. However, it may be easier to change just a subset of parameters rather than every parameter. The following parameters can cause problems or confusion if they match at each of a link:
Radio Name Endpoint Identifier IP Address IP Subnet Mask Default Gateway The following parameters can match at both ends of the link:
Admin and User passwords Link Name Link Security Key (although each link should be different) 201872-003 2015-10-23 46 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Bandwidth RF Frequency Link Distance TDD Frame Size T1/E1 configurations Ethernet configurations Polarization setting Three different types of files can be uploaded into the radio. After selecting the file type, browse to the location of the file on your computer, and then click Upload. The radio firmware file extension is .bin, and is the core code for the radio. Always verify that the code type matches the radio being accessed. The filename should match the name of the code that is currently installed, but with a different number sequence at the end of the filename. The configuration file makes all configuration settings on the radio. Only upload configuration files from the same model-type radio, or edited XML versions of the same model.
(5 GHz models only) The regulatory domain database file governs the RDK function. Upload updates, as required. 47 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios File Activation Page Use this page to move stored or uploaded files for use on the radio. The page indicates which file is currently in use, and which file is available for use. Click the Swap button to place the file in the Alternative File column into the active state and move the file in the Current File column to the Alternative File column. Figure 27 File Activation page Note: In all cases, the radio reboots after a new file is selected using the Swap function. This places the radio out of service for a short time. 201872-003 2015-10-23 48 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios System Configuration Page This page contains several critical system parameters. Figure 28 System Configuration page Note: For models requiring a Regulatory Domain Key (RDK), you must enter a valid RDK to edit this page. Most entries on this page are self-explanatory. The following lists unique or important parameters. Set the Endpoint Identifier so that one end of the link is set to Radio A and the opposite end set to Radio B. In single-link networks, it is unimportant which end is designated A or B. In multi-link networks, however, it may be important to orient the links so that at any collocation site (where there are multiple radios of the same type at the same site), all radios are set to the same Endpoint Identifier (A or B). See Link Orientation and Synchronization. Note: Changing the Endpoint Identifier parameter requires a reboot of the radio to take effect. The reboot temporarily interrupts traffic. Set the Radio Transmit Power (dBm) parameter to the designed level. The professional installer sets this value or dictates the value of this setting to the system administrator following the system 201872-003 2015-10-23 49 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios design and local regulations. In many cases, this value must be set to a proper value to comply with legal restrictions. Improper values can result in liability to the user and/or installer. Note: Changing Radio Transmit Power may temporarily interrupt traffic. Small changes in output power do not normally interrupt traffic, but larger changes may. Do not adjust the Radio Transmit Power parameter to a value higher than is legally allowed. Do not adjust the Radio Transmit Power parameter lower than the link budget and fade margin can afford. Note: The link may be lost and unrecoverable through GUI control. If the link is lost due to reduction of Radio Transmit Power, travel to the radio location(s) may be required to reset the value. Set the Bandwidth (MHz) parameter to the designed level. The value of this is determined in the design/engineering stage. The Bandwidth parameter must also match at both ends of the link. In conjunction with the Mode parameter, the Bandwidth parameter directly relates to the capacity, latency, and the number of TDM circuits supported. The transmitter and receiver bandwidth are modified using this parameter, making it critical that it be set with respect to the local RF noise and interference profile, and/or in relation to any multi-link network design. Note: Changing Bandwidth will temporarily interrupt traffic. The Bandwidth parameter must match at each end. Adjust the far-end radio first, and then the near-end radio. Changing Bandwidth changes the radios threshold. A narrower bandwidth has better threshold performance and improved interference immunity, therefore if changing to a wider bandwidth, there is an opportunity that the link may be lost and unrecoverable through GUI control. Check the available fade margin and interference profile to determine if the impact to threshold and increased bandwidth is acceptable to maintain the link and the desired performance. If the link is lost due to increasing the Bandwidth parameter, travel to the radio location(s) may be required to reset the value. Set the Mode parameter to the designed selection. The value of this setting is determined in the design/engineering stage. The Mode parameter must match at both ends of the link. In conjunction with the Bandwidth parameter, the Mode parameter setting directly relates to the capacity of the system, as well as critical RF parameters, including receiver threshold, carrier-to-interference ratio, and in some cases, maximum radio transmit power. Note: Changing Mode will temporarily interrupt traffic. The Mode setting must match at each end. Adjust the far-end radio first, and then the near-end radio. Changing Mode changes the radios threshold, carrier-to-interference ratio, and also may have impact on the Radio Transmit Power. A lower mode has better threshold performance and carrier-to-
interference ratio, and in some cases, higher output power, therefore if changing to a higher mode (for example, from Mode 1 to Mode 2), there is an opportunity that the link may be lost and unrecoverable through GUI control. Check the available fade margin and interference profile, and determine if the impact to RF performance is sufficient to maintain the link and desired performance. If the link is lost due to increasing the Mode parameter, travel to the radio location(s) may be required to reset the value. Set the RF Frequency (GHz) parameter to the designed point. The value of this setting is determined in the design/engineering stage. RF Frequency must match at both ends of the link. It may be critical to set RF Frequency with respect to the local RF noise and interference profiles, and/or in relation to any multi-link network design. 201872-003 2015-10-23 50 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios The frequency selection section includes the ability to select from either the complete list of frequencies (All) that can be tuned for the selected band and bandwidth, or, in some cases, a pre-
selected list of non-overlapping center frequencies (Preferred) that Exalt determined provides the most flexible collocation opportunities for large networks of Exalt radios The frequency selection section includes a band selection button that must be enabled for the frequency band of operation for which the link was engineered. In some cases, some bands may not be selectable due to regulatory constraints. Some bands also require Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS), based on the active RDK. DFS is automatically enabled for these bands and is selectable for all other bands. Note: Changing RF Frequency will temporarily interrupt traffic. The RF Frequency parameter setting must match at each end. Adjust the far-end radio first, and then the near-end radio. If the RF Frequency parameter is changed to a frequency with interference, the link may be lost and unrecoverable through GUI control. If the link is lost due to changing the RF Frequency parameter, travel to the radio location(s) may be required to reset the value.
(5GHz models only) DFS is automatically enabled for any band where required based on the regulations that match the active RDK. For bands where DFS is not required, it can still be selected. For DFS to operate properly, set the antenna gain figure to match the installed transmission system gain (that is, the gain of the antenna minus all losses between the radio and the antenna). Note: When DFS is enabled, the radio temporarily stops transmitting for at least 60 seconds to ensure that no radar interference is present. This is called Channel Availability Check
(CAC). The DFS status displays on the Alarms Page. Once CAC passes, the radio resumes normal operation. If at any time during CAC or regular operation a qualifying radar signature is detected, the radio shuts down communications for a minimum of 30 minutes. This is the Non-Occupancy Period (NOP). Transmission only resumes after the NOP completes and then only after a successful CAC. Set the Link Distance (miles) parameter to the range that is equal to or greater than the actual link distance. The value of this setting is determined in the design/engineering stage. Note: Changing the Link Distance parameter will temporarily interrupt traffic. The Link Distance setting must match at each end and must not be less than the actual link distance. Adjust the far-end radio first, and then the near-end radio. If the Link Distance parameter is changed to a setting less than the actual distance, the link may be lost and unrecoverable through GUI control. If the link is lost due to this situation, travel to the radio location(s) may be required to reset the value. If the Link Distance parameter setting is set to a distance unnecessarily higher than the actual link distance, the radio may have substantially reduced performance with respect to throughput and latency. Set the TDD Frame Size (ms) parameter to the designed level. The value of this setting is determined in the design/engineering stage. The TDD Frame Size parameter must match at both ends of the link. The TDD Frame Size parameter setting directly relates to the capacity, latency, and number of TDM circuits that can be supported over the given link distance. In multi-link networks, especially where there are collocated links, it is also important to set all radios to the same TDD Frame Size setting to avoid self-interference. See Time Division Duplex (TDD) Factors and Link Orientation and Synchronization for more information. 201872-003 2015-10-23 51 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Note: Changing the TDD Frame Size parameter will temporarily interrupt traffic. TDD Frame Size parameters must match at each end. Adjust the far-end radio first, and then the near-end radio. If the TDD Frame Size parameter is set to a value that cannot be supported for the link distance, the link may be lost and unrecoverable through GUI control. If the link is lost due to this situation, travel to the radio location(s) may be required to reset the value. Set the TX/RX Throughput Ratio (%) parameter to program radio symmetry. The default setting is 50/50 for symmetrical, full-duplex throughput. Other throughput ratio options are 20/80, 80/20, and 65/35, 35/65. See Link Symmetry. For asymmetric throughput, only TDD frame size settings of 2ms and 5ms and RF Bandwidth settings of 16MHz and higher are supported. Set the Radio Collocation parameter to control parameters related to the internal or GPS Synchronization feature (see Radio Synchronization). This parameter can be enabled when an Exalt radio's Sync Out is connected to a collocated radio's Sync In, or when a GPS receiver is connected to Radio A. There are two additional features:
Set the Flywheel Period parameter to Normal (default) or Infinite. This is the period of time that the radio will run on the internal timing signal if the timing signal is lost. The Normal parameter is a time period that allows the timing signal to be recovered. The default time to wait is set between 5 and 10 min. The system then resynchronizes to the signal without impact to traffic. If Normal is selected and timing is not recovered within the set time period, the system stops transmitting (loss of link) until timing is recovered. This prevents self-interference to local systems, but loses the link. The Infinite parameter allows the radio to run on the internal clock source with no limit and attempts to resynchronize when the timing source is detected. This allows the link to continue to operate, however, if a signal is not detected within approximately 10 minutes, the radio may start to cause interference to other collocated systems, and other collocated systems may start to cause interference with it. If after this interval timing is restored, a temporary outage due to the resynchronization requirement may occur. Set the Tx Timing Offset (Sec) parameter to allow the administrator to delay transmitter timing from the timing pulse by a fixed time, in microseconds. This is useful if multiple synchronized Exalt radio systems are present, separated by distance, such as when using a repeater. This delay is required to offset the difference in speed-of-light between the two locations. It is recommended to add a 5Sec delay for every mile of difference in path length. For example, if there is one link with no delay, delay the link within the field-of-view of the first link on the same or overlapping frequency channel accordingly so that it is synchronized, including the speed-of-light delay between the two sites. Antenna Port parameter EX-4.5r GigE and EX-5r GigE: The antenna port selection toggles between the vertically and horizontally polarized integrated antennas or the dual-polarized setting. Ensure that both link ends match polarization. EX-4.5r-c GigE and EX-5r-c GigE: The antenna port selection allows selection of either the V, H, or both connectors for dual-polarized operation. 201872-003 2015-10-23 52 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Note: Changing the antenna port will temporarily interrupt traffic. The polarization of the antennas at each end must match at each end adjust the far-end radio first, then the near-end radio. Buzzer Timeout (minutes) parameter creates an audio signal for antenna alignment. Turn on the buzzer continuously during antenna alignment or preset a period of time that the buzzer will sound. If the buzzer stops before alignment activities are complete, change the selection and press the Update button or select the ON option until alignment activities are complete. 53 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Ethernet Interface Configuration Page This page allows the administrator to set the alarm, and duplex settings of the Ethernet connection. It also allows determination of the management information for in-band (carried over the air and available from both the PoE(1) and ETH2 connectors on either end of the link) or out-of-band (not carried over the air and only available from the PoE(1) connector) Figure 29 Ethernet Interface Configuration page To ignore Ethernet alarms, disable the alarming of either or both connectors, accordingly. Muting the ETH2 connection is desirable when connected equipment senses Ethernet signaling and makes decisions (such as, spanning tree protocol enable) based on the Ethernet signal. If the ETH2 connection has muting enabled, the port is muted when the link is not active. It may be desirable to disable the alarming of the ETH2 connector if it is not used. For Gigabit Ethernet interfaces, configure the interface on the radio and the interface on the connected network equipment to Auto-Negotiate; the default setting for new radios. For 100BaseT (Fast Ethernet) interfaces, configure the interface on the radio and the interface on the connected network equipment to 100/Full; the default setting for new radios. It is not recommended for 100BaseT connections to be set to Auto-negotiate, as this can exhibit packet loss with an extremely adverse impact on throughput. 201872-003 2015-10-23 54 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios VLAN Configuration Page VLAN is disabled as the default setting for Exalt radios. The Exalt radios still pass VLAN and non-
VLAN traffic across the link, but do not examine the VLAN traffic or act upon it. Enable VLAN using the Exalt GUI for expanded VLAN support. Figure 30 VLAN Configuration page When VLAN is first enabled, the Ethernet interface ports are assigned as Default VLAN, until the ports are configured with specific VLAN IDs. For example, a specific VLAN for management access to the radio must be manually configured. Note: Once a management VLAN is configured or modified and the Update button clicked, the management connection will likely be lost. The management connection to the radio must follow the configuration to the assigned VLAN. After configuring and enabling the management VLAN on the radio, reconfigure your networks management access to match the settings on the radio. If any VLANs are configured in addition to the management VLAN, the radio treats the traffic that is not in the VLAN filter list in accordance with the selection made in the status setting. The Block Untagged selection only passes the VLAN IDs on the filter list; all other traffic is blocked. The Pass Untagged selection passes all untagged traffic transparently, and only blocks VLAN IDs not on the filter list. The Tag Untagged selection tags all untagged traffic with the selected default VLAN ID assigned in this table. 55 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios The management VLAN ID number is assigned in the second table, and can be used for either or both Ethernet interface on the radio. In the third table, up to 16 unique VLANs can be configured for filtering. VLAN ID numbering ranges from 1 to 4094. VLAN configurations are maintained even when VLAN is disabled. That is, the VLANs can be configured and the configuration saved, even though they are not active until VLAN is enabled. Use the procedure in Reset to Critical Factory Settings to restore the management connection if a mistake was made assigning the management VLAN and access cannot be restored. Note: Only one entry per VLAN ID is allowed. If the same VLAN ID is entered into the table more than once, the radio uses the first assignment found in the table and ignores duplicate entries. 201872-003 2015-10-23 56 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios T1/E1 Configuration Pages These pages allow the administrator to selectively enable or disable the T1 or E1 circuits, one at a time. For enabled T1/E1 circuits, additional configuration, including loopback functions, are available. Disable the unused T1 or E1 so that the alarms are turned off and more throughput is allocated to the Ethernet interface. Every enabled T1 or E1 input, even if there is no T1 or E1 signal present, reduces the aggregate throughput of the Ethernet interface by roughly 3Mbps (for T1) or 4Mbps (for E1). This page toggles between T1 and E1, as required, by clicking the Set to T1 or Set to E1 button. A warning displays that a reboot is necessary, and the radio reboots if the administrator continues. This will interrupt traffic. It may be necessary to re-login to the radio after the reboot completes. T1/E1 mode self-coordinates across the link if the link is active. This means that it only needs to be set while connected at one end. In addition, enabling and disabling T1/E1 circuits also self-coordinates across the link if the link is active. If a link is not active and T1/E1 enabling is a mismatch when a link is first created, the Radio A configuration for T1/E1 enabling supersedes the settings on the Radio B configuration, and changes the settings on Radio B. Note: Certain combinations of the TDD Frame Size, Link Distance, Mode, and Bandwidth parameter settings limit the number of T1/E1 circuits that can be carried by the radio. In these cases, certain fields on the T1/E1 Interface Configuration pages are not available, starting with the highest port number. For example, for a 4x T1/E1 radio version, if only three (3) circuits can be carried, port 4 is not available for configuration and is disabled. If only two circuits can be carried, both ports 3 and 4 are not available. Increasing the TDD frame size and Mode parameters, and/or increasing the Bandwidth parameter results in an increase in the supported number of T1/E1 circuits. T1 Interface Configuration Page This page allows the administrator to enable/disable each individual T1 channel, set the Line Build Out
(LBO), Line Code (either AMI or B8ZS), and AIS enabling/disabling for each input. If enabled, the radio places an AIS code on the output of the associated interface if and when the link fails or when there is no T1 signal available from the far end to provide the user at the local end. Loopback controls are also provided (see T1/E1 Loopback). 57 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Figure 31 T1 Interface Configuration page E1 Interface Configuration Page This page allows the administrator to enable/disable each individual E1 channel. The AIS can also be enabled and disabled for each input. If enabled, the radio places an AIS code on the output of the associated interface if and when the link fails or when there is no E1 signal available from the far end to provide the user at the local end. Loopback controls are also provided (see T1/E1 Loopback). Figure 32 E1 Interface Configuration page 201872-003 2015-10-23 58 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios T1/E1 Loopback Loopback is provided for any enabled T1 or E1 port. As shown in Figure 33 and Figure 34, the choices are:
No Loopback (default) External (local) External (remote) Internal Note: Only one Internal loopback can be enabled at any time. All loopback configurations control the loop at the Line Interface integrated circuit, which is the device wired directly to the front panel ports. External loopback modes are used in conjunction with an external test source. The designation of local or remote refers to where the loopback is occurring relative to the location where the loopback is implemented. That is, on the radio being accessed, if External (remote) is selected, this loops the signal back at the remote radio interface back towards the local radio. Likewise, if External (local) is selected, the signal loops back at the local interface towards the remote radio (Figure 33 and Figure 34). Figure 33 External (remote) loopback Figure 34 External (local) loopback When a local T1/E1 port is configured for External (remote) loopback, it is the same as configuring the remote radio for External (local) loopback. Internal loopback uses an internal test source, and sends the test source signal across the link, looped at the remote radios interface, returned to the local radio, and looped at the local radios interface back to the source. The inputs at both ends are looped back at the line level. Figure 35 illustrates the internal loopback function. Figure 35 Internal loopback 59 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios GPS Information Page This page provides information on how many GPS satellites are within the view of the Exalt GPS receiver. This page is active for implementations that include the GPS receiver connection for synchronization. This information can be helpful for troubleshooting GPS issues. Figure 36 GPS Information page 201872-003 2015-10-23 60 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Alarms Page This page provides an easy-to-read summary of the alarm status of both local and remote radios. The colors on this page reflect the color of the alarms displayed on the radio front panel. However, additional detail displays on this page to aid in quick assessment of issues and status. Figure 37 Alarms page Table 6 lists alarm status conditions that appear on this page. Table 6 Alarm status indicators Label Status Link System Link V Link H DFS V DFS H Collocation 61 Indicates RF link status for the entire link (all active polarizations):
Green Solid = Error-free connection (BER<10e-6) Yellow Solid = Errored connection (10e-3>BER >10e-6) Red Solid = No link (BER>10e-3) Same as Link System, but only for the Vertical polarization link connection. Same as Link System, but only for the Horizontal polarization link connection.
(5GHz models only) Indicates the status of the Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) for the Vertical polarization connection. Green = No DFS activity, normal transmission Red = Either CAC or NOP is in progress.
(5GHz models only) Same as DFS V, but for the Horizontal polarization connection. Indicates the enabled/disabled status with Internal or GPS sync and current alarm status. Green Solid = Sync enabled and sync input present Yellow Solid = Sync enabled and missing proper sync input in flywheel operation period Red Solid = Sync enabled and missing proper sync input signal and flywheel period expired 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Table 6 Alarm status indicators (Continued) Label Status EthernetPoE(1) EthernetETH2 T1/E1 Input Link Security Temperature Green Solid = Data present at PoE(1) connection Off = No data present Same as PoE(1), but for the ETH2 connection. Green = Enabled and connection present (clocking confirmed) Red = Enabled and no connection present Grey = Disabled or unavailable due to configuration Green Solid = Link security key is matching at both ends Yellow Solid = Link security key is mismatched at both ends Green Solid = Normal temperature range Yellow Solid = Exceeding normal temperature range The Temperature alarm monitors the internal temperature of the unit based on specific points inside the radio chassis. It is normal for the internal temperature to be above the ambient temperature, so the temperature reading may be higher than the highest specified ambient temperature. When the internal electronics reach a point that is higher than the normal temperature rise at the highest ambient temperature, the temperature alarm turns yellow. Power down the radio as soon as possible, and investigate the cause of the temperature rise before the radio is put back into service. In almost all cases, a temperature alarm is due to an external cause. 201872-003 2015-10-23 62 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Performance Page This page provides statistical information about the performance of the system in relation to the integrity of the user data and the RF link. Where applicable, the Performance page shows system performance as a whole, and provides separate performance information for the two polarizations:
Vertical (V) and Horizontal (H). Figure 38 Performance page The Current BER field indicates the current bit error rate of the link. If the link is operating perfectly, this should indicate zero. Generally, the link should remain at a BER less than 1x10-6 (1 bit out of every million bits errored). This is the threshold performance specification and the standard to which the link was engineered. However, radio links can and are affected by weather, interference, and other external sources and will occasionally have a higher error rate. A link remains operational unless the BER exceeds 1x10-3 (1 bit out of every hundred bits errored). Consult the link design engineer for an understanding of the predicted error rate of the radio link as it has been designed. Many applications are unaffected by bit errors, but TDM circuits (for example, T1 or E1) are more sensitive. Also, if the link operator is providing a service guarantee, this value may need to be monitored or examined in cases of service issues. The behavior of BER in relation to other alarms or measurements and external events can be very helpful in troubleshooting activities. Errored Seconds (ES) indicates the total number of seconds that occurred where there was at least one bit error since the last time that the radio statistics counter was reset. Generally, ES are not a significant concern, so long as they are not continuous or above the anticipated performance based on the original link engineering goals. If ES are continuous or at a high rate, this is normally an indication of poor link performance due to poor RSL or interference, or severe impact by weather or other environmental factors. However, similar to the performance factors previously listed, ES can and will occur in any radio link. Once again, consult the link engineer to determine the original design goals, and compare actual performance to these expectations to determine if any improvements are necessary or if other problems may be causing excessive ES. 63 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Note: Unavailable Seconds do not register as ES. In other words, the ES counter counts all seconds that are errored NOT INCLUDING the seconds that were classified as unavailable. The total number of seconds with errors or outages is the sum of ES and Unavailable Seconds. Unavailable Seconds (also called UAS) are similar to ES, but this counter keeps track of every second where the bit error rate equals or exceeds 1x10-3, as well as any seconds where there is a complete loss of radio communication, over the period since the last counter reset. If Unavailable Seconds are continuous or at a high rate, this is normally an indication of poor link performance due to poor RSL or interference, or severe impact by weather or other environmental factors. However, similar to the performance factors listed above, Unavailable Seconds can and do occur in any radio link. Consult the link engineer to determine the original design goals, and compare actual performance to these expectations to determine if any improvements are necessary or if other problems may be causing excessive Unavailable Seconds. Current RSL is the measurement of the received signal level at the radio antenna port. This is the measured level of the RF signal coming from the opposite end of the radio link. The link was engineered to a specific RSL by the link design engineer, and this RSL should be obtained during installation and remain relatively stable during the operation of the link. RSL can and will vary as a result of weather changes and other external sources, such as path obstructions. Once again, this variation was part of the original design to achieve a certain level of performance over time. Bit errors occur when the RSL falls to a level within roughly 3dB of the threshold specification. When the RSL falls below the threshold specification, the link disconnects and will not reconnect until the RSL is above the threshold specification. The behavior of RSL in relation to other alarms or measurements and external events can be very helpful in troubleshooting activities. Minimum RSL indicates the worst (lowest) received signal level that occurred since the last counter reset. It is helpful to know if the RSL dropped significantly from the normal level, or has reached a level near or below threshold. Minimum RSL Timestamp indicates the date and time when the Minimum RSL occurred. This is helpful for general troubleshooting, and especially comparing to items in the event log or diagnostic charts from the same time period. Maximum RSL indicates the best (highest) RSL that occurred since the last counter reset. This indicates the best performance of the radio link, which is normally equal to the installed value, and is usually the designed value. Time Since Reset indicates the amount of time passed since the last counter reset. This helps to quantify the seriousness of other statistics, such as ES and Unavailable Seconds, if there have been high numbers of ES and/or Unavailable Seconds over a relatively short period of time. All end-of-link statistics on this page can be independently reset using the reset statistics button. It is good practice to reset the statistics at the time that the link is commissioned (after all antenna alignment is complete and stable RSL at designed levels is achieved, and no more system reboots are anticipated). Regularly review this page regularly, make records of the performance, and reset the statistics so that the counters can more precisely pinpoint issues. Note: Resetting statistics from one end also resets the statistics for the same radio at the opposite end. That is, if the Local statistics are reset, logging into the remote end shows the Remote statistics on that end (which is the local radio in the first condition) as being reset at the same time. 201872-003 2015-10-23 64 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Event Log Page Use this page to review a list of the events logged by the radio. The following items are listed in the event log:
Alarms Alarms clearing (Normal) Radio Reboots Every event is tagged with the time that the event occurred, and a severity and type. The event log also allows filtering to limit the view of the log to the lowest level of desired information. For example, a filter level of Minor displays Minor, Major, and Critical severity events. The log contains the last 1000 events. Events are deleted on a FIFO basis, erasing the oldest entries to make room for the newest entries. The event log can be cleared and be downloaded from the radio (some models may require a software upgrade to enable this feature). A screen capture of the browser window can serve as a useful record. Figure 39 Event Log page 65 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Diagnostic Charts Page Use this page as an aid in troubleshooting. This page illustrates the historical (and current) performance for three parameters: RSL, Radio Temperature, and BER. For RSL and BER, the user can select to see each polarization separately (Vertical and Horizontal) or summed together for an overview of total system performance. The horizontal scale illustrates 120 points of time measurement and is synchronized on all three graphs. The scale displays in minutes, hours, or days from the last two hours (120 minutes), five days
(120 hours), or four months (120 days). All information is stored, so all of these periods are available for short- and long-term performance analysis. The right side of a graph represents the most recent measurement, and data marches from the right-to-left at every interval. The vertical scale of each chart independently scales to show the maximum resolution based on the maximum variation of the data over the selected time measurement. Figure 40 Diagnostic Charts page Use the cursor to point to any spot on any of the three charts, and all three charts illustrate the measurements taken for that time interval in the upper-left corner of each chart. The time interval is indicated by T=(value). This is followed by the value of the measurement, listing the highest value, lowest value and average value measured over that time interval. For example, in Figure 40 the displayed time interval is minutes, and the cursor is held at the T=17 mark on the horizontal axis. The measurements shown indicate performance from 17 minutes ago. The high/low/average values shown on each chart are measurements made across that specific one-hour interval. 201872-003 2015-10-23 66 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Changes in RSL often have an impact on BER, and this can be confirmed by looking for synchronized events. When BER events occur without corresponding changes in RSL, this normally indicates interference, atmospheric changes, transmission system issues (such as problems with cables, connectors or antennas), or possibly radio hardware problems. It is also useful to help determine if changes in radio temperature are occurring, and if they are having any impact on RSL or BER. If the radio is mounted in an environmentally controlled location, this has less relevance. However, temperature monitoring can be helpful to ensure that the radio is operating within specifications. Use the independent V (Vertical) and H (Horizontal) selections to diagnose issues that might be dependent upon polarization or only effecting part of the system. Comparing the two can indicate if the issues are the same independent of polarization. 67 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Spectrum Analyzer Page The spectrum analyzer feature provides a useful pre-planning and troubleshooting tool. Perform a spectrum analysis after deployment and just before commissioning to maintain a record of the spectrum at the time of deployment. Figure 41 shows the Spectrum Analyzer page. Note that both polarizations are independently measured when a scan is performed. Generally, a clear spectrum is required for both polarizations for the radio to run in dual-polarization mode. Figure 41 Spectrum Analyzer page While a professional spectrum analyzer provides higher levels of control and precision for pre-
planning, the Spectrum Analyzer page allows evaluation of the RF spectrum as seen at the radios RF input port prior to deployment. This is useful for pre-planning the center frequency and occupied bandwidth, and to determine polarization and antenna type and mounting locations. For troubleshooting, enable the spectrum analyzer to scan the desired segment or full band of the frequency range. Select the step size and set the remote radio transmitter ON or OFF. This allows viewing of the clean spectrum without the remote transmitter on and a comparison of the remote transmitter in the midst of other signals. 201872-003 2015-10-23 68 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Note: Enabling the spectrum analyzer interrupts all radio traffic for the duration of the analysis. In addition, access to the radios GUI may also be interrupted, depending on the location of the interfaced computer relative to the radio where the spectrum analysis is occurring. The GUI is available at the completion of the spectrum analysis. Use the smallest step size to obtain the finest view of the spectrum. The spectrum analyzer can be set to match the start and stop frequency for a dwell mode. Peak and average detection modes are also available. Peak detection is helpful for capturing intermittent events such as pulsed emissions. It is best to set the Scan Time option to a time value as opposed to using the infinity setting. If your management computer is connected to the radio through the radio link, access to the GUI is interrupted during the duration of the analysis. Note: The result of selecting infinity may be complete loss of contact to that radio and may require a physical visit to the radio location to disable the spectrum analyzer. The spectrum analyzer graph displays received signals in red or green (Figure 42), normalized in dBm to the resolution bandwidth of the analyzer. Red indicates a peak hold function. This is the highest level detected during the entire scan. Green indicates the last value measured at that frequency. Figure 42 Spectrum analyzer graph example A completely green vertical box indicates that the signal maintained a steady level for the entire scan or that the last scan measured at a strong or stronger level than the rest of the analysis. A completely red vertical box indicates that there was a signal at some point during the scan, but that the signal was not detected at the last scan. A graph displaying green on the lower part and red at the upper part indicates that at some time during the scan, a signal was detected at a higher level than was detected during the last scan. The last spectrum analyzer scan performed displays in this page until the radio is rebooted. You can do a screen capture for record keeping and for comparison to future analyses. The time and date of the analysis displays on the page, which is handy as a reference in a screen capture. 69 201872-003 2015-10-23 Reboot Page Use this page to reboot the radio. The function may never be required, but can be used in emergencies. All configurations that require a reboot automatically reboot on administrator confirmation. Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Figure 43 Reboot page 201872-003 2015-10-23 70 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Manual Page The manual (this document or the version that matches the installed firmware) is available within the GUI. Adobe Acrobat Reader 5.5 or higher is required (go to www.adobe.com to download Acrobat Reader). Click the Manual link to display the manual within the browser window. Once the manual displays, click the save button on the PDF toolbar to download the manual locally. Figure 44 Manual page 71 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Specifications This section presents specifications for the EX-r Series GigE of Digital Microwave Radios. Physical Specifications Integrated Antenna Models Physical Configuration Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Operating Temperature Altitude Humidity Environmental Outdoor unit (ODU) 14.6 x 14.6x 3.8"/37 x 37 x 9.7 cm 12 lbs; 5.5 kg 40 to +149F /40 to +65C 15,000'/4.6 km 100% condensing NEMA4/IP56 Connectorized Antenna Models Physical Configuration Dimensions (H x W x D) Weight Operating Temperature Altitude Humidity Environmental Outdoor unit (ODU) 14.6 x 14.6x 2.5"/37 x 37 x 6.4 cm 12 lbs; 5.5 kg 40 to +149F /40 to +65C 15,000'/4.6 km 100% condensing NEMA4/IP56 201872-003 2015-10-23 72 1MHz; 5MHz for and some regulatory domains 0.5dB Mode 1 (QPSK); Mode 2 (16QAM) 0.5, 1, 2, 2.5, 4, 5 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Common System Specifications Tuning Resolution Power Control Step Size Selectable Modulation Modes Selectable Frame Lengths (ms) Maximum Aggregate User Capacity, single polarization a Mbps 8/10MHz Maximum Aggregate User Capacity, dual-polarized Error Floor Frequency Stability Link Security 16/20MHza 32MHz 64MHza Mbps 8/10MHz 16/20MHza 32MHz 64MHza 10-12
+7 ppm 96-bit Security Code Mode 1 Mode 2 13 27 55 110 27 55 110 220 Mode 1 Mode 2 26 55 110 220 55 108 220 440 a. Not all bandwidth and mode combinations are available on all radio models. For some regulatory domains, the 8MHz Bandwidth setting displays as 10MHz, and the 16MHz Bandwidth setting displays as 20MHz. Some radios may require specific software license keys, which can be purchased from your authorized Exalt representative. 73 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios System Specifications, 4.5GHz Band Frequency Band Output Power (at full power) Output Power (at minimum power) Selectable Channel Bandwidths Receiver Threshold (BER=10-6) 4400 to 4900MHz
+24dBm (0.25W) Mode 1, +21dBm Mode 2 (0.13W)
+4dBm 8MHz, 16MHz, 32MHz, 64MHza dBm 8MHz 16MHz 32MHz 64MHza Mode 1 Mode 2
-86
-83
-80
-77
-78
-75
-72
-69 Maximum RSL Regulatory Compliance Emission Designator(s) Mode 1: -25dBm error-free; 0dBm no damage FCC Part 15, EN 60950-1, UL 60950-1 8MHz 16MHz 32MHz 64MHza 7M8W7D 15M7W7D 30M9W7D 60M8W7D a. Certain combinations of Bandwidth, Mode, and Cross-polarization are enabled through software option. 201872-003 2015-10-23 74 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios System Specifications, 5.3GHz Band Frequency Band Tunable Range Output Power (at full power) Output Power (at minimum power) Selectable Channel Bandwidths Receiver Threshold (BER=10-6) 5250 to 5350MHz 5260 to 5332MHz
+13dBm (0.02W)
-7dBm 8MHz, 16MHz, 32MHz, 64MHza dBm 8MHz 16MHz 32MHz 64MHza Mode 1 Mode 2
-86
-83
-80
-77
-78
-75
-72
-69 Maximum RSL Non-overlapping channels Regulatory Compliance FCC ID IC ID Emission Designator(s) Mode 1: -25dBm error-free; 0dBm no damage 8MHz: 10; 16MHz: 5; 32MHz: 2; 64MHza: 1 FCC 15.407; IC RSS-210 TTM-105P25M 6254A-105P25R 8MHz 16MHz 32MHz 64MHza 7M8W7D 15M7W7D 30M9W7D 60M8W7D a. A firmware option is required to enable 64MHz BW in jurisdictions where it is permitted. For some regulatory domains, the 8MHz Bandwidth setting displays as 10MHz, and the 16MHz Bandwidth setting displays as 20MHz. 75 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios System Specifications, 5.4GHz Band Frequency Band Tunable Range Output Power (at full power) Output Power (at minimum power) Selectable Channel Bandwidths Receiver Threshold (BER=10-6) 5470 to 5725 MHz 5488 to 5715 MHz
+13dBm (0.02W)
-7dBm 8MHz, 16MHz, 32MHz, 64MHza dBm 8MHz 16MHz 32MHz 64MHza Mode 1
-86
-83
-80
-77 Mode 2
-78
-75
-72
-69 Maximum RSL Non-overlapping channels Regulatory Compliance FCC ID IC ID Emission Designator(s) Mode 1: -25dBm error-free; 0dBm no damage 8MHz: 29; 16MHz: 14; 32MHz: 7; 64MHza: 3 FCC 15.407; IC RSS-210; ACMA TTM-105P25M 6254A-105P25R 8MHz 16MHz 32MHz 64MHza 8M3W7D 16M7W7D 33M0W7D 65M0W7D a. A firmware option is required to enable 64MHz BW in jurisdictions where it is permitted. For some regulatory domains, the 8MHz Bandwidth setting displays as 10MHz, and the 16MHz Bandwidth set-
ting displays as 20MHz. 201872-003 2015-10-23 76 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios System Specifications, 5.8GHz Band Frequency Band Tunable Range Output Power (at full power) Output Power (at minimum power) Selectable Channel Bandwidths Receiver Threshold (BER=10-6) Maximum RSL Non-overlapping channels Regulatory Compliance FCC ID IC ID Emission Designator(s) 5725 to 5850 MHz 5731 to 5844 MHz
+24dBm (0.25W), Mode 1
+21dBm (0.13W), Mode 2
+4dBm 8MHz, 16MHz, 32MHz, 64MHza
(dBm) 8MHz 16MHz 32MHz 64MHza Mode 1 Mode 2
-86
-83
-80
-77
-78
-75
-72
-69 Mode 1: -25dBm error-free; 0dBm no damage 8MHz: 15; 16MHz: 7; 32MHz: 3; 64MHza: 1 FCC 15.407 (b) (4) (ii); IC RSS-210; ACMA TTM-105P25M 6254A-105P25R 8MHz 16MHz 32MHz 64MHza 8M4W7D 16M7W7D 33M1W7D 64M5W7D a. A firmware option is required to enable 64MHz BW in jurisdictions where it is permitted. For some regulatory domains, the 8MHz Bandwidth setting displays as 10MHz, and the 16MHz Bandwidth set-
ting displays as 20MHz. 77 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Interfaces RF (x2 for EX-4.5r-c GigE and EX-5r-c GigE) Connector Impedance N-type female 50 Ohms TDM (x2, 2 interfaces each) Connector T1 Impedance T1 Line Codes T1 LBO Settings (in ft.) T1 Clocking Speed T1 Compliance E1 Impedance E1 Line Codes E1 Clocking Speed E1 Compliance RJ-45 (RJ48C), female 100 Ohms, balanced AMI, B8ZS, selectable 0-133, 133-266, 266-399, 399-533, 533-655 1.544 Mbps ANSI T1.102-1987; ITU-T; G.823; GR-49T-CORE 120 Ohms, balanced HDB3 2.048 Mbps CEPT-1; G.703; ITU-T-G703 Ethernet (x2) Connectors Interface Speed Duplex Compliance Sync-Out Connector Signal Sync-In Connector Signal Power Power Injector Connector Input Voltage Consumption Integrated Antenna Gain 3dB Beamwidth Polarization 78 RJ-45, female, auto-MDIX 10, 100, or 1000 Mbps Half, full, auto, selectable 802.3 RJ-45, female 0.5 to 5sec pulse, based on frame size setting RJ-45, female From Sync-out or 1pps (GPS) 6-pin barrier strip 48VDC
<65 W (1.35A) 24dBi (midband, EX-5r GigE) 21dBi (midband, EX-4.5r GigE) 9 degrees (EX-5r GigE) 10 degrees (EX-4.5r GigE) Switch-selectable Vertical or Horizontal or Cross 201872-003 2015-10-23 201872-003Interface Connections This section provides the pin number assignment and wiring information for the connectors on the r-Series radios. All connectors are shown as viewed from the radio front panel, as shown in Figure 45. Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Figure 45 EX-r Series GigE connector orientation TDM Connections There are two connectors for TDM; each connector has two TDM circuits available. Figure 46 illustrates the pin orientation and functionality of these connectors. These connectors are disabled on the IP version radios. Pin Function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Tip Out (from radio) Ch.1 & 2 Ring Out (from radio) Ch.1 & 2 Tip Out (from radio) Ch.3 & 4 Tip In (to radio) Ch.1 & 2 Ring In (to radio) Ch.1 & 2 Ring Out (from radio) Ch.3 & 4 Tip In (to radio) Ch.3 & 4 Ring In (to radio) Ch.3 & 4 Figure 46 TDM connectors 201872-003 2015-10-23 79 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios RSL & Sync In Connector This connector can be used during the antenna alignment process, to provide a received signal level
(RSL) voltage to a voltmeter. The connector is also used for connection to the Sync Out connector from a neighboring radio or to an optional Exalt GPS antenna for the purposes of GPS synchronization. Figure 47 illustrates the pin orientation and functionality for this connector. Pin Function 1
+5V out to GPS antenna 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Ground Tx Data to GPS antenna Enable signal to GPS antenna Rx Data from GPS antenna Input sync signal Received Signal Level (RSL) Unused Figure 47 RSL & Sync In connector 80 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Power/Ethernet Connector This connector is the primary connector on the radio, and must be connected to provide power to the radio, and primary Ethernet communications for traffic and Ethernet. Figure 48 illustrates the pin orientation and functionality for this connector. The Ethernet connector implements Auto-MDIX, and therefore either straight or crossover Ethernet cables may be used, independent of the wiring of the connected device. The wiring follows typical wiring for Power-over-Ethernet (PoE), however the power consumption requirement for the r-Series radio does not allow for standard (802.3af) PoE, and only the Exalt power injector shall be used. In addition, the Exalt power injector provides critical reset capability that would not be available from a generic PoE injector, even if the power consumption requirement is met. Pin Function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Paired with Pin 2 Paired with Pin 1 Paired with Pin 6
+DC Power (48V) In
+DC Power (48V) In Paired with Pin 3
-DC Power (48V) In
-DC Power (48V) In Figure 48 Power/Ethernet connector Ethernet 2 Connector This is the secondary connector for Ethernet on the radio. Use it to connect other networking equipment to the radio system or for the primary data interface when the Power/Ethernet connector is being used for out-of-band management applications. The pin assignments are the same for this connector as the PoE(1) connector, but without any power connections. 201872-003 2015-10-23 81 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Antennas Table 7 lists antennas supported by the 5r-c GigE models for use in the USA. In some countries, antennas exceeding a certain level of gain may be unlawful. Refer to RF Output Power Setting for details on regulatory limits. Table 7 Supported antennas Description Manufacturer Model #
2-foot Dish P2F-52-N Andrew 2-foot Xpol Dish PX2F-52-N Andrew 3-foot Dish P3F-52-N Andrew 3-foot Xpol Dish PX3F-52-N Andrew 4-foot Dish P4F-52-N Andrew 4-foot Xpol Dish PX4F-52-N Andrew HP2F-52-NPA 2-foot HP Dish Andrew HPX2F-52-NPA 2-foot Xpol HP Andrew HP3F-52-NPA 3-foot HP Dish Andrew HPX3F-52-NPA 3-foot Xpol HP Andrew HP4F-52-NPA 4-foot HP Dish Andrew HPX4F-52-NPA 4-foot Xpol HP Andrew HP6F-52-NPA 6-foot HP Dish Andrew HPX6F-52-NPA 6-foot Xpol HP Andrew DFPD2-52 Gabriel QF2-52-N Gabriel QF2.5-52-N Gabriel QF4-52-N Gabriel QFD2-52 Gabriel QFD2.5-52 Gabriel QFD4-52 Gabriel HQF2-52-N Gabriel HQF4-52-N Gabriel HQF6-52-N Gabriel HQFD2-52 Gabriel HQFD2.5-52 Gabriel HQFD4-52 Gabriel HQFD6-52 Gabriel MT-486004 MTI MT-486001 MTI FP2-5-28 Radio Waves Radio Waves SP2-5.2 Radio Waves HP2-5.2 SP3-5.2 Radio Waves SP4-5.2 Radio Waves Radio Waves SPD2-5.2 2-foot Panel 2-foot Dish 2.5-foot Dish 4-foot Dish 2-foot Xpol Dish 2.5-foot Xpol Dish 4-foot Xpol Dish 2-foot HP Dish 4-foot HP Dish 6-foot HP Dish 2-foot Xpol HP 2.5-foot Xpol HP 4-foot Xpol HP 6-foot Xpol HP 18-inch Panel 2-foot Panel 2-foot Panel 2-foot Dish 2-foot HP Dish 3-foot Dish 4-foot Dish 2-foot Xpol Dish Midband Gain (dBi) 29.4 29.4 33.4 33.4 34.9 34.9 29.0 29.0 33.0 33.0 34.5 34.5 37.2 37.2 28.0 28.5 31.2 34.8 28.4 31.1 34.7 28.2 34.4 37.4 28.1 30.7 34.3 37.3 26.0 28.0 28.0 29.0 28.6 32.0 34.8 28.1 82 3dB (Azimuth/Elevation) Beamwidth (degrees) 5.4 5.4 3.8 3.8 3.0 3.0 5.4 5.4 3.8 3.8 3.0 3.0 1.8 1.8 4.6 5.6 4.4 2.7 5.6 4.4 2.7 5.7 2.8 1.9 5.7 4.5 2.8 1.9 6.0 4.5 4.5 6.1 6.1 4.0 3.0 6.2 201872-003 2015-10-23 Table 7 Supported antennas (Continued) Manufacturer Model #
Radio Waves Radio Waves Radio Waves RFS RFS RFS RFS RFS RFS RFS Description 3-foot Xpol Dish 4-foot Xpol Dish 6-foot Xpol Dish 2-foot Dish 3-foot Dish 4-foot Dish 6-foot Dish 4-foot HP Dish 6-foot HP Dish SPD3-5.2 SPD4-5.2 SPD6-5.2 SPF2-52A SPF3-52A SPF4-52A SPF6-52A SDF4-52A SDF6-52A MA0528-28AN 2-foot Panel Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Midband Gain (dBi) 31.1 34.4 37.5 27.9 31.4 33.9 37.4 33.9 37.4 28.0 3dB (Azimuth/Elevation) Beamwidth (degrees) 4.2 3.1 2.1 6.2 4.2 3.1 2.1 3.1 2.1 4.5 201872-003 2015-10-23 83 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Troubleshooting This section provides information regarding troubleshooting of common issues and alarms on these radios. Exalt Digital Microwave Radio systems are designed by Exalts expert engineers with extensive experience through multiple generations of microwave radio design. These new-generation systems contain extensive diagnostic tools, alarm indications, and troubleshooting aids. And, as compared to other systems in their class, are easier to install, maintain, and troubleshoot. The GUI provides information to aid in troubleshooting (see Diagnostic Charts Page). Contact Exalt Customer Care for further assistance with issues with your Exalt radio and with suggestions on how the radio and documentation can be improved. General Practices Troubleshooting a microwave radio link can be a complex task. Approach troubleshooting as a process of elimination, and first determine which portions of the system are operating properly. In a vast majority of cases, failures or poor performance of microwave links is attributed to something other than the microwave radio hardware. In this respect, the back-to-back bench test (see Back-to-
back Bench Testing) is very important to determine if radio hardware is operating properly and eliminate many variables in the troubleshooting process. If a back-to-back bench test fails, then the radio hardware is either broken or the radios are improperly configured. Upgrade the radio to the most current release of firmware, and/or reset the radio to its critical factory settings, following the quick start guide instructions and those in Configuration and Management, helps to confirm if configuration issues cause failure. The most common issues with microwave radio links are:
An improperly terminated RF cable Multipath propagation RF interference Path obstruction Misaligned antenna Moisture in the transmission system (antenna feed and/or RF cable) If the radio link has been operating without issues and is exhibiting new poor performance behavior or becomes completely inoperative, the troubleshooting process should pay close attention to any conditions that may have changed between the time when the system was working without issue and the time when the issues started. Also, it can be helpful to compare some performance parameters of the system before and after the presence of issues. Often the source of the issues can be determined by thoughtful consideration of changes, such as:
Changes in weather, including high winds Changes made to the radio equipment, transmission system, or connected equipment New radio systems or electronic equipment the nearby radio or transmission system Faulty antenna Improper grounding Insufficient link margin in the design/implementation 84 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Tree growth, flooded fields, or changes in rivers/lakes along the path T1/E1 enabling matches at each end of the link Link security key matches at each end of the link Link distance matches at each end of the link TDD Frame Length matches at each end of the link Endpoint Identifier is different at each end of the link (one end Radio A, one end Radio B) Ethernet interfaces are enabled, as desired New construction nearby either end of the link, or along the path Verify that configurations are set as follows:
RF matches at each end of the link Bandwidth matches at each end of the link AUX Ethernet is set for in-band or out-of-band NMS, as desired Also, use the ExaltCalc tool in the design phase to determine the optimum setting for the Bandwidth and TDD Frame Length parameters for the given link distance, and provides guidance to the expected RF link performance, as well as throughput, latency, and number of supported T1/E1 circuits. Typical Indications of Issues In many cases, microwave radio users do not notice changes or degradation to the radio system until the radio system fails completely or becomes highly errored or significantly intermittent. However, regular management of the radio system can help indicate changes in performance that have not yet impacted user performance, but may impact performance at a later date if left unchecked or unaddressed. The administrator can use this as an opportunity to be proactive and monitor the radio link performance regularly, watching for unexplained or unexpected changes in performance and trends in performance changes. Most importantly, monitoring radio system RSL over time indicates the performance of the radio system. Address any long-term drop in RSL and erratic or unsteady RSL. Some RSL changes are expected and weather patterns and the related multipath can cause dramatic RSL changes resulting in system outage. However, that outage should not occur at a significantly greater rate than the designed long-term performance. Consult the path design engineer for more information about link reliability expectations and anticipated RSL deviation. In addition, regular inspection of the transmission system (RF cables and antennas) and paying close attention to changes along the path, such as construction or tree height, or new microwave radio installations nearby, can be extremely helpful and proactive. When link performance is very poor, alarms on the radio front panel and within the radios management system indicates particular failures. Consult this manual for more information on the specific alarms and diagnostics, or contact Exalt Customer Care for assistance. Exalt Customer Care is primarily motivated to determine if the radio hardware is faulty and require return for repair, and to help execute an effective and efficient repair and return process for radio terminals believed to be faulty. However, Exalt Customer Care provides advice regarding the total radio system and RF path engineering and environment, and advises on troubleshooting. End users should first contact the installer and/or designer of the system. In many cases, an in-depth understanding of RF design is required, and on-site analysis and special test equipment, may be 201872-003 2015-10-23 85 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios necessary. Compared to phone support from Exalt Customer Care, troubleshooting is much more expeditious if the professional installer and/or link designer examines the system and reviews the management information in the GUI. In turn, if the professional installer and/or link designer contacts Exalt Customer Care, the process to rectify the system is much more expedient due to the in-depth knowledge related to the implementation and the RF environment. Improper RF Cable Termination Improper RF cable termination is a very common problem. In many cases, this is a problem that occurs during installation and is not a problem that suddenly appears. However, if cables are moved or flexed, especially near the termination points, and radio errors, changes in RSL, or other performance issues occur, this is a certain sign of this issue. Another relatively easy method to test for this condition is to decrease the output power of the radio system (at each end, one end at a time). A poor RF cable termination may be reflecting too much RF energy back into the radio system, and reducing output power reduces the reflected energy at a faster rate than the transmitted energy towards the far end. Be careful not to reduce the output power to the point where the radios threshold is reached. Typically, a reduction of just 3 to 6dB is enough to determine if this is the issue. If the reduction of output power clears the error condition, this is the likely cause. Use a reflectometer or meter that can read VSWR at the operating frequency to identify poor terminations as well as poor antenna feeds. Note: The Praxsym VSWR meter is an excellent tool for this purpose. Multipath Propagation Multipath propagation is a term that encompasses changes to the RF path, such as reflections and/or refraction, causing partial or complete destruction of the radio signal, and thus excessive bit errors and/
or system outages. Rapid changes in temperature, inversion layers, humidity, air pressure, water evaporation, as well as standing water or moisture on objects along the path are all examples of changes that can cause multipath propagation. New building construction near either end of the path or along the path can cause new reflection characteristics. If your system has been operating without issue and is suddenly experiencing issues that are symptomatic of a certain time of day or related to change in climatic events or some of the external factors listed above, this is likely the cause. Consult a professional RF path engineer in these cases. Often, minor repositioning of the antennas at either or both ends can reduce or eliminate these problems. RF Interference RF interference is usually indicative of another radio system nearby either end of your radio system or aimed towards one or both ends of your radio system usually at or near the same frequency and usually with a similar signal level. Other forms of RF interference also exist, such as electronic equipment placed close to the radio chassis or transmitters that couple onto the cabling or grounding system of the radio. Microwave ovens and wireless communication devices used near the equipment or cabling are examples of electronic equipment interference. 86 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Note: Exalt Digital Microwave Radios operate in license-exempt bands. Microwave ovens, wireless Internet devices and cordless phone technology may also use this frequency band. It may be necessary to separate the radio chassis, cabling system and antenna from these devices. RF interference, like most other causes of problems, is indicated by significant bit errors and/or system outages. One means to determine presence of interference is the use of a spectrum analyzer that covers the same range as the radio system. A professional RF engineer can use a spectrum analyzer to locate sources of interference, measure these sources, and determine potential remedies to take to operate in the presence of interference. If a spectrum analyzer is not available, the radios RSL port can help determine RSL levels of interfering signals. By turning the far-end radio off, the residual RSL measured by the radio indicates the level of interference seen by the radio. It is possible that interference levels below that which can be measured still have an impact on the radio system especially if the radio system has low fade margin or is using a high order modulation. Exalt Digital Microwave Radios provides considerable flexibility to tune to different frequencies across the bands within which they operate. This is the easiest method to use to try to avoid existing interference. In addition, the occupied bandwidth of the radio can be reduced. This, along with re-
tuning, can be very effective, however throughput is reduced. Repositioning the antenna and/or changing polarization, or upgrading the antenna to a higher gain, and/or using a high-performance antenna, are all secondary means that can be used. It may be necessary to perform combinations of both radio changes (retuning, occupied bandwidth reduction) and antenna system changes (position, polarization, upgrade). Path Obstruction A path obstruction is defined as an object, such as a building or tree, impeding the proper path of the radio system. If the system design was proper at the time of installation and issues arise at a later date, an updated path profile and survey may be necessary to identify changes in path clearance. Misaligned Antenna At the time of initial installation, it is critical that the antennas at each end are properly aligned and that the designed RSL is achieved. However, antennas may become misaligned due to high winds, changes in the guy-wiring systems keeping the antenna mast stable, or loosening of the antenna mounting hardware. A reduction in the RSL of the link is symptomatic of this condition, but this condition is not the only condition that results in a reduction of RSL. However, if conditions occur where the antenna alignment may be suspected, the mechanics must be inspected and the antennas realigned. Faulty Antenna (EX-4.5r-c GigE and EX-5r-c GigE) A faulty antenna is rare, but is still a possibility. In some cases, the mechanics of the antenna feed can get moisture inside, or a bad or weak connection in the pin and connector structure of the antenna may occur. A VSWR measurement of the antenna connection can be made to verify this condition. Improper Grounding In addition to being a potential human safety issue, improper system grounding is a somewhat common condition that can cause continuous bit errors or bit errors when metal objects come in 201872-003 2015-10-23 87 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios contact with the radio, transmission system, or racking system. If touching the radio causes errors, grounding is the cause. It can be difficult to identify grounding problems, but a professional electrician can normally inspect a system and identify if there are deficiencies in the grounding system. Insufficient Link Margin Ideally, the link was designed with enough link margin (fade margin) to allow for multipath propagation and atmospheric fading and still remain reliable. In some cases, link margin is compromised by economic factors, such as using low-cost RF cabling or lower-cost antennas that have less gain or deficient performance compared to higher cost transmission system components. In some cases, there may be antenna size restrictions that forced the design to not have the desired amount of link margin. If the link was designed with poor link margin, there are likely many cases of bit errors and outages. The antenna system and transmission line can be upgraded to help reduce this. If the link design was installed with sufficient margin, but RSL is reduced, the remaining link margin may no longer be enough to maintain a reliable link. The causes of RSL reduction were previously described, but are usually due to new path obstruction(s) or antenna misalignment due to wind or mechanical factors. The antenna height or location can be changed to overcome new obstructions. Realignment of the antenna, and/or improvement to mechanical structures can help overcome antenna misalignment. Moisture in the Transmission System If the connectors on cables and antennas and egress junctions are not properly weatherproofed, moisture can get into the transmission system and cause significant error conditions and erratic performance. In many cases, the transmission system must be replaced. A VSWR meter is one means to identify such issues. Conduct physical inspections often. If changes to the weatherproofing (such as cracking) are noticed, replace the weatherproofing before leakage occurs. 88 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Back-to-back Bench Testing Use back-to-back bench testing to test the radio before installation, pre-configure the radio and connected equipment before installation, or in the troubleshooting process to identify if the radio hardware is the source of a system issue. It is a critical process, and often required or highly desirable for any installation or troubleshooting exercise. This section describes how to properly configure the radio hardware and accessories for a proper back-to-back bench test. For radio testing, there are two types of back-to-back configurations:
1 Basic test (test general operation) 2 Specification performance verification Basic Test The basic test is a simple test of radio functionality. It verifies that the radios are properly configured to communicate to one another, and verifies general radio performance as operational. For the basic test, the following items are needed:
Radio pair RF interconnect cable(s) (any length short is best) Fixed or variable attenuation, between 60 and 90dB (note: attenuation for basic test does not to be calibrated or precise) Powering source Computer/terminal with either serial or Ethernet port (helpful, but not necessary) If no computer is available, use the temporary hardware configuration key or DIP switch, depending on radio model (see Initial Configuration and Back-to-Back Bench Test) Connect the items as follows:
1 Connect attenuation and (known-good) RF cable(s) between radio pair, shown in Figure 49. 2 Configure one radio as Radio A; the other as Radio B 3 Power on radio pair Figure 49 Basic back-to-back bench test configuration After connecting and powering on, observe the front panel LEDs to verify that the LINK and STATUS LEDs are green. If so, the radios are communicating and all radio-related alarm conditions are normal. 201872-003 2015-10-23 89 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios It can be beneficial to have a computer to verify configuration in case of red LEDs or to pre-configure the radio as desired for operation. Follow the instructions in Configuration and Management. Specification Performance Verification The specification performance verification is a more detailed test that allows you to verify that the radios output power and threshold specifications are being met. This is typically a test that would only be performed in a troubleshooting scenario, but can be performed before installation to provide a detailed record or ensure radio performance before installation. This test is identical to the basic test, but in place of the fixed attenuation, it requires the use of calibrated variable attenuation, or a set of calibrated fixed attenuators, or a combination of both, adding to a total attenuation value of 120dB, as measured at the operating frequency of the radio. In addition, a volt meter or computer is also required. Connect the system as shown in Figure 49, using the combination of fixed and variable attenuation between the radios RF ports. Connect the volt meter to either radios RSL test point and associated reference ground connection. In this test, it is desirable to use pre-tested RF cables, known to be good, and the insertion loss is known at the operating frequency. If the cables are short (6'/2m or less), you can estimate the loss, including connectors, to be less than 1dB each. The estimate of cable loss is critical to the overall confidence of the measurements made in this test. There are two critical specifications that can be tested in this configuration:
RF output power Radio receiver threshold To measure transmitter output power, simply insert any value of attenuation between the radios between 60 and 90dB. Ensure that both RF output power settings are at maximum. Use the volt meter to measure RSL in both directions. The RSL measured value should match the appropriate value according to the inserted attenuation, such as:
RSL = RF Output Power cabling losses total attenuation Verify output power by adjusting output power using the Exalt GUI (in administration mode) and evaluate the corresponding change to the RSL measurement. For threshold testing, the key is to insert a measured amount of loss that is close to, but not exceeding the radios specified system gain. System gain is the difference between RF output power and receiver threshold. At your selected modulation and bandwidth settings, determine the specified threshold performance, and choose a value of attenuation (including cable losses) that adds to roughly 5 to 15dB less than the system gain. For example, if the threshold for your measurement is -85dBm, the output power is +27dBm, so the system gain is 112dB. Choose a value of total attenuation in the range of roughly 100105dB. Once this attenuation is inserted, verify RSL readings as in the first step, and then, using the GUI, reduce radio output power in 1dB steps until the receiving radio (the one whose output power not being adjusted) Link LED turns from green to yellow. This indicates that threshold has been reached. At this point, verify the equation for system gain using the new output power level setting and verify that the threshold performance is meeting or exceeding the published specification. Note: Due to the variation of measurements and accuracies involved in this test, you may read a measurement that is 1dB to as much as 2dB off of the expected value. It should be of no concern unless the value is more than 3dB worse than expected. 90 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios General Compliance and Safety The usage of radio transmission devices is subject to specific regulatory requirements governed by regional legislation. In most cases, the specific device must be authorized for use in a given country and must be installed and adjusted in accordance with specific radio-frequency settings and in a manner that has been authorized specific to the device itself in accordance with the specific location of the device. Some users may be completely or partially restricted from use of the device. Please consult local governmental agency/agencies for regulatory requirements before use, or contact Exalt or your Exalt authorized dealer for assistance. Do not modify this device in any way without the express written consent of Exalt. Modification voids the manufacturer warranty, and may also be illegal in accordance to government regulations. In addition, there are no user-serviceable parts or assemblies inside the product housing. There may also be voltages, signals, and mechanisms within the device that could be harmful to human safety. The mounting of this device and associated peripherals and connections (inclusive of antenna mast, antenna, cabling, egress, lightning protection devices, grounding, power, and so on) may be subject to regional requirements for health and human safety. A qualified professional installer and an electrician are highly recommended, and may be required by law. 201872-003 2015-10-23 91 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Dynamic Frequency Selection Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) may be required by regional legislation in some frequency bands to avoid causing interference to radar systems. Prior to the start of any transmission, the device equipped with DFS monitors the spectrum and is not permitted to transmit on a part of the spectrum that is already in use for radar transmissions for a period of 30 minutes. During operation of the device, the spectrum is continually monitored by the DFS to detect if radar begins transmission on a frequency that is being used by the device to transmit on. If the DFS software detects radar, the device must move off channel within a specified time period so that the device transmission does not interfere with the radar transmission. The device equipped with DFS is required to stay off that part of the spectrum for a minimum of 30 minutes, after which time the device may then check the spectrum for radar transmissions and begin transmitting if no radar is detected. 92 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Safety Notices 1 Review this entire guide for important installation instructions BEFORE attempting to install this product. 2 This product is intended to be installed, used, and maintained by experienced telecommunications personnel only. 3 Employ a properly licensed or authorized electrician to install or evaluate/certify the installation of all power and grounding related to the use of this equipment and all connected devices. 4 The device(s) shall only be connected to AC power sources provided by the supplier or to DC sources within the device specifications. Use a separate breaker circuit at the power source. 5 Lightning, surge protection devices, and earth grounding are required for most installations to ensure human safety. Consult a qualified electrician. 6 Servicing of this device should be performed by authorized personnel only. Do not disassemble this device. By opening or removing any covers you may expose yourself to hazardous energy parts. Incorrect reassembly of this product can cause a malfunction, and/or electrical shock, when the unit is subsequently used. 7 Do not connect or disconnect the power connection to the device when the power supply is plugged into an AC outlet. To connect, first connect the power connection to the device, and then apply power (or plug in) at the outlet. To disconnect, disengage power at the outlet or unplug, and then disconnect the direct connection to the device. 8 Do not insert any object of any shape or size inside this product at any time, whether powered or not. Objects may contact hazardous energy components that could result in a risk of fire or personal injury. 9 Liquids shall not come in contact with, or enter the inside of the device at any time. 10 Proper ventilation and/or airflow shall be provided surrounding the equipment. Items shall not come in contact with heat-sinking materials. Ensure that ambient operational and storage temperature specifications are maintained at all times. 11 Equipment is suitable for mounting on noncombustible surfaces only. 12 Do not move or alter the marking labels. 13 A CSU or similar isolating device is necessary between the equipment and the public telecommunications network. The equipment has not been evaluated for direct connection to the public telecommunications network. 201872-003 2015-10-23 93 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Regulatory Notices The following notices apply to the EX-5r GigE and EX-5r-c GigE version radios. United States Compliance The EX-r Series GigE product families operate under FCC Rule Part 15.407 as a license-exempt device. They may only be used as a point-to-point transmission device for fixed or temporary-fixed
(non-mobile) installations. The devices are subject to the following restrictions:
Do not use external amplifiers to boost the power or overcome transmission system losses, unless the specific amplifier/cable/antenna combination has expressly been authorized by the FCC. The output power must never exceed +30 dBm. Cross-border transmissions are expressly prohibited, except with written permission from both the FCC and the governing body of the neighboring country (Cofetel for Mexico; Industry Canada for Canada). Use only parabolic dish antennas or directional flat-panel antennas. No other types of antennas
(omni-directional, yagi, and so on) are authorized. Parabolic dishes of either grid or solid type are allowed. Maximum mid-band gain of each type of antenna certified is:
Directional flat panel: 28 dBi (~2'/61cm square) Parabolic dish: 37.9 dBi (6'/1.8m diameter) Note: The 5GHz model is approved under FCC Rule Part 15.407(b)(4)(ii) for antenna gains greater than 10dBi. The 5GHz model cannot be manufactured, marketed, or sold after March 2, 2018 unless it is re-
certified under FCC Rule Part 15.407(b)(4)(i). Check with Exalt Wireless for status of re-certification. Federal Communications Commission (FCC), United States The device is allowed to be used provided it does not cause interference to other devices. It is not guaranteed to provide protection against interference from other electronic and radio devices. The system has been tested and found to comply with the limits of a class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one of more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. connected. 94 201872-004 2016-05-26 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help. Shielded cables and I/O cords must be used for this equipment to comply with the relevant FCC regulations. Changes or modifications not expressly approved in writing by Exalt may void the users authority to operate this equipment. This device must be professionally installed. To comply with regulations, the output power of this device may need to be adjusted in accordance to the associated transmission system. See RF Output Power Setting for details. The antenna associated with this device shall be mounted in a location that is at least 10.5'/3.2m away from humans that may be subject to long-term or continuous exposure. Canada Compliance The EX-5r GigE models operate under RSS-210 of Industry Canada regulations. Operation is subject to the following conditions, unless express permission is granted by Industry Canada to operate in a different manner:
External amplifiers cannot be used to boost the power or to overcome transmission system losses, unless the specific amplifier/cable/antenna combination is expressly authorized by Industry Canada. Cross-border transmissions are expressly prohibited, except with written permission from both Industry Canada and the governing body of the neighboring country (FCC for USA) Only parabolic dish antennas or directional flat-panel antennas may be used. No other types of antennas (omni-directional, yagi, and so on) are authorized. Parabolic dishes of either grid or solid type are allowed. Maximum gain of each type of antenna allowed is:
Directional flat panel: 28 dBi (~2'/61cm square) Parabolic dish: 37.9 dBi (6'/1.8m diameter) Industry Canada (IC), Canada This Class B Digital apparatus meets all the requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Cet appareil numerique de la classe B respecte les exigences du Reglement sur le material broilleur du Canada. This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1 2 this device may not cause interference, and this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device. Antennas Supported in Canada The EX-r Series GigE radios are designed to operate with the antennas listed in Table 7, which have a maximum gain of 37.5dBi. Antennas not included in the list or having a gain greater than 37.5dBi are strictly prohibited for use with this device. The required antenna impedance is 50 Ohms. 201872-004 2016-05-26 95 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Europe and ITU Country Compliance All of these permitted devices must be professionally installed. They can only be used as a point-to-
point transmission device for fixed or temporary-fixed (non-mobile) installations. Note: Do not use external amplifiers to boost the power or overcome transmission system losses, unless the specific amplifier/cable/antenna combination has expressly been authorized by the specific country regulations. The output power must never exceed that specified in Specifications. The EX-5r GigE product family operates under EN 301 893 and EN 302 502 rules as a license-exempt device. The EX-5r GigE product family complies with ETS 301 893 for the 5.3 and 5.47 GHz bands for license-exempt use for most countries recognizing ETSI or ITU band assignments. This band is not yet harmonized for all countries recognizing ETSI or ITU band assignments. These bands require Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) and Transmitter Power Control (TPC) for radar-detection and avoidance. There is a +30dBm EIRP limit applied to this band. Transmitter power must be adjusted accordingly with respect to the RF cabling losses and antenna gains associated with each terminal. The EX-5r GigE product family complies with ETS 302 502 for the 5.8 GHz band. This band is not yet harmonized for all countries recognizing ETSI or ITU band assignments. Consult the individual country regulations or your Exalt Wireless representative for details. This band requires DFS and TPC for radar-detection and avoidance. There is a +33dBm EIRP limit for use of the 10 MHz BW setting, and a +36dBm EIRP limit for use of the 20 MHz BW setting. Some countries limit the EIRP to +5dBm for all bandwidths in this band. All models comply with the requirements for CE Mark (EN 60950-1 and IEC 60950-1) and EMC (EN 301 489-17). No substitutions shall be made, and all wiring and grounding instructions contained in this manual must be followed to ensure safety in accordance to the standards and local rules. 96 201872-004 2016-05-26 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Regulatory Compliance As of this printing, Exalt Wireless, Inc. has approvals for the products that are covered by this manual, as indicated in Table 8. If your application or country is not listed, check with your Sales Representative for the current status. Table 8 Product Approvals EX-5r Series, 5.3 GHz EX-5r Series, 5.4 GHz EX-5r Series, 5.8 GHz Country Austria Australia Belgium Canada Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Ghana Great Britain Hungary Iceland Ireland Italy Liechtenstein Lithuania Luxembourg Malta Mexico Netherlands Norway Philippines Poland Portugal 201872-003 2015-10-23 97 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Table 8 Product Approvals (Continued) Country Romania Slovak Republic Slovenia Spain Sweden Switzerland Turkey United States EX-5r Series, 5.3 GHz EX-5r Series, 5.4 GHz EX-5r Series, 5.8 GHz 98 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Regulatory Domain Keys Exalt radios are designed to allow the professional installer to select frequency bands, determine signal bandwidths, tune center frequencies, limit output power, and enable or disable DFS options as permitted by regional regulations. For models with the Regulatory Domain Key (RDK) feature, the radios ship with the RDK information empty and the radio cannot be enabled without a valid key. The partner, distributor, or installer is responsible for installing the RDK based on the final installation country of the radio. Exalt issues RDK information to their distributors when ship-to country information is provided. Consult your local Exalt distributor or reseller to obtain the RDK. Countries are assigned to different regulatory domains based on current regulatory requirements. Each regulatory domain has the parameters set to ensure that when the radio is turned on, the default settings are complaint for local laws. Caution! It is critical that the RDK be set to the correct default setting so that the local regulations for the installation requirements are met. Regulatory Domain Keys are assigned by regulatory domain based on the local regulations. Table 9 Regulatory Domain Keys Regulatory Domain Key Name 053A0 Frequency Band(s) 5.3GHz, 5.4GHz, 5.8GHz 5.3GHz, 5.4GHz, 5.8GHz 5.8GHz 5.3GHz, 5.8GHz 5.3GHz, 5.4GHz, 5.8GHz 5.4GHz, 5.8GHz 5.3GHz, 5.4GHz, 5.8GHz Countries USA (prior to July 20, 2007), Canada (prior to May 8, 2008), Singapore, Philippines USA (after July 20, 2007), Canada (after May 8, 2008) China Mexico EU, Ghana Australia Philippines 053A1 053A2 053A3 053A4 053A5 053A6 201872-003 2015-10-23 99 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios EIRP Limits for the United States and Canada Note: The professional installer is responsible to ensure that RF output power is properly adjusted to not exceed the regulatory limit. EX-5r Series EIRP for the US and Canada 52505350 MHz Band For all within the 52505350 MHz band, the maximum EIRP is 30 dBm. The maximum output of the radio is +13 dBm. P = 30 G + L where:
P =
G =
L =
Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm. Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 5250 to 5350 MHz. Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 5250 and 5350 MHz. 54705725 MHz Band For all models within the 54705725 MHz band, the maximum EIRP allowed is 30 dBm. The maximum output power of the radio is +13 dBm. P = 30 G + L where:
P =
G =
L =
Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm. Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 5470 to 5725 MHz. Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 5470 and 5725 MHz. 57255850 MHz Band For all models within the 57255850 MHz band, the maximum EIRP allowed is 61.9 dBm. The maximum output power of the radio is +24 dBm in Mode 1 and +21 dBm in Mode 2. P = 61.9 G + L where:
P =
G =
L =
100 Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm. Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 5725 to 5850 MHz. Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 5725 and 5850 MHz. 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios EIRP Limits for Australia Note: The professional installer is responsible to ensure that RF output power is properly adjusted to not exceed the regulatory limit. EX-5r Series EIRP for Australia 54705725 MHz Band Note: Australian regulations have a no-transmit band from 56005650 MHz, adjust the transmitter to avoid this range. For EX-5r models within the 54705725 MHz band, the maximum EIRP allowed is 30 dBm. The maximum output power of the radio is +13 dBm. P = 30 G + L where:
P =
G =
L =
Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm. Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 5470 to 5725 MHz. Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 5470 and 5725 MHz. 57255850 MHz Band For the EX-5r models within the 57255850 MHz band, the maximum EIRP allowed is 36 dBm. The maximum output power of the radio is +24 dBm in Mode 1 and +21 dBm in Mode 2. P = 36 G + L where:
P =
G =
L =
Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm. Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 5725 to 5850 MHz. Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 5725 and 5850 MHz. 201872-003 2015-10-23 101 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios EIRP Limits for the European Union and ITU Countries The countries that are covered by this Regulatory Domain are: Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Czech Republic, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Ghana, Great Britain, Greece, Hungary, Iceland, Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Liechtenstein, Lithuania, Luxembourg, Malta, Norway, Poland, Portugal, Slovak Republic, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, Netherlands, Switzerland, and Turkey. Note: The professional installer is responsible to ensure that RF output power is properly adjusted to not exceed the regulatory limit. Use only parabolic dish antennas or directional flat-panel antennas. No other types of antennas
(omni-directional, yagi, and so on) are authorized. Parabolic dishes of either grid or solid type are allowed. Maximum mid-band gain of each type of antenna certified is:
Directional flat panel: 28 dBi (~2'/61cm square) Parabolic dish: 37.9 dBi (6'/1.8m diameter) EX-5r Series EIRP Table 10 summarizes the maximum power by band and country for EX-5r Series radios. 52505350 MHz band For all models within the 52505350 MHz band, the maximum EIRP is specified in Table 10. The maximum output of the radio is +13 dBm. P = ME G + L where:
P =
ME =
G =
L =
Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm. Maximum EIRP, as specified in Table 10. Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 5250 to 5350 MHz. Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 5250 and 5350 MHz. 54705725 MHz band For all models within the 54705725 MHz band, the maximum EIRP allowed is specified in Table 10. The maximum output power of the radio is +13 dBm. P = ME G + L where:
102 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios P =
ME =
G =
L =
Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm. Maximum EIRP, as specified in Table 10. Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 5470 to 5725 MHz. Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 5470 and 5725 MHz. 57255850 MHz band For all models within the 57255850 MHz band, the maximum transmit power with respect to specific country EIRP regulations is determined based on the channel bandwidth. The EIRP power limit is specified in Table 10. The Exalt EX-5r series radios maximum transmitter conducted power is +24 dBm. Use the following equation to determine the maximum transmitter power for the radio:
P = ME G + L where:
P =
ME =
G =
L =
Maximum transmitter output power of radio, in dBm. Maximum EIRP, as specified in Table 10. Specified gain of antenna, in dBi, from 5725 to 5850 MHz. Total transmission system losses of all elements between the radios RF connector and the antennas RF connector (all cables, connectors, lightning suppressors), in dB, as specified or measured between 5725 and 5850 MHz. 201872-003 2015-10-23 103 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Table 10 EU and ITU Country Specific EIRP Levels for EX-5r Series Country Maximum EIRP 5.3 GHz band Maximum EIRP 5.4 GHz band Austria 23 dBm Belgium Cyprus Czech 23 dBm 23 dBm Denmark 23 dBm Estonia Finland France 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm Germany 23 dBm Ghana Great 23 dBm 23 dBm Hungary 23 dBm Iceland Ireland Italy 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm Liechtens 23 dBm Lithuania 23 dBm Luxembo 23 dBm Netherla Norway Poland Portugal 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm 23 dBm Romania 23 dBm Slovak 23 dBm Slovenia 23 dBm Spain Sweden 23 dBm 23 dBm Switzerla 23 dBm Turkey 23 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm 30 dBm Maximum EIRP 5.8 GHz band
(BW dependent)a 5 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 5 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 5 dBm 33/36 dBm 5 dBm 33/36 dBm 33/36 dBm 5 dBm 33/36 dBm a. If the output power is designated as 33/36 dBm, the EIRP is limited to 33 dBm for 10 MHz bandwidth transmissions and 36 dBm for 20 MHz bandwidth transmissions. 104 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Declaration of Conformity to the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC English:
Deutsch:
Dansk:
Espaol:
This equipment is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC. Dieses Gert entspricht den grundlegenden Anforderungen und den weiteren entsprecheneden Vorgaben der Richtlinie 1999/5/EU. Dette udstyr er i overensstemmelse med de vsentlige krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i Directiv 1999/5/EF. Este equipo cumple con los requisitos esenciales asi como con otras disposiciones de la Directive 1999/5/EC. Dette utstyret er i samsvar med de grunnleggende krav og andre relevante bestemmelser i EU-directiv 1999/5/EC. Este equipamento satisfaz os requisitos essenciais e outras provises da Directiva 1999/5/EC. Cet appareil est conforme aux exigencies essentialles et aux autres dispositions pertinantes de la Directive 1999/5/EC. essi bnaur samrmist lgbonum krfum og rum kvum tilskipunar 1999/5/ESB. Questo apparato conforme ai requisiti essenziali ed agli altri principi sanciti dalla Direttiva 1999/5/EC. Franais:
slenska:
Italiano:
Nederlands: Deze apparatuur voldoet aan de belangrijkste eisen en andere voorzieningen van richtlijn 1999/5/EC. Norsk:
Portugus:
Suomalainen: Tm laite tytt direktiivin 1999/5/EY oleelliset vaatimukset ja on siin asetettujen muidenkin ehtojen mukainen. Svenska:
For 5 GHz radios, the following standards were applied:
Radio: EN 301 893, EN 302 502 The following CE mark is affixed to the product:
EMC: EN 301 489-1, EN 301 489-17 Safety: EN 60950-1, IEC 60950-1 Denna utrustning r i verensstmmelse med de vsentliga kraven och andra relevanta bestmmelser i Direktiv 1999/5/EC. EU WEEE Exalt is committed to meeting the requirements of the European Unions Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) Directive. The Directives require producers of electrical and electronic equipment to finance the take-back for re-use or recycling of their products placed on the EU market after 13 August 2005. Exalt products that are within the scope of the Directives are labeled with a crossed-out "wheelie-bin"
symbol as required by the Directives. This indicates that the product was placed on the market after 13 August 2005 and that end-users should segregate the product from other wastes at end-of-life. The WEEE Directives are being implemented in each of the 28 EU and European Economic Area
(EAA) countries through national legislation. This has resulted in considerable variation in the detailed requirements across the EU, many of which require presence in the EU. As a result, Exalts WEEE compliance approach is to require the distributors and/or resellers in the EU to comply with each countrys national legislation by registration of the distributor or reseller as the producer and for the reseller/distributor to carry out and fulfill the legislative requirements of each national compliance scheme. Below is the crossed out wheelie bin symbol as required by the WEEE Directive. 201872-003 2015-10-23 105 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios EU RoHS RoHS is the acronym used to refer to the European Union (EU) Directive 2002/95/EC on the Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment. Hazardous materials are those chemicals and substances that are legislatively, market, or customer banned or restricted for use in products and/or manufacturing. There are six (6) RoHS substances: lead
(Pb), cadmium (Cd), mercury (Hg), hexavalent chromium (Cr+6), polybrominated biphenyls (PBB) and polybrominated diphenylethers (PBDE). Other countries may be introducing legislation that results in similar restrictions of hazardous substances. Many Exalt products will continue to use lead-
based solder under the exemption allowed for network infrastructure equipment. Small amounts of lead, cadmium, mercury, hexavalent chromium, PBB, and PBDE can also be found in a few electrical and electrical components. 106 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Copyright Notices This section presents copyright notices for third-party software licensed to Exalt Wireless, Inc. Net-SNMP The following copyright notice applies to the open-source licensing agreement for Net-SNMP. Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carnegie Mellon University Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000 Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Regents of the University of California All Rights Reserved Permission to use, copy, modify and distribute this software and its documentation for any purpose and without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice appears in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation, and that the name of CMU and The Regents of the University of California not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the software without specific written permission. CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM THE LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE. Network Associates Technology, Inc. Copyright (c) 2001-2003, Networks Associates Technology, Inc All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Networks Associates Technology, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, 201872-003 2015-10-23 107 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Cambridge Broadband, Ltd. Portions of this code are copyright (c) 2001-2003, Cambridge Broadband Ltd. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* The name of Cambridge Broadband Ltd. may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Sun Microsystems, Inc. Copyright 2003 Sun Microsystems, Inc., 4150 Network Circle, Santa Clara, California 95054, U.S.A. All rights reserved. Use is subject to license terms below. This distribution may include materials developed by third parties. Sun, Sun Microsystems, the Sun logo and Solaris are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems, Inc. in the U.S. and other countries. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of the Sun Microsystems, Inc. nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. 108 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Sparta, Inc. Copyright (c) 2003-2005, Sparta, Inc All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Sparta, Inc nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Cisco, Inc. Copyright (c) 2004, Cisco, Inc and Information Network Center of Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 201872-003 2015-10-23 109 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
* Neither the name of Cisco, Inc, Beijing University of Posts and Telecommunications, nor the names of their contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS ''AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co. Copyright (c) Fabasoft R&D Software GmbH & Co KG, 2003 oss@fabasoft.com Author: Bernhard Penz Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
* Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
* Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 110 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios 201872-003 2015-10-23 111 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios END USER AGREEMENT
(including Limited Hardware Warranty, Software License and RMA Procedure) THIS IS AN AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU (AS ORIGINAL END USER PURCHASER OF AN EXALT PRODUCT) AND EXALT WIRELESS, INC. ("EXALT"). THE END USER AGREEMENT APPLICABLE TO YOUR EXALT PRODUCT IS THE END USER AGREEMENT THAT IS PRE-LOADED ON THE EXALT PRODUCT, OR IF NONE IS PRE-LOADED, IT IS THE END USER AGREEMENT AVAILABLE ON THE EXALT WEBSITE @
WWW.EXALTCOM.COM/EULA ON THE DATE OF YOUR PURCHASE OF THE EXALT PRODUCT OR OTHERWISE DIRECTLY AVAILABLE FROM EXALT UPON REQUEST. BY ACCEPTING THIS AGREEMENT OR BY USING THE EXALT PRODUCT WITH OR FOR WHICH THIS AGREEMENT IS PROVIDED ("PRODUCT"), YOU ARE AGREEING TO ALL OF THE BELOW TERMS AND CONDITIONS. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH THESE TERMS AND CONDITIONS, YOU SHOULD NOT USE THE PRODUCT AND PROMPTLY RETURN IT TO YOUR PLACE OF PURCHASE FOR A REFUND. "YOU" MEANS THE LEGAL END USER ENTITY THAT PURCHASED THE PRODUCT FOR ITS OWN USE. 1 Exalt Limited Hardware Warranty a. Exalt warrants solely to the original purchaser ("Purchaser") that the Exalt hardware product b. that this Agreement is provided with or for (the "Hardware Product") will substantially conform in all material respects to the relevant Exalt published specifications that apply at the time of manufacture of such Hardware Product for two (2) years from the date of purchase of Hardware Product by Purchaser (the "Warranty Period"). Proof-of-purchase in the form of an invoice, payment of invoice, or delivery waybill must be supplied, if requested by Exalt, in case of any dispute of warranty start date. In the event Purchaser notifies Exalt during the Warranty Period of a defective Hardware Product (material nonconformance with the published specifications), Exalt shall within the Warranty Period, at its own option either: (A) use reasonable efforts to remedy any reproducible Hardware Product defect covered by this limited warranty within a reasonable period of time; (B) replace the defective Hardware Product with a functionally equivalent product (repair parts and products may be either reconditioned or new, but, if reconditioned, shall be of the same quality as new parts or products); or (C) if Exalt determines that it is unable to repair or replace such Hardware Product, Exalt (or its applicable reseller) will refund to Purchaser the amount actually paid by Purchaser for the applicable Hardware Product. All replaced parts and products become the property of Exalt. c. The Exalt warranty does not cover any defective Hardware Product that (i) is subject to the exclusions set forth below in Section 3; (ii) cannot be demonstrated to have a defect of the types of defects covered by the Exalt warranty, or (iii) Purchaser is unable to provide adequate information describing how the Hardware Product failed that would allow Exalt to determine that the defect is covered by the Exalt warranty. Any Hardware Product that is returned by the Purchaser to Exalt and Exalt determines that such product is not covered by the Exalt warranty, will be, at Purchaser's option and expense (including any applicable shipping, handling, evaluation, repair, replacement and disposal fees), either be: (a) returned to Purchaser in the state received, (b) repaired or replaced, as applicable, and returned to Purchaser, or disposed of in accordance with Purchaser's instructions. Repaired or replaced Hardware Product will be warranted for the remainder of the original Warranty Period, but not less than ninety (90) days. 201872-003 2015-10-23 112 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios 2 Warranty Registration In order to facilitate warranty service and communication with Exalt, Exalt recommends that the Purchaser registers the Hardware Product with Exalt promptly following the Hardware Product purchase by providing to Exalt the requested registration information. Product registration may be performed by completing and submitting the product registration form on www.exaltcom.com/ProductRegistration. 3 Limited Hardware Warranty Exclusions This limited warranty will not apply to: (A) any Hardware Product that: (i) has been modified or altered by any party other than Exalt; (ii) has been subject to accident, misuse, neglect, or mistreatment; (iii) has been damaged during installation of the Hardware Product; (iv) has been damaged by failure of Purchaser or its agents to follow Exalt's instructions or specifications; (v) has been damaged by the equipment or system with which the Hardware Product is used; (vi) has sustained damage to the Hardware Products' interface or power connectors; (vii) is determined to be stolen; or (viii) has been damaged by water, fire, power changes, other hazards, or acts of God
(including without limitation lightning); (B) any Software included in any such Hardware Product
(see Software License below), or (C) any consumables. The warranty applies only to Hardware Products manufactured by or for Exalt and that can be identified by the Exalt trademark, trade name, serial number or logo affixed to them. Other products, including any third-party manufacturer products sold by Exalt on a resale basis, are subject to the applicable third-party manufacturer's warranty and end user agreement and are not warranted by Exalt. The Hardware Products covered by this warranty are not consumer products and are not intended for personal, family, or household purposes, nor are they intended for high-risk activities as described in Section 5 below. 4 Hardware Product RMA Procedure A return material authorization (RMA) is required prior to returning Hardware Product to Exalt for in-warranty or out-of-warranty repair/evaluation. As such, Purchaser must use the then current Exalt RMA procedure. Such procedure is available on the Exalt website @ www.exaltcom.com/
RMA or directly from Exalt upon request. PRODUCTS RETURNED WITHOUT A DULY ISSUED RMA NUMBER WILL BE RETURNED TO PURCHASER BY EXALT AT PURCHASER'S EXPENSE. 5 PRODUCT WARRANTY DISCLAIMER AND LIMITATION OF LIABILITY a. THE ABOVE EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE HARDWARE PRODUCT, THE CONDITIONS AND OTHER TERMS SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, CONDITIONS AND OTHER TERMS WHETHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, REGARDING THE PRODUCT (HARDWARE PRODUCT AND SOFTWARE) AND ANY SERVICES PROVIDED BY EXALT, AND EXALT, ITS SUPPLIERS AND LICENSORS HEREBY EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM, TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY APPLICABLE LAW, ANY AND ALL SUCH EXPRESS, IMPLIED AND STATUTORY WARRANTIES, CONDITIONS AND OTHER TERMS, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY AND ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE, INTERFERENCE WITH QUIET ENJOYMENT, NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD-PARTY RIGHTS AND MERCHANTABILITY. FURTHER, EXALT DOES NOT WARRANT RESULTS OF USE OR THAT YOUR USE OF THE PRODUCT WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR FREE. NO WARRANTIES ARE MADE BY EXALT'S SUPPLIERS OR LICENSORS. EXCEPT FOR THE ABOVE EXPRESS LIMITED WARRANTY FOR THE HARDWARE PRODUCT, THE CONDITIONS AND OTHER TERMS STATED HEREIN, THE 113 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios PRODUCT IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND WITH ALL FAULTS. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, ACCURACY, AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU. b. THE PRODUCT IS NOT FAULT-TOLERANT AND IS NOT DESIGNED, MANUFACTURED OR INTENDED FOR USE OR RESALE AS ONLINE CONTROL EQUIPMENT IN HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTS REQUIRING FAIL-SAFE PERFORMANCE, SUCH AS IN THE OPERATION OF NUCLEAR FACILITIES, AIRCRAFT NAVIGATION OR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS, AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL, DIRECT LIFE SUPPORT MACHINES OR WEAPONS SYSTEMS, IN WHICH THE FAILURE OF THE PRODUCT COULD LEAD DIRECTLY TO DEATH, PERSONAL INJURY, OR SEVERE PHYSICAL OR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE. EXALT AND ITS SUPPLIERS AND LICENSORS SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR ANY HIGH-RISK USES LISTED ABOVE. c. REGARDLESS OF WHETHER ANY REMEDY SET FORTH HEREIN FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE OR OTHERWISE, AND TO THE EXTENT ALLOWED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT WILL EXALT, ITS SUPPLIERS OR LICENSORS BE LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY UNDER ANY TORT, CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHER LEGAL OR EQUITABLE THEORY FOR ANY LOST PROFITS, LOST OR CORRUPTED DATA, COMPUTER FAILURE OR MALFUNCTION, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS, OR OTHER SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND ARISING OUT OF (1) THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PRODUCT OR (2) PRODUCT RELATED SERVICE OR SUPPORT, EVEN IF EXALT HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH LOSS OR DAMAGES AND WHETHER OR NOT SUCH LOSS OR DAMAGES ARE FORESEEABLE. IN NO EVENT SHALL EXALT'S AND ITS SUPPLIERS'/LICENSORS' AGGREGATE LIABILITY EXCEED AN AMOUNT EQUAL TO THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID BY PURCHASER FOR THE PRODUCT OR SERVICE THAT IS THE SUBJECT OF A CLAIM. ANY CLAIM ARISING OUT OF OR RELATING TO THIS AGREEMENT MUST BE BROUGHT WITHIN ONE (1) YEAR AFTER THE OCCURRENCE OF THE EVENT GIVING RISE TO SUCH CLAIM. IN ADDITION, EXALT DISCLAIMS ALL LIABILITY OF ANY KIND OF EXALT'S SUPPLIERS/LICENSORS. d. 6 SOFTWARE LICENSE a. Subject to the terms and conditions of this Agreement, Exalt hereby grants You a non-
exclusive, non-transferable, non-sublicensable license to use the Software that comes with the Product, if any is provided as part of the Product, only as part of the normal operation, use and maintenance of the Hardware Product for which the Software was provided. You may make back-up copies of such Software. You shall not otherwise copy, distribute or alter the Software. Furthermore, except to the extent allowed by applicable law if located in the European Union, and then only with prior written notice to Exalt, You shall not disassemble or reverse engineer the Software in whole or in part or authorize others to do so. No rights to distribute or sublicense the Software are granted herein. b. There may be certain third-party owned software provided along with, or incorporated within the Product ("Third Party Software"), and which Third Party Software has a separate license agreement and which is governed exclusively by such separate license agreement ("Third Party License") and not this Agreement. Such Third Party Software and applicable Third Party Licenses are listed in the document "EXALT WIRELESS, INC. THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE AND THIRD-PARTY LICENSES USED WITH CERTAIN EXALT 201872-003 2015-10-23 114 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios PRODUCTS" available through the Web user interface application provided with this product or on the Exalt website. Except as Exalt may otherwise inform You in writing, the Third Party License gives You at least the license rights granted above in Section 6(a), and may provide additional license rights as to the Third-Party Software, but only with respect to the particular Third-Party Software to which the Third-Party License applies. SUCH THIRD-PARTY SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY FROM EXALT AND ITS LICENSORS, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-
INFRINGEMENT. c. Exalt and its licensors are the sole and exclusive owners of the Software, and all underlying intellectual property rights in the Software and Hardware Product. All rights not expressly granted to You relating to the Software are reserved by Exalt and its licensors. You take unencumbered title to the Hardware Product, subject to Exalt's and its licensors' ownership in the underlying intellectual property, upon payment in full to Exalt or the Exalt reseller for the Product(s). d. All licenses to the Software hereunder shall terminate if You fail to comply with any of the provisions of this Agreement and do not remedy such breach within thirty (30) days after receiving written notice from Exalt. You agree upon termination to immediately cease using the Software and to destroy all copies of the Software which may have been provided or created hereunder. 7 GOVERNMENT RESTRICTIONS a. You agree that you will not export or re-export the Products without Exalt's prior written consent, and then only in compliance with all requirements of applicable law, including but not limited to U.S. export control regulations. You have the responsibility to obtain any required licenses to export, re-export or import the Products. You shall defend, indemnify and hold Exalt and its suppliers/licensors harmless from any claims arising out of Your violation of any export control laws relating to any exporting of the Products. By accepting this Agreement and receiving the Products, You confirm that You are not listed on any governmental export exclusion lists and will not export or re-export the Products to any country embargoed by the U.S. Applicable export restrictions and exclusions are available at the official web site of the U.S. Department of Commerce Bureau of Industry and Security (www.bis.doc.gov). b. For purchase by or on behalf of governmental entities (including federal, state or provincial, and local), the governmental entity's rights in any technical data and software in the Products include only those rights customarily provided to the public as defined in Exalt's standard End User Agreement. In connection with any purchase by or on behalf of a U.S. governmental entity, Exalt's customary commercial license in technical data and software is provided in accordance with FAR 12.211 (Technical Data) and FAR 12.212 (Software) and, for Department of Defense transactions, DFAR 252.227-7015 (Technical Data - Commercial Items) and DFAR 227.7202-3 (Rights in Commercial Computer Software or Computer Software Documentation). If a governmental entity has a need for rights not conveyed under these terms, it must negotiate a mutually acceptable written agreement with Exalt specifying and specifically conveying such rights. Any use, modification, reproduction, release, performing, displaying or disclosing of the Exalt Software by a governmental entity shall be governed solely by the terms of this Agreement. 8 CONFIDENTIALITY Purchaser acknowledges and agrees that information supplied by Exalt in connection with the Product or this Agreement and designated by Exalt as confidential is the confidential information of Exalt, which confidential information includes the Software. Purchaser agrees: (i) to hold the confidential information in confidence using the same degree of care that it uses to protect its own 115 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios confidential information of similar importance, but not less than a reasonable degree of care, (ii) not to make use of confidential information other than as contemplated by this Agreement, and
(iii) not to reproduce confidential information except as expressly authorized by this Agreement. Purchaser's obligations with respect to confidentiality do not apply to information which: (i) becomes generally available to the public other than as a result of unauthorized disclosure by Purchaser, or (ii) was in Purchaser's possession prior to disclosure by Exalt. 9 MISCELLANEOUS Exalt shall be excused from delay or failure in performance caused by anything beyond its reasonable control, including, without limitation, acts of God or of any third party, government action, compliance with laws or regulations, shortages, strikes, lockouts or industrial disputes, or the unavailability of deliveries, supplies, or software. Purchaser shall not sell, transfer or assign this Agreement without the prior written consent of Exalt. Any act in derogation of the foregoing shall be null and void, and Purchaser will remain obligated under this Agreement. This Agreement shall benefit and be binding upon the parties to this Agreement and their respective permitted successors and assigns. The waiver or failure of either party to exercise in any respect any right provided for in this Agreement shall not be deemed a waiver of any further right under this Agreement. If any provision of this Agreement is held by a court of competent jurisdiction to be contrary to law, the remaining provisions of this Agreement will remain in full force and effect. This Agreement and any disputes arising out of, or in any way related to or connected with, this Agreement, its termination or the relationship of the parties will be governed by and construed in accordance with the laws of the State of California, excluding its conflict of laws principles and excluding the United Nations Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods. All disputes arising out of, or in any way related to or connected with, with this Agreement, the Products or Services shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association under its commercial arbitration rules by a single arbitrator appointed in accordance with the rules. Both parties consent that the arbitration shall take place in Santa Clara County, California. The award rendered by the arbitrator shall be final and binding on the parties and judgment on the award may be entered in any court having jurisdiction thereof. Any litigation relating to this Agreement or the arbitration shall take place in the state courts of Santa Clara County or in the federal courts of the Northern District of California. The foregoing notwithstanding, Exalt may obtain preliminary and/
or permanent injunctive relief in any court of competent jurisdiction worldwide to enforce the terms of Sections 6, 7 and 8. Purchaser hereby consents and submits to the exclusive jurisdiction and venue of these courts and agrees that process may be served in the manner provided or allowed by California or federal law. In any action or proceeding to enforce rights under this Agreement, the prevailing party shall be entitled to recover costs and attorneys' fees. If the party who initiates the proceeding unilaterally dismisses it, the other party will be deemed the prevailing party. This Agreement represents the complete agreement and understanding of the parties with respect to the subject matter herein. This Agreement may be modified only through a written instrument signed or otherwise agreed to by both parties.
-----------------------------------------
Part Number 203985 Revision 2.21, 11/6/2014 Exalt Confidential 201872-003 2015-10-23 116 Index A AC adapter 25 Administration Settings page 40 administrator privileges 34 Advance Encryption Standard 41 AES 41 AIS enabling//disabling 57 alarm conditions 37 alarms 54, 61 clearing 65 Alarms page 61 AMI 57 antenna port parameter 52 antennas alignment 31, 87 Canada 95 mounting 3, 28 indoor 30 mounting height 6 site preparation considerations 6 transmission line 29 troubleshooting 87 AUTO SYNC mode 12 B B8ZS 57 back-to-back bench test 8, 89 back-to-back bench test configuration 89 bandwidth 5 Bandwidth parameter 50 battery source 25 BER 66 browsers 33 buzzer timeout selection parameter 53 C cables Ethernet (CAT5e or CAT6) 8 RF 6 RFC 4 T1/E1 8 troubleshooting improper RF cable termination 86 center frequency tuning 5 channel bandwidth 5 CLI 32 main menu 32 menu options 33 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios clock 15 configuration file 45 connectors 23 GPS/RSL 23 Power/Ethernet 23, 81 T1/E1 1&3 23 T1/E1 2&4 23 TDM 79 contact information 1 Current BER field 63 Current RSL field 64 D data communication interface 5 date and time 40 DC power source 25 Diagnostic Charts page 66 dimensions 72 documentation, related 1 duplex settings 54 Dynamic Frequency Selection (DFS) 51, 92 E E1 channels 58 E1 Interface Configuration page 58 effective isotropic radiated power (EIRP) 9 encryption 5 Endpoint Identifier 35, 49 Errored Seconds (ES) field 63 Ethernet configuration parameters 58 Ethernet connectors 81 Ethernet interface 78 throughput settings 57 Ethernet Interface Configuration page 54 Event Log page 65 ExaltCalc tool 10, 85 external GPS source 14 external loopback modes 59 F factory default settings 27, 46 fade margin 6, 88 features 5 File Activation page 45, 48 File Transfer page 45 file transfers 45 files activating stored 48 default configuration file 46 201872-003 2015-10-23 117 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios frame length See TDD frame frequency center 6 G gateway (default) 46 Global Positioning System (GPS) kit 12 GPS Information page 60 GPS synchronization 52, 60 GPS/RSL connector 23 GPS/RSL LED 24 grounding 87 GUI Administration Settings page 40 Alarms page 61 browsers supported 33 description 33 Diagnostic Charts page 66 E1 Interface Configuration page 58 Ethernet Interface Configuration page 54 Event Log page 65 File Activation page 45, 48 File Transfer page 45 GPS Information page 60 IP address (default) 33 log in 34 login privileges 34 navigation panel 37 Performance page 63 Radio A configuration 33 Radio Information page 39 Reboot page 70 Spectrum Analyzer page 68 summary status information 37 System Configuration page 49 T1 Interface Configuration page 57 T1/E1 Configuration page 57 VLAN page 55 H hop 7 hub 13 I interfaces Ethernet 78 power 78 RF 78 T1/E1 78 interference 64 Regulatory Domain Key (RDK) 41, 49 interference profile 6 IP address conflicts 33 IP address subnet 33 IP settings 8 K keys L LEDs GPS/RSL 24 Power Injector 24 Power/Ethernet 24 T1/E1 1&3 24 T1/E1 2&4 24 License Key 41 lightning arrestor 6 lightning arrestors 30 Line Build Out (LBO) 57 Line Code 57 link 6 orientation 10 RF link testing 8 synchronization 10 Link Distance parameter 51 link margin 88 link parameters 36 Link Security Key 40 Link Security Key parameter 46 login names 34 login privileges 34 loopback 57, 58, 59 external (local) 59 external (remote) 59 internal 59 M master timing 12 Maximum RSL field 64 MIB files 45 Minimum RSL field 64 Minimum RSL Timestamp field 64 Mode parameter 50 modes AUTO SYNC 12 mounting hardware 21 multi-link backbone 13 multi-link network 14 118 201872-003 2015-10-23 multipath 85 multipath propagation 86 muting 54 N noise profile 6 O offset timing 15 P parameters antenna port 52 buzzer timeout selection 53 passwords 8, 34 path obstruction 87 performance degradation 85 Performance page 63 power system LEDs 26 Power connector 81 power injector 25 power interface 78 Power/Ethernet connector 23 R radio default settings 11 grounding 87 initiation tasks 19 installation tasks 19 maximum transmit power setting 50 mounting 6, 21 rebooting 65, 70 Radio A 11 Radio A configuration 7 radio configuration 7 radio features 5 radio firmware files 45 radio frequency 2 Radio Information page 39 radio mount enclosure 3 connections 4 indoor 3 connections 4 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios regulatory requirements EX-5i FCC EIRP 101 EX-5r Series FCC EIRP 100 USA 94 repeater 13 RESET button 24 RF cable length 4 RF connector termination 25 RF Frequency parameter 50 RF interface 78 RF interference 86 RF lightning arrestor 30 RF output power 9 RSL 9 current RSL readings 64 diagnostics 66 Maximum RSL field 64 Minimum RSL Timestamp field 64 monitor for performance 85 RSL voltage 31 S safety 91 Set to E1 button 57 Set to T1 button 57 shipping box contents 7 site preparation 6 SNMP 17, 42 SNMP Traps 43 specifications 72 Spectrum Analyzer page 68 Swap button 45, 48 SYNC RECIPIENT radio 12 SYNC SOURCE radios 12 synchronization 12 internal 13 System Configuration page 49 system latency 6 system parameters default settings 27 system performance 63 system reboot 65 system settings Radio Transmit Power parameter 49 Reboot page 70 record keeping 20 Regulatory Domain Database (RDD) 45 Regulatory Domain Key (RDK) 41, 49, 99 Current BER field 63, 64 Errored Seconds (ES) field 63 grounding 87 Maximum RSL 64 Minimum RSL field 64 201872-003 2015-10-23 119 VLAN page 55 voltage test 31 VSWR 86 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Digital Microwave Radios Time Since Reset field 64 Unavailable Seconds field 64 system specifications 73 system synchronization 14 T T1 clocking 24 T1 Interface Configuration page 57 T1/E1 1&3 connector 23 T1/E1 2&4 connector 23 T1/E1 2&4 LED 24 T1/E1 circuits 57 T1/E1 Configuration page 57 T1/E1 interfaces 78 T1/E1 loopback 59 TDD factors 9 TDD frame length 6 TDD Frame Size parameter 51 TDM circuits 50 TDM connections 79 TDM connectors 79 Telnet session 32 temperature 66 testing 89 back-to-back bench 8 threshold 90 threshold testing 90 time division duplex (TDD) SeeTDD frame Time Since Reset 64 timing lost signal 15 master timing 12 offset timing 15 using an external GPS source 14 transmission line coaxial 29 transmitter output power 8 traps 43 troubleshooting 66, 84 U Unavailable Seconds (UAS) 64 unfaded error-free performance 9 Update button 40 user privileges 34 V VLAN 16 tagging 16 120 201872-003 2015-10-23 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Figure 1 Exalt EX-5r GigE (integrated antenna model) ......................................................................2 Figure 2 Cablingintegrated antenna model .....................................................................................4 Figure 3 Cablingexternal antenna model .........................................................................................4 Figure 4 Basic radio interconnectivity using internal synchronization .............................................13 Figure 5 Collocated radios, one in AUTO SYNC mode to provide redundancy ..............................13 Figure 6 Multiple-link site configuration, using AUTO SYNC for redundancy ..............................13 Figure 7 GPS as primary sync source using AUTO SYNC ..............................................................14 Figure 8 Synchronized GPS sources using AUTO SYNC ................................................................15 Figure 9 Radio installation tasks .......................................................................................................19 Figure 10 Pole-mount example ...........................................................................................................21 Figure 11 EX-r Series GigE pole and wall mount (with azimuth and elevation adjustment) .............22 Figure 12 EX-5r-c GigE pole/wall mount ...........................................................................................22 Figure 13 EX-r Series GigE connectors ..............................................................................................23 Figure 14 Power injector connectors ...................................................................................................26 Figure 15 CLI main menu ...................................................................................................................32 Figure 16 Initiating the browser connection ........................................................................................34 Figure 17 Browser Login screen .........................................................................................................34 Figure 18 Radio Information page ......................................................................................................35 Figure 19 Exalt GUI window description ...........................................................................................36 Figure 20 Summary status information ...............................................................................................37 Figure 21 Radio Information page ......................................................................................................39 Figure 22 Administration Settings page ..............................................................................................40 Figure 23 SNMP Configuration page ..................................................................................................42 Figure 24 Trap Configuration page .....................................................................................................43 Figure 25 File Transfer page ...............................................................................................................45 Figure 26 File Transfer pagedownload file link ..............................................................................46 Figure 27 File Activation page ............................................................................................................48 Figure 28 System Configuration page .................................................................................................49 Figure 29 Ethernet Interface Configuration page ................................................................................54 Figure 30 VLAN Configuration page .................................................................................................55 Figure 31 T1 Interface Configuration page .........................................................................................58 Figure 32 E1 Interface Configuration page .........................................................................................58 Figure 33 External (remote) loopback .................................................................................................59 Figure 34 External (local) loopback ....................................................................................................59 Figure 35 Internal loopback ................................................................................................................59 Figure 36 GPS Information page .........................................................................................................60 Figure 37 Alarms page ........................................................................................................................61 Figure 38 Performance page ................................................................................................................63 Figure 39 Event Log page ...................................................................................................................65 Figure 40 Diagnostic Charts page .......................................................................................................66 Figure 41 Spectrum Analyzer page .....................................................................................................68 Figure 42 Spectrum analyzer graph example ......................................................................................69 Figure 43 Reboot page ........................................................................................................................70 Figure 44 Manual page ........................................................................................................................71 Figure 45 EX-r Series GigE connector orientation .............................................................................79 Figure 46 TDM connectors .................................................................................................................79 Figure 47 RSL & Sync In connector ...................................................................................................80 Figure 48 Power/Ethernet connector ...................................................................................................81 Figure 49 Basic back-to-back bench test configuration ......................................................................89 1 201872-003 2015-10-23 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE 201872-003 2015-10-23 2 Exalt Installation and Management Guide EX-r Series GigE Factory default settings ...........................................................................................................11 Connectors ..............................................................................................................................23 LED indicators ........................................................................................................................24 Recommended transmission line ............................................................................................29 Default login information .......................................................................................................34 Alarm status indicators ...........................................................................................................61 Supported antennas .................................................................................................................82 Product Approvals ..................................................................................................................97 Regulatory Domain Keys ........................................................................................................99 EU and ITU Country Specific EIRP Levels for EX-5r Series ..............................................104 1 201872-003 2015-10-23
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2016-06-29 | 5731 ~ 5844 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment |
2 | 2007-09-17 | 5470 ~ 5725 | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | Original Equipment |
3 | 5731 ~ 5844 | DTS - Digital Transmission System |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 2 3 | Effective |
2016-06-29
|
||||
1 2 3 |
2007-09-17
|
|||||
1 2 3 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Exalt Wireless, Inc.
|
||||
1 2 3 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0014287304
|
||||
1 2 3 | Physical Address |
530 Division Street
|
||||
1 2 3 |
Campbell, California 95008
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
United States
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 2 3 | TCB Application Email Address |
b******@baclcorp.com
|
||||
1 2 3 |
m******@ccsemc.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 2 3 | Grantee Code |
TTM
|
||||
1 2 3 | Equipment Product Code |
105P25M
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 2 3 | Name |
T****** B****
|
||||
1 2 3 | Telephone Number |
469-3********
|
||||
1 2 3 | Fax Number |
408-7********
|
||||
1 2 3 |
t******@exaltcom.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
1 2 3 | Firm Name |
Exalt Communications, Inc.
|
||||
1 2 3 | Name |
L**** M********
|
||||
1 2 3 | Physical Address |
580 Division Street
|
||||
1 2 3 |
Campbell, California 95008
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
United States
|
|||||
1 2 3 | Telephone Number |
(408)******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 3 |
L******@exaltcom.com
|
|||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 2 3 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 | No | |||||
1 2 3 | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 08/13/2016 | ||||
1 2 3 | 09/07/2007 | |||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 2 3 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | Equipment Class | NII - Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure TX | ||||
1 2 3 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |||||
1 2 3 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | 5 GHz Point to Point Fixed Link Radio Module | ||||
1 2 3 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | Modular Equipment Type | Limited Single Modular Approval | ||||
1 2 3 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment | ||||
1 2 3 | Original Equipment | |||||
1 2 3 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | Yes | ||||
1 2 3 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | Grant Comments | Class II Permissive Change of updating 5.8 GHz band under new rules documented in this filing. Limited Modular Approval. Output power listed is peak conducted. Marketing to the General Public is prohibited. Professional installation is required. Only those antennas documented in this filing and installed in the manner specified may be used with this device. Those antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 3 meters from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Users and installers must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating requirements for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This device has 7.5 MHz, 15 MHz, 30 MHz and 60 MHz bandwidth modes. | ||||
1 2 3 | Output power listed is peak conducted. Marketing to the General Public is prohibited. Professional installation is required. Only those antennas documented in this filing and installed in the manner specified may be used with this device. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 20 cm from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. Users and installers must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating requirements for satisfying RF exposure compliance. Minimum antenna gain authorized for this device is 18 dBi. | |||||
1 2 3 | Limited Modular Approval. Output power listed is peak conducted. Marketing to the General Public is prohibited. Professional installation is required. Only those antennas documented in this filing and installed in the manner specified may be used with this device. The antenna(s) used for this transmitter must be installed to provide a separation distance of at least 3 meters from all persons and must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with anyother antenna or transmitter. Users and installers must be provided with antenna installation instructions and transmitter operating requirements for satisfying RF exposure compliance. | |||||
1 2 3 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 2 3 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 2 3 | Firm Name |
Bay Area Compliance Laboratories Corporation
|
||||
1 2 3 |
Micom Labs
|
|||||
1 2 3 | Name |
L******** T****
|
||||
1 2 3 |
G**** H******
|
|||||
1 2 3 | Telephone Number |
408-7******** Extension:
|
||||
1 2 3 |
925-4********
|
|||||
1 2 3 | Fax Number |
408 7********
|
||||
1 2 3 |
925-4********
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
l******@baclcorp.com
|
|||||
1 2 3 |
g******@micomlabs.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15E | 48 | 5731.00000000 | 5844.00000000 | 1.0000000 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 1 | 15E | ND | 5250 | 5350 | 0.0547 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
2 | 2 | 15E | ND | 5470 | 5725 | 0.0869 | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
3 | 1 | 15C | 5731.00000000 | 5844.00000000 | 1.0000000 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC